Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 1.
What are d-block elements? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:
Definition: d-block elements are defined as the elements in which the differentiating electron enters d-orbital of the penultimate shell i.e. (n – 1) d-orbital where ‘n is the last shell.

The general electronic configuration can be represented as, (n – n) dn – 10, nsn – 2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 2.
What is the position of the transition elements in the periodic table?
Answer:
The transition elements are placed in periods 4 to 7 and groups 3 to 12 of the periodic table.

Question 3.
In which block of the modern periodic table are the transition elements placed?
Answer:
Transition elements are placed in d-block of the modern periodic table.

Question 4.
Why are most of the d-block elements called transition elements?
Answer:

  • d-block elements have electronic configuration,(n – n) dn – 10, nsl – 2. They are all metals.
  • In the periodic table, they are placed between the ,s-block and p-block elements, i.e., in the groups between 2 and 13.
  • They show characteristic properties which are intermediate between those of the elements of s-block and p-block.
  • Hence, they show a transition in the properties from those of the most electropositive .v-block elements and less
  • electropositive (or electronegative) p-block elements.
  • Therefore, most of the d-block elements are called transition elements.

Question 5.
How many series of d-block elements are present in the long-form periodic table? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:
There are four series of d-block elements which are placed between 5 and p-block elements in the long-form periodic table as follows :

d-seriesPeriodElectronic configuration
(1) 3d-seriesfourth[Ar] 3d1 – 10, 4s1 – 2
(2) 4d-seriesfifth[Kr] 4d1 – 10, 5s1 – 2
(3) 5d-seriessixth[Xe] 4f14 5d1 – 10 6s1 – 2
(4) 6d- seriesseventh[Rn] 5f14 6d1 – 10 7s2

Modern periodic table :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 6.
Represent the elements in the four series of transition elements.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 2

Question 7.
In which period of the periodic table, will an element, be found whose differentiating electron is a 4d-electron?
Answer:
An element whose differentiating electron is a 4d-electron will be present in fifth period of the periodic table.

Question 8.
Write the condensed electronic configuration of each series of transition elements.
Answer:
Condensed Electronic Configuration of Transition Elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 9.
Write expected and observed electronic configuration of 3d-series block elements.
Answer:
Electronic configuration of 3d-series of d-block elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 5

Question 10.
Explain why transition elements with electronic configuration 3d44s2 and 3d94s2 do not exist.
Answer:
(1) d-orbitals are degenerate orbitals and they acquire extra stability when half-filled (3d5) or completely filled (3d10). Hence 3d4 and 3d9 electronic configurations are less stable.
(2) The energy difference between 3d and 4.s’ subshells is very low, hence there arises a transfer of one electron from 45 orbital to 3d orbital.
The electronic configuration changes as,
3d4, 4s2 → 3d5 4s1
3d9, 4s2 → 3d10 451
Therefore transition elements, with electronic configurations 3d4, 4s2 and 3d9, 4s2 do not exist.

Question 11.
Write observed electronic configuration of elements from first transition series having half-filled d-orbitals.
Answer:
There are two elements namely Cr and Mn which have half-filled d-orbitals.
24Crls22s22p63s23p63d54s1
25Mnls22s22p63s23p63d54s2

Question 12.
Explain the variable oxidation states of metals of first transition series.
Answer:

  • The transition metals (or, elements) exhibit variable oxidation states due to their electronic configuration, (n – 1) d1 – 10 ns1 – 2 for the first row.
  • They show only positive oxidation states due to loss of electrons from outer 45-orbital and the penultimate 3rf-orbital.
  • Loss of one 45 electron forms M+ ion. Loss of two 45 electrons form M2+ ion.
  • +2 is the common oxidation state of these elements.
  • Higher oxidation states are due to loss of 3 d-electrons along with 45 electrons.
  • As the number of unpaired electrons increases, the number of oxidation states shown by the element also increases.
  • Sc has only one unpaired electron and it shows two oxidation states ( + 2 and + 3)
  • Mn with 5 unpaired d electrons show six different oxidation states. They are +2, +3, +4, +5, +6 and + 7. Thus Mn has the highest oxidation state.
  • From Fe onwards variable oxidation states decreases as the number of unpaired electron decreases.
  • The last element in the series, Zn shows only one oxidation state ( + 2).

Question 13.
Show different oxidation states of 3d-series of transition elements.
Answer:
The following table shows, different oxidation states of 3d-series of transition elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 7

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 14.
Write oxidation states and outer electronic configuration of first transition series elements.
Answer:
Oxidation states of first transition series elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 8
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 9

Question 15.
Zinc shows only one oxidation slate. Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic conliguration of zinc is, 30Zn Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 or [Ar] 3d10 4s2.
  • Due lo loss of two electrons from 4s suhshell Zn shows oxidation state +2. with elcctronic configuration. [Ar] 183d10.
  • Since Zn+2 acquires an extra stability of completely fIlled 3d10 orbital. it shows only one oxidation state + 2.

Question 16.
Why is manganese more stable in the + 2 state than the + 3 state and the reverse is true for iron?
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of Mn is 25Mn [Ar] 3d5 4s2
  • In + 2 and + 3 oxidation states, the electronic configuration of Mn is, Mn2+ [Ar] 3d5 and Mn3+ [Ar] 3d4
  • Since half-filled d-orbital (3d5) has more stability and lower energy than 3d4, Mn2+ is more stable than Mn3+.
  • The electronic configuration of Fe is 26Fe [Ar] 3d6 4s2 In + 2 and + 3 oxidation states of Fe, the electronic configuration is, Fe2+ [Ar] 3d6 and Fe3+ [Ar] 3d5 Since half-filled orbital is more stable, + 3 state of Fe is more stable than + 2 state.

Question 17.
What are the electronic configurations of various ions of 3d-elements?
Answer:
Electronic configuration of various ions of 3d elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 10

Question 18.
Scandium shows only two oxidation states. Explain.
Answer:
Scandium has electronic configuration, 21Sc : Is2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p6, 3d1, 4s2 Sc shows only two oxidation states namely + 2 and + 3.

  • Due to the loss of two electrons from the 4s-orbital, Sc acquires + 2 oxidation state Sc2 + : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d1.
  • Due to the loss of one more electron from the 3d-orbital, it acquires + 3 oxidation state with the extra stability of an inert element 18Ar. Sc+3 : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6.
  • Since Sc3+ acquires extra stability of inert element [Ar]18, it does not form higher oxidation state.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 19.
Write different oxidation states of iron.
OR
Write the electronic configurations of
(i) Fe
(ii) Fe2+ and
(iii) Fe3+.
Answer:
Oxidation states of iron are +2, +3, +4, +5, +6.
(i) 26Fe : ls22s22p63s23p63d64s2
(ii) Fe2+ : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d6
(iii) Fe3+ : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5.

Question 20.
Explain different oxidation states of chromium.
Answer:

  • The observed electronic configuration of chromium is, 24Cr [Ar] 3d5 4s1.
  • Different possible oxidation states of Cr are 4-1 (3d5), + 2 (3d4), + 3 (3d3), + 4 (3d2), + 5 (3d1) and + 6 (3d°).
  • Although in + 1 state, Cr gets extra stability of half-filled 3d5-orbital, it does not exhibit + 1 state in common except with pyridine.
  • Cr+2 has few stable salts like CrCl2, CrSO4 while Cr+3 forms very stable salts like CrCl3.
  • Cr+4 and Cr + 5 are unstable oxidation states.
  • Cr+6 is the most stable state due to inert gas [Ar] electronic configuration and form the salts like K2Cr2O7.

Question 21.
Manganese shows variable oxidation states. Give reasons.
Answer:

  • Manganese (25Mn) has electronic configuration. 25Mn [Ar]18 3d5 4s2.
  • Mn has stable half-filled d-subshell.
  • Due to a small difference in energy between 3d and 4s-orbitals, Mn can lose or share electrons from both the orbitals, hence shows variable oxidation states.
  • Mn shows oxidation states ranging from + 2 to + 7.

Question 22.
Write the different oxidation states of manganese. Why is + 2 oxidation state of manganese more stable than Mn3+?
Answer:

  • The different oxidation states of Mn are +2, +3, +4, +5, + 6 and +7.
  • The electronic configuration of Mn is Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5 4s2
  • + 2 oxidation state is very stable due to higher stability of half-filled 3d orbital.
  • Mn3+ has electronic configuration, ls22s2 2p63s23p63dA which is less stable.

Question 23.
Write the physical properties of first transition series.
Answer:
Physical properties of first transition series :

  • All transition elements of the first series are metals.
  • Except Zn, they are very hard and have low volatility.
  • They show characteristic properties of metals. They are lustrous, malleable and ductile.
  • They are good conductors of heat and electricity.
  • They have high melting points and boiling points.
  • Except Zn and Mn, they have one or more typical metallic structures at normal temperatures.

Question 24.
Which elements in the transition elements, 3d-series has
(i) the lowest density
(ii) the highest density?
Answer:
In 3d transition elements,
(i) Scandium (Sc) has lowest density and
(ii) Zinc (Zn) has the highest density.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 25.
Explain the variation in density of d-block elements.
Answer:
The densities of d-block elements are higher than 5-block elements due to higher nuclear charge which results in reduction in atomic size.

Question 26.
Explain the variation in melting points of the transition elements.
Answer:

  1. All transition elements are metals and the strength of metallic bonding increases as the number of unpaired electrons increases.
  2. In transition elements as atomic number increases, the number of unpaired electrons increases from (n – 1)d1 to (n – 1 )d5.
    For example in 3d-series, melting points increase from 21Sc to 24Cr in 4d-series from 39Y to 42Mo, and in 5d-series from 72Hf to 74W.
  3. After (n – l)d5 electronic configuration, the electrons start pairing, hence the number of unpaired electrons decrease, hence metallic character, melting points decrease from (n-1 )d6 to (n – 1)d10.
  4. In all transition series the melting point increases steadily up to d5 configuration and after this melting point decreases regularly.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 11

Question 27.
The first ionisation enthalpies of third transition series elements are much higher than those of the elements of first and second transition series. Explain.
Answer:

  1. Third transition series elements have electronic configuration, 4f14 5d1 – 10 6s2.
  2. Thus, atoms of third series elements possess filled 4f-orbitals.
  3. 4f-orbitals due to their diffused shape, exhibit poor shielding effect and give rise to lanthanide contraction. Hence the valence electrons experience greater nuclear attraction and greater amount of energy is required to ionise the elements of third transition series namely (Hf to Au).
  4. Therefore the ionisation enthalpies of third transition series elements are much higher than those of the first and second transition series.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 13

Question 28.
Explain the metalic character of transition metals.
Answer:

  • All the transition elements are metals.
  • They are hard, lustrous, malleable, ductile and they have high tensile strength.
  • They have high melting points and boiling points.
  • Their metallic character is due to vacant or partially filled (n – 1) d-orbitals, and they involve both metallic and covalent bonding.
  • Since the strength of metallic bonds depends upon the number of unpaired electrons, it increases up to middle i.e., up to (n – 1 )d5, hence accordingly melting points and boiling points also increase.
  • After (n – l)d5 configuration, the electrons start pairing, hence the metallic strength, melting points and boiling points decrease with the increase in atomic number.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 29.
How does metallic character vary in 3d transition elements?
Answer:

  1. In 3d-series elements as atomic number increases from scandium (Sc [Ar]18 3d1 4s2) the number of unpaired electrons increases up to 3d5 in chromium.
  2. As the number of unpaired electrons increases, the metallic character increases, hence the melting points and boiling points increase from 21Sc(3d1) to 24Cr (3d5).
  3. After chromium the number of unpaired electrons goes on decreasing due to the pairing of electrons, hence metallic character, melting points and boiling points decrease from 25Mn to 29Cu.
  4. Zinc has all electrons paired, hence it is soft, has a low melting and boiling points.

Question 30.
Which are the common arrangement of the atoms in the structure of transition metals?
Answer:
Most of the transition metals have simple hexagonal closed packed (hep), cubic closed packed (ccp) or body centred cubic (bcc) lattices.

Question 31.
Why do the compounds of transition metals exhibit magnetic properties?
Answer:
The compounds of transition metals exhibit magnetic properties due to the presence of unpaired electrons in their atoms or ions.

Question 32.
What is the cause of paramagnetism and ferromagnetism?
Answer:
Paramagnetism and ferromagnetism is due to the presence of unpaired electrons in species.

Question 33.
When does species become diamagnetic?
Answer:
When there is no unpaired electron, i.e. all electron spins are paired, the species become diamagnetic.

Question 34.
How do metals Fe, Co, Ni acquire permanent magnetic moment?
Answer:
The transition metals Fe, Co and Ni are ferromagnetic. When the magnetic field is applied, all the unpaired electrons in these metals (and their compounds) align in the direction of the applied magnetic field. Due to this the magnetic susceptibility is enhanced and these metals can be magnetised, that is, they acquire permanent magnetic properties.

Question 35.
In which oxidation state, is vanadium diamagnetic?
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of vanadium is, 23V [Ar] 3d3 4s2.
  • In +5 oxidation state, the electronic configuration is, V5+ [Ar].
  • Since in V5+ state, vanadium has all electrons paired, it is diamagnetic.

Question 36.
How is a magnetic moment expressed?
Answer:
The magnetic moment is expressed in Bohr magneton (B.M.). It is denoted by μ.

Question 37.
What is Bohr magneton (B.M.)?
Answer:
Bohr magneton (B.M.) is a unit of magnetic moment :
\(1 \mathrm{~B} . \mathrm{M} .=\frac{e h}{4 \pi m_{\mathrm{e}} c}\)
where, h : Planck’s constant (h = 6.626 x 10-34 Js)
e : electronic charge (1.60218 x 10-19 C)
me : mass of an electron (9.109 x 10-31 kg)
c : velocity of light. (2.998 x 108 ms-1)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 38.
Explain the magnetic properties of transition (or d-block) elements.
Answer:

  • Most of the transition metal ions and their compounds are paramagnetic in nature due to the presence of one or more unpaired electrons in their (n – 1)d-orbitals. Hence they are attracted in the magnetic field.
  • As the number of unpaired electrons increases from 1 to 5 in J-orbitals, the paramagnetic character and magnetic moment increase.
  • The transition elements or their ions having all electrons paired are diamagnetic and they are repelled in the magnetic field.
  • Metals like Fe, Co and Ni possess very high paramagnetism and acquire permanent magnetic moment hence they are ferromagnetic.

Question 39.
Explain the effective magnetic moment of the species.
Answer:

  • The magnetic moment in the species arises due to the presence of unpaired electrons.
  • The magnetic moment depends upon the sum of orbitals and spin contribution for each unpaired electron present in the species.
  • In transition metal ions, the contribution of orbital magnetic moment is suppressed by the electrostatic field of other atoms, molecules or ions surrounding the metal ion in the compound.
  • Hence the net or effective magnetic moment arises mainly due to spin of electrons. The effective magnetic moment μeff, of a paramagnetic substance is given by 1 spin only’ formula represented as, \(\mu=\sqrt{n(n+2)}\) B.M. where n is the number of unpaired electrons.

Question 40.
What is the importance of magnetic moment (μ)?
Answer:

  • From the measurements of the magnetic moment (μ) of the species or metal complexes of the first row of transition elements, the number of unpaired electrons can be calculated with the spin-only formula.
  • As magnetic moment is directly related to the number of unpaired electrons, value of μ will vary directly with the number of unpaired electrons.
  • In 2nd and 3rd transition series, orbital angular moment is significant. Hence spin-only formula for the complexes of 2nd and 3rd transition series is not useful.

Question 41.
Calculate the magnetic moment of the following species :
(1) Cr3+
(2) Co
(3) Co3+
(4) Cu2 +.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 14

Question 42.
Explain : A slight difference in the calculated and observed values of magnetic moments.
Answer:
Magnetic moments are determined experimentally in solution or in solid state where the central atom or ion is hydrated or bound to ligands. Hence a slight difference is observed in calculated and experimentally obtained values of magnetic moment (μ).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 15

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 43.
Calculate the magnetic moment of a divalent ion in an aqueous solution, if its atomic number is 24.
Answer:
(1) The electronic configuration of divalent inri M2+ having atomic number 24 is.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 18

The ion has number of unpaired electrons. n = 4.
By spin only’ formula, the magnetic μ is given by, \(\mu=\sqrt{n(n+2)}=\sqrt{4(4+2)}=4.90 \mathrm{~B} . \mathrm{M}\)
(This M2+ ion is Cr2+ ion)

Question 44.
When does a substance appear coloured?
Answer:
A substance appears coloured when it absorbs a portion of visible light. The colour depends upon the wavelength of absorption in the visible region of electromagnetic radiation.

Question 45.
Why do the d-block elements form coloured compounds?
Answer:

  • Compounds (or ions) of many d-block elements or transition metals are coloured.
  • This is due to the presence of one or more unpaired electrons in (n – 1) d-orbital. The transition metals have incompletely filled (n – 1) cf-orbitals.
  • The energy required to promote one or more electrons within the d-orbitals involving d-d transitions is very low.
  • The energy changes for d-d transitions lie in visible region of electromagnetic radiation.
  • Therefore transition metal ions absorb the radiation in the visible region and appear coloured.
  • Colour of ions of d-block elements depends on the number of unpaired electrons in (n – 1) d-orbital. The ions having equal number of unpaired electrons have similar colour.
  • The colour of metal ions is complementary to the colour of the radiation absorbed.

Question 46.
How is complementary colour of a compound identified?
Answer:

  1. The transition metal ions absorb the radiation in the visible region and appeared coloured.
  2. Metal ion absorbs radiation of certain wavelength from the visible region. Remaining light is transmitted and the observed colour corresponds to the complementary colour of the light observed.
  3. The complementary colour can be identified (with the diagram given).

For example if red colour is absorbed then transmitted complementary colour is green.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 19

Question 47.
Write outer electronic configuration (d-orbital) and colour of 3d-series of transition metal ions.
Answer:
Colour of 3d-transition metal ions
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 20

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 48.
Mention the factors on which the colour of a transition metal ion depends.
Answer:
The factors on which the colour of transition metal ion depends are as follows :

  • The presence of incompletely filled d-orbitals in metal ions. (The compounds with the configuration d° and d’0 are colourless.)
  • The presence of unpaired electrons in d-orbitals.
  • d → d transitions of electrons due to absorption of radiation in the visible region.
  • Nature of groups (anions) (or ligands) linked to the metal ion in the compound or a complex.
  • Type of hybridisation in metal ion in the complex.
  • Geometry of the complex of the metal ion.

Question 49.
Give reasons : Zinc salts are colourless.
Answer:

  • Colour of the ions of d-block elements depends on the number of unpaired electrons in (n – 1) d-orbitals.
  • Zinc forms salts of Zn2+ ions.
  • The electronic configuration of Zn+2 is [Ar] 3d10.
  • Since Zn+2 does not have unpaired electrons in 3d-orbital, d→d transition cannot take place, hence, Zn+2 ions form colourless salts.

Question 50.
Explain : The compounds of Cu(II) are coloured.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 29Cu [Ar] 3d10 4s1 and Cu2+ [Ar] 3d9.
  • In copper compounds Cu2+ ions have incompletely filled 3d-orbital (3d9).
  • Due to the presence of one unpaired electron in 3 d-orbital, Cu2+ ions absorb red light from visible spectrum and emit blue radiation due to d → d transition. Therefore, copper compounds are coloured.

Question 51.
Explain why the solution of Ti3+ salt is purple in colour.
OR
Why is Ti3+ coloured? (atomic number Ti = 22)
Answer:

  • Ti2+ ions in the aqueous solution exist in the hydrated complex form as [Ti(H2O)6]2+.
  • The electronic configuration of Ti is, 22Ti [Ar]18 3d2 4s2 and Ti3+ [Ar]18 3d1. Hence in complex, Ti3+ has one unpaired electron in 3d subshell.
  • Initially, the 3d electron occupies lower energy d-orbital (in t2g-orbitals).
  • On the absorption of radiations of about 500 nm in yellow green region by a complex, 3d1 electron is excited to the higher energy d-orbital (eg-orbitals).
  • When the electron returns back to the lower energy d-orbital (t2g), it transmits radiation of complementary colour i.e. red blue or purple colour. Hence, the solution of hydrated Ti3+ is purple.

Question 52.
What will be the colour of Cd2+ salts? Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of, 48Cd [Kr]36 3d10 5s2 and Cd2+ [Kr]36 3d10.
  • Cd2+ ions have completely filled 3d subshell and there are no unpaired electrons in 3d-orbital.
  • Hence d → d transition is not possible.
  • Therefore, Cd2+ ions do not absorb radiations in the visible region and the salts of Cd2+ ions are colourless (or white).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 53.
Indicate which of the ions may be coloured- V3+, Sc3+, Cr31, Cu2+, Ti3+, Cu+
Answer:

  • V3+ [Ar]18 3d2-((green)
    Since there are two unpaired electrons available, for d → d transition, it will show a Green colour.
  • Sc3+ [Ar]18 3d° (colourless/white).
    Since there are no unpaired electrons in the 3d subshell, it will not show colour.
  • Cr3+ [Ar]18 3d3 – (violet)
    There are three unpaired electrons in the 3d subshell, hence due to d → d transition, it will show violet colour.
  • Cu2+ [Ar]18 3d9 (blue)
    It has one unpaired electron that can undergo a d → d transition, hence it will show the colour blue.
  • Ti3+ [Ar]18 3d1 (purple)
    It has one unpaired electron that can undergo a d → d transition, hence it will show the colour purple.
  • Cu1+ [Ar]18 3d10 (colourless)
    There are no unpaired electrons in the 3d subshell, hence it will not show colour.

Question 54.
Explain why is cobalt chloride pink in colour when dissolved in water but turns deep blue when treated with concentrated hydrochloric acid.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 27Co : [Ar] 3d14s2 and Co2+ [Ar] 3d1.
  • When dissolved in water cobalt chloride, Co2+ forms pink complex, [Co(H2O)6]2+.
  • The complex has octahedral geometry.
  • Due to absorption of radiation in the visible region and d – d transition, it forms pink coloured solution.
  • When CoCl2 solution is treated with concentrated HCl solution it turns deep blue.
  • This change is due to the formation of another complex, [CoC14]2+ which has a tetrahedral geometry.
  • Thus due to a change in geometry of the complex formed the colour of the solution changes from pink to deep blue.

Question 55.
Explain the catalytic properties of the rf-block or transition metals.
Answer:

  • d-block elements or transition metals and their compounds or complexes influence the rate of a chemical reaction and hence act as catalysts.
  • In homogeneous catalysis a catalyst forms an unstable intermediate compound which decomposes into products and regenerates the catalyst. But transition metals involve heterogeneous catalysis.
  • The transition metals have incompletely filled d-subshells which adsorb reactants on the surface and provide a large surface area for the reactants to react.
  • Since transition metals have variable oxidation states they are very good catalysts.
  • Hence, compounds of Fe, Co, Ni, Pt, Pd, Cr etc are used as catalysts in many reactions.

Question 56.
Explain the use of different transition metals as catalysts.
Answer:
The transition metals are very good catalysts.

  • MnO2 is used as a catalyst in the decomposition of KClO3.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 21
  • In the manufacture of ammonia by Haber’s process, Mo/Fe is used as a catalyst.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 22
  • In the synthesis of gasoline by Fischer Tropsch process, Co-Th alloy is used as a catalyst.
  • Finely divided Ni (formed by reduction of heated oxide in hydrogen) is very efficient catalyst in hydrogenation of ethene to ethane at 140 °C.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 23
  • Commercially, hydrogenation with Ninkel as catalyst is used to convert inedible oils into solid fat for the production of margarine.
  • In the contact process of industrial production of sulphuric acid, sulphur dioxide and oxygen (from air) react reversibly over a solid catalyst of platinised asbestos.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 24
  • Carbon dioxide and hydrogen are formed by the reaction of carbon monoxide and steam at 500 °C with Fe-Cr catalyst.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 25

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 57.
What are interstitial compounds of transition metals?
Answer:

  • The interstitial compounds of the transition metals are those which are formed when small atoms like H, C or N are trapped inside the interstitial vacant spaces in the crystal lattices of the metals.
  • Sometimes, sulphides and oxides are also trapped in the crystal lattices of transition elements.
  • Presence of these elements in the crystal lattices of metals provide new properties to the metals.

Question 53.
Give one example of an interstitial compound.
Answer:
Steel and cast iron are examples of interstitial compounds of carbon and iron.

Question 54.
Give examples of interstitial compounds where the property of the transition metal is changed.
Answer:
Steel and cast iron are interstitial compounds of carbon and iron (carbides of iron). Due to the presence of carbon, the malleability and ductility of iron is reduced while its tenacity increases.

Question 55.
What are the properties of the interstitial compounds of transition metals?
Answer:

  • The chemical properties of the interstitial compounds are the same as that of parent transition metals.
  • They are hard and show the metallic properties like electrical and thermal conductivity, lustre, etc.
  • Since metal-non-metal bonds in the interstitial compounds are stronger than metal-metal bonds in pure metals, the compounds have very high melting points, higher than the pure metals.
  • They have lower densities than the parent metal.
  • The interstitial compounds containing hydrogen (i.e., hydrides of metals) are powerful reducing agents.
  • The compounds containing carbon, hence behaving as carbides, are chemically inert and extremely hard like diamond.
  • In these compounds, malleability and ductility are changed. For example steel and cast iron.

Question 56.
What are interstitial compounds? Why do these compounds have higher melting points than corresponding pure metals?
Answer:

  1. The interstitial compounds of the transition metals are those which are formed when small atoms like H, C or N are trapped inside the interstitial vacant spaces in the crystal lattice of the metals.
  2. Since metal-nonmetal bonds in the interstitial compounds are stronger than metal-metal bonds in pure metals, the compounds have very high melting points, higher than the pure metals.

Question 57.
Explain the formation of alloys of transition metals.
Answer:

  • The transition metals form a large number of alloys among themselves, which are hard with high melting points.
  • During alloy formation atoms of one metal are distributed randomly in the lattice of another metal.
  • The metals with similar atomic radii and similar properties readily form alloys.
  • These alloys have industrial importance.
  • The alloys can be ferrous alloys or nonferrous alloys.

Question 58.
How are the transition metal alloys classIfied?
Answer:
The transition metal alloys are classified into

  • Ferrous alloys
  • Nonferrous alloys.

Question 59.
Explain what are
(1) ferrous alloys and
(2) nonferrous alloys.
Answer:

  1. Ferrous alloys: In ferrous alloys, atoms of other elemems are distributed randomly in atoms of iron in the mixture. As the percentage of iron is more in these alloys, they are termed as ferrous alloys. For expamle : nickel steel, chromium steel, stainless steel, (All steels have abot 2% carbon)
  2. onferrous alloys : These are formed by mixing atoms of transition metal other than iron with a non transition elemeni. For example, brass is an alloy of Cu and Zn. Bronze is an alloy of Cu and Sn.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 60.
What are the uses of alloys?
Answer:

Name of alloyImportant use in industry
(1) Bronze (Cu + Sn)In making statues, medals and trophies (as it is tough, strong and corrosion-resistant)
(2) Cupra-nickel (Cu + Ni)In making machinery parts of marine ships, boats, marine conden­ser tubes.
(3) Stainless steelIn the construction of the outer fuselage of ultra-high-speed aircraft.
(4) Nichrome : (Ni+ Cr in the ration 80 : 20)For gas turbine engines.
(5) Titanium alloysFor ultra-high-speed flight, fireproof bulkheads and exhaust shrouds (as they withstand high temperatures).

Question 61.
Write the preparation of potassium permanganate.
Answer:
Potassium permanganate (KMnO4) is prepared in the following steps,

(1) Chemical Oxidation : When finely divided manganese dioxide (Mn02) is heated strongly with fused caustic potash (KOH) and an oxidising agent potassium chlorate (KCIO3), dark green potassium manganate (K2MnO4) is obtained. (In neutral or acidic medium K2MnO4 disproportionates.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 26

The liquid is filtered through glass wool or sintered glass and evaporated. Potassium manganate crystallises as small, blackish crystals.

(2) Oxidation of K2MnO4 by
(i) Electrolytic oxidation : An alkaline solution of manganate ion is electrolysed between iron electrodes separated by a diaphragm. Manganate ion \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\right)\) undergoes oxidation at anode forming permanganate ion \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\right)\). Oxygen evolved at anode converts \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\right)\) to \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\right)\).

The overall reaction is as follows :
2K2MnO4 + H2O + [O] → 2KMnO4 + 2KOH

The electrolytic solution is filtered and evaporated to obtain deep purple black crystals of KMn04.

(ii) By passing CO2 through the solution of K2MnO4 :
3K2MnO4 + 4CO2 + 2H2O → 2KMnO4 + MnO2 + 4 KHCO3

Question 62.
What is meant by the disproportionation of an oxidation state? Explain giving example of manganese.
Answer:

  1. Disproportionation reaction is a chemical reaction in which atom or an ion of an element forms two or more species having different oxidation states, one lower and one higher.
  2. Manganese (Mn) shows different oxidation states + 2 to +7.
  3. When one oxidation state, lower or higher oxidation state becomes unstable as compared to another oxidation state, it undergoes disproportionation reaction.
  4. For example, + 6 oxidation state of Mn is less stable than + 7 and + 4.
    • Hence, in acidic medium \(\mathrm{Mn}^{6+} \text { in } \mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\) undergoes disproportionation reaction.
      Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 27
    • In neutral medium green K2MnO4 disproportionates to KMn04 and MnO2.
      Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 28

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 63.
Give examples of oxidising reactions of KMnO4.
Answer:
(1) KMnO4 in acidic medium :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 57
(2) KMnO4 in neutral or alkaline medium in neutral or weakly alkaline medium :
(i) Iodide is oxidised to iodate ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 33
(ii) Thiosulphate ion is oxidised to sulphate ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 34
(iii) Manganous salt is oxidised to MnO2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 35

Question 64.
Balance the following equations :
KI + KMnO4 + H2SO4 → K2SO4 + MnSO4 + 8H2O + I2
H2S + KMnO4 + H2SO4 → K2SO4 + MnSO4 + H2O + S.
Answer:
10 KI + 2KMnO4 + 8H2SO4 → 6K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 8H2O + 5I2
5H2S + 2KMnO4 + 3H2SO4 → K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 8H2O + 5S.

Question 65.
Give the uses of potassium permanganate.
Answer:
Uses of potassium permanganate :

  • as an antiseptic.
  • as a powerful oxidising agent in laboratory and industry.
  • in the detection of unsaturation in organic compounds in the laboratory. (Baeyer’s reagent, alkaline KMnO4).
  • for detecting halides in qualitative analysis.
  • in volumetric analysis for the estimation of H2O2, FeSO4 etc.)

Question 66.
Write the formula of chromite ore.
Answer:
FeOCr2O3.

Question 67.
How is potassium dichromate manufactured from chromite ore (FeOCr2O3)?
Answer:
Manufacture of potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O2) from chrome iron ore (FeOCr2O3) involves following steps :
(1) Concentration of ore : The chromite ore (FeOCr2O3) is powdered and washed with current of water.
(2) Conversion of chromite ore into sodium chromate : The concentrated ore is mixed with anhydrous sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) and a flux of lime in excess air and heated in a reverberatory furnace.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 36
Sodium chromate (Na2CrO4) formed in the reaction is then extracted with water so that Na2CrO4 dissolves into solution and insoluble substances separate out.
(3) Conversion of Na2CrO4 into sodium dichromate (Na2Cr4O7) : Na2CrO4 solution is acidified with concentrated H2SO2, so that sodium chromate is converted into sodium dichromate.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 37
Less soluble sodium sulphate crystallises out as Na2SO4.10H2O. which is filtered off.
(4) Conversion of Na2Cr2O7 into K2Cr2O7 : Concentrated solution of Na2Cr2O7 is treated with KCl on by double decomposition, K2Cr2O7 is obtained.
Na2Cr2O7 + 2KCl → K2Cr2O7 + 2NaCl
On concentrating and cooling the solution, less soluble orange coloured K2Cr2O7 crystallises out which is filtered and purified by recrystallisation.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 68.
What happens when hydrogen sulphide gas (H2S) is passed through acidified K2Cr2O7 solution?
Answer:
When hydrogen sulphide (H2S) gas is passed into solution of K2Cr2O7, H2S is oxidised to a pale yellow solid (precipitate) of sulphur. Orange coloured solution becomes green due to formation of chromic sulphate (green coloured).

In the reaction, H2S is oxidised to S and K2Cr2O7 is reduced to Cr2(SO4)3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 38

Question 69.
What are the common physical properties of d-block elements?
Answer:
The common physical properties of d-block elements are :

  • All d-block elements are lustrous and shining.
  • They are hard and have high density
  • They have high melting and boiling points.
  • They are good electrical and thermal conductors.
  • They have high tensile strength and malleability.
  • They can form alloys with transition and nontransition elements
  • Many metals and their compounds are paramagnetic.
  • Most of the metals are efficient catalysts.

Question 70.
What are the common chemical properties of d-block elements?
Answer:
The common chemical properties of the d-block elements are :

  • All d-block elements are electropositive metals.
  • They exhibit variable oxidation states and form coloured salts and complexes.
  • They are good reducing agents.
  • They form insoluble oxides and hydroxides.
  • Iron, cobalt, copper, molybdenum and zinc are biologically important metals.
  • They catalyse biological reactions.

Question 71.
Give examples to show that elements of first row of d-block elements differ from second and third row with respect to the stabilisation of higher oxidation states.
Answer:

  • Highest oxidation state for the first row element is + 7 as in Mn.
    For the second row, the highest oxidation state is + 8 as in Ru (RuO4).
    For the third row, the highest oxidation state is + 8 as in Os (OsO4).
  • Compounds of Mo(V) of 2nd row and W(VI) of 3rd row of transitional elements are more stable than Cr(VI) and Mn (VIII) of first row elements.

Question 72.
How do metals occur in nature?
Answer:
In nature, few metals occur in earth’s crust in free state or native state while other metals occur in the combined form.
(1) Elements in free state or native state : The metals which are non-reactive with air, water, CO2 and non-metals occur in free state or native state. For example, gold, platinum, palladium occur in free state. Metals like Cu, Ag and Hg occur partly in the free state.

(2) Combined form : The metals which are reactive occur in the combined state with other elements forming compounds like oxides, sulphides, sulphates, carbonates, silicates, etc.

Question 73.
What are minerals?
Answer:
Minerals : They are naturally occurring chemical substances in the earth’s crust containing metal in free state or in combined form and obtainable from mining are called minerals. For example, haematite Fe203, galena PbS, etc.

Question 74.
What are ores?
Answer:
Ores : The minerals containing a high percentage of metals from which metals can be profitably extracted are called ores.
[Note : Every ore is a mineral but every mineral is not an ore.]

Question 75.
Write names of minerals and ores of Iron, Copper and Zinc.
Answer:

MetalsMineralOre
IronHaematite Fe2O3
Magnetite Fe3O4
Limonite 2Fe2O3, 3H2O
Iron pyrites FeS2
Siderite FeCO3
Haematite
CopperChalcopyrite CuFeS2 Chalcocite Cuprite Cu2OChalcopyrite
Chalcocite
ZincZinc blende ZnS
Zincite ZnO
Calamine ZnCO3
Zinc blende

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 76.
What is metallurgy?
Answer:
Metallurgy : The process of extraction of metal in a pure state from its ore is called metallurgy.

Question 77.
Define the following:
(1) Pyrometallurgy
(2) Hydrometallurgy
(3) Electrometallurgy.
Answer:

  1. Pyrometallurgy : It is a process of extraction of metal from metal oxide from concentrated ore by reduction with a suitable reducing agent like carbon, hydrogen, aluminium, etc. at high temperature.
  2. Hydrometallurgy : It is a process of extraction of metals by converting their ores into aqueous solutions of metal compounds and reducing them by suitable reducing agents.
  3. Electrometallurgy : It is a process of extraction of highly electropositive metals like Na, K, Al, etc. by electrolysis of fused compounds of the metals where metal ions are reduced at cathode forming metals.

Question 78.
What is gangue?
Answer:
Gangue : The earthly and undesired impurities of various substances like sand (SiO2), metal oxides, etc. present in the ore are called gangue or matrix.

Question 79.
Define concentration of an ore.
Answer:
Concentration : A process of removal of gangue or unwanted impurities from the ore is called concentration of an ore. It is also called benefaction or dressing of an ore.

Question 80.
What are common methods of concentration of an ore?
Answer:
The concentration of an ore involves different methods depending upon the differences in physical properties of compounds or the metal present and the nature of the gangue.

The common methods of concentration of ore are as follows :

  1. Gravity separation or hydraulic washing :
    This can be carried out by two processes as follows :

    • Hydraulic washing by using Wilfley’s table method
    • Hydraulic classifier methods.
  2. Magnetic separation
  3. Froth floatation process.
  4. Leaching.

The method depends upon the nature of ore.

Question 81.
What is leaching?
Answer:
Leaching : ft is a (chemical) process used in the concentration of an ore by extracting soluble material from an insoluble solid by dissolving in a suitable solvent. This method is used in the concentration process of ores of Al, Ag, Au, etc.

Question 82.
What is roasting of an ore?
Answer:
Roasting : It is a process of strongly heating a concentrated ore in the excess of air below melting point of metal, to convert it into oxide form. It is used for a sulphide ore. For example, ZnS ore on roasting forms ZnO.

Question 83.
Write an equation to show how zinc blende (ZnS) is converted to ZnO.
Answer:
When zinc blende is roasted, it is converted to ZnO.
\(\mathrm{ZnS}+\mathrm{O}_{2} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{ZnO}+\mathrm{SO}_{2}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 84.
Explain the term : Smelting
Answer:
Smelting : The process of extraction of a metal from its ore by heating and melting at high temperature is called smelting. Reduction of ore is carried out during smelting.

Question 85.
What is calcination?
Answer:
Calcination is a process in which the ore is heated to a high temperature below the melting point of the metal in the absence of air or limited supply of air in a reverberatory furnace.

It is generally used for carbonate and hydrated oxides to convert them into anhydrous oxides.

Question 86.
Define the terms :
(1) Flux
(2) Slag
Answer:
(1) Flux : A flux is a chemical substance which is added to the concentrated ore during smelting in order to remove the gangue or impurities by chemical reaction forming a fusible mass called slag.
(2) Slag : It is a waste product formed by combination of a flux and gangue (or impurities) during the extraction of metals by smelting process.

Iron is the fourth most abundant element in the earth’s crust.

Question 87.
What is the composition of haematite ore?
Answer:
Composition of Haematite ore is Fe2O3 + SiO2 + Al2O3 + phosphates

Question 88.
Which impurities (gangue) are present in haematite ore?
Answer:
SiO2 and Al2O3 are the impurities present in the haematite ore.

Question 89.
Which reducing agents are used to reduce haematite ore into metallic iron?
Answer:
Haematite ore is reduced using coke and CO. Carbon in the coke is converted to carbon monoxide. Carbon and carbon monoxide together reduce Fe203 to metallic iron.

Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2.

Question 90.
Why is limestone used in the extraction of iron?
Answer:

  • The ore of iron contains acidic gangue or impurity of silica, SiO2.
  • To remove silica gangue, basic flux like calcium oxide CaO, is required, which is obtained from the decomposition of limestone, CaCO3. \(\mathrm{CaCO}_{3} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CaO}+\mathrm{CO}_{2}\)
  • Silica reacts with CaO and forms a fusible slag of CaSiO3.
    \(\mathrm{SiO}_{2}+\mathrm{CaO} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CaSiO}_{3}\)

Therefore in the extraction of iron, lime is used.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 91.
Name the furnace in which iron is extracted from Haematite ore.
Answer:
Extraction of iron is carried out in Blast furnace.

Question 92.
Explain the extraction of iron from haematite.
Answer:
Iron is mainly extracted from haematite, Fe2O3 by reduction process.
Haematite ore contains silica (SiO2), alumina (Al2O3) and phosphates as impurity or gangue.

Coke is used for the reduction of ore.

To remove acidic gangue SiO2, a basic flux CaO is used which is obtained from lime stone CaCO3.

The extraction process involves following steps :
(1) Concentration of an ore : The powdered ore is concentrated by gravity separation process by washing it in a current of water. The lighter impurities (gangue) are carried away leaving behind the ore.
(2) Roasting : The concentrated ore is heated strongly in a limited current of air. During this, moisture is removed and the impurities like S, As and phosphorus are oxidised to gaseous oxides which escape.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 41
After roasting, the ore is sintered to form small lumps.
(3) Reduction (or smelting) : The roasted or calcined ore is then reduced by heating in a blast furnace.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 42
The blast furnace is a tall cylindrical steel tower about 25 m in height and has a diameter about 5-10m lined with fire bricks inside.

Blast furnace has three parts :

  • the hearth,
  • the bosh and
  • the stack.

At the top, there is a cup and cone arrangement to introduce the ore and at the bottom, tapping hole for withdrawing molten iron and an outlet to remove a slag.

The roasted ore is mixed with coke and limestone in the approximate ratio of 12 : 5 : 3.

A blast of hot air at about 1000 K is blown from downwards to upwards by layers arrangement. The temperature range is from bottom 2000 K to 500 K at the top. The charge of ore from top and the air blast from bottom are sent simultaneously. There are three zones of temperature in which three main chemical reactions take place.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

(i) Zone of combustion : The hot air oxidises coke to CO which is an exothermic reaction, due to which the temperature of furnace rises.
C + 1/2 O2 → CO ΔH= – 220kJ
Some part of CO dissociates to give finely divided carbon and O2.
2CO → 2C + O2
The hot gases with CO rise up in the furnace and heats the charge coming down. CO acts as a fuel as well as a reducing agent.

(ii) Zone of reduction : At about 900 °C, CO reduces Fe2O3 to spongy (or porous) iron.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2
Carbon also reduces partially Fe203 to Fe.
Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO

(iii) Zone of slag formation : At 1200 K limestone, CaCO3 in the charge, decomposes and forms a basic flux CaO which further reacts at 1500 K with gangue (SiO2, Al2O3) and forms a slag of CaSiO3 and Ca3AlO3.
CaCO3 + CaO + CO2.
CaO + SiO2 → CaSiO3
12CaO + 2Al2O3 → 4Ca3AlO3 + 3O2

The slag is removed from the bottom of the furnace through an outlet.

(iv) Zone of fusion : The impurities in ore like MnO2 and Ca3(PO4)2 are reduced to Mn and P while SiO2 is reduced in Si. The spongy iron moving down in the furnace melts in the fusion zone and dissolves the impurities like C, Si, Mn, phosphorus and sulphure. The molten iron collects at the bottom of furnace. The lighter slag floats on the molten iron and prevents its oxidation.

The molten iron is removed and cooled in moulds. It is called pig iron or cast iron. It contains about 4% carbon.

Question 93.
Write the reaction involved in the zone of reduction in blast furnace during extraction of iron.
Answer:
Zone of reduction : At about 900 °C, CO reduces Fe2O3 to spongy (or porous) iron.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2
Carbon also reduces Fe2O3 to Fe.
Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO

Question 94
Write reactions involved at different temperatures in the blast furnace.
Answer:

Temperature KChange taking place in the blast furnaceReactions
1. 500 KHaematite ore loses moistureore xH2O → ore
2. 900 KReduction of ore by COFe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO
3. 1200KLimestone decomposesCaCO3 → CaO + CO2
4. 1500KReduction of ore by CFe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO
5. 1600 K(i) Reduction of FeO by C
(ii) Fusion of iron and slag formation
FeO + C → Fe + CO
CaO + SiO2 → CaSiO3
6. 2000 KCombustion of coke2C + O2 → CO

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 95.
What is the action of carbon on Fe203 in blast furnace?
Answer:
Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO

Question 96.
What is refining of metals?
Answer:
Refining of metals : The purification of impure or crude metals by removing metallic and nonmetallic impurities is known as refining of metals. H

Question 97.
How is pure iron obtained from crude iron?
Answer:
Pure iron can be obtained by electrolytic refining.

Question 98.
Name the methods of refining of metals.
Answer:
Methods of refining of metals :

  • Electrorefining
  • Liquefaction
  • Distillation
  • Oxidation m

Question 99.
What are the factors that govern the choice of extraction technique of metals?
Answer:
The choice of extraction technique is governed by the following factors.

  • Nature of ore
  • Availability and cost of reducing agent. (Generally, cheap coke is used).
  • Availability of hydraulic power.
  • Purity of metal required.
  • Value of by-products. For example. SO2 obtained during the roasting of sulphide ores is important for the manufacture of H2SO4.

Question 100.
Which are the commercial forms of iron?
Answer:
Commercial forms of iron are :

  • Cast iron
  • wrought iron
  • steel. H

Question 101.
(A) What are f-block elements?
(B) What are inner transition elements?
Answer:
(A)

  • Elements in which differentiating electron enters into the pre-penultimate shell the (n – 2) f-orbital are known as f.block elements.
  • They include 28 elements with atomic numbers ranging from 58-71 and atomic numbers 90 to 103 collectively.
  • There are two f-series or two f-block elements, namely 4f and 5f series.
  • The f-block includes two inner transition series namely the lanthanoid series. Cerium (58) to LuteUum (71) or the 4 f-block elements and the actinoid series. Thorium (90) to I.awrencium (103) or the 5f block elements.

(B) f-block elements are called inner transition elements since f-orbital lies much inside the f-orbital in relation to the transition metals, These elements have 1 to 14 electrons in their f-orbital.

Question 102.
What are fIrst inner transition elements?
Answer:

  1. 4f-hlock elements are called (first) inner transition elements and have partly filled inner orbitaIs or (4f) orbitais.
  2. They have general outer electronic configuration \((n-2) f^{1-14},(n-1) d^{0-1}, n s^{2}\).
  3. There are two f-series, namely 4f and 5f series, called lanthanoids and acùnoids respectively.
  4. They shos intermediate properties as compared to electropositive s-block elements and electronegative p-block elements. Hence they are called (first) inner transition elements.

Question 103.
What are lanthanoids (or lanthanides)?
OR
What is the lanthanoid series?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids or Lanthanoid series or Lanthanones : The series of fourteen elements from 58Ce to 71Lu in which a differentiating electron enters 4f sub-shell and follows lanthanum is called lanthanoid series and the elements are called lanthanoids.
  • They have general electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f1-14 ,5d0-1, 6s2.
  • They follow Lanthanum (Z = 57) in 3d-series.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 104.
What are rare earths?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids or 4f-block elements are called rare earths.
  • Lanthanoids are never found in free state, and their minerals are not pure.
  • They exhibit similar chemical properties hence cannot be extracted and separated by normal metallurgical processes.
  • Lanthanoid metals are available on small scale. Therefore they are called rare earths.

Question 105.
Explain the position of lanthanoids in the periodic table.
OR
How is the position of lanthanoids justified?
Answer:

  1. Position of Lanthanoids in the periodic table : Group – 3; Period – 6.
  2. They interrupt the third transition series of t/-block elements (i.e. 5 d series) in the sixth period.
  3. They are 14 elements from 58Ce to 71Lu and their position is in between La and Hf. Since they follow lanthanum, they are called lanthanoids.
  4. They are called 4f-series elements and for the convenience, they are placed separately below the main periodic table.
  5. The actual position of lanthanoids is in between Lanthanum (Z = 57) and Hafnium (Z = 72).
  6. Their position is justified due to following reasons :
    • All these elements have the same electronic configuration in ultimate and penultimate shells, one electron in 5d-orbital and two electrons in 6s-orbital.
    • Group valence of all lanthanoids is 3.
    • All lanthanoids from 58Ce to 71Lu have similar physical and chemical properties.

Question 106.
Explain the meaning of inner-transition series.
Answer:
A series of f-block elements having electronic configuration (n – 2)f1-14 (n – I) d0-1 ns2 placed separately in the periodic table represents inner transition series. The f-orbitals lie much inside the e/ orbitals.

Since the last electron enters pre-penultimate shell, these elements are inner transition elements.

There are two inner transition series as follows :
4f-series 58Ce → 71Lu
5f-series 90Th → 103Lr

Question 107.
Draw a skeletal diagram of the periodic table to show the position of d and/- block elements.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 44

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 108.
What are the properties of lanthanoids?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids are soft metak with silvery white colour, Colour and brightness reduces on exposure to air.
  • They are good conductors of heat and electricity.
  • Except promethium (Pm), all are non-radioactive in nature.
  • The atomic and ionic radii decrease from La to Lu. (Lanthanoid contraction).
  • Coordination numbers arc greater than 6.
  • They are paramagnetic.
  • They become ferromagnetic at lower temperature.
  • Their magnetic and optical properties are independent of environment.
  • They are called rare earths as their exiractioli was difficult.
  • They are abundant in earth’s crust
  • All lanthanoids fonn hydroxides which are ionic and basic. l3asicity decreases with atomic number,
  • They react with nitrogen to give nitrides and with halogen to give halides.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 45
  • When heated with carbon at very high temperature give carbides
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 46

Question 109.
Explain the variations in ionisation enthalpy of lanthanoids.
Answer:

  • The first ionisation enthalpy of lanthanoids is nearly same. It is very high for Gd and Yb.
  • The ionisation enthalpy increases from first (IE1] to third (IE3).

First, second and third ionization enthalpies of lanthanoids in kj/mol

LanthanoidIE1IE2IE3
La538.110671850.3
Ce528.010471949
Pr523.010182086
Nd530.010342130
Pm536.010522150
Sm543.010682260
Eu547.010852400
Gd592.011701990
Tb564.011122110
Dy572.011262200
Ho581.011392200
Er589.011512190
Tm596.711632284
Yb603.411752415
Lu523.513402022

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 110.
Give the general electronic configuration of 4f-series elements (OR lanthanoids).
Answer:

  • The general electronic configuration of 4f-series elements is, Ln[Xe]54 4f1-14 5d0-1 6s2 where Ln is a lanthanoid.
  • Xenon has electronic configuration, [Xe] : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 4p6 4d10 5s2 5p6.
  • In lanthanoids, the differentiating electron enters prepenultimate shell, 4f m

Question 111.
What are the important features of the electronic configuration of lanthanoids?
Answer:

  1. Lanthanoids show two types of electronic configurations
    (a) an expected or idealized
    (b) an observed electronic configuration.
    In the idealized electronic configuration, the filling of the 4/-orbitals is regular but in the observed configuration, there is the shift of a single electron from 5d to 4/ sub-shell.
  2. Lanthanum (57) has an electronic configuration [Xe] 4f° 5d16s2. It does not have any f-electron.
  3. The next incoming electron does not enter the 5d sub-shell but goes to the 4f sub-shell.
  4. 14 electrons are progressively filled in the 4f sub-shell as the atomic number increases by one unit from La to Lu.
  5. La, Gd and Lu are the only elements which possess one electron in a 5d orbital, while in all other lanthanoids the 5d sub-shell is empty.
  6. La-(4f°), Gd-(4f7) and Lu-(4f14) posses extra stability due to their empty, half-filled and completely filled 4f-orbitals respectively.
  7. The 4f-electrons in the prepenultimate shell are shielded by the outermost higher orbitals, 5s2, 5p6, 5d1, 6s2, i.e. by eleven electrons, hence they are less effective in chemical bonding.

Electronic configuration (Idealised and observed)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 48
[Xe]54 ls22s22p63s23p63d104s24p64d105s25p6

Question 112.
Write the expected electronic configuration of (a) Nd (Z = 60) (b) Tm (Z = 69).
Answer:
Expected electronic configuration :
(a) Nd = [Xe] 4f3 5d1 6s2
(b) Tm= [Xe] 4f145d16s2

Question 113.
Write electronic configurations of
(i) Gd
(ii) Yb.
Answer:
(i) 64Gd [Xe] 4f75d16s2 (Observed)
(ii) 70Yb [Xe] 4f145d°6s2 (Observed)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 114.
Write expected and observed electronic configurations of
(i) Ce
(ii) Tb.
Answer:

ElementExpected (Idealised)Observed
(i) 58Ce[Xe] 4f15d16s2[Xe] 4f25d°6s2
(ii) 65Tb[Xe] 4f85d16s2[Xe] 4f95d°6s2

Question 115.
Why are the expected and observed ground state electronic configurations of gadolinium and lawrencium same?
Answer:

  • The degenerate orbitals like 4f and 5f acquire extra stability when they are half filled (4f7) or completely filled (5f14).
  • The expected and observed electronic configuration of gadolinium is, 64Gd [Xe] 4f7 5d1 6s2.
  • The expected and observed electronic configuration of lawrencium is 103Lr [Rn] 5f14 6d1 7s2.

Question 116.
Explain oxidation states of lanthanoids.
Answer:

  • The common oxidation state of the Lanthanoids is 3 + due to the loss of 2 electrons from outermost 6s orbital and one electron from the penultimate 5d sub-shell.
  • Gd3+ and Lu3+ show extra stability due to their half-filled and completely filled f-orbitals, Gd3+ = [Xe]4f7, Lu3+ = [Xe]4f14
  • Ce and Tb attain the 4f° and 4f7configurations in the 4 + oxidation states. Eu and Yb attain the 4f7 and 4f14 configurations in the 2 + oxidation states. Sm and Tm also show the 2+ oxidation state although their stability can be explained based on thermodynamic factors.
  • Some lanthanoids show 2 + and 4 + oxidation states even though they do not have stable electronic configuration of 4f°, 4f7 or 4f14. E.g. Pr4+ (4f1), Nd2+ (4f4), Sm2+ (4f6), Dy4+ (4f8) etc

Question 117.
Write the. electronic configuration of the following ions :
(1) La3 + ;
(2) Gd3+;
(3) Eu3+;
(4) Ce3+.
Answer:
(1) La3 + = [Xe]
(2) Gd3+ = [Xe] 4f7
(3) Eu3+ = [Xe] 4f6
(4) Ce3+ = |Xe] 4f1

Question 118.
Write the electronic configuration of
(1) Nd2+
(2) Nd3+
(3) Nd4+.
Answer:
(1) Nd2+ [Xe] 4f4
(2) Nd3+ [Xe] 4f3
(3) Nd4+ [Xe] 4f2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 119.
Among the following lathanoids, which elements show only one oxidation state 3 +? Why? Dy, Gd, Yb, Lu.
Answer:
Gd and Lu show only one oxidation state 3 +, since they acquire electronic configurations with extra stability namely 4f7 and 4f14 respectively.

Question 120.
Write the expected electronic configurations of :
(1) europium (Z = 63),
(2) erbium (Z = 68).
Answer:
(1) Europium (63Eu) [Xe]544f6 5d1 6s2
(2) Erbium (68Er) [Xe]544f11 5d1 6s2

Question 121.
Why does lanthanum form La3+ ion, while cerium forms Ce4+ ion? (Atomic number La = 57 and Ce = 58).
Answer:

  1. Electronic configuration Lanthanum is La [Xe] 4f° 5d1 6s2. By losing three electrons, La acquires stable electronic configuration of Xe and forms La3+.
  2. Electronic configuration of Cerium is Ce [Xe] 4f1 5d1 6s2. By losing four electrons, Ce acquires stable electronic configuration of Xe and forms Ce4+.

Question 122.
63EU and 70Yb show 2 + oxidation state. Explain.
Answer:
63EU has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f7 5d°6s2. By losing 2 electrons from 6s orbital, it acquires stable configuration and 4f-orbital is half-filled.
70Yb has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f14 5d° 6s2. By losing 2 electrons from 6 s orbital, it acquires stable configuration and 4/-orbital is completely filled.
Hence Eu and Yb show 2 + oxidation states.

Question 123.
Display electronic configuration, atomic and ionic radii of lanthanoids.
Answer:
Answers are given in bold.

Electronic configuration and atomic ionic radii of lanthanoids
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 49

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 124.
Explain the trend in atomic and ionic sizes of lanthanoids.
Answer:

  • From 57La (187 pm) to first element of 4f-series 58Ce (183 pm), the contraction in atomic radius is very large, 4 pm.
  • But from Ce onwards as atomic number increases atomic radius decreases very steadily so that total decrease in atomic radius from Ce to Lu is only 10 pm.
  • In case of tripositive ions due to large pull by nucleus, the decrease in ionic radii is slightly more, i.e. 18 pm. For example, Ce3+ (103 pm) to Lu3+ (85 pm ).
  • Hence all lanthanoids have similar properties. Therefore they cannot be separated from each other easily by normal metallurgical methods but require special methods.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 50

Question 125.
What is meant by lanthanoid contraction?
Answer:
Lanthanoid contraction : The gradual decrease in atomic and ionic radii of lanthanoids with the increase in atomic number is called lanthanoid contraction.

Question 153.
Explain the causes of the lanthanoid contraction.
Answer:
The causes of the lanthanoid contraction are as follows :

  • As the atomic number of lanthanoids or 4f-block elements increases the positive nuclear charge increases and correspondingly electrons are added to the prepenultimate 4f sub-shell.
  • The attraction of nucleus on 4 f-electrons increases with the increase in atomic number.
  • The outer eleven electrons namely, 5s2, 5p6, 5d3 and 6s2 do not shield inner 4 f-electrons from the nucleus.
  • There is imperfect shielding of each 4f-electron from other 4 f-electrons.
  • As compared to d sub-shell, the extent of shielding for 4 f-electrons is less.
  • Due to these cumulative effects, 4 f-electrons experience greater nuclear attraction and hence valence shell is pulled towards the nucleus to the greater extent decreasing atomic and ionic radii appreciably.
  • From 57La to 58Ce, there is a sudden contraction in atomic radius from 187 pm to 183 pm but the further decrease up to the last 4f-element, 71Lu is comparatively low (about 10 pm).

Question 126.
Explain lanthanoid contraction effect with respect to (1) decrease in basicity, (2) ionic radii of post-lanthanoids.
Answer:
The lanthanoid contraction has a definite effect on the properties of lanthanoids as well as on the properties of post-lanthanoid elements.
(1) Decrease in basicity :

  • In lanthanoids due to lanthanoid contraction, as the atomic number increases, the size of the lanthanoid atoms and their try positive ions decreases, i.e. from La3+ to Lu3+.
  • As size of the cation decreases, according to Fajan’s rule, the polarizability increases and thus the covalent character of the M-OH bond increases, and ionic character decreases.
  • Therefore the basic nature of the hydroxides decreases.
  • Basicity and ionic character decrease in the order La(OH)3 > Ce(OH)3 > … Lu(OH)3.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

(2) Ionic radii of post-lanthanoids :

  • Elements following the lanthanoids in the 6th period (third transition series, i.e. 5d-series) are known as post-lanthanoids.
  • Due to lanthanoid contraction the atomic radii (size) of elements which follow lanthanum in the 6th period (3rd transition series – Hf, Ta, W, Re)-are similar to the elements of the 5th period (4d-series Zr, Nb Mo, Tc).
  • Due to similarity in their size, post-lanthanoid elements (5d-series) have closely similar properties to the elements of the 2nd transition series (4d-series) which lie immediately above them.
  • Pairs of elements namely Zr-Hf(Gr-4), Nb-Ta (Gr-5), Mo-W(Gr-6), Tc-Re (Gr-7) are called chemical twins since they possess almost identical sizes and similar properties.

Question 127.
Why do lanthanoids form coloured compounds?
Answer:

  • The colour in lanthanoid ions is due to the presence of unpaired electrons in partially filled 4f sub-shells.
  • Due to the absorption of radiations in the visible region there arises the excitations of the unpaired electrons from f-orbital of lower energy to the f-orbital of higher energy-giving f → f transitions.
  • The observed colour is complementary to the colour of the light absorbed.
  • The colour of try positive ions (M3+) depends upon the number of unpaired electrons in f-orbitals. Hence the lanthanoid ions having equal number of unpaired electrons have similar colour.
  • The colours of M3+ ions of the first seven lanthanoids, La3+ to Eu3+ are similar to those of seven elements Lu3+ to Tb3+ in the reverse order.

Question 128.
Explain, why Ce3+ ion is colourless.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of Ce3+ is, [Xe] 4f7
  • Even though there is one unpaired electron in 4f sub-shell, the f → f transition involves very low energy. Hence, Ce3+ ion does not absorb radiation in the visible region.

Therefore Ce3+ ion is colourless.

Question 129.
Explain why Gd3+ is colourless.
Answer:

  • Gd3+ has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f7
  • Due to extra stability of half filled orbital, it does not allow f → f transition, and hence does not absorb radiations in the visible region.

Hence Gd3+ is colourless.

Question 130.
The salts of (1) La3+ and (2) Lu3+ are colourless. Explain.
Answer:
(1) (i) La3+ has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f°
(ii) Since there are no unpaired electrons in 4 f-orbital, f → f transition is not possible. Hence La3+ ions do not absorb radiations in visible region, and they are colourless.

(2) (i) LU3+ has electronic configuration [Xe] 4 f14
(ii) Since there are no unpaired electrons in 4f-orbital, f → f transition is not possible. Hence Lu3+ ions do not absorb radiations in visible region and they are colourless.

Question 131.
Explain giving examples, the colour of nf electrons is about the same as those having (14-n) electrons.
Answer:
(1) Consider Pr3+ and Tm3+ ions.
Tm3+ (4f12) has nf electron 12 electrons.
Pr2+ (4f2) has (14 – n) = (14 – 2) = 12 electrons. Both, Tm3+ and Pr3+ are green.

(2) Consider Nd3+ and Er3+ ions. Er3+ (4f11) has nf electrons 11.
Nd3+ (4f3) has (14 – n) is (14 – 3) = 11 electrons. These both ions Er3+, Na3+ are pink in colour.

Question 132.
Lu3+ has observed magnetic moment zero. How many unpaired electrons are present?
Answer:
Since magnetic moment is zero, it has no unpaired electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 133.
What are the application of lanthanoids?
Answer:

  1. Lanthanoid compounds are used inside the colour television tubes and computer monitor. For example mixed oxide (Eu, Y)2 O3 releases an intense red colour when bombarded with high energy electrons.
  2. Lanthanoid ions are used as active ions in luminescent materials. (Optoelectronic application)
  3. Nd : YAG laser is the most notable application. (Nd : YAG = neodymium doped ytterium aluminium garnet)
  4. Erbium doped fibre amplifiers are used in optical fibre communication systems.
  5. Lanthanoids are used in cars, superconductors and permanent magnets.

Question 134.
What are actinoids? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:

  • Actinoids : The series of fourteen elements from 90Th to 103Lr which follow actinium (89Ac) and in which differentiating electrons are progressively filled in 5f-orbitals in prepenultimate shell are called actinoids.
  • Their general electronic configuration is, [Rn]86 5f1-14 6d0-1 7s2.

Question 135.
Why are actinoids called inner transition elements?
Answer:

  • Actinoids are 5f-series elements in which electrons progressively enter into 5f-orbitals, which are inner orbitals.
  • They have electronic configuration [Rn]86 5f1-14 6d0-1 7s2.
  • They show intermediate properties as compared to electropositive 5-block elements and electronegative p-block elements. Hence they are called second inner transition elements.

Question 136.
Explain the position of actinoids in the periodic table.
OR
What is the position of actinoids in the periodic table?
Answer:

  • Position of actinoids in the periodic table : Group-3; Period-7.
  • They interrupt the fourth transition series (6d series) in the seventh period in the periodic table.
  • After Actinium, 89Ac which has electronic configuration [Rn] 6d17s2, the electrons enter progressively 5f orbital and they have general electronic configuration, [Rn] 5f1 – 14 6d0 – 1 7s2.
  • They are fourteen elements from 90Th to 103Lr and since they follow actinium, they are called actinoids.
  • They are called 5f series or second inner transition series elements and for the convenience they are placed separately below the periodic table.

Question 137.
Write idealised and observed electronic configuration of actinoids.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 52

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 138.
Explain the oxidation states of actinoids.
Answer:

  • Due to availability of electrons in 5f, 6d and 7s sublevels, lanthanoids show varied oxidation states.
  • The most common oxidation state is + 3 due to loss of one electron from 6d and two electrons from 6s-orbitals.
  • Ac, Th and Am show + 2 oxidation state.
  • Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am and Cm show + 4 oxidation state.
  • Np and Pu show the highest oxidation state + 7.
  • U, Np, Bk, Cm and Am show stable oxidation state + 4.
  • In + 6 oxidation state, due to high charge density the actinoid ions form oxygenated ions, e.g. \(\mathrm{UO}_{2}^{+}, \mathrm{NpO}_{2}^{+},\) etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 53

Question 139.
Why do actinoids show variable oxidation states?
Answer:

  • The large number of variable oxidation states of actinoids is due to very small energy difference between 5f, 6d and 7s subshells.
  • The electronic configuration of actinoids is, [Rn] 5f1-14 6d0-1, 7s2
  • Due to the loss of three electrons from 6d1 and 7s2, the common oxidation state is + 3, but due to further loss of electrons from 5f subshell, actinoids show higher oxidation states.
  • The variable oxidation states are + 2 to + 7.

Electronic configuration of actinoids and their ionic radii in + 3 oxidation state
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 54

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 140.
What is meant by actinoid contraction?
Answer:
Actinoid contraction: The gradual decrease in atomic and ionic radii of actinoids with the increase in atomic number is called actinoid contraction.

Question 141.
The extent of actinoid contraction is greater than lanthanoid contraction. Explain Why?
Answer:

  • The electronic configurations of :
    Lanthanoids [Xe] 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2
    Actinoids [Rn] 5f1 – 14, 6d0 – 1 7s2
  • The mutual screening offered in case of 5f-electrons is less than that in the 4f-electrons.
  • Hence, the outer orbitals are pulled to the greater extent by nuclei in actinoids (5f-series) than in lanthanoids (4f-series).
  • Therefore, actinoid contraction is greater than lanthanoid contraction.

Question 142.
Describe the important properties of actinoids.
Answer:
Properties of actinoids :

  • Actinoids are silvery white ( similar to lanthanoids).
  • They are highly reactive radioactive elements.
  • Most of these elements are not found in nature. They are radioactive and man made.
  • They experience decrease in the atomic and ionic radii from Ac to Lw, known as actinoid contraction.
  • The common oxidation state is +3. Elements of the first half of the series exhibit higher oxidation states.

Question 143.
What are the applications of actinoids?
Answer:

  • Thorium oxide (ThO2) with 1% CeO2 is used as a major source of indoor lighting, as well as for outdoor camping.
  • Uranium is used in the nuclear reactors.
  • The isotopes of Thorium and Uranium have very long half-life, so that we get very negligible radiation from them: Hence they can be used safely.

Question 144.
What are transuranic elements?
Answer:

  • The man-made elements heavier titan Uranium (Z = 92) in the Actinoid señes are called transuranic elements.
  • These are synthetically or artificially prepared (man-made) elements starting from Neptunium (Z= 93).
  • Transuranic elements arc generally considered to be from Neptunium (Z = 93) to Lawrencium (Z = 103).
  • Recently elements from atomic number 104 (Rf) to atomic number 118 (Og) or (Uuo) in 6 d series have also been identified as transuranic elements.
  • All transuranic elements are radioactive.

Question 145.
What are post actinoid elements?
Answer:

  • Elements from atomic number 104 to 118 are called postactinoid elements.
  • The post actinoid elements known so far are transition metals.
  • They can be synthesised in the nuclear reactions.
  • As they have very short half life period, it is difficult to study their chemistry.
  • Ruiherfordium forms a chloride (RfCl4) similar to zirconium and hafnium in + 4 oxidation state.
  • Dubniurn resembles niobium and protactinium.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 146.
Name the transuranic elements.
Answer:
Names of transuranic elements

NameSymbolAtomic number
NeptuniumNp93
PlutoniumPu94
AmericiumAm95
CuriumCm96
BerkeliumBk97
CaliforniumCf98
EinsteiniumEs99
FerminumFm100
MendeleviumMd101
NobeliumNo102
LawrenciumLr103
RutherfordiumRf104
DubniumDb105
SeaborgiumSg106
BohriumBh107
HassiumHs108
MeitneriumMt109
DarmstadtiumUun/Ds110
RoentgeniumUuu/Rg111
CoperniciumUub/Cn112
UnuntriumUut113
UnunquadiumUuq114
UnunpentiumUup115
UnunhexiumUuh116
UnunseptiumUus117
UnunoctiumUuo118

In the transuranic elements, elements from atomic number 93 to 103 are actinoids and from atomic number 104 to 118 are called postactinoid elements.

Question 147.
What are the similarities between lanthanides and actinides.
Answer:
Lanthanides and actinides show similarities as follows :

  • Both, lanthanides and actinides show+ 3 oxidation state.
  • In both the series, the f-orbitals are filled gradually.
  • Ionic radius of the elements in both the series decreases with increase in atomic number.
  • Electronegativity in both the series is low for all the elements.
  • They all are highly reactive.
  • The nitrates, perchlorates and sulphates of all elements are soluble while their hydroxides, theorides and carbonates
    are insoluble.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 148.
Differentiate between lanthanoids and actinoids.
Answer:

LanthanoidsActinoids
Electronic configuration [Xe] 4f1-14 5d0-1, 6s2Electronic configuration [Rn] 5f1-14 6d0-1, 7s2
The differentiating electron enters the 4f subshell.The differentiating electron enters the 5f subshell.
Except for Promethium all other elements occur in nature.Except for Uranium and Thorium, all others are synthesized in the laboratory.
The binding energy of 4f electrons is higher.5f-orbitals have lower binding energy.
Only Promethium is radioactive.All elements are radioactive.
Besides 3 + oxidation state they show 2 + and 4 + oxidation states.Besides 3 + oxidation state they show 2 + , 4 + , 5 + , 6 + , 7 + oxidation states.
They have a less tendency to form complexes.They have greater tendency to form complexes.
Many lanthanoid ions are colourless. Their colour is not as deep and sharp as actinoids.Actinoids are coloured ions. Their colour is deep, e.g. U3+ is red and U4+ is green.
Lanthanoids cannot form oxo-cations.Actinoids form oxo-cations such as – UO2+, PuO2+, UO22+, PuO22+.
Lanthanoid hydroxides are less basic.Actinoid hydroxides are more basic.
Lanthanoid contraction is relatively less.Actinoid contraction from element to element is comparatively more.
Mutual shielding of 4f electrons is more.Mutual shielding effect of 5f electrons is less.

Question 149.
Compare Pre-transition metals, Lanthanoid and transition metals.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 55

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 150.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub-question :

1. In transition elements, the different electron enters into
(a) ns subshell
(b) np subshell
(c) (n – 1) d subshell
(d) (n – 2)f subshell
Answer:
(c) (n – 1) d subshell

2. Chromium (Z = 24) has electronic configuration
(a) [Ar]4dA 4s2
(b) [Ar] 4d5 451
(c) [Ar] 3d5 3s1
(d) [Ar] 3d5 4s1
Answer:
(d) [Ar] 3d5 4s1

3. Manganese achieves the highest oxidation state in its compounds
(a) Mn3O4
(b) KMnO4
(c) K2MnO4
(d) MnO2
Answer:
(b) KMnO4

4. The group which belongs to transition series is
(a) 2
(b) 7
(c) 13
(d) 15
Answer:
(b) 7

5. The last electron of transition element is called
(a) s-electron
(b) p-electron
(c) d-electron
(d) f-electron
Answer:
(c) d-electron

6. Which one of the following elements does NOT belong to first transition series?
(a) Fe
(b) V
(c) Ag
(d) Cu
Answer:
(c) Ag

7. The incomplete d-series is
(a) 3d
(b) 4d
(c) 5d
(d) 6d
Answer:
(d) 6d

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

8. The electronic configuration of Sc is
(a) [Ar] 3d2 4s2
(b) [Ar] 3d1 4s2
(c) [Kr] 3d1 4s2
(d) [Kr] 3d2 4s1
Answer:
(b) [Ar] 3d1 4s2

9. The observed electronic configuration of copper is
(a) [Ar]18 3d9 4s2
(b) [Kr] 3d10 451
(c) [Kr] 3d9 4s2
(d) [Ar] 3d10 451
Answer:
(d) [Ar] 3d10 451

10. Fe belongs to the
(a) 3d-transition series elements
(b) 4d-transition series elements
(c) 5d-transition series elements
(d) 6d-transition series elements
Answer:
(a) 3d-transition series elements

11. Which one of the following elements does not exhibit variable oxidation states?
(a) Iron
(b) Copper
(c) Zinc
(d) Manganese
Answer:
(c) Zinc

12. In KMnO4, oxidation number of Mn is
(a) 2+
(b) 4 +
(c) 6 +
(d) 7+
Answer:
(d) 7+

13. Which one of the following transition elements shows the highest oxidation state?
(a) Sc
(b) Ti
(c) Mn
(d) Zn
Answer:
(c) Mn

14. The colour of transition metal ions is due to
(a) s → s transition
(b) d → d transition
(c) p → p transition
(d) f → f transition
Answer:
(b) d → d transition

15. Which one of the following compounds is expected to be coloured?
(a) AgNO3
(b) CuSO4
(c) ZnCl2
(d) CuCl
Answer:
(b) CuSO4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

16. The metal ion which is NOT coloured, is
(a) Fe3+
(b) V2+
(c) Zn2+
(d) Ti3+
Answer:
(c) Zn2+

17. A pair of coloured ion is
(a)Cu2+, Zn2+
(b)Cr3+ , Cu+
(c) Cd2+, Mn5+
(d) Fe2+, Fe3+
Answer:
(d) Fe2+, Fe3+

18. The highest oxidation state is shown by
(a) Fe
(b) Mn
(c) Os
(d) Cr
Answer:
(c) Os

19. Transition elements are good catalysts since
(a) they show variable oxidation states
(b) they have partially filled d-orbitals
(c) they have low I.P
(d) they have small atomic radii
Answer:
(a) they show variable oxidation states

20. Highest magnetic moment is shown by the ion
(a) V3+
(b) Co3+
(c) Fe3+
(d) Cr3+
Answer:
(c) Fe3+

21. The most common oxidation state of lanthanoids is
(a) +4
(b) +3
(c) +6
(d) +2
Answer:
(b) +3

22. Which one of the following elements belong to the actinoid series?
(a) Cerium
(b) Lutetium
(c) Thorium
(d) Lanthanum
Answer:
(c) Thorium

23. The total number of elements in each of f-series is
(a) 10
(b) 12
(c) 14
(d) 15
Answer:
(c) 14

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

24. The general electronic configuration of Lanthanoids is
(a) [Xe] 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2
(b) [Xe] 4f2 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2
(c) [Xe] 4f1 – 13 5d0 – 1 6s2
(d) [Xe] 4f0 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s1
Answer:
(a) [Xe] 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2

25. f-block elements are called ………………….
(a) transition elements
(b) representative elements
(c) inner transition elements
(d) alkalin earth metals
Answer:
(c) inner transition elements

26. Actinoids form coloured salts due to the transition of electrons in
(a) d – d
(b) f – f
(c) f – d
(d) s – f
Answer:
(b) f – f

27. In the periodic table, Gadolinium belongs to
(a) 4th Group 6th period
(b) 4th group 4th period
(c) 3rd group 5th period
(d) 3rd group 7th period.
Answer:
(d) 3rd group 7th period.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

28. The transuranic elements are prepared by
(a) addition reaction
(b) substitution reactions
(c) decomposition reaction
(d) nuclear reactions
Answer:
(d) nuclear reactions

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 1.
What are p-block elements?
Answer:
The elements in which the differentiating electron (last filling electron) enters the p-orbital of the outermost shell of the atoms are called p-block elements. The elements of groups 16, 17 and 18 are p-block elements.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 2.
To which groups in the periodic table do p-block elements belong?
Answer:
A maximum of 6 electrons can be accommodated in the p-subshell, giving rise to six groups. In the periodic table, groups 13 to 18 include p-block elements.

Question 3.
What is the general electronic configuration of p-block elements?
Answer:
The general electronic configuration of valence shell of p-block elements is ns2 np1 – 6 (except He which has electronic configuration Is2).

Question 4.
What factors influence the properties of p-block elements?
Answer:
The properties of p-block elements are influenced by

  • atomic and ionic radii
  • ionisation enthalpy
  • electron gain enthalpy (or electron affinity)
  • electronegativity
  • the presence or absence of electrons in d or d and orbitals in the p-block elements. m

Question 5.
Mention the symbols and atomic numbers of p-block elements. Also show the positions in the periods and groups.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 1

Question 6.
Name the elements in groups 16, 17 and 18. What is the oxygen family?
Answer:
Group 16 elements :
Oxygen (8O); Sulphur (16S); Selenium (34Se); Tellurium(52Te); Polonium(84Po)

Group 17 elements :
Fluorine (9F); Chlorine (17Cl); Bromine (35Br); Iodine (53I); Astatine (85At).

Group 18 elements :
Helium : (2He) Neon (10Ne), Argon (18Ar), Krypton (36Kr), Xenon(54Xe), Radon (86Rn)

The group 16 is called the oxygen family.

Question 7.
What are chalcogens?
Answer:
Group 16 elements are called chalcogens or ore-forming elements, as a large number of metal ores are oxides or sulphides.

Question 8.
Which is the most abundant element on the earth?
Answer:
(i) Oxygen is the most abundant of all the elements on the earth.
(ii) 46.6% by mass of earth’s crust contains oxygen and oxygen forms 20.95 % by volume of air.

Question 9.
How does sulphur occur?
Answer:
Sulphur forms 0.034 % by mass of the earth’s crust. In the combined form it occurs as follows :

  • Sulphides : Galena (PbS), Zinc blende (ZnS), Copper pyrites (CuFeS2)
  • Sulphates : Gypsum (CaSO4.2H2O), Epsom salt (MgSO4.7H2O), Baryte (BaSO4)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 10.
How do selenium, tellurium and poloniumoccur?
Answer:
Selenium and tellurium are found as metal selenides and tellurides in sulphide ores. Polonium occurs in nature as a decay product of thorium and uranium metals.

Question 11.
What are group 17 elements called?
Answer:
Group 17 elements are collectively called halogens. In Greek, halo means salt and gene means born, so halogens are salt produClng elements.

Question 12.
Why are halogens not found in the free state?
Answer:
Halogens are highly reactive due to high elec-tronegativities, hence do not occur in the free state. They mostly occur in the form of compounds.

Question 13.
How do group 17 elements occur 1
Answer:
Group 17 elements occur mostly in the form of compounds.

  • Fluorine is available as insoluble fluorides in the earth’s crust.
  • The important minerals are fluorspar, CaF2, cryolite, Na3AlF6, fluorapatite 3Ca3(PO4)2.CaF2.
  • Halides (chloride, bromides, iodides) of Na, K, Mg and Ca are present in sea water.
  • The dried up sea beds contain sodium chloride and the mineral carnallite (KCl.MgCl2.6H20).
  • Seaweeds contain up to 0.5 % of iodine. The compound chile saltpetre contains 0.2% of sodium iodate.
  • Astatine is the last member of the halogen family. It is radioactive and has a half life of 8.1 hours.

Question 14.
How do noble gases occur?
Answer:

  • The most important source of noble gases is the atmosphere where they make up about 1% by volume of air. Argon is the major constituent.
  • All noble gases occur in nature except Radon. Radon is a decay product of radioactive 226Ra.
  • Helium on a large scale is obtained from natural gas. Helium and neon are found in the minerals pitchblende, monazite and cleveite.
  • Xenon and Radon are the rarest noble gases.

Question 15.
How does the general electronic configuration of groups 16, 17 and 18 vary?
Answer:
The general electronic configuration of group 16 elements is ns2np4, group 17 is ns2np5 and group 18 is ns2np6. Group 16 has two electrons less than the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas. while group 17 has one electron less than the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas.

Question 16.
Give the names, atomic numbers and electronic configuration of the group 16 elements.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 2

Question 17.
Write the names and electronic configuration of group 17 elements.
Answer:
Electronic configuration of group 17 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 18.
Write the names of group 18 elements and their electronic configuration.
Answer:
Electronic configuration of group 18 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 4

Question 19.
Mention the different atomic and physical properties of group 16 elements.
Answer:
Atomic and physical properties of group 16 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 5

Question 20.
Mention the different atomic and physical properties of group 17 elements.
Answer:
Atomic and physical properties of group 17 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 6

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 21.
Mention the different atomic and physical properties of group 18 elements.
Answer:
Atomic and physical properties of group 18 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 7

Question 22.
Discuss the trends in the following in case of groups 16, 17 and 18 elements.
(1) Atomic and ionic radii
(2) Ionisation enthalpy
(3) Electronegativity
(4) Electron gain enthalpy
Answer:

  1. Atomic and ionic radii :In groups 16, 17, 18 the atomic and ionic radii increase down the group, due to increase in the number of quantum shells. Across a period atomic or ionic radii decrease due to increase in effective nuclear charge.
  2. Ionisation enthalpy :
    • The elements of groups 16, 17 and 18 have a high ionisation enthalpy
    • In groups 16, 17, 18 the ionisation enthalpy decreases down the group, due to increase in atomic size.
  3. Electronegativity : In groups 16, 17, 18 the elec-tronegativity decreases down the group.
  4. Electron gain enthalpy :
    • In groups 16 and 17 the electron gain enthalpy becomes less negative down the group.
    • Group 18 elements have large positive electron gain enthalpy.

Question 23.
Explain the electron gain enthalpy of group 16 elements.
Answer:

  1. Electron gain enthalpy (or electron affinity) is the energy released when an electron is added to the valence shell of a gaseous atom forming gaseous ion.
    \(\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}+\mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{M}^{+}{ }_{(\mathrm{g})}+\text { energy }\)
    More the energy released more is electron gain enthalpy or electron affinity.
  2. Group 16 elements have high values for electron gain enthalpy. On moving down the group, electron gain enthalpy decreases from S to Po.
  3. Oxygen has less negative electron gain enthalpy, due to high electronegativity, low atomic size and high electron density so that the incoming electron is repelled.
  4. Electron gain enthalpy of the elements decreases down the group due to successive decrease in electronegativity and nuclear attraction and increase in atomic size.
ElementSSeTePoO
Electron gain enthalpy kJ/mol-200-195– 190– 174– 141

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 24.
Oxygen has low electron gain enthalpy in group 16 elements. Explain.
Answer:

  • Oxygen has low atomic size.
  • It has high electronegativity (3.5).
  • It has high electron density.
  • The incoming electron is repelled due to high electron density hence oxygen has less negative value of electron gain enthalpy as compared to other group 16 elements. O(g) + e → O(g) ΔegH = – 141 kJ mol-1

Question 25.
Bromine has the highest negative electron gain enthalpy as compared to other elements of 4th period. Explain.
Answer:

  • As compared to other elements (K to Kr) of 4th period, bromine (Br) has the lowest atomic size.
  • It has electronic configuration, 35Br [Ar]18 3d10 4s2 4p5.
  • It has seven valence electrons and it needs one electron to complete octet.
  • Hence Br has the strongest tendency to gain an electron and energy released is maximum in the period. Br(g) + e → Br(g) ΔegH = -325 kJ mol-1

Therefore Br has the highest electron gain enthalpy as compared to other elements of 4th period.

Question 26.
Fluorine has higher electronegativity but less electron gain enthalpy. Explain.
Answer:

  • Halogens have the highest values for electronegativity due to their small atomic radii and high nuclear charge.
  • Fluorine has the highest electronegativity due to its small size.
  • In fluorine due to strong inter electronic repulsions in the relatively small 2p orbitals and higher electron density, there is not much attraction of the nucleus for the incoming electron.
  • Thus the electron gain enthalpy of fluorine is less in spite of higher electronegativity.

Question 27.
Explain the trend in atomic radius of group 18 elements.
Answer:

  • The atomic radii of group 18 elements is larger than the atomic radii of group 17 elements.
  • Down the group from He to Xe, atomic radii increases due to increase in the number of quantum shells.
  • The atomic radii increase in the order He < Ne < Ar < Kr < Xe

Question 28.
Explain the variation in (1) ionisation enthalpy and (2) electron gain enthalpy in group 18 elements.
Answer:
(1) Ionisation enthalpy :

  • In general, group 18 elements have high values of ionisation enthalpy.
  • In a period, each noble gas has the highest ionisation enthalpy.
  • The noble gases have electronic configuration, ns2 np6, they have complete octet with paired electrons and very stable closed-shell electronic configuration. Therefore high energy is required to remove the electron from valence shell.
  • Down the group ionisation enthalpy decreases.

(2) Electron gain enthalpy :

  • Group 18 elements have electronic configuration ns2 np6 and complete octet of electrons, hence they have no tendency to accept electrons.
  • Therefore, they have a large positive electron gain enthalpy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 29.
How does the atomic radii and ionisation enthalpy vary across a period?
Answer:

  • The atomic or ionic radii decreases across a period with increase in atomic number and increase in the effective nuclear charge (Zeff).
  • The ionisation enthalpy also increases across a period with increase in atomic number. This is due to addition of electrons to the same shell, while moving across a period.
  • Inert element at the end of period has the highest value of ionisation enthalpy.

Question 30.
Why are atomic radii of noble gases larger than those of halogens?
Answer:

  • Halogens (F to At) are in group 17 while noble gas (He to Rn) are in group 18.
  • Generally, atomic radii decrease on moving from left to right in a period, hence atomic radii of noble gases are expected to be smaller than those of halogens.
  • Due to the crowding of eight electrons in the valence shell, electron density increases and there is an appreciable electronic repulsion between them.
  • To decrease this repulsion and electronic density, the volume of valence shell increases.

Therefore atomic radii of noble gases are larger than those of halogens.

Question 31.
Which element has higher electron affinity among O and S? Why?
Answer:

  1. Oxygen has less negative electron gain enthalpy, due to high electronegativity, low atomic size and high electron density so that the incoming electron is repelled.
  2. Electron gain enthalpy of the elements decreases down the group due to successive de­crease in electronegativity and nuclear attraction and increase in atomic size.
    ElementSSeTePoO
    Electron gain enthalpy kJ/mol-200-195– 190– 174– 141

Question 32.
Why is the first ionisation energy of oxygen lower than that of nitrogen?
Answer:

  1. Electronic configuration :
    7N Is2 2s2 2px1 2py1 2pz1
    8O Is2 Is2 2px2 2py1 2pz1
  2. Nitrogen has extra stability due to half-filled p-orbitals. Therefore it has higher first ionisation enthalpy.
  3. Oxygen by losing one electron from 2px orbital acquires extra stability of half-filled 7-orbitals and hence has lower ionisation enthalpy.
  4. Therefore oxygen has lower ionisation enthalpy than nitrogen.

Question 33.
Why do halogens possess very high values of electronegativity? Arrange the halogens in the order of decreasing electronegativity.
Answer:

  • Since halogens have eletronic configuration, ns2 np5, they have tendency to accept one electron to complete an octet.
  • Group 17 elements have the lowest atomic radii and high effective nuclear charge.
  • Therefore halogens have high values of electronegativity.
  • The decreasing order of electronegativity is, F > Cl > Br > I

Question 34.
Discuss the physical states and the types of elements of Groups 16,17 and 18.
Answer:
Physical states :

  • Oxygen is a gas, while the other elements of Group 16 are solids at room temperature.
  • All the elements of group 16 show allotropy and exist in several allotropic modifications.
  • In group 17, fluorine and chlorine are gases, bromine is a liquid and iodine is a solid at room temperature.
  • All halogens are coloured. Fluorine is a yellow coloured gas, chlorine is a greenish-yellow coloured gas, bromine is a red coloured liquid and iodine is a violet coloured solid.
  • All the elements of group 18 are monoatomic gases.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Types of elements :

  • In group 16 elements, oxygen and sulphur are non-metals, selenium and tellurium are metalloids, while polonium is a radioactive metal with half-life 138 days.
  • All halogens are non-metals.
  • Group 18 elements are chemically inert and hence called inert elements.

Question 35.
Explain the colour of halogens.
Answer:

  • All halogens are coloured.
HalogenFluorineChlorineBromineIodineAstatine
colourpale yellowgreenish yellowredvioletmetallic grey
  • The colour arises due to absorption of radiation in visible region and exCltation of electrons.
  • From F to I atomic size increases, hence the valence electrons are loosely bound.
  • For example, fluorine absorbs violet radiation of higher energy and transmits yellow light of lower energy while iodine absorbs yellow light of lower energy and transmits violet radiation of higher energy.

Question 36.
Explain the trend in the density, melting and boiling points of Group 16 elements.
Answer:
Density :

  • The density of group 16 elements increases down the group.
  • On moving down the group, the increase in atomic mass is more than the increase in atomic size.
  • Down the group the magnitude of van der Waals forces of attraction increases resulting in compact lattice formation of elements.

Therefore the density increases down the group.

The density increases in the order O < S < Se < Te

Melting and boiling point :

  • The melting and boiling points of the elements increase regularly on moving down the group.
  • However, the melting and boiling points of polonium are lower than that of tellurium.
  • This is because the intermolecular van der Waals forces are weaker in polonium.
  • There is also a large difference in the melting and boiling points of oxygen and sulphur as oxygen has a smaller size, while sulphur has a larger size and stronger van der Waals forces.
Element0SSeTePo
Melting point (K)55393490725520
Boiling point (K)9071895812601235

Question 37.
Explain the following in the case of group 17 elements :
(i) Density
(ii) Melting and boiling point
Answer:
Density :

  • Down the group, density of halogens increases.
  • This is, because down the group, van der Waals forces of intermolecular attraction increase, and hence tendency for agglomerisation increases. Therefore density increases.

Melting point and boiling point :

  • Halogens have low melting points and boiling points.
  • Melting points and boiling points increase down the group.

Question 38.
In case of group 18 elements, explain the variation in melting and boiling points.
Answer:
Melting points and boiling points :

  • Group 18 elements have very low melting points and boiling points.
  • The melting points and boiling points increase down the group from He to Rn.
  • As the size of the atoms increases on moving down the group, the magnitude of the van der Waals forces increase from He to Rn.
  • Thus, the melting and boiling points increase from He to Rn. Helium has the lowest boiling point (4.2 K) of any known substance.
  • The boiling points increase in the order He < Ne < Ar < Kr < Xe < Rn

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 39.
Explain reactions of halogens with water.
Answer:

  • Halogens react with water forming halo acids and haloxyaClds.
  • The reactivity decreases from fluorine to iodine.
  • 2F2 + 2H2O → 4HF + O2
    3F2 + 3H2O → 6HF + O3
    X2(g) + H2O(1) → HX(aq) + HOX (X = Cl, Br)

Question 40.
How do halogens react with other solvents and with hydrocarbons?
Answer:

  • Halogens are soluble in various organic solvents such as chloroform, carbon disulphide and carbon tetrachloride
  • All halogens react with hydrocarbons and form mono or multisubstituted compounds.
  • The reactivity decreases down the group from fluorine to iodine.
    CH4 + 2F2 → C + 4HF
    C + 2F2 → CF4
    CH4 + Cl2 → CCl4 + 4HCl

Question 41.
Explain the trend in the bond dissociation enthalpies of halogen molecules.
Answer:

  • The bond dissociation enthalpies of halogen molecules decrease down the group with an increase in atomic size.
  • However, the bond dissociation enthalpy of fluorine is lower than that of chlorine and bromine because the F – F bond is weak.
  • The bond dissociation enthalpies of the halogen molecules decreases in the order,
    Cl – Cl > Br – Br > F – F > I -1.

Question 42.
Why does the density of halogens increase on moving down the group?
Answer:
The bond dissociation enthalpies of halogen molecules decrease down the group with an increase in atomic size.

Question 43.
Why do melting and boiling points of halogens increase on moving down the group?
Answer:

  • The atomic size of halogens increases on moving down the group and hence the strength of van der Waals forces between the molecules also increases.
  • In the lighter elements, F and Cl, these forces are weak, hence they are gases at room temperature and possess low melting and boiling points.
  • In the heavier elements of the group, the van der Waals forces become stronger. Thus, bromine is a liquid and iodine is a solid and they possess higher melting and boiling points.

Question 44.
Why does oxygen show anomalous behaviour?
OR
Oxygen differs from the rest of the members of the family. Explain
Answer:
Oxygen is the first element of group 16.
Reasons for anomalous behaviour of oxygen :

  • It has the smallest size in the group.
  • It has the highest electronegativity (3.5).
  • It does not have vacant d-orbitals like other elements in group 16.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 45.
Explain the anomalous behaviour of oxygen in relation to the properties of the Group 16 elements.
Answer:
Oxygen shows following anomalous behaviour :

  • Physical state : Oxygen is a gas while other elements in the group are solids at ordinary temperature.
  • AtomiClty : Oxygen exists as a diatomic molecule O2 while other elements are polyatomic molecules like S8, Se8 have puckered ring structure.
  • Magnetic behaviour : Molecular oxygen O2 is paramagnetic while other elements are diamagnetic. Molecular O2 has two unpaired electrons in the antibonding molecular orbitals.
  • Oxidation states : Oxygen shows oxidation state-2 in oxides, – 1 in peroxides while + 2 in oxygen difluoride, OF2.
  • Since it does not have vacant d-orbital it doesn’t show higher oxidation states while other elements of group 16 show + 2, + 4 and + 6 oxidation states.
  • Hydrogen bonding : Since oxygen has high elec-tronegativity (3.5), it forms hydrogen bonding in its compounds like H2O, alcohols, etc. Other elements in the group do not show this property.
  • Hydrides : The hydride of oxygen, H2O is a liquid while the hydrides of all other elements in group 16 are gases.
  • Covalency : Oxygen shows a common covalency 2 since it has only two unpaired electrons and no d -orbitals in its valence shell. In rare cases, it shows covalency 4.
  • The other members of Group 16 can show covalency, more than 4, due to the presence of J-orbitals in their valence shell.

Question 46.
Oxygen generally exhibits an oxidation state of – 2, whereas the other members of its family show oxidation states of +2, +4 and +6 as well. Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of oxygen is ls22s22p4.
  • It has two half filled p-orbitals and no d-orbitals for exCltation of electrons. Hence it cannot show higher oxidation states.
  • Oxygen being highly electronegative, it mostly shows an oxidation state of – 2 only.
  • Other members of the family like sulphur, have vacant d-orbitals, thereby giving four and six half- filled orbitals for bonding.
  • Furthermore, they can combine with more electronegative elements.
  • Hence, they show oxidation states of +2, +4 and 4- 6 also.

Question 47.
Why is H2O a liquid and H2S a gas?
OR
Water is a liquid and other hydrides of the group, are gases. Explain.
Answer:

  • The boiling point of water (373 K) is very high hence it is less volatile while that of H2S is low (213 K) and hence it is volatile.
  • Since oxygen is more electronegative than sulphur, O-H bond is more polar and there arises associ-
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 10
  • Hydrogen bonding and molecular assoClation are not present in H2S and other hydrides.
  • In H2S, there are weak van der Waals forces.
  • Therefore to separate H2O molecules in H2O liquid, energy required is higher than that required to separate H2S molecules.

Hence H2O is a liquid and H2S (and other hydrides) is a gas.

Question 48.
Why does fluorine show anomalous behaviour?
Answer:
Fluorine exhibits anomalous behaviour as compared to other halogens in the group.

The reasons for anomalous behaviour of fluorine are as follows :

  • the smallest size of fluorine
  • the highest electronegativity
  • low bond dissoClation enthalpy of F-F bond
  • non-availability of d-orbitals in its valence shell.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 49.
Explain the anomalous properties of fluorine.
Answer:
The anomalous properties of fluorine are as follows :

  • Fluorine has the highest reactivity among other halogens.
  • Fluorine forms strong hydrogen bonding in its hydrides unlike other halogens.
  • HF is a liquid while other hydrogen halides are gases at room temperature.
  • HF is a weak aCld while other haloaClds are strong aClds.
  • Fluorine shows only one oxidation state – 1 while all other halogens show variable oxidation states like -1, +1, +3, +5 and + 7.
  • Fluorine has the highest electronegativity but less negative electron gain enthalpy than chlorine.
  • The compounds of fluorine have higher ionic character than other halogens.
  • Fluorine has no tendency to form polyhalide ion whereas other halogens form polyhalide ions like, Cl3, Br3 and I3.
  • Fluorine unlike other halogens when reacts with water and produces O2 and O3.
    2F2 + 2H2O → 4HF + O2;
    3F2 + 3H2O → 6HF + O3
  • Fluorine shows much higher values of ionisation enthalpy, electronegativity and standard electrode potentials compared to the other halogens.
  • Fluorine shows much lower values of ionic and covalent radii, melting and boiling points and electron gain enthalpy than expected.
  • Fluorine forms only one oxoacid HOF, while the other halogens form a number of oxoacids.

Question 50.
Describe anomalous behaviour of fluorine with the other elements of group 17 with reference to :
(a) Hydrogen bonding
(b) Oxidation state
(c) Polyhalide ions.
Answer:
Anomalous behaviour of fluorine with other 17 group elements (Cl, Br, I) :

(a) Hydrogen bonding : Hydrogen bonding is present in HF only, while it is absent in other haloaClds (HCl, HBr and HI).
(b) Oxidation state : Fluorine shows only one oxidation state namely – 1 due to absence of d-orbital. Other halogens exhibit along with – 1 other oxidation states namely +1, +3, + 5 and +7.
(c) Polyhalide ion : Fluorine does not form polyhalide ion but other halogens form polyhalide ions like Cl3, Br3 and I3.

Question 51.
At room temperature hydrogen fluoride is a liquid while all other hydrogen halides are gases. Explain.
Answer:

  • Fluorine has the highest electronegativity compared to remaining halogens.
  • H-F bond has the highest bond polarity compared to other halides.
  • The presence of strong intermolecular hydrogen bonding leads to the association of HF molecules as follows :
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 11
  • Other hydrogen halides do not show hydrogen bonding due to their larger atomic size and less electronegativity.

Hence HF is a liquid while other hydrogen halides (HCl to HI) are gases.

Question 52.
Explain the oxidation states of Group 16 elements.
Answer:

  • Group 16 elements have general electronic configuration, ns2 np4,
  • They show variable oxidation states, – 2, + 2, + 4 and -6.
  • Since all elements have 6 valence electrons, they tend to gain or share 2 electrons to complete an octet, and show common oxidation state – 2.
  • Oxygen being highly electronegative, it shows the common oxidation state -2 in oxides (H2O, MgO). It shows – 1 oxidation state in peroxides (H2O2, Na2O2) and + 2 oxidation states in OF2.
  • Except oxygen all other elements have vacant d-orbitals, hence they show higher oxidation states + 4 and + 6. For example
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 12
  • The stability of the + 6 oxidation state decreases but the stability of the +4 oxidation state increases down the group due to the inert pair effect.
  • Bonding in +4 and +6 oxidation states is covalent in nature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 53.
What is the oxidation state of S in H2S2O6?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 13
∴ The oxidation state of S atom = + 5

Question 54.
What is the oxidation state of oxygen in OF2?
Answer:
The oxidation state of oxygen in OF2 is +2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 14

Question 55.
What is the oxidation state of oxygen in compounds
(i) O2F2 and
(ii) H2O2?
Answer:
(i) In O2F2, the oxidation state of oxygen is + 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 15

(ii) In H2O2, the oxidation state of oxygen is – 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 16

Question 56.
Oxygen usually exhibits – 2 oxidation state, but it exhibits + 2 oxidation state in OF2?
Answer:

  • Oxygen being highly electronegative, it shows the common oxidation state – 2 in oxides.
  • In the presence of a highly electronegative fluorine atom it exhibits + 2 oxidation state in OF2.

Question 57.
Why do sulphur and other heavier elements of group 16 exhibit higher oxidation states?
Answer:
Since sulphur and heavier elements of group 16 have large atomic radii and available d-orbitals, they exhibit higher oxidation states.

Question 58.
Why does the tendency of group 16 elements to exist in -2 oxidation state decrease on moving down the group?
Answer:

  • The electronegativity of the elements of Group 16 elements decreases on moving down the group in the order O > S > Se > Te > Po.
  • Thus, the tendency to show -2 oxidation state also decreases.

Question 59.
Discuss the oxidation states in Group 18 eiements.
Answer:

  • The group 18 elements have a stable electronic configuration ns2np6 with completely filled orbitals.
  • Due to completely filled orbitals and complete octets these elements do not show a tendency to lose, gain or share electrons.
  • They have zero valency and mostly exist as mono- atomic gases.
  • Xenon exhibits higher oxidation states, as the paired electrons of the valence shell can be unpaired and promoted to the empty d-orbitals.
  • The unpaired electrons are shared with fluorine or oxygen atoms to form covalent compounds with higher oxidation states such as XeF2, XeF4, XeF6, XeO3 and XeOF6.

Question 60.
Why does xenon being a noble gas form compounds with other elements?
Answer:
Xenon forms compounds with other elements due to the following reasons :

  • Xenon has large atomic size and lower ionisation enthalpy.
  • The paired electrons of the valence shell can be unpaired and promoted to the empty d-orbitals.
  • The unpaired electrons are shared with fluorine or oxygen atoms to form covalent compounds with higher oxidation states.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 61.
Explain the reactivity of group 16 elements with hydrogen.
Answer:

  • All the elements of group 16 react with hydrogen and form hydrides of the type H2M where M = O, S, Se, Te and Po. For example H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te and H2Po.
  • The hydrides of these elements show regular trends in their physical and chemical properties.

Question 62.
Explain the general structures of hydrides of group 16 elements.
OR
Give reason : Bond angle decreases from H2O to H2S.
Answer:

  • Group 16 elements form hydrides of the type H2M where M = O, S, Se, Te and Po.
  • All these hydrides are formed by sp3 hybridisation of the central atom and have angular shape.
  • All hydrides have similar structure but differ in H-M-H bond angle. This bond angle decreases from H2O to H2Te.
  • All these hydrides have two M-H bond pairs and two lone pairs of electrons.
  • Due to repulsion between lone pairs-lone pairs and lone pairs-bond pairs, and bond pairs-bond pairs the bond angle is reduced from regular 109° 28′.
  • On moving down the group, atomic size increases, electronegativity decreases, electron density decreases.
  • Since among group 16 elements, oxygen has the highest electronegativity, lowest atomic size and hence the highest electron density, the repulsion between electron pairs is maximum in H2O, hence H-O-H bond angle is maximum.
  • The electron pair repulsion decreases down the group, hence bond angle also decreases down the group.
HydridesH2OH2sH2SeH2Te
H-M-H angle104°92°91°90°

Question 63.
Explain the physical states, volatility and chemical properties of hydrides of group 16 elements.
Answer:
(1) Physical state : Hydride of oxygen, H2O is a colourless odourless liquid while the hydrides of other group 16 elements are colourless poisonous gases with unpleasant odours.

(2) Volatility : Volatility of hydrides increase from H2O to H2S and then decreases. H2O < H2S > H2Se > H2Te
At ordinary temperature H2O is a liquid while all other hydrides are gases.

(3) Thermal stability :

  • The thermal stability of hydrides decreases in the order of H2O > H2S > H2Se > H2Te.
  • Since atomic size increases from O to Te, the tendency to form hydride bond, M-H decreases. Hence M-H bond in O-H is the strongest and in Te-H the weakest. Therefore thermal stability decreases from H2O to H2Te.

(4) ACldic character :

  • The hydrides of group 16 elements are weakly acidic and acidic strength increases from H2O to H2Te.
    Since M-H bond strength decreases, bond enthalpy decreases, acidic character increases.

(5) Reducing power :

  • Except H2O, all hydrides of group 16 elements are reducing agents.
  • Reducing power increases from H2S to H2Te.
  • Reducing power of the hydrides is due to their less stability and tendency to dissociate, which increases from H2S to H2Te.

Question 64.
Giving suitable reasons, arrange the hydrides of group 16 elements in the decreasing order of their thermal stability.
Answer:

  • The thermal stability of hydrides decreases in the order of H2O > H2S > H2Se > H2Te.
  • Since atomic size increases from O to Te, the tendency to form hydride bond, M-H decreases.
  • Hence M-H bond in O-H is the strongest and in Te-H the weakest. Therefore thermal stability decreases from H2O to H2Te.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 65.
What is the oxidation state of S in the following :
(a) S8
(b) \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\)
(c) K2S2Og?
Answer:
(a) Oxidation state of S in, S8 is zero.
(b) In \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\) it is +6
(c) in K2S2O8 it is +6

Question 66.
H2S is less acidic than H2Te, why?
Answer:

  • Sulphur is more electronegative than Tellurium.
  • Bond energy of S-H in H2S is (347 kJ mol-1) more than the bond energy of Te-H (238 kJ mol-1).
  • Hence H2Te dissociates more giving H + (or H3O+) than H2S in the solution. Therefore H2S is less acidic than H2Te.

Question 67.
“The reducing power of the hydrides of group 16 elements increases from H2S to H2Te”. Explain.
Answer:

  • Except H2O, all hydrides of group 16 elements are reducing agents.
  • reducing power increases from H2S to H2Te.
  • reducing power of the hydrides is due to their less stability and tendency to dissociate, which increases from H2S to H2Te.

Question 68.
Explain the volatility of hydrides from H2S to H2Te.
OR
“The boiling points of the hydrides of Group 16 elements increases from H2S to H2Te.” Explain.
Answer:

  • In group 16 elements, except H2O which is a liquid, all other hydrides are gases.
  • From H2S to H2Te boiling point increases due to an increase in atomic size from S to Te.
  • The magnitude of van der Waals forces increases as atomic size increases, from S to Te, therefore boiling points increase from H2S to H2Te.
HydridesH2oH2SH2SeH2Te
Boiling point K373213232269

Question 69.
Give reasons : H2S has a lower boiling point than H2O.
Answer:

  • Hydrogen bonding and molecular association are not present in H2S.
  • The H2O molecules are associated with each other through intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
  • Hence, H2S has a lower boiling point than H2O.

Question 70.
Among the hydrides of group 16, water shows unusual properties. Why?
Answer:

  • Oxygen being more electronegative, the O-H bond is more polar and there arises association of H2O molecules through intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
  • The other hydrides of group 16 do not form H bonds and hence exist as discrete molecules.
  • As a result, water shows unusual properties like high B.P, high thermal stability and weaker acidic character as compared to the other hydrides of group 16.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 71.
Explain the reactivity of halogens towards hydrogen.
Answer:

  • All halogens react with hydrogen and form hydrogen halides HX where X = F, Cl, Br, I.
  • The affinity and reactivity decrease down the group from F to I.
  • Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 17

Question 72.
Explain the acidic strength of halo acids.
OR
Write a short note on the acidic strength of hydrogen halides.
Answer:

  • The aCldic strength of haloaClds vary in the following order, HF < HCl < BHr < HI
  • The stability of hydrogen halides decreases down the group. HF > HCl > HBr > HI.
    This is because from F to I, atomic size increases and bond dissociation enthalpy of H-X decreases.

Question 73.
HF is the most stable among all the hydrogen halides. Explain.
OR
Explain the thermal stability of hydrogen halides.
Answer:

  • HF is the most stable among all the hydrogen halides.
  • The thermal stability decreases from HF to HI.
  • This is due to a decrease in bond dissociation enthalpy and bond strength of H-X bond from F to I.
  • Down the group, from F to I, atomic size increases, bond length of H-X bond increases, bond polarity decreases and hence bond strength decreases.
  • F being of the lowest atomic size and the highest electronegativity, HF bond is stronger and highly thermally stable.

Question 74.
Explain the reducing character of hydrogen halides.
Answer:

  • The reducing character of hydrogen halides increases from HF to HI.
  • HF does not show any reducing property while HI is a strong reducing agent.
  • H-X bond strength and thermal stability of hydrogen halides decrease from HF to HI.

Unlike other hydrogen halides, HF does not dissociate releasing hydrogen, hence HF is not a reducing agent.

Question 75.
Why is HCl a weaker acid than HI?
Answer:

  • Bond length of HCl is less than HI.
  • Cl is more electronegative than I.
  • Hence bond strength of HCl is more than HI.
  • Therefore HCl dissociates less than HI, which makes HCl a weaker acid than HI.

Question 76.
Why is HF a weaker acid than HCl2
Answer:

  • The H-F bond is stronger than H-Cl bond.
  • Hence, HF ionises less readily than HCl in H2O, to give H+ ions.
    Therefore, HF is a weaker acid than HCl.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 77.
Arrange the halogen acids in the decreasing order of :
(1) thermal stability
(2) acidic strength.
Answer:
(1) Thermal stability : As the atomic size increases from F to I, the bond dissociation enthalpy of H-X decreases.
Thus, the thermal stability of hydrogen halides decreases down the group in the order HF > HCl > HBr > HI

(2) ACldic strength : Since, the bond dissociation enthalpy of H-X decreases down the group, the acidic strength varies in the order HI > HBr > HCl > HF

Question 78.
Noble gases do not form compounds with hydrogen. Why?
Answer:
Noble gases have a stable electronic configuration, and so are unreactive. Since, they are chemically inert, they do not form compounds with hydrogen.

Question 79.
Explain the reactivity of group 16 elements with oxygen.
OR
Give brief account of the oxides of group 16 elements.
Answer:

  • All elements of group 16 react with oxygen and form oxides of the types EO2 and EO3 where E = S, Se, Te or Po. Examples are SO2, SeO2, TeO2, SO3, TeO3, etc.
  • SO2 and SeO2 are acidic in nature and react with water to form acids.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 18
  • The reducing power reduces from SO2 to TeO2. SO2 is an oxidising agent, while TeO2 is a reducing agent.
  • SO3, SeO3 and TeO3 are also acidic in nature. They react with water to form acids.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 19

Question 80.
Complete the following reactions :
(i) S + O2(air)
(ii) Se + O2(air)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 20

Question 81.
Explain the reactivity of halogens towards oxygen.
Answer:

  • Halogens with oxygen form many oxides with different oxidation states of halogens.
  • Fluorine forms O2F2 and OF2.
  • Chlorine forms oxides like Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 21 Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 22 All oxides are oxidising agents.
  • Bromine forms oxides like Br2O, BrO2, BrO3 and iodine forms I2O4, I2O5, I2O7.

Question 82.
Discuss the properties of the oxides of halogens.
Answer:
Properties of oxides of halogens :

  • Both OF2 and O2F2 are strong fluorinating agents. Only OF2 is thermally stable at 298 K. OF2 oxidises plutonium to PuF6. This reaction is used to remove Pu as PUF6 from spent nuclear fuel.
  • The chlorine oxides Cl2O, ClO2, Cl2O6 and Cl2O7 are highly reactive oxidizing agents and tend to explode. ClO2 is used as a bleaching agent in the paper industry and textiles and in water treatment.
  • Bromine forms oxides like Br2O, BrO2, BrO3, which are the least stable halogen oxides. They are powerful oxidising agents.
  • Iodine forms oxides like I2O4, I2O5 and I2O7. These solids are insoluble in water and decompose on heating. I2O5 is a powerful oxidising agent and is used to determine the amount of carbon monoxide.

For a particular halogen, higher oxides are more stable than the lower ones.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 83.
Explain the reactivity of group 16 elements towards halogens.
Answer:

  1. The group 16 elements with halogens form a large number of halides of the type EX2, EX4 and EX6 where E is an element of the group and X is a halogen.
  2. The stability of the halides decreases in the order fluoride > chloride > bromide > iodide.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 23
  3. The hexahalides SF6, SeF6, TeF6 are formed by direct combination. They are colourless gases. The hexahalides have sp3d2 hybridisation and have an octahedral structure. SF6 is exceptionally stable due to steric reasons.
  4. The tetrahalides SF4, SeF4, TeF4, TeCl4 have sp3d hybridisation and thus have a trigonal bipyramidal structure in which one of the equatorial positions is occupied by a lone pair of electrons. This geometry is also called see-saw geometry.
  5. The dihalides SCl2, SeCl2, TeCl2 have sp3 and thus have a tetrahedral structures with two equatorial positions occupied by lone pairs.
  6. The monohalides S2F2, S2Cl2, Se2Cl2 and Se2Br2 are dimeric in nature. These halides have a tendency to undergo disproportionation. For example, 2Se2Cl2 → SeCl4 + 3Se

Question 84.
Complete the following reaction :
(i) S + 3F2
(ii) Se + 2Cl2
Answer:
(i) S + 3F2 → SF6
(ii) Se + 2Cl2 → SeCl4

Question 85.
Explain the reactivity of halogens towards other halogens.
OR
What are interhalogen compounds?
Answer:

  • The halogens have a tendency to combine amongst themselves forming different compounds called interhalogen compounds.
  • Interhalogens are of the type XX, XX’3, XX’5 and XX’7 where X is larger size halogen than X’.
  • They are covalent, diamagnetic, reactive and good oxidising agents.
  • Preparation :
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 24

Question 86.
Explain the reactivity of Group 18 towards halogens.
Answer:

  • Group 18 elements are chemically inert.
  • However, inert elements like krypton and xenon react directly with fluorine under appropriate conditions to give their fluorides. For example,
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 25
  • The xenon fluorides XeF2, XeF4 and XeF6 are colourless crystalline solids which sublime at 298 K.
  • These fluorides are strong fluorinating agents.

Question 87.
What is the action of metals on group 16 elements?
Answer:
Metals react with O, S, Se to form oxides, sulphides and selenides respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 26

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 88.
Complete the following reactions :
(i) Cu + S
(ii) Cd + Se
Answer:
(i) Cu + S → CuS
(ii) Cd + Se → CdSe

Question 89.
Explain the reactivity of halogens with metals.
Answer:

  • All halogens react with metals instantly to give metal halides.
  • Down the group reactivity decreases from fluorine to iodine.
  • 2Na(s) + Cl2(1) → 2NaCl(s), Mg(s) + Br2(s) → MgBr2(s)
  • Halogens being highly electronegative, the metal-halogen bonds are ionic and ionic character decreases down the group. For example M-F > M-Cl > M-Br > M-I.
  • The metal halides with higher oxidation state of the metal are more covalent than the halides with lower oxidation state of metal. For example SnCl4, PbCl4, SbCl5 and UF6 are more covalent than

Question 90.
Explain the property of allotropy in Group 16 elements.
Answer:

  • All the elements of group 16 exhibit allotropy.
  • These elements exist in different allotropic modifications.
  • Oxygen exists as O2 and ozone O3.
  • Sulphur exists as α-sulphur, β-sulphur, γ-sulphur, homocyclic sulphur, plastic sulphur, etc. Rhombic sulphur (α sulphur) and mono-clinic sulphur (β sulphur) are the important allotropes. Both are non-metallic in nature.
  • Selenium exists in two allotropic forms red (non-metallic) and grey (metallic).
  • Tellurium exists in two allotropic forms crystalline form and the amorphous form.
  • Po has two forms namely α-form and β-form both being metallic.

Question 91.
What are the allotropes of oxygen?
Answer:
Allotropes of oxygen :

  • Oxygen O2
  • Ozone O3

Question 92.
Which are the most important allotropic forms of sulphur?
Answer:
The most important allotropes of sulphur are :

  • Rhombic (α-sulphur)
  • Monoclinic (β-sulphur)

Question 93.
Write a note on the following :
(1) Rhombic sulphur
(2) Monoclinic sulphur
Answer:
(1) Rhombic sulphur :

  • Rhombic sulphur are orthorhombic crystals.
  • This is the most stable form and common form of sulphur.
  • It is pale yellow., having density 2.069 g/cm3 and melting point 385.8 K
  • It is insoluble in water, but soluble in CS2
  • It is stable below 369 K and transforms to β-sulphur above this temperature.
  • It exists as S8 molecules with a structure of a puckered ring.
  • It is obtained by the evaporation of roll sulphur is CS2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 28

(2) Monoclinic sulphur :

  • Monoclinic sulphur (β sulphur or prismatic sulphur) are needle-shaped monoclinic crystals.
  • It is bright yellow, having a density 1.989 gcm3 and melting point 393 K.
  • It is soluble in CS2.
  • It is stable above 369 K and transforms into α-sulphur below this temperature.
  • It exists as, S8 molecules with a structure of a puckered ring.
  • It is prepared by melting rhombic sulphur and cooling it till a crust is formed. Two holes are pierced in the crust and the remaining liquid is poured to obtain needle-shaped crystals of monoclinic sulphur.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 94.
What are the different oxyacids of sulphur?
Answer:
Sulphurous acid : H2SO3
Sulphuric acid (Oil of vitriol): H2SO4
Di or pyrosulphuric acid or oleum H2S2O7
Peroxy monosulphuric acid or Caro’s acid H2SO5
Peroxy sulphuric acid (or Marshall’s acid : H2S2O8
Thiosulphuric acid H2S2O3

Question 95.
Write the structures of oxyacids of sulphur. Write the oxidation number of sulphur.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 30
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 31

Question 95.
Write molecular formulae and structure of the following compounds :
(1) Peroxy monosulphuric acid
(2) Pyrosulphuric aCld
Answer:
(1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 113
(2)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 114

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 96.
What is oil of vitriol?
Answer:
In ancient days, sulphuric acid, H2SO4 was called, oil of vitriol.

Question 97.
What is the oxidation state of S in the following compounds?
(i) H2SO2
(ii) H2S2O4
(iii) H2S2O6
(iv) H2S2O5
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 32

Question 98.
Which are different oxyacids (or oxoacids) of halogens?
Answer:
Fluorine forms only one oxyacid namely, hypofluorous acid or fluoric acid, HOF while other halogens form several oxyacids.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 33

Question 99.
How do
(i) oxidising power and
(ii) thermal stability of oxyacids (or oxoacids) of halogens vary?
Answer:
(i) Oxidising power of oxyacids of halogens decreases as the oxidation number of halogens increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 34

(ii) The thermal stability of oxyacids of halogens increases with the increase in the oxidation state of halogen. Hence the increasing order of thermal stability is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 35

Question 100.
How does the acid strength of the halogen oxoacids vary?
Answer:
The acid strength of the halogen oxoacids increases with increase in the oxidation state of the halogen.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 36

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 101.
Explain the laboratory methods for the preparation of dioxygen.
Answer:
Laboratory methods :
(i) By heating chlorates, nitrates and permanganates.
Potassium chlorate in the presence of manganese dioxide on heating decomposes to form potassium chloride and oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 39

(ii) By the thermal decomposition of metal oxides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 40
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 41

(iii) By the thermal decomposition of hydrogen peroxide :
The thermal decomposition of hydrogen peroxide in the presence of finely divided metal and manganese dioxide used as catalyst gives oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 42

Question 102.
How is oxygen prepared by thermal decomposition of certain metallic oxides?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 43

Question 103.
Write the reactions for the decomposition of following oxides on heating :
(i) HgO
(ii) Ag2O
(iii) PbO2
(iv) H2O2.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 44

Question 104.
How is dioxygen manufactured on a large scale?
Answer:
Dioxygen on a large scale or commercial scale is obtained by two following methods :
(1) From water : By electrolysis of acidified water, H2 gas is obtained at the cathode and O2 is obtained at anode.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 45

(2) From air :

  • Carbon dioxide and water vapour is removed from air and the remaining gases are liquefied.
  • O2 on large scale is obtained by fractional distillation of liquid air.
  • On distillation, liquid dinitrogen having low boiling point distils out first leaving behind liquid dioxygen. Then liquid O2 is distilled out and separated.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 105.
What is the action of heat on KClO3?
Answer:
Laboratory methods :
(i) By heating chlorates, nitrates and permanga­nates.
Potassium chlorate in the presence of manganese dioxide on heating decomposes to form potassium chloride and oxygen.
\(2 \mathrm{KClO}_{3} \frac{\Delta}{\mathrm{MnO}_{2}} 2 \mathrm{KCl}+3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

(ii) By the thermal decomposition of metal oxides.
\(2 \mathrm{Ag}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{s})} \stackrel{\text { heat }}{\longrightarrow} 4 \mathrm{Ag}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
\(\begin{aligned}
&2 \mathrm{HgO}_{(\mathrm{s})} \stackrel{\text { heat }}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{Hg}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \\
&2 \mathrm{PbO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})} \stackrel{\text { heat }}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{PbO}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}
\end{aligned}\)

(iii) By the thermal decomposition of hydrogen per­oxide :
The thermal decomposition of hydrogen peroxide in the presence of finely divided metal and manganese dioxide used as catalyst gives oxygen.
\(2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2 \text { (aq) }} \frac{\text { heat }}{\mathrm{MnO}_{2}} 2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(1)}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

Question 106.
Write the reactions of dioxygen with
(i) ZnS
(ii) CH4
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 110

Question 107.
Complete the following reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 46
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 47

Question 108.
What are the uses of dioxygen?
Answer:
The uses of dioxygen are as follows :

  • Dioxygen is essential for sustaining life. It is used in hospitals for artificial respiration.
  • It is used in oxy-hydrogen (2800 °C) and oxy-acetylene (3200 °C) torches used for cutting and welding metals.
  • Oxygen cylinders are used in hospitals, for high altitude flying and in mountaineering.
  • It is used in the combustion of fuels. In rockets, hydrazine in oxygen is used as a fuel as it provides tremendous thrust.

Question 109.
What are oxides? How are they classified? Give examples.
OR
What are the different types of oxides? Give example.
Answer:
The oxides are binary compounds in which one element is oxygen and another may be a metal or a non-metal.
They are classified as follows :

  • acidic oxides, CO2, SO2, etc.
  • Basic oxides, CaO, BaO, etc.
  • Amphoteric oxides, Al2O3, ZnO, etc.
  • Neutral oxides, NO, N2O, CO, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 110.
Explain different types of oxides.
Answer:
Oxides are of four types as follows :
(1) acidic oxides :

  • The oxide, which on reaction with water forms an acid or reacts with a base to give a salt is called an acidic oxide.
  • It is formed by the combination of oxygen with non-metals. For example CO2, SO3, etc.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 48

(2) Basic oxide :

  • The oxide, which on reaction with water forms a base or reacts with an acid to give a salt is called basic oxide.
  • It is formed by the reaction of oxygen with highly electropositive metals.
    For example, Na2O, CaO, etc.
    Na2O(s) + H2O(1) → 2NaOH(aq)
    CaO(s) + H2O(1) → Ca(OH)2(aq)
    BaO(s) + 2HCl(aq) → BaCl2 + H2O
  • Basic oxides are generally ionic in nature.

(3) Amphoteric oxide :

  • The oxide, which shows both acidic and basic I characteristics is called an amphoteric oxide.
  • They are formed by the reaction of oxygen with elements which lie on the border of electroposi- five (metals) and electronegative (non-metals) nature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 49

Along the period, from left to right the nature of oxides changes from basic to amphoteric to acidic.

(4) Neutral oxide : The oxide which behaves neither acidic nor basic is called a neutral oxide.
For example, CO, NO, N2O.

Question 111.
What is the nature of the following oxides :
(i) N2Os
(ii) P4O10
(iii) Cl2O7
(iv) ZnO
(v) Al2O3
(vi) K2O
(vii) BaO
(viii) CO
(ix) N2O?
Answer:

Acidic oxide(i) N2O5 (ii) P4O10 (iii) Cl2O7
Basic oxide(vi) K2O (vii) BaO
Amphoteric oxide(iv) ZnO (v) Al2O3
Neutral oxide(viii) CO (ix) N2O

Question 112.
Complete the following reactions :
(i) P4O10 + H2O
(ii) C12O7 + H2O
(iii) ZnO + HCl
(iv) ZnO + NaOH
(v) Al2O3 + NaOH.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 50

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 113.
Explain the nature of zinc oxide with the help of the reactions.
OR
Explain with chemical reactions, why is zinc oxide amphoteric in nature.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 115

Question 114.
What is ozone umbrella?
OR
Explain Ozone as a protective umbrella for UV from sun.
Answer:
The stratospheric pool of ozone which is a layer above earth’s surface and protects from harmful high energetic ultraviolet (UV) rays is called the ozone umbrella or ozonosphere.

Question 115.
How is ozone formed naturally?
Answer:

  • In the atmosphere, ozone is naturally formed through photochemical reactions.
  • Oxygen present in the lower mesosphere on the absorption of solar radiations, is dissociated into two oxygen atoms which oxidise oxygen to ozone.
  • One atomic oxygen combines with molecular oxygen to form O3.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 51

Question 116.
Explain laboratory preparation of ozone.
Answer:

  • When a slow dry stream of oxygen is passed through a silent electric discharge, oxygen is converted into ozone (about 10%). The mixture is called ozonised oxygen.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 52
  • It is an endothermic reaction.
  • Silent electric discharge prevents the decomposition of ozone.

Question 117.
What are the physical properties of ozone?
Answer:
The physical properties of ozone are as follows :

  • Gaseous ozone is blue, liquid ozone is dark blue and solid ozone is violet-black.
  • It has a pungent odour hence the name is ozone.
  • At higher concentrations (about 100 ppm), it is harmful and results into nausea and headache while in small concentrations it is harmless.
  • Ozone is thermodynamically less stable than oxygen.
  • The decomposition of ozone (2O3 → 3O2) is exothermic (ΔH < O) and has ΔS > 0.
  • Therefore ΔG < 0 and hence decomposition of O3 is spontaneous.
  • Ozone is diamagnetic in nature.

Question 118.
Ozone acts as an oxidising agent and a reducing agent. Explain with examples.
Answer:
(A) Ozone as an oxidising agent : Since ozone decomposes to liberate nascent oxygen, it is a powerful oxidising agent next to fluorine.
O3(g) → O2(g) + O
For example :

  • It oxidises lead sulphide (PbS) to lead sulphate (PbSO4) changing the oxidation state of S from – 2 to +6.
    PbS(s) + 4O3(g) → PbSO(s) + 4O2(g)
  • Potassium iodide, KI is oxidised to iodine, I3 in the solution.
    2KI(aq) + H3O(1) + O3(g) → 2KOH(aq) + I2(s) + O2(g)
  • Ozone oxidises nitrogen oxide to nitrogen dioxide.
    NO(g) + O3(g) → NO2(g) + O2(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

(B) Ozone as a reducing agent : Ozone reduces peroxides (O1-) to oxides (O2-).

  • Ozone reduces barium peroxide, BaO2 to barium oxide, BaO.
    BaO2 + O3 → BaO + 2O2
  • Ozone reduces hydrogen peroxide, H2O2 to water, H2O.
    H2O2 + O3 → H2O + 2O2

Question 119.
What is meant by ozone depletion?
Answer:
The thinning of the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere is called ozone depletion. This thinning has been more pronounced in the polar regions, especially over the Antarctica.

Question 120.
How does ozone protect the people of the earth?
Answer:
Ozone layer in the upper atmosphere absorbs the harmful high energetic UV radiations of the Sun and protects the earth. The ultraviolet radiations damage plant and animal life on earth.

Question 121.
How do exhaust systems of cars and supersonic jet aeroplanes deplete the concentration of ozone layer?
Answer:
The exhaust gases from cars and supersonic jet aeroplanes contain nitric oxide (NO), which combines with ozone in the atmosphere forming oxygen.
NO + O3 → NO2 + O2
Hence the concentration of ozone is depleted in the upper layer of the atmosphere.

Question 122.
How do the coolents in refrigerants deplete the concentration of ozone?
Answer:

  • The coolents used in refrigerants are generally chlorofluorocarbons, CFCs also known as Freon, for example CF2Cl2.
  • CFCs have very long lifetime about 20 to 100 years.
  • CF2Cl2 undergoes photochemical decomposition giving free radicals which react and destroy ozone.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 53

Thus Cl- propagates the destruction of ozone in the atmosphere.

Question 123.
What is the action of ozone on unsaturated hydrocarbons? Give reaction.
Answer:
Ozone with unsaturated hydrocarbons form ozonides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 54

Question 124.
Ozone depletion is a major environmental problem. Explain.
Answer:

  • The depletion of ozone layer increases the amount of ultraviolet radiation reaching the Earth.
  • This has caused an increase in the rate of skin cancer, eye cataracts and damage to the genetic as well as immune system.
  • Thus, ozone depletion has become a major environ-mental problem.

Question 125.
What are the uses of ozone?
Answer:
Uses of Ozone :

  • Ozone sterilises drinking water by oxidising germs and bacteria present in it.
  • It is used as a bleaching agent for ivory, oils, starch, wax and delicate fabrics like silk.
  • Ozone is used to purify the air in crowded places like Clnema halls, railways, tunnels, etc.
  • In industry, ozone is used in the manufacture of synthetic camphor, potassium permanganate, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 126.
How is sulphur dioxide prepared?
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide, SO2 is prepared by following methods :
(1) From sulphur : When sulphur is burnt in air or oxygen, SO2 is formed along with SO3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 57

(2) Laboratory method (From sulphite) :

  • Sodium sulphite on treating with dilute H2SO4 forms SO2.
    Na2SO3 + H2SO4(aq) → Na2SO4 + H2O(1) + SO2(g)
  • Sodium sulphite, Na2SO3 on reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid solution forms SO2.
    Na2SO3(aq) + 2HCl(aq) → 2NaCl9aq0 + H2O(1) + SO2(g)

(3) Industrial method (From sulphides): It is obtained as a by-product in the roasting of ores of pyrites and blendes.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 58

The gas is dried and liquefied under pressure and stored.

Question 127.
What happens when an excess of SO2 is passed through sodium hydroxide solution?
Answer:
When SO2 gas is passed through sodium hydroxide solution (NaOH), it forms sodium sulphite, Na2SO3 which further with excess of SO2 forms sodium hydrogen sulphite, NaHSO3.
2NaOH + SO2 → Na2SO3 + H2O
Na2SO3 + H2O + SO2 → 2NaHSO3

Question 128.
Give reactions to show that SO2 gas acts as a reducing agent.
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide (SO2) acts as a reducing agent in the presence of moisture.

  • Sulphur dioxide, SO2 reduces halogens (X°) to haloacids (X1-).
    I2 + 2H2O + SO2 → 2HI + H2SO4
  • SO2 gas when passed through an acidified solution of KMnO4 it is decolourised due to reduction (Mn7+ to Mn2+).
    2KMnO4 + 2H2O + 5SO2 → K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 2H2SO4
  • Sulphur dioxide (SO2) reduces Fe3+ to Fe2+
    2FeCl3 + SO2 + 2H2O → 2FeCl2 + H2SO4 + 2HCl

Question 129.
Complete the following reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 61
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 62

Question 130.
What are the uses of sulphur dioxide?
Answer:
The uses of sulphur dioxide are as follows :

  • SO2 is used in the manufacture of H2SO4.
  • In refining petroleum and also in sugar industry.
  • In the manufacture of NaHSO3.
  • As an antichlor, as a disinfectant and preservative.
  • Liquid SO2 is used as a selective solvent to dissolve many inorganic and organic compounds.
  • Sulphur dioxide is used for bleaching wool and silk. As a bleaching agent in moist condition due to reduction reaction (SO2 + 2HaO → H2SO4 + 2[H]) colouring matter + [H] → colourless matter.
  • On exposing the bleached matter, the colour is restored due to oxidation. Colourless matter + [O] → coloured matter. Hence the bleaching action is temporary.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 131.
Explain, the nature of S-O bond in SO2.
Answer:

  • In SO2, sulphur atom is sp2 hybridised forming three hybrid orbitals.
  • In SO2, each oxygen atom is bonded to sulphur by a σ and a π bond. Hence in SO2 there are two σ and two π bonds.
  • a bonds are formed by sp2-p overlap while one of n bonds is due to pπ-pπ overlaps and other is due to pπ-pπ overlap.
  • But both S-O bonds are identical due to resonance and has bond length 143 pm.

Question 132.
What are the physical properties of H2SO4?
Answer:

  • It is a colourless, dense, oily liquid having speClfic gravity 1.84 at 298 K.
  • It has freezing point 283 K and boiling point 611 K.
  • It is a strong dehydrating agent and dissolves in water with the evolution of a large amount of heat.
  • It is a strong dibasic acid and acts as an oxidising agent.
  • Due to hydrogen bonding, it is viscous.
  • It is highly corrosive and produces severe bums on skin.

Question 133.
How is a solution of H2SO4 prepared from concentrated sulphuric acid solution?
Answer:

  • Concentrated H2SO4 dissolves in water with the evolution of a large amount of heat.
  • Generally a dilute solution is prepared by adding water to the concentrated solution.
  • In case of concentrated H2SO4, since its specific gravity is higher, the added water remains on the surface of it and due to evolution of heat, a glass vessel cracks at the interface.
  • Hence concentrated H2SO4 must be added slowly into fine stream of water with constant stirring to obtain a dilute H2SO4 solution.

Question 134.
Give two chemical reactions to explain oxidizing property of concentrated H2SO4.

Question 135.
Why is sulphuric acid a strong acid?
Answer:
Sulphuric acid ionises in an aqueous solution in two steps as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 69
The larger value of Ka (Ka >10) shows more dissociation of the acid into H3O+ and H2SO4. Thus H2SO4 is a strong acid.

Question 136.
What is the action of hot and concentrated sulphuric acid on the following :
(i) Carbon
(ii) Sulphur
(iii) Phosphorus
(iv) Zn
(v) Cu
(vi) Haloacid (HX)?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 71
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 72

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 137.
Write the reactions of the following with concentrated H2SO4 :
(i) NaCl
(ii) KNO3
(iii) CaF2.
Answer:
(i) NaCl + H2SO4conc. → NaHSO4 + HCl
(ii) 2KNO3 + H2SO4conc. → K2SO4 + 2HNO3
(iii) CaF2 + H2SO4conc. → CaSO4 + 2HF.

Question 138.
What is the action of hot and concentrated H2SO4 on
(i) FeSO4 and
(ii) HI?
Answer:

  • FeSO4 is oxidised to Fe2(SO4)3 by hot and concentrated H2SO4.
    \(2 \mathrm{FeSO}_{4}+2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Fe}_{2}\left(\mathrm{SO}_{4}\right)_{3}+\mathrm{SO}_{2}+2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\)
  • HI is oxidised to I2 by hot and concentrated H2S04.
    2HI + H2SO4 → 2H2O + SO2 + I2

Question 139.
Complete the following reactions :
(i) Fe + dil. H2SO4
(ii) Benzene + H2SO2(conc.)
(iii) PCl5 + H2SO4
(iv) K4[Fe(CN)6]
(v) KClO3
(vi) Fluorspar, CaF2 + dil. H2SO4.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 73

Question 140.
In the dissociation of H2SO4 in water, why is the second dissociation constant smaller than the first?
Answer:

  • H2SO4 is a dibasic acid. In aqueous, solution it dissociates in two steps as follows :
    H2SO4(aq) ⇌ H+(aq) + HSO4(aq) Ka1 > 10
    HSO; (aq) ⇌ H+(aq) + SO2-4(aq) Ka2 = 1.2 x 10-2
  • Neutral H2SO4 molecule has more tendency to lose proton (H+) than anionic Lowry-Bronsted base \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-} \text {. }\)
  • Therefore second dissociation constant Ka2 is smaller than first dissociation constant Ka1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 141.
Mention the conditions to maximize the yield of H2SO4 by contact process.
Answer:

  • In the contact process of the manufacture of sulphuric acid, SO2 is oxidised to SO3 by heating the mixture on the heterogeneous catalyst V2O5.
    2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2SO3(g) ΔH= – 196.6 kJ
  • The forward reaction is exothermic and there is a decrease in number of moles and volume.
  • The optimum conditions to maximise the yield of H2SO4 are pressure of 2 bar and temperature around 720 K.

Question 142.
What are the uses of H2SO4?
Answer:
H2SO4 has following uses :

  • In the preparation of HNO3, HCl, H2PO4, Na2CO3 sulphates, alums, alcohols, ethers, etc.
  • In the manufacture of dyes, fertilizers like ammonium sulphate, super phosphate, detergents.
  • As an electrolyte in lead storage battery.
  • As a dehydrating agent.
  • As an oxidising agent.
  • For refining petroleum.
  • As a pickling agent for removing layers of basic oxides from the metal surfaces like Fe, Cu, etc. before the metals are galvanized, electroplated, etc.
  • It is used as a laboratory reagent.
  • It is used in the manufacture of nitrocellulose products.

Question 143.
What happens when,
(i) SO3 gas is passed through water
(ii) Concentrated sulphuric acid is added to sugar?
Answer:
(i) SO3 dissolves in water and forms sulphuric acid, H2SO4.
SO3(g) + H2O(1) → H2SO4(aq)
(ii) Concentrated sulphuric acid when added to sugar, it is dehydrated giving carbon.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 74

Question 144.
How is chlorine obtained from HCl?
Answer:
Chlorine is obtained by the oxidation of hydrochloric acid by various oxidising agents:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 75
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 76

Question 155.
How is chlorine obtained from rock salt or NaCl?
Answer:
Rock salt or NaCl in the presence of MnO2 and concentrated H2SO4 forms chlorine.

The reaction takes place in two steps.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 77

Question 156.
How is chlorine manufactured by Deacon’s process?
Answer:
In Deacon’s process, chlorine is manufactured by oxidising hydrogen chloride gas by atmospheric oxygen in the presence of CuCl2 as a catalyst at 723 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 78

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 147.
How is chlorine manufactured by the electrolytic process?
Answer:

  • On a large scale chlorine is obtained by an electrolytic process.
  • The electrolyte is brine, a concentrated solution of NaCl.
  • Nelson’s two compartments diaphragm cell is used for electrolysis in which stout graphite rod is used as an anode while U shaped steel vessel is used as a cathode.
  • Reactions :
    NaCl → Na+ + Cl
    H2O ⇌ H++ OHAt cathode :
    2H2O + 2e → H2 + 20H
    Na+ +OH → NaOHAt anode :
    2Cl → 2Cl + 2e
    2Cl → Cl2(g)

Question 148.
What are the physical properties of chlorine?
Answer:
The physical properties of chlorine are as follows :

  • It is greenish-yellow gas with a suffocating and pungent smell and is heavier than air.
  • It is a poisonous gas.
  • When liquefied, chlorine forms a greenish-yellow liquid which has boiling point 239 K.
  • Chlorine is soluble in water and the solution is called chlorine water.

Question 149.
What is the action of chlorine on the following :
(i) Na
(ii) K
(iii) Ca
(iv) Fe
(v) A1
(vi) Cu?
Answer:
(i) 2Na + Cl2 → 2NaCl
(ii) 2K + Cl2 → 2KCl
(iii) Ca + Cl2 → CaCl2
(iv) 2Fe + 3Cl2 \(\stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow}\) 2FeCl3
(v) 2A1 + 3Cl2 \(\stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow}\) 2A1Cl3
(vi) Cu + Cl2 → CuCl2

Question 150.
What is the action of Cl2 on the following :
(i) P4
(ii) As
(iii) Sb
(iv) B
(v) S.
Answer:
(i) P4 + 6Cl2 → 4PCl3 and P4 + 10Cl2 → 4PCl5
(ii) 2As + 3Cl2 → 2AsCl3
(iii) 2Sb + 3Cl2 → 2SbCl3
(iv) 2B + 3Cl2 → 2BCl3
(v) S8 + 4Cl2 → 4S2Cl2
Sulphur monochloride

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 151.
What is the action of chlorine on
(i) hydrogen
(ii) hydrogen sulphide?
OR
Give two reactions to show the affinity of hydrogen towards chlorine.
Answer:
(i) Since chlorine has high affinity for hydrogen, it forms hydrogen chloride in the presence of sunlight.
\(\mathrm{H}_{2}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2} \stackrel{h v}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{HCl}\)
(ii) Chlorine reacts with hydrogen sulphide to form hydrogen chloride and sulphur.
H2S + Cl2 → 2HCl + S

Question 152.
What is the reaction of chlorine with ammonia?
Answer:

  • Chlorine reacts with the excess of ammonia to form ammonium chloride, NH4Cl and nitrogen.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 80
  • When chlorine is in excess, then with ammonia it forms explosive nitrogen trichloride, NCl3.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 81

Question 153.
Explain the reactions of chlorine with alkalies.
Answer:

  • Chlorine with cold and dilute caustic soda, NaOH forms sodium chloride and sodium hypochlorite, NaOCl.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 82
  • Chlorine with hot and concentrated NaOH forms sodium chloride and sodium chlorate, NaClO3.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 83
  • When chlorine is passed over dry slaked lime Ca(OH)2, bleaching powder, CaOCl2 is obtained.
    Ca(OH)2 + Cl2 → CaOCl2 +H2O

Question 154.
What is the action of chlorine on
(i) methane and
(ii) ethylene?
Answer:
(i) With methane, chlorine forms substituted products.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 84
(ii) With unsaturated hydrocarbons, chlorine forms addition products.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 85

Question 155.
Explain oxidising nature of chlorine with chemical reactions.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 86

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 156.
Explain the bleaching action of chlorine.
Answer:
(i) Chlorine acts as a powerful bleaching agent due to its oxidising nature.
(ii) In moist conditions or in the presence of water it forms unstable hypochlorous acid, HOCl which decomposes giving nascent oxygen which oxidises the vegetable colouring matter of green leaves, flowers, litmus, indigo, etc.
Cl2 + H2O → HCl + HOCl
HOCl → HCl + [O]
Vegetable coloured matter + [O] → colourless matter.

Question 157.
Explain disinfecting action of chlorine.
OR
Chlorine is used for the sterilization of water. Explain.
Answer:
(i) Since chlorine has an ability of killing harmful micro-organisms, it acts as a good disinfecting agent.
(ii) This ability is due to the oxidising nature of chlorine which produces nascent oxygen in aqueous solutions.
H2O + Cl2 → HCl + HOCl
HOCl → HCl + [O]

Question 158.
What is the action of Cl2 on
(a) Cold and dil. NaOH
(b) Hot and cone. NaOH
(c) P4 molecule
(d) Iron (II)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 87

Question 159.
Write the formulae of tear gas, phosgene and mustard gas.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 112

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 160.
Who prepared hydrochloric acid first?
Answer:
Glauber in 1648, first prepared hydrochloric acid by heating common salt NaCl with concentrated H2SO4.
\(2 \mathrm{NaCl}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4}(\text { conc. }) \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Na}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4}+2 \mathrm{HCl}\)

Question 161.
What are the physical properties of hydrogen chloride gas?
Answer:

  • Hydrogen chloride is a colourless gas with a pungent odour.
  • It is heavier than air.
  • Hydrogen chloride on liquefication forms a colourless liquid having boiling point 189 K and on freezing it forms white solid crystals having melting point 159 K.
  • Hydrogen chloride is highly soluble in water.

Question 162.
What is hydrochloric acid?
Answer:
An aqueous solution of hydrogen chloride is called hydrochloric acid.

It is acidic in nature. It is a strong acid and dissociates almost completely.
HCl(aq) + H2O → H3O+(aq) + Cl(aq) Ka = 107

Question 163.
What is aquaria? What is the action of aquaria on (i) Au and (ii) Pt?
Answer:
A mixture of three parts of concentrated HCl solution and one part of concentrated HNO3 solution is known as aquaria.

Aquaregia dissolves almost all substances including noble metals like gold, platinum.

This high solubility is due to the formation of nascent chlorine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 89

Question 164.
Write the reactions of hydrochloric acid with the following :
(a) NaHSO3
(b) NaHCO3
(c) CaO
(d) Mg(OH)2
(e) NaOH.
Answer:
(a) NaHSO3 + HCl → NaCl + H2O + SO2
(b) NaHCO3 + HCl → NaCl + H2O + CO2
(c) CaO + 2HCl → CaCl2 + H2O
(d) Mg(OH)2 + 2HCl → MgCl2 + 2H2O
(e) NaOH + HCl → NaCl + H2O

Question 165.
What are the uses of hydrogen chloride (hydrochloric acid)?
Answer:
Hydrogen chloride (OR hydrochloric acid) is used :

  • in the manufacture of chlorine and ammonium chloride,
  • to manufacture glucose from com, starch
  • to manufacture dye
  • in mediClne and galvanising
  • as an important reagent in the laboratory
  • to extract glue from bones and for the purification of bone black.
  • for dissolving metals, Fe + 2HCl(aq) → FeCl2 + H2(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 166.
What are the general compositions of interhalogen compounds?
Answer:
(i) The general compositions of interhalogen compounds are XX’, XX’3, XX’5 and XX’7 where halogen X is more electropositive and has larger size than another halogen X’. For example,

XX’XX’3XX’5XX’7
CIF
BrF
BrCl
ICl
C1F3
BrF3
If3
IC13
(unstable)
C1F5
BrF5
If5
IF7

(ii) As the ratio of radii of X and X’ increases, the number of atoms of X’ per molecule of interhalogen compound increases. For example, iodine having the largest size with fluorine of the smallest size forms stable IF7.

Question 167.
Which are the different types of interhalogen compounds?
Answer:
(i) The general compositions of interhalogen compounds are XX’, XX’3, XX’5 and XX’7 where halogen X is more electropositive and has larger size than another halogen X’. For example,

XX’XX’3XX’5XX’7
CIF
BrF
BrCl
ICl
C1F3
BrF3
If3
IC13
(unstable)
C1F5
BrF5
If5
IF7

(ii) As the ratio of radii of X and X’ increases, the number of atoms of X’ per molecule of interhalogen compound increases. For example, iodine having the largest size with fluorine of the smallest size forms stable IF7.

Question 168.
What are general characteristics of interhalogen compounds?
Answer:
The general characteristics of interhalogen compounds are as follows :

  • In XX’n, X is the halogen which has larger size and is more electropositive, while X’ is the halogen having smaller size and is less electropositive, n is the number of atoms of X’ attached to X.
  • Interhalogen compounds are named as halogen halides. The more electropositive halogen is named as such and the less electropositive halogen is named as the halide. In ClF, since Cl is larger and more electropositive than F, the interhalogen compound is named as Chlorine monofluoride,
  • As the ratio of radii (radius of X : radius of X’ ) between the atoms X and X’ increases, the number of halogen atoms (n) per interhalogen compound also increases.
  • The interhalogen compounds have even number of atoms i.e. 2,4,6,8. For example, ClF3 has 4 atoms and BrF5 has 6 atoms.
  • The number of X’ atoms in the interhalogen compounds are always odd.
  • The properties of interhalogen compounds are generally intermediate between those of the halogens from which they are made.
  • The oxidation state of the atom X in XX’n, is equal to +1, +3, +5, +7 and that of X’ is -1.
  • Since the electronegativity difference between two different halogens is low, the interhalogen compounds are covalent in nature.
  • Interhalogen compounds exist as gases, liquids and solids depending upon their composition. They are volatile and less stable but not explosive.
  • They are diamagnetic in nature.
  • Since the interhalogen bond (X – X’) is weaker than parent halogens, they are more reactive than halogens.
    x- l so >oui bruin Timor! N

Question 169.
How are interhalogen compounds prepared?
Answer:
All interhalogen compounds are prepared by direct reaction of halogens or reaction of halogen on lower interhalogen compounds. The compound formed depends upon specific conditions of the reactions,

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

(a) By direct combination :

  • Chlorine monofluoride, ClF : It is a colourless gas obtained by reacting equal volumes of Cl2 and F2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 90
  • Chlorine trifluoride, ClF3 : It is a colourless gas, obtained by reacting Cl2 with excess of F2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 91
  • Bromine trifluoride, BrF3 : It is a yellow green liquid obtained by reacting Br2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 92
  • Iodine trichloride, ICl3 : It is an orange solid obtained by reacting I2 with excess of Cl. This orange solid dimerises to form I2Cl6 having Cl-bridges.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 93
  • Iodine chloride, ICl : It is obtained by reaction between equimolar amounts of I2 and Cl2. a- form of it is a ruby red solid while 1-form is a brown-red solid.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 94
  • Bromine pentafluoride, BrF5 : It is a colourless liquid and obtained by the reaction of bromine with the excess of fluorine.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 95
  • Bromine chloride BrCl : It is a gas, obtained by the reaction of bromine with chlorine taken in equal volumes.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 96

(b) By the reaction of halogen with interhalogen compound :

  • Bromine fluoride (BrF) : It is a pale brown coloured gas prepared by the action of Br2 on BrF3. Br2 + BrF3 → 3BrF
  • Bromine trifluoride ( BrF3) : BrF3 can also be prepared by the action of Br2 on ClF’3.
    Br2 + ClF3 → 2BrF3 + BrCl

(c) SpeClal reaction for the preparation of ICl :

  • ICl( Wij’s solution) can be prepared by the action of Iodinef (I2) on potassium chlorate (KClO3)
    I2 + KClO3 → ICl + KlO3

Question 170.
Give the physical states of the following molecules :
BrCl, IBr, IF5, BrF5, ClF3, IF7
Answer:

MoleculesPhysical states
BrClGas
IBrBlack solid
If5Colourless gas
BrF5Colourless liquid
ClF3Colourless gas
IF7Colourless gas

Question 171.
Discuss the hydrolysis reactions given by interhalogen compounds.
Answer:
Interhalogen compounds undergo hydrolysis and form haloacids of lower halogen and oxyacid of higher halogen in interhalogen compounds.

BrCl + H2O → HOBr + HCl
5ICl + 3H2O → HIO3 + 5HCl + 2I2
2ICI3 + 3H2O → HIO3 + 5HCl + ICl

Question 172.
Give the addition reaction given by interhalogen compounds.
Answer:
Interhalogen compounds give addition reactions with unsaturated hydrocarbons.
CH2 = CH2 + XX’ → CH2X – CH2X’
CH2 = CH2 + ICl → CH2I – CH2Cl

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 173.
Arrange the given compounds in the order of their thermal stability. ClF, IBr, BrCl, ICl.
Answer:
The thermal stability of interhalogen compounds depends upon the electronegativity of the combining atoms.

ElementsFClBrI
Electronegativity4.03.23.02.7

More the difference between the electronegativity the combining atoms, more is the thermal stability. Hence the order of thermal stability is ClF > ICl > IBr > BrCl

Question 174.
Give one fluorinating reaction given by inter-halogen compounds.
Answer:
Interhalogen compounds like ClF3, BrF3, etc. are very reactive and they are strong fluorinating agents.
U(S) + 3ClF3(1) → UF6(g) + 3ClF(g)

Question 175.
What are the uses of interhalogen compounds?
Answer:
The uses of interhalogen compounds are as follows :

  • ICl is used as a halogenating agent and also in the estimation of iodine number of fats and oils.
  • In the preparation of polyhalides, interhalogen compounds are used.
  • ClF3 and BrF3 are widely used as fluorinating agent. They are used in the separation of 235U isotope by fluorinating.
    235U(S) + 3ClF3(l)235UF6(g) + 3ClF(g)
  • In propellants ClF3 and IF3 are used as oxidisers.
  • They are used as non-aqueous solvents.
  • The XX’ interhalogen compounds are used as a catalyst for the oxidation of As(III)

Question 176.
Give the disproportionation reactions given by the following :
(i) BrF
(ii) ClF3
(iii) ICl3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 100

Question 177.
Give hybridisation and geometry of the following molecules :
(1) C1F3
(2) IF5
(3) IF7.
Answer:

MoleculeHybridisationGeometry
(1) C1F3sp3dTrigonal bipyramidal or T-shaped
(2) IF5sp3d2Square pyramidal
(3) IF7sp3d3Pentagonal bipyramidal

Question 178.
Draw structure of :
(a) Chlorine trifluoride
(b) Chlorine pentafluoride
(c) Bromine trifluoride
(d) Iodine dichloride
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 101

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 179.
Complete the given table :

The oxidation state of the central atomNumber of lone pairs of electronsExamples
+ 7………………………………..IF7
………………………………..1IF5
………………………………..2I2Cl6
+ 1………………………………..IBr

Answer:

The oxidation state of the central atomNumber of lone pairs of electronsExamples
+ 70IF7
+ 51IF5
+ 32I2Cl6
+ 13IBr

Question 180.
Explain IC1 is more reactive than I2.
Answer:

  • in interhalogen compound ICl and I2 the atoms are bonded by covalent bonds.
  • The covalent bond between dissimilar atoms, I and Cl atoms in ICl is weaker than between similar atoms in I2.
  • Therefore bond dissociation enthalpy of ICl bond is less than that of I2 bond.
    Hence ICl is more reactive than I2.

Question 181.
What is the action of
(i) H2O and
(ii) PF5 on XeF2?
Answer:
(i) Action of H2O ( Hydrolysis) :
XeF2 undergoes hydrolysis to form HF.
2XeF2 + 2H2O → 4HF + 2Xe + O2

(ii) Reaction with PF5 :
XeF2 forms adducts on reaction with PF5.
XeF2 + PF5 → XeF2.PF5

Question 182.
Give the method of preparation of XeF4 and its structure.
Answer:
For the preparation of XeF4 :
The covalent bond between dissimilar atoms, I and Cl atoms in ICl is weaker than between similar atoms in I2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18 107

Question 183.
Complete the following :
(1) XeF4 + H2O → ……………… + HF
Answer:
XeF4 + H2O → XeOF2 + 2HF

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

Question 184.
What are the uses of :
(1) Helium
(2) Neon
(3) Argon.
Answer:
(1) Uses of helium (He) :

  • A mixture of helium (85%) and oxygen (15%) is used for filling balloons.
  • A mixture of helium and oxygen is also used for respiration by sea divers instead of air because helium is less soluble in blood than nitrogen under high pressure. It is also used for treatment of asthma.
  • Helium is used in produClng inert atmosphere in metallurgical operations and welding of metals.
  • Liquid helium is used in produClng low temperature required for research.
  • Helium is also used in produClng lasers in low temperature gas thermometry.
  • It is used in magnetic resonance imaging.
  • It is used as a shielding gas for arc welding, (viii) It is used in supersonic wind tunnels.
  • Helium nucleus is used as a bombarding particle for disintegration of atoms.

(2) Uses of neon (Ne) :

  • Neon is used in the production of neon discharge lamps and signs by filling Ne in glass discharge tubes.
  • Neon signs are visible from a long distance and also have high penetrating power in mist or fog.
  • A mixture of neon and helium is used in voltage stabilizers and current rectifiers.
  • Neon is also used in the production of lasers and fluorescent tubes.

(3) Uses of argon (Ar) :

  • Argon is used to fill fluorescent tubes and radio valves.
  • It is used to provide inert atmosphere for welding and production of steel.
  • It is used along with neon in neon sign lamps to obtain different colours.
  • A mixture of 85% Ar and 15% N2 is used in electric bulbs to enhance the life of the filament.

Question 185.
Helium and neon do not form compounds with fluorine. Why?
Answer:
Helium and Neon do not contain d-orbitals in their respective valence shells and hence their electrons cannot be promoted to higher energy levels like other elements in group 18. Therefore, helium and neon do not form compounds with fluorine.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 223.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub¬question :

1. Oxygen molecule shows :
(a) Paramagnetism
(b) Diamagnetism
(c) Ferromagnetism
(d) ferrimagnetism
Answer:
(a) paramagnetism

2. Among group 16 elements, the radioactive element is
(a) Ra
(b) Rn
(c) Bi
(d) Po
Answer:
(d) Po

3. Hybridization involved in H2O is
(a) sp
(b) sp3
(c) sp3d2
(d) sp2
Answer:
(b) sp3

4. The structure of SF4 is
(a) Octahedral
(b) Bipyramidal
(c) Square planar
(d) Tetrahedral
Answer:
(b) Bipyramidal

5. Which one has the highest bond energy?
(a) 0-0
(b) S-S
(c) Se-Se
(d) Te-Te
Answer:
(b) S – S

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

6. Which of the following compounds contains S = O as well as S = S bonds?
(a) Sulphuric acid
(b) Thiosulphuric acid
(c) Sulphurous acid
(d) Thiosulphurous acid
Answer:
(b) Thiosulphuric acid

7. Ozone is :
(a) A compound of oxygen
(b) An allotropic oxygen
(c) An isotope of oxygen
(d) An isobar of oxygen
Answer:
(b) An allotropic oxyen

8. Which one has lowest boiling point?
(a) H2O
(b) H2S
(C) H2Se
(d) H2Te
Answer:
(b) H2S

9. Maximum covalency of sulphur is :
(a) Four
(b) Six
(c) Three
(d) Two
Answer:
(b) Six

10. Oxygen exhibits-1 oxidation state in :
(a) OF2
(b) H2O2
(c) HClO
(d) H2O
Answer:
(b) H2O2

11. The oxidation state of oxygen in OF2 is
(a) -1
(b) -2
(c) +1
(d) +2
Answer:
(d) +2

12. In the hydrides of group 16 elements, the minimum bond angle is in
(a) H2O
(b) H2S
(C) H2Se
(d) H2Te
Answer:
(d) H2Te

13. In SF6, sulphur atom undergoes hybridisation
(a) sp3
(b) sp3d
(c) sp3d2
(d) sp3d3
Answer:
(c) sp3d2

14. Al2O3 is
(a) acidic oxide
(b) basic oxide
(c) amphoteric oxide
(d) neutral oxide
Answer:
(c) amphoteric oxide

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

15. Which of the following is a basic oxide?
(a) SiO2
(b) P4O10
(c) MgO
(d) Al2O3
Answer:
(c) MgO

16. The most stable allotropic form of sulphur is :
(a) Rhombic sulphur
(b) Flowers of sulphur
(c) Platic sulphur
(d) Mono clinic sulphur
Answer:
(a) Rhombic sulphur

17. The atomicity of sulphur in orthorhombic sulphur is –
(a) 8
(b) 6
(c) 4
(d) 2
Answer:
(a) 8

18. The oxidation state of sulphur in peroxy disul- phuric acid is
(a) +2
(b) +3
(c) +4
(d) +6
Answer:
(d) +6

19. In the contact process, the catalyst used is
(a) TiO2
(b) Pt
(c) V2O5
(d) Fe2O3
Answer:
(c) V2O5

20. What is the molecular formula of the oleum?
(a) H2SO3
(b) H2SO4
(c) H2S2O7
(d) H2S2O8
Answer:
(c) H2S2O7

21. The electronic configuration of bromine is
(a) [Ne] 3s23p5
(b) [Kr] 4d105s25ps
(c) [Ar] 3d104s24p5
(d) [Ar]4d105s25p5
Answer:
(c) [Ar] 3d104s24p5

22. The decreasing order for negative values for electron gain enthalpies is
(a) F > Cl > Br
(b) Cl > F > Br
(c) Br > Cl > F
(d) F > Br > Cl
Answer:
(b) Cl > F > Br

23. The molecular formula H2S2O2 represents which oxoacid among the following?
(a) Hydrosulphurous acid
(b) Thiosulphurous acid
(c) Sulphuric acid
(d) Pyrosulphurous acid
Answer:
(b) Thiosulphurous acid

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

24. General electronic configuration of group 16 elements is
(a) ns2np3
(b) ns2np4
(c) ns2np2
(d) ns2np5
Answer:
(b) ns2np4

25. The decreasing order of electronegativity is
(a) Cl > I > Br
(b) Br > I > F
(c) F > Br > I
(d) Cl > F > Br
Answer:
(c) F > Br > I

26. The increasing order of acidic strength of haloacids is
(a) HF > HCl > HBr > HI
(b) HCl > HF > HBr > HI
(c) HCl < HF < HBr < HI
(d) HF < HCl < HBr < HI
Answer:
(d) HF < HCl < HBr < HI

27. Amongst haloacids, the strongest reducing agent is
(a) HCl
(b) HF
(c) HI
(d) HBr
nswer:
(c) HI

28. Haloacid with the maximum thermal stability is
(a) HI
(b) HCl
(c) HF
(d) HBr
Answer:
(c) HF

29. The bleaching action of chlorine is due to
(a) oxidation
(b) reduction
(c) neutralisation
(d) double decomposition
Answer:
(a) oxidation

30. The halogen which does not form polyhalide ion is
(a) F
(b) Br
(c) I
(d) Cl
Answer:
(a) F

31. Camalite is a natural source of
(a) F
(b) Cl
(c) Br
(d) I
Answer:
(b) Cl

32. In Deacon’s process the catalyst used is
(a) V2O5
(b) CuCl2
(c) PtCl4
(d) FeCl3
Answer:
(b) CuCl2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

33. Chlorine on reaction with carbon disulphide forms
(a) CCl4
(b) SO2Cl2
(c) S2Cl2
(d) CSCl2
Answer:
(c) S2Cl2

34. When chlorine is passed over dry slaked lime the product obtained is
(a) CaCl2
(b) HCl
(c) CaOCl2
(d) HOCl
Answer:
(c) CaOCl2

35. Hybridisation in ClF3 is
(a) sp3
(b) sp3d
(c) dsp3
(d) sp3d2
Answer:
(b) sp3d

36. The geometry of ClF3 is
(a) tetrahedral
(b) trigonal bipyramidal
(c) square planar
(d) triangular
Answer:
(b) trigonal bipyramidal

37. The structure of interhalogen compound XX’5 is
(a) square pyramidal
(b) trigonal bipyramidal
(c) tetrahedral
(d) pentagonal bipyramidal
Answer:
(a) square pyramidal

38. Interhalogen compound used as a fluorinating agent is
(a) IF7
(b) BrF5
(c) IF5
(d) ClF3
Answer:
(d) ClF3

39. The increasing order of thermal stability of oxoacids of halogens is
(a) HClO2 < HCIO3 < HClO4
(b) HClO4 < HCIO3 < HClO2
(c) HClO4 < HClO2 < HCIO3
(d) HCIO3 < HClO2 < HClO4
Answer:
(a) HClO2 < HCIO3 < HClO4

40. The shape of IF7 molecules is :
(a) Tetrahedral
(b) Octahedral
(c) Trigonal bipyramidal
(d) Pentagonal bipyramidal
Answer:
(d) Pentagonal bipyramidal

41. The strongest oxidizing agent is :
(a) HOCl
(b) HClO4
(c) HClO3
(d) HClO2
Answer:
(b) HClO4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

42. Iodine can exist in the oxidation states
(a) +1, +3, +5
(b) -1, +1, +3
(c) +3, +5, +7
(d) -1, +1, +3, +5, +7
Answer:
(d) -1, +1, +3, +5, +7

43. Fluorine does not show positive oxidation state due to absence of:
(a) d-orbitals
(b) s-orbitals
(c) p-orbitals
(d) f-orbitals
Answer:
(a) d-orbitals

44. The most powerful oxidising agent is :
(a) Fluorine
(b) Chlorine
(c) Iodine
(d) Bromine
Answer:
(a) Fluorine

45. Which one is the strongest reducing agent?
(a) HF
(b) HCl
(c) HBr
(d) HI
Answer:
(d) HI

46. Fluorine can exist in the oxidation state :
(a) – 1 only
(b) – 1 and + 1
(c) 1-, +1, +3 only
(d) -1, +l,. + 3, +7
Answer:
(a) – 1 only

47. Which of the following halogen is radioactive in nature?
(a) Chlorine
(b) Bromine
(c) Iodine
(d) Astatine
Answer:
(d) Astatine

48. The electronic configuration of krypton is
(a) [Ar] 3d10 As2 Ap6
(b) [Ne] 3s2 3p6
(c) [Ai] 4d10 5s2 5p6
(d) [Xe] 6s2 6p6
Answer:
(a) [Ar] 3d10 As2 Ap6

49. Which one of the following does not exist?
(a) HeF4
(b) XeF4
(c) CF4
(d) SF6
Answer:
(a) HeF4

50. Name the noble gas not present in the air.
(a) Radon
(b) Argon
(c) Krypton
(d) Helium
Answer:
(a) Radon

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

51. Which is the most abundant noble gas?
(a) Argon
(b) Helium
(c) Neon
(d) Krypton
Answer:
(a) Argon

52. A mixture used for respiration by the sea divers is OR Which mixture is used for respiration by deep sea divers?
(a) He + O2
(b) Ne + O2
(c) Ar + O2
(d) Kr + O2
Answer:
(a) He + O2

53. Iodine exists as-
(a) polar molecular solid
(b) ionic solid
(c) nonpolar molecular solid
(d) hydrogen-bonded molecular solid
Answer:
(c) nonpolar molecular solid

54. Hybridisation in H2S is
(a) sp
(b) sp3
(c) sp3d2
(d) sp2
Answer:
(b) sp3

55. Noble gas which finds the use as a cryogenic agent is
(a) He
(b) Ne
(c) Ar
(d) Kr
Answer:
(a) He

56 Which of the following compounds of chlorine is used as refrigerant?
(a) CCl3NO2
(b) CCl2F2
(c) COCl2
(d) CCl4
Answer:
(b) CCl2F2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

57. The increasing order of oxidising power of oxyacids of chlorine is
(a) HClO2 > HClO3 > HClO4
(b) HOCl > HCl02 > HClO4
(c) HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4
(d) HClO4 < HOCl < HCO2
Answer:
(c) HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4

58. S-O-O-S bonds are present in
(a) H2S2O6
(b) H2SO5
(c) H2S2O5
(d) H2S2O8
Answer:
(d) H2S2O8

59. The increasing order of thermal stability of hydrides of sixteenth group elements is
(a) H2O < H2S < H2Se < H2Te
(b) H2S < H2O < H2Se < H2Te
(c) H2Te < H2S < H2Se < H2O
(d) H2Te < H2Se < H2S < H2O
Answer:
(d) H2Te < H2Se < H2S < H2O

60. The bond angle F-Cl-F in ClF3 is
(a) 89°
(b) 109°29
(c) 95°
(d) 120°
Answer:
(a) 89°

61. The oxidation number of Xe in XeOF2 is :
(a) O
(b) +2
(c) +4
(d) +3
Answer:
(c) +4

62 XeF4 on partial hydrolysis produces
(a) XeF2
(b) XeOF2
(c) XeOF4
(d) XeO3
Answer:
(c) XeOF4

63. Shape of XeO4 is
(a) Octahedral
(b) Square pyramidal
(c) Pyramidal
(d) T-shaped
Answer:
(b) Square pyramidal

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Elements of Groups 16, 17 and 18

64. In XeF2, XeF4 and XeF6 the number of lone pairs on Xe is respectively
(a) 2, 3, 1
(b) 1, 2, 3
(c) 4, 1, 2
(d) 3, 2, 1
Answer:
(d) 3, 2, 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 1.
What is chemical kinetics?
Answer:
Chemical kinetics is a branch of physical chemistry that involves the study of the rates and mechanisms of chemical reactions and the influence of various factors like temperature, pressure, catalyst, etc., on the rates of reactions.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 2.
What is the importance of chemical kinetics?
Answer:

  • It deals with the study of the rates and mechanism of reactions.
  • The effect of temperature on the reaction rates can be studied.
  • The influence of catalysts can be studied.
  • The conditions for altering the rates and mechanisms of chemical reactions can be predicted.
  • Thermodynamic parameters like energy, enthalpy changes, Δ5, ΔG of the reactions can be calculated.

Question 3.
How are reactions classified according to their rates? Give one example of each.
Answer:
According to the rates of the reactions, they can be classified as :
(1) Fast reactions,
(2) Very slow reactions,
(3) Moderately slow reactions.

(1) Fitst actions : In this, reactants react almost instantaneously, e.g., neutralisation reaction between H+ and OH-, forming water.
\(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{xa})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \rightarrow \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{0 \mathrm{D}}\)

(2) Very slow reactions : In this, the reactants react extremely slow, so that there is no appreciable change in the concentrations of the reactants over a long period of time. E.g., reaction of silica with mineral acids, rusting of iron, etc.

(3) Moderately slow reactions : In this, the reactants react moderately slow with a measurable velocity, e.g., the hydrolysis of the esters.
\(\begin{aligned}
\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOC}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O} \stackrel{\mathrm{H}^{+}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH} \\
&+\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{OH}
\end{aligned}\)

Question 4.
Define rate of a reaction.
Answer:
Definition : The rate of a chemical reaction is defined as the change in the concentration of the reactants or products per unit time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 2
It is often expressed in mol dm-3s-1.

Question 5.
Explain the following :
(A) Rate of the reaction in terms of the concentration of the reactants.
(B) Rate of reaction in terms of the concentration of the products.
Answer:
(A) Rate of the reaction in terms of the concentration of the reactants :
If c1 and c2 are the concentrations of the reactant A at time t1 and t2 respectively, then, the change in concentration, Δc = c2 – c1
Since c2 < c1, the term Δc is negative often written as – Δc.
The time interval is, Δt – t2 – t1
If Δ [A] is the change in concentration of A, then A[A] = C2 – C1
∴ Rate of the reaction = \(\mathrm{A}=\frac{-\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta t}\)
∴ Rate of the reaction = \(\frac{-\Delta c}{\Delta t}\)

(B) Rate of the reaction in terms of the concentration of the products :
If x1 and x2 are the concentrations of the product B at time t1 and t2 respectively, then the change in concentration, Δx = x2 – x1.

∴ x2 > x1, the term Δx is positive.
The time interval is, Δt = t2 – t1

If Δ B is the change in concentration of product B, then Δ[B] = x2 – x1 = Δx
∴ Rate of formation of \(\mathrm{B}=+\frac{\Delta[\mathrm{B}]}{\Delta t}\)
∴ Rate of the reaction \(=\frac{\Delta x}{\Delta t}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 6.
What are the units of rate of a chemical reaction?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 3
∴ The unit of the rate of a chemical reaction : mol L-1 3t-1 or mol dm-3s-1 (According to IUPAC, the rate of a chemical reaction should be expressed in mol m-3s-1 [SI unit]).

Question 7.
Mention the factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
The rate of a chemical reaction depends on the following factors :

  • Nature of the reactants.
  • The concentration of the reactants. In case of a gaseous reaction the rate depends on the pressures of the reactants.
  • Temperature of the reaction.
  • The presence of a catalyst and its nature.

Question 8.
Explain the term Average rate of a reaction.
Answer:
In chemical kinetics the rate of a reaction is measured in terms of the changes in the concentrations of the reactants or the products per unit time. Average rate of a chemical reaction : It is expressed as a finite change in concentration (- Δc) of the reactant divided by the time interval (Δt) for the change in concentration.

Consider a reaction,
A → B
The rate of a reaction, \(R=\frac{-\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta t}=\frac{-\Delta c}{\Delta t}=\frac{c_{2}-c_{1}}{t_{2}-t_{1}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 4
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 5
∴ Average rate \(=\frac{-\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta t}\) (in mol dm-3s-1)

Δc is negative, since the concentrartion of the reactant decreases with the time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 6
The rate of a reaction is also measured in terms of a finite change in the concentration (Δx) of the product divided by the time interval (Δt), for the change.

For the reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 7

Question 9.
Explain the term Instantaneous rate of a reaction.
Answer:
Instantaneous rate of a reaction : It is defined as a rate of a reaction at a specific instant during a course of the reaction.

If the average reaction rate is calculated over shorter and shorter intervals (making Δt very small) then instantaneous rate is obtained.

In case of reactant A, the instantaneous rate is represented as, \(R=\frac{-d[\mathrm{~A}]}{d t}\) and in case of product B, it is represented as \(R=\frac{+d[B]}{d t}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 10.
Define :
(a) Average rate of reaction.
(b) Instantaneous rate of reaction.
Answer:
(a) Average rate of a chemical reaction : It is expressed as a finite change in concentration (- Δc) of the reactant divided by the time interval (Δt) for the change in concentration.

∴ Average rate, \(R=\frac{-\Delta c}{\Delta t}\)

(b) Instantaneous rate of reaction : It is defined as a rate of a reaction at a specific instant during a course of the reaction.

Instantaneous rate \(=\frac{-d c}{d t}\)

Question 11.
Represent the average rates of the following reaction. N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g).
Answer:
For the reation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 12
This is because the rate of consumption of H2 is thrice the rate of consumption of N2 while the rate of formation of NH3 will be twice the rate of consumption of N2.

Question 12.
Express the rate of a reaction in terms of change in concentration of each constituent in the following reaction : aA+bB → cC+ dD
Answer:
The rate of a reaction may be expressed in terms of decrease in the concentration of the reactants or in-crease in the concentration of the product per unit time,

∴ For the given reaction, aA T bB → cC +dD
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 13

Question 13.
For a hypothetical reaction, A + 2B → products, the concentration of A and B at different intervals of time are given in the following table. Find the rates of the reaction in terms of concentration changes in A and B.

The equilibrium concentration of A and B at different time intervals :

Time t/minute[A]/mol L-1[B]/ml L-1
01.0002.000
100.5341.068
200.3420.360
300.1800.360

Answer:
Rate of a reaction = \(\frac{-\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta t}=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{\Delta[\mathrm{B}]}{\Delta t}\)
(1) Over time interval from O to 10 minutes
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 14
(Note that the rate of a reaction in terms of changes in concentration of any reactant or product at the given time remains the same.)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(2) Over the time interval from 10 to 20 minutes,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 15

Question 14.
Show that the rate of reaction is the same whether expressed in terms of the rate of consumption of any reactant or of the formation of any product.
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
The concentrations of reactants and products at different time intervals are given in the following table :
Concentrations of various species at different times for the reaction N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g) :

Time/s[N2O5]/M[NO2]/M[O2]/M
00.030000
2000.02130.01740.00435
4000.01520.02960.00740
6000.01080.0384 0.00960

Answer:
The rate of the reaction can be expressed in terms of rate of consumption of reactants or rate of formation of products.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 16
Consider concentrations at time t1 = 200 seconds and t2 = 400 seconds
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 17
The constant values of rate of reaction proves that the rate of the reaction may be measured in terms of concentration changes of reactants or products per unit time.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 15.
Define Rate law (or differential rate law).
Answer:
Rate law (or differential rate law) : It is defined as an experimentally determined mathematical equation which expresses the rate of a chemical reaction in terms of molar concentrations of the reactants which influence the rate of the reaction. For example, for a reaction, A + B → Products By rate law, Rate = R = k[A] x [B] where k is a rate constant and [Al and [B] are molar concentrations of the reactants A and B respectively.

Question 16.
Give examples of rate law with illustrations.
Answer:
Consider following examples :
(i) H2(g) + I2(g) → 2HI(g)
R = k[H2] [I2]

(ii) 2H2O2(g) → 2H2O(I) + O2(g)
Experimentally it is observed that the rate of the reaction is proportional to the concentration of H2O2.
∴ R = k [H2O2]

(iii) NO2(g) + CO(g) → NO(g) + CO2(g)
Experimentally it is observed that rate of the reaction does not depend on the concentration of CO but it is proportional to [NO2]2.
∴ R = k[NO2]2

Question 17.
What are the applications of the rate law?
Answer:

  • The rate of any reaction at the given concentration can be measured by knowing the rate law and the rate constant.
  • The concentration of the reactants or the products at any instant during the progress of a reaction can be estimated with the help of rate law and the rate constant.
  • The mechanisms of simple or complex chemical reactions can be predicted and studied.

Question 18.
Define the rate constant. What are the factors which influence the rate constant of a chemical reaction?
Answer:
(A) Rate constant : The rate constant of a chemical reaction is defined as the rate of the chemical reaction when the concentration (or active masses) of each reactant has unit value, i.e., 1 mol dm-3 in the case of solution and the pressure is 1 atm in case of gases, e.g., for a reaction, A → products, Rate R = k[A].

If [A] = 1 mol dm-3, then k = R.

(B) The rate constant of a reaction depends on the following factors:

  • Nature of the reactants.
  • Temperature of the reaction. As the temperature increases, the velocity constant (rate constant) increases.
  • The conditions of the reactions like the presence of the catalyst, solvent, pH, etc.
  • It does not depend on the concentration of the reactants. But if one or more substances are in excess concentration, then the order of the reaction is independent of them.

Question 19.
What are the characteristics of rate constant?
Answer:
The characteristics of rate constant are as follows :

  • The rate constant depends upon the nature of the reaction.
  • Higher the value of the rate constant, faster is the reaction.
  • Lower the value of the rate constant, slower is the reaction.
  • By increasing the temperature, the magnitude of the rate constant increases.
  • For the given reaction, the rate constant has higher value in the presence of a catalyst than in the absence of the catalyst.
  • The reactions having lower activation energy have higher values for rate constants.

Solved Examples 6.2 – 6.3.2

Question 20.
Solve the following :

(1) Write the rate expressions for the following reactions in terms of rate of consumption of the reactants and the rate of formation of the products.
(i) 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
(ii) H2(g) + I2(g) → 2HI(g)
Solution :
(i) Given : 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
Rate of consumption of NO at time \(t=\frac{-d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}\)
Rate of consumption of O2 at time \(t=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of formation of NO2 at time \(t=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of the reaction \(=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
\(=\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

(ii) Given : H2(g) + I2(g) → 2HI(g)
Rate of consumption of H2 at time \(t=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of consumption of I2 at time \(t=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{I}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of formation of HI at time \(t=\frac{d[\mathrm{HI}]}{d t}\)
∴ Rate of reaction at any time t \(=-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}=-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{I}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{HI}]}{d t}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(2) The gas-phase reaction between NO and Br2 is represented by the equation. 2NO(g) + Br2(g) → 2NOBr(g)
(a) Write the expressions for the rate of consumption of reactants and formation of products.
(b) Write the expression for the rate of overall reaction in terms of rates of consumption of reactants and formation of products.
Solution :
Given : 2NO(g) + Br2(g) → 2NOBr(g)
(a) Rate of consumption of NO at time t \(=-\frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}\)
Rate of consumption of Br2 at time t \(=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{Br}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of formation of NOBr at time \(t=\frac{d[\mathrm{NOBr}]}{d t}\)
(b) Rate of reaction \(=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{Br}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
\(=\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{NOBr}]}{d t}\)

(3) The decomposition of N2Os is represented by the equation
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
(a) How is the rate of formation of NO2 related to the rate of formation of O2?
(b) How is the rate of formation of O2 related to the rate of consumption of N2O5?
Solution :
Given : 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
(a) Rate of formation of NO2 at time \(t=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
Rate of formation of O2 at time \(t=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

They are related to each other through rate of reaction.
∴ Rate of reaction \(=\frac{1}{4} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

(b) Rate of consumption of N2O5 at time t \(=-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}\right]}{d t}\)

Rate of reaction \(=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

In general,
Rate of reaction \(=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}\right]}{d t}=\frac{1}{4} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{O}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)

(4) Nitric oxide reacts with H2 according to the reaction. 2NO(g) + 2H2(g) → N2(g) + 2H2O(g)
What is the relationship among \(\frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2}\right]}{d t} \text { and } \frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\right]}{d t} ?\)
Solution :
Given : 2NO(g) + 2H2(g) → N2(g) + 2H2O(g)
The relationship among the rate of consumption of the reactants and the rate of formation of products is as follows :

Rate of reaction :
\(R=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d[\mathrm{NO}]}{d t}=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\right]}{d t}\)

(5) The rate of decomposition of N2Os was studied in liquid bromine,
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
If at a certain time, the rate of disappearance of N2O5 is 0.015 Ms-1 find the rates of formation of NO2 and O2. What is the rate of the reaction at this instant?
Solution :
Given : 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
Rate of disappearance of N2O5 = 0.015 M s-1
Rate of formation of NO2 =?
Rate of formation of O2 =?
Rate of reaction = ?
Rate of disappearance of \(\mathrm{N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}=\frac{-d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{5}\right]}{d t}\)
= 0.015 M s-1

Since 4 moles of NO2 are formed from 2 moles of N2O5 Rate of formation of NO2Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 21
Answer:
Rate of formation of NO2 = 0.03 Ms-1
Rate of formation of O2 = 0.0075 M s-1
Rate of reaction = 0.0075 Ms-1.

(6) In the reaction, PCl5(g) → PCl3(g) + CI2(g), at a particular moment, the rate of disappearance of PCl5 is 0.015 Ms-1. What are the rates of formation of PCI3 and Cl2?
Solution :
Given : PCl5(g) → PCl3(g) + Cl2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 22
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 23
Answer:
Rate of formation of PCl3 = 0.015 Ms-1
Rate of formation of Cl2 = 0.015 Ms-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(7) In the reaction, 2N3O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g), at a certain time, the rate of formation of NO2 is 0. 04 Ms-1. Find the rate of consumption of N2O5, rate of formation of O2 and the rate of the reaction.
Solution :
Given : 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
Rate of formation of NO2 = \(\frac{d\left[\mathrm{NO}_{2}\right]}{d t}\) = 0.04 Ms-1

From the reaction, rate of consumption of N2O5 is half the rate of formation of NO2 since when 2 moles of N2O5 are consumed, 4 moles of NO2 are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 24
Rate of formation of O2 is one-fourth rate of formation of NO2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 25
Answer:
(i) Rate of consumption of N2O5
(ii) Rate of formation of O2 = 0.01 Ms-1
(iii) Rate of reaction = 0.01 Ms-1

(8) Consider the reaction 2A + B → 2C. Suppose that at a particular moment during the reaction, rate of disappearance of A is 0.076 M/s,
(a) What is the rate of formation of C?
(b) What is the rate of consumption of B?
(c) What is the rate of the reaction?
Solution :
Given : 2A + B → 2C
Rate of disappearance of A = 0.076 Ms-1
(a) Rate of formation of C =?
(b) Rate of consumption of B =?
(c) Rate of reaction = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 26
Answer:
(a) Rate of formation of C = 0.076 Ms-1
(b) Rate of consumption of B = 0.038 M s-1
(c) Rate of reaction = 0.038 Ms-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(9) Consider the reation \(\mathbf{3 I}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{-}+\mathbf{S}_{2} \mathbf{O}_{8(u q)}^{2-} \longrightarrow \mathbf{I}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) At a particular time t, \(t, \frac{d\left[\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\right]}{d t}=2.2 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{M} / \mathrm{s}\) What are the values of \(\text { (a) }-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{I}^{-}\right]}{d t}\) \(-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~S}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{8}^{2-}\right]}{d t}\) \(\text { (c) } \frac{d\left[\mathbf{I}_{3}^{-}\right]}{d t}\) at the same time?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 27
(a) Rate of consumption of \(\mathrm{I}^{-}=-\frac{d\left[\mathrm{I}^{-}\right]}{d t}\)
When 2 moIes of \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) are formed, 3 moves of I are consumed in the same time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 28

(b) In the formation of 2 moles of \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\), 1 mole of \(\mathrm{S}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{8}^{2-}\) is consumed in the same time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 29
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 30

(10) Ammonia and oxygen react at high temperature as :
4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) → 4NO(g) + 6H2O(g)
In an experiment, rate of formation of NO(g) is 3.6 x 10-3 mol L-1s-1.
Calculate-
(a) Rate of disappearance of ammonia
(b) Rate of formation of water.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 31
Answer:
(a) Rate of disappearance of NH3
= 3.6 x 10-3 mol L-1s-1
(b) Rate of formation of H2O
= 5.4 x 10-3 mol L-1s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(11) The rate law for the reaction
C2H4Br2 + 3I → C2H4 + 2Br +I3 is Rate = k [C2H4Br2][I]. The rate of the reac-tion is found to be 1.1 x 10-4 M/s when the concentrations of C2H4Br2 and I– are 0.12M and 0.18 M respectively. Calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
Solution :
Given : C2H4Br2 + 3I → C2H4 + 2Br +I3
By rate law, Rate of reaction = R = k x [C2H4Br2][I]
R = 1.1 x 10-4 Ms-1
[C2H4Br2] = 0.12 M; [I] =0.18 M
Rate constant = k =?
R = k x [C2H4Br2] x [I]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 33
Answer:
Rate constant = k = 5.1 x 10-3 M-1s-1

(12) For a reaction, 2A + B → C, the rate law is, rate =k x [A]2 x [B]. If the rate constant of the reaction is 3.74 x 10-2M-2s-1, calculate the rate of the reaction when the concentrations of A, B and C are 0.108 M, 0.132 M and 0.124 M respectively.
Solution :
Given : Rate constant of the reaction = k
= 3.74 x 10-2M-2s-1
[A] =0.108 M, [B] = 0.132M, [C] = 0.124 M
Rate of the reaction = R = ?
By rate law,
R = k [A]2 x [B] = (0.108)2 x 0.132 = 1.54 x 10-3 Ms-1
(Concentration of C need not be considered since it is a product.)
Answer:
Rate of reaction = 1.54 x10-3 Ms-1

(13) For a reaction, A + B → C, if the concentration of A doubles, the rate of the reaction doubles. While if the concentration of B doubles the rate of the reaction increases by four fold. Write rate law. .
Solution :
Let x moles of A react with y moles of B. xA + yB → C
To write rate law, it is necessary to find x and y values.

(i) Initial rate \(=R_{1}=k[\mathrm{~A}]_{1}^{x}[\mathrm{~B}]_{1}^{y}\)
Final rate R2 is doubled when the concentration of A is doubled, i.e., R2 = 2R1 when final concentration,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 174
(It is assumed that the concentration of B remains same.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 34

(ii) Initial rate \(=R_{1}=k[\mathrm{~A}]_{1}^{x}[\mathrm{~B}]^{y}\)
If the concentration of B is doubled keeping of A constant, rate becomes four times, i.e.,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 35
Hence the rate law is represented by an expression.
Rate = k[A] [B]2
Answer:
Rate law is. Rate = k [A] [B]2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(14) For the reaction, A2 + B + C → AC + AB, it is found that tripling the concentration of A2 triples the rate, doubling the concentration of C doubles the rate and doubling the concentration of B has no effect,
(a) What is the rate law?
(b) Why the change in concentration of B has no effect?
Solution :
Given : A2 + B + C → AC + AB
(a) The rate law may be represented as,
Rate = k [A2]x [B]y [C]z
Let [A]1, [B]1 and [C]1 represent initial concentration and [A]2, [B]2 and [C]2 represent final concentrations, and let R1 and R2 be initial and final rates of the reaction when the concentrations are changed.

(i) If [A]2 = 3[A]1, R2 = 3R1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 36
If the concentrations of B and C remain constant, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 37

(b) In the rate determining step, B may not be involved as the reactant, hence rate is independent of changes in concentration of B. (OR B may be in large excess as compared to the concentrations of A and C.)
Answer:
(a) Rate law : Rate = k [A] [C]

Question 21.
Define and explain the term order of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
Order of a chemical reaction : The order of a chemical reaction is defined as the number of molecules (or atoms) whose concentrations influence the rate of the chemical reaction.
OR
The order of a chemical reaction is defined as the sum of the powers (or exponents) to which the concentration terms of the reactants are raised in the rate law expression for the given reaction.

Explanation :
Consider a reaction,
n1A + n2B → Products
where n1 moles of A react with n2 moles of B.

The rate of this reaction can be expressed by the rate law equation as,
R = k [A]n1 [B]n2
where k is the rate constant of the reaction, hence, the order of the reaction is n – n1 + n2, (observed, experimentally).

If n = 1, the reaction is called the first order reaction, if n = 2, it is called the second order reaction, etc.

If n = 0, it is called the zero order reaction, e.g., photochemical reaction of H2(g) and Cl2(g).

Question 22.
What are the features (or key points) of order of a reaction?
Answer:
The features of order of reaction are as follows :

  • It represents the number of atoms, ions or molecules whose concentrations influence the rate of the reaction.
  • It is not related to the stoichiometric equation of the reaction, hence it cannot be predicted from stoichiometric balanced equation.
  • It is experimentally determined quantity.
  • It is defined only in terms of the concentrations of the reactants and not of products.
  • It may have values which are integers, fractional or zero.
  • Higher values are rare. Reactions of first and second order are in large number. Third order reactions are very few like,
    2NO(g) + Cl2(g) → 2NOCl(g).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Solved Examples 6.3.3

Question 23.
Solve the following :
(1) From the rate expressions for the following reactions, determine their order :
(a) 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g) : Rate = k [N2O5]
(b) CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g) : Rate = k [CHL3] [Cl2]1/2
(c) C2H5Cl(g) → C2H4(g) + HCl(g): Rate = k [C2H5Cl]
(d) 2NO2(g) + F2(g) → 2NO2F(g) → : Rate = k (NO2] [F2]
Solution :
(a) 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
The rate law expression given for the reaction is Rate = k x [N2O5]
Hence the reaction is of first order.

(b) CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g)
The given rate law expression is, R = k [CHCl3] x [Cl2]1/2 Here the order of a reaction is one with respect to CHCl3(g) and half with respect to Cl2(g). Therefore the overall order of the reaction is 1 + 1/2 = 1.5.

(c) C2H5Cl(g) → C2H4(g) + HCl(g)
The given rate law expression is, Rate = k [C2H5Cl]
Hence the reaction has order equal to one.

(d) 2NO2(g) + F2(g) → 2NO2F(g)
The given rate law expression for the reaction is Rate = k [NO2] x [F2]
Hence the reaction is first order with respect to NO2 and first order with respect to F2. The overall order of the reaction is, n = nNO2 + nF1 = 1 + 1 = 2.

(2) Determine the order of following reactions from their rate expressions :
(a) 2H2O2 → 2H2O + O2 Rate = k [H2O2]
(b) NO2 + CO → NO + CO2 Rate = k [NO2]2
(c) 2NO + O2 → 2NO2 Rate = k [NO]2 x [O2]
(d) CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g)
Rate = k [CHCl3] [Cl2]
Solution :
(a) For the reaction,
2H2O2 → 2H2O + O2
Since the rate law expression given is,
Rate = k [H2O2]
Hence the reaction is of first order.

(b) For the reaction,
NO2 + CO → NO + CO2
Since the rate law given is Rate = k [NO2]2, the reaction is second order with respect to NO2 and zero order with respect to CO. Hence the net order of the reaction is, n = nNO2 + nco = 2 + 0 = 2

(c) For the reaction,
2NO + O2 → 2NO2
Since the rate law expression given is, Rate = k [NO]2 x [O2] the reaction is second order with respect to NO and first order with respect to O2. Hence the overall order of reaction is n = nNO2 + no2 = 2 + 1 = 3.

(d) For the reaction, by rate law,
Rate = k [CHCl3] x [Cl2] reaction is first order with respect to CHCl3 and first order with respect to Cl2. Hence the overall order is, n = ncHcl3 + ncl2 = 1 + 1 = 2.

(3) Write the rate law expressions for the following reactions:
(1) 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2 + O2; order of the reaction is 1.
(2) CH3CHO → CH4 + CO; order of the reaction Is 3/2.
Solution :
(1) For the given reaction, order is one hence the rate law expression is, Rate = k [N2O5].
(2) For the given reaction, order is 3/2, hence the rate law expression is Rate = k x [CH2CHO]3/2.

(4) The reaction \(\mathbf{H}_{2} \mathbf{O}_{2(\mathbf{a q})}+3 \mathbf{I}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{-}+2 \mathbf{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 2 \mathbf{H}_{2} \mathbf{O}_{(0)}+\mathbf{I}_{3(a q)}^{-}\) is first order in H2O2 and I, zero order in H+. Write the rate law.
Solution:
Given :
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+3 \mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}^{+}{ }_{(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{i})}+\mathrm{I}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
Since the reaction is first order in H2O2 and F and zero order in H+, the expression for rate law will be,
Rate =k [H2O2]1 [I]1 [H+]0
∴ Rate = k [H2O2] [I]
Answer:
Rate = k [H2O2] [I]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(5) The rate law for the gas-phase reaction
2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g) is rate = k [NO2]2 [O2]. What is the order of the reaction with respect to each of the reactants and what is the overall order of the reaction?
Solution :
Given : 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
Rate = k [NO]2[O2]
Order of the reaction with respect to NO = nNo = 2
Order with respect to O2 = nO2 = 1
Overall order of the reaction = n = nNO + nO2
= 2 + 1
= 3
Answer:
Order with respect to NO = 2
Order with respect to O2 = 1
Overall order = 3

(6) What is the order for the following reactions?
(a) 2NO2(g) + F2(g) → 2NO2F(g), rate = k [NO2][F2]
(b) CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g), rate = k[CHCl3][Cl2]1/2
Solution :
(a) Given : 2NO2(g) + F2(g) → 2NO2F
Rate = k [NO2][F2]
Hence the reaction is first order with respect to NO2 and first order with respect to F2
∴ Order of reaction = nNO2 + nF2 = 1 + 1 = 2

(b) Given :
CHCl3(g) + Cl2(g) → CCl4(g) + HCl(g),
Rate = k [ CHCl3] [Cl2]1/2
Hence the reaction is first order in CHCl3 and half order in Cl2.
∴ Order of reaction
= nCHCl3 + nCl2 = 1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Answer:
(a) Order of the reaction = 2
(b) The order of the reaction = \(\frac{3}{2}\)

(7) Write the rate law for the following reactions :
(a) A reaction that is zero order in A and second order in B.
(b) A reaction that is second order in NO and first order in Br2.
Solution :
(a) Given : A + B → Products
The reaction is zero order in A and second order in B. Hence the rate law is represented as, Rate = k [A]O[B]2
Rate = k[B]2

(b) Given : 2NO(g) + Br2(g) → 2NOBr(g)
The reaction is second order in NO and first in Br2. Hence the rate law is,
∴ Rate = k [NO]2[Br2]
Answer: (a) Rate law : Rate = k[B]2
(b) Rate law : Rate = k [NO]2[Br2]

(8) The reaction A + B → Products, is first order in each of the reactants, (a) Write the rate law.
(b) How does the reaction rate change if the concentration of B is decreased by a factor 3?
(c) What is the change in the rate if the concentration of each reactant is tripled? (d) What is the change in the rate, if the concentration of A is doubled and that of B is halved?
Solution :
(a) The reaction is first order in A and B. Hence the equation for rate law is,
Rate = k [A] [B]
(b) Before changing the concentration of B, Initial rate = R1 – k [A]1 [B]1
After change in concentration of B,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 39
Hence the rate of the reaction will be decreased by a factor 3.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(c) When the concentration of each reactant is tripled, then the final concentrations will be, [A]2 = 3[A]1 and [B]2 = 3[B1]
∴ R2 = k x 3[A]1 x 3 [B]1
∴ R2 = k x 3[A]1 x 3 [B]1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 40
Hence the rate of the reaction will be increased by 9 times.

(d) When the concentration A is doubled and that of B is halved then the final concentrations will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 41
Rate of the reaction will remain unchanged.
Answer:
(a) Rate law is, Rate = k [A] [B],
(b) Rate is decreased by a factor 3,
(c) Rate is increased by 9 times,
(d) Rate remains unchanged.

(9) Consider the reaction A2 + B → products. If the concentration of A2 and B are halved, the rate of the reaction decreases by a factor of 8. If the concentration of A2 is increased by a factor of 2.5, the rate increases by the factor of 2.5. What is the order of the reaction? Write the rate law.
Solution :
Given : A2 + B → Products
(i) When concentration of A2 and B are halved :
[A2]2(final) = 1/2 [A2]1(final) and [B]2 = 1/2 [B]1 then, R2(final) = 1/8R1(intial).

(ii) When concentration of A2 is increased by the factor 2.5,
[A2]2 = 2.5 [A2]1 (concentration of B is same) then, R2 = 2.5 R1
Now let the reaction be, XA2 + yB → Products

From data in (ii),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 43
Hence the reaction is of third order. The rate law can be represented as,
Rate = k [A2] [B]2
Answer:
(i) Order of the reaction = 3
(ii) Rate law : Rate = k [A2] [B]3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(10) Consider the reaction C + D → Products. The rate of the reaction increases by a factor of 4 when the concentration of C is doubled. The rate of the reaction is tripled when concentration of D is tripled. What is the order of the reaction? Write the rate law.
Solution :
Given : C + D → Products OR xC + yD → Products
(i) When the concentration of C is doubled, the rate of the reaction increases by 4.

[C]2(final) = 2[C]1(initial) then R2(final) = 4R1(initial)
(In this, the concentration of D is assumed to be constant.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 44
Hence, the reaction is second order in C.
∴ nC = 2
(ii) When the concentration of D is tripled, rate is tripled. The concentration of C is assumed to be constant.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 45
Rate law : Rate = A[C]2[D]
Answer:
(i) Order of the reaction = 3
(ii) Rate law : Rate = A[C]2[D]

(11) The reaction F2(g) + 2ClO2(g) → 2FClO2(g) is first order in each of the reactants. The rate of the reaction is 4.88 x 10-4 M/s when [F2] = 0.015 M and [ClO2]= 0.025 M. Calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
Solution :
Given :
F2(g) + 2ClO2(g) → 2FClO2(g)
Order of reaction in F2 = nF2 = 1
Order of reaction in CIO2 = nClO2 = 1
Rate = R = 4.88 x 10-4 Ms-1
[F2] = 0.015 M; [ClO2] = 0.025 M
Rate = k = ?
By rate law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 46
Answer:
Rate constant = 1 = 1.3 M-2s-1

(12) The reaction 2H2(g) + 2NO(g) → 2H2O(g) + N2(g) is first order in H2 and second order in NO. The rate constant of the reaction at a certain tem­perature is 0.42M-2s-1. Calculate the rate when [H2] = 0.015 M and [NO] = 0.025 M.
Solution :
Given : 2H2(g) + 2NO(g) → 2H2O(g) + N2(g)
Order of reaction in H2 = nH1 = 1
Order of reaction in NO = nNO = 2
Rate constant = k = 0.42 M-2s-1
[H2] = 0.015 M; [NO] = 0.025 M
Rate of reaction = R = ?
By rate law,
Rate = R = k [H2] [NO]2
= 0.42 x 0.015 x (0.025)2 M-2s-1 M M
= 3.94 x 10-6 Ms-1
Answer:
Rate of reaction = R = 3.94 x 10-6 Ms-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(13) Find the order of following reactions whose rate laws are expressed as follows. CA and CB are the concentrations of reactants A and B respectively :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 47
Solution :
Given :
(1) For, – \(\frac{d c}{d t}\) = k x \(\mathrm{C}_{A}^{0}\) the order of the reaction, n = 0. Hence it is a zero order reaction.

(2) For, – \(\frac{d c}{d t}\) = k x \(\mathrm{C}_{A}^{3 / 2}\), the overall order of the reaction is 3/2.

(3) For, –\(\frac{d c}{d t}\) = k x \(\mathrm{C}_{A}^{1 / 2} \mathrm{C}_{B}^{2}\), the reaction has order 1/2 with respect to A and 2 with respect to B.
∴ n = nA + nB = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 2 = \(\frac{5}{2}\).
Hence the (overall) order of the reaction is \(\frac{5}{2}\).

(4) For, \(-\frac{d c}{d t}=k \mathrm{C}_{A}^{5 / 2} \times \mathrm{C}_{B}^{0}\)
The reaction has order \(\frac{5}{2}\) with respect to A and zero with respect to B.
∴ n = nA + nB = \(\frac{5}{2}\) + 0 = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
Hence the order of the reaction is \(\frac{5}{2}\).

(5) For, \(-\frac{d c}{d t}=k \times \mathrm{C}_{A}^{1 / 3} \times \mathrm{C}_{B}^{2 / 3}\). The reaction has order \(\frac{1}{3}\) with respect to A and \(\frac{2}{3}\) with respect to B.
∴ n = nA + nB = \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 1
Hence the order of the reaction is 1.

(14) The rate of a reaction, 2A + B → Products is 3.78 x 10-4 M s-1 when the concentrations of A and B are 0.3 M each. If the rate constant of the reaction is 4.2 x 10-3s-1 find the order of the reaction.
Solution :
Given : 2A + B → Products
Rate = R = 3.78 x 10-4Ms-1
[A] = [B] = 0.3 M
Rate constant = 1 = 4.2 x 10-3 s-1
Let the order of the reaction in A be x and in B be y.

Then, by rate law,
Rate = R = k [A]x [B]y 3.78 x 10-4
= 4.2 x 10-3(0.3)x(0.3)y
= 4.2 x 10-3 (0.3)x+y
∴ \(\frac{3.78 \times 10^{-4}}{4.2 \times 10^{-3}}\) = (0.3)x+y
0.09 = (0.3)x+y
(0.3)2 = (0.3)x+y                        .
∴ x + y = 2
Hence the order of overall reaction is 2.
Answer:
The order of the reaction is 2.

(15) The rate of the reaction, A → Products is 1.25 x 10-2 M/s when concentration of A is 0. 45 M. Determine the rate constant if the reaction is
(a) first order in A
(b) second order in A.
Solution :
Given : A → Products
Rate = R = 1.25 x 10-2 M/s
[A] = 0.45 M

(a) Rate constant, k = ? if order is one.
For first order, rate law is, R = k [A]
∴ \(k=\frac{R}{[\mathrm{~A}]}=\frac{1.25 \times 10^{-2}}{0.45}\)
= 2.78 x 10-2s-1

(b) Rate constant, k =? if order is two. For second order, rate law is, R = k [A]2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 50
Answer:
(a) Rate constant, k = 2.78 x 10-2
(b) Rate constant, k = 6.173 x 10-2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 24.
Define and explain the term elementary reaction.
Answer:
Many reactions take place in a series of steps. Such reactions are called complex reactions. Each step taking place in a complex reaction is called an elementary reaction. This shows that a complex reaction is broken down in a series of elementary chemical reactions.

By adding all the elementary steps of a complex reaction we get the overall reaction.

The mechanism of a reaction is decided from the sequence of the elementary steps that are added to give overall reaction.

Elementary reaction : It is defined as the reac­tion which takes place in a single step and cannot be divided further into simpler chemical reactions.

The order and molecularity of the elementary reaction are same.

Some reactions take place in one step and cannot be broken down into simpler reactions. For example,

C2H5I(g) → C2H4(g) + HI(g)
O3(g) → O2(g) + O(g)

Question 25.
Define and explain the term molecularity of a reaction. Give examples.
OR
Define the molecularity of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
Molecularity : The molecularity of an elementary reaction is defined as the number of molecules (or atoms or ions) which take part in a chemical reaction.

Explanation :

  • The molecularity of a reaction is always integral.
  • It cannot be determined experimentally.
  • The minimum value of the molecularity is one.
  • It cannot have fractional or zero values.
  • The reactions are classified according to the mole­cularity as follows :

(a) Unimolecular reaction (OR First order reac­tion) : In this only one molecule takes part in the reaction, e.g., N2O5(g) → 2NO2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)O2(g)

The rate law expression for this reaction is, Rate = k [N2O5]. Hence it is unimolecular and first order.

Other unimolecular reactions are,
O3(g) → O2(g) + O(g)
C2H5I(g) → C2H2(g) + HI(g)

(B) Bimolecular reaction In this two molecules take part in the reaction,
e.g., 2HI(g) → H2(g) + I2(g)
O3(g) + O(g) → 2O2(g)
2NO2(g) → 2NO(g) + O2(g)

(c) Trimolecular reaction: In this three molecules take part in the reaction.
e.g., 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)

The higher molecularity is rare since the prob ability of simultaneous collisions between more molecules is very low.

Question 26.
Explain order and molecularity of elementary reactions.
Answer:
(1) The order and molecularity of elementary reaction are same.
(2) Consider second order bimolecular reaction,
2NO2(g) → 2NO(g) + O2.
(3) The rate of the reaction is given by, Rate = k [NO2]2
(4) Similarly consider unimolecular first order reaction,
C2H5I(g) → C2H4(g) + HI(g)
Rate = k [C2H5I]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 27.
Define and explain the term rate-determining step.
Answer:
(1) Many chemical reactions take place in a series of elementary steps. Among many steps of the reaction, one of the steps is the slowest step compared to other steps.

Rate determining step : The slowest step in the reaction mechanism which involves many steps is called the rate-determining step.

(2) Example :
Consider decomposition of gaseous NO2Cl.
2NO2Cl(g) → 2NO2(g) + Cl2(g)
This reaction takes place in two steps :
Step I : \(\mathrm{NO}_{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{(g)} \stackrel{k_{1}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})}\) (slow, unimolecular)

Step II: \(\mathrm{NO}_{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{(g)} \stackrel{k_{2}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})}\) (fast, bimolecular)

2NO2CI(g) → 2NO2(g) + CI2(g) (overall reaction)

Among two steps, first step being slower represents rate-determining step. The rate law can be represented as, Rate = k1 [NO2CI]

Hence, the reaction is first order.

In this Cl(g) is formed as a reaction intermediate.

Question 28.
What are the features of rate-determining step?
Answer:
Features of rate-determining step :

  • The overall reaction can never occur faster than its rate-determining step.
  • The rate-determining step can occur anywhere in the reaction mechanism and depends on nature of reactants, conditions of the reaction, etc.
  • The rate law of a rate-determining step can directly be obtained from its stoichiometric equation.
  • The rate law of a rate-determining step can directly be obtained from its stoichiometric equation.

Question 29.
What is reaction intermediate? Explain with an example.
Answer:
Reaction intermediate : The additional species other than the reactants or products formed in the mechanism during progress of the reaction is called reaction intermediate.

Features of reaction intermediate :

  • The reaction intermediate appears in the reaction mechanism but does not appear in the overall reaction or in the products.
  • It is always formed in one step and consumed in the subsequent step in the mechanism.
  • Its concentration is very small and cannot be determined easily.
  • Rate of the reaction is independent of concentration of this intermediate.
  • The life period of the reaction intermediate is extremely small, hence cannot be isolated.
  • The composition of the reaction intermediate, decides the mechanism of the reaction.
  • Consider decomposition of gaseous NO2Cl. 2NO2Cl(g) → 2NO2(g) + Cl2(g)

This reaction takes place in two steps :
Step I : \(\mathrm{NO}_{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})} \stackrel{k_{1}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})}\) (slow, unimolecular)

Step II : \(\mathrm{NO}_{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{g})} \stackrel{k_{2}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\) (fast, bimolecular)
2NO2Cl(g) → 2NO2(g) + Cl2(g) (overall reaction)
Cl formed in Step I is removed in Step II, Hence Cl is a reaction intermediate.

Question 30.
Identify the molecularity and write the rate law for each of the following elementary reactions :
(a) NO(g) + O3(g) → NO3(g) + O(g)
(b) H2I(g) + I(g) → 2HI(g)
(c) CI(g) + Cl(g) + N2(g) → N2(g)
Answer:
NO(g) + O3(g) → NO3(g) + O(g) Molecularity is 2.
Rate law : Rate = k [NO] x [O3]

(b) H2I(g) + I(g) → 2HI(g) Molecularity is 2.
Rate law : Rate = k [H2I] x [I]

(c) Cl(g) + Cl(g) + N2(g) →Cl2(g) + N2(g) Molecularity is 3.
Rate law : Rate = k [Cl]2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 31.
Write molecularity of the following reaction:
2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g).
Answer:
For the reaction, 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g) Molecularity = 3.

Question 32.
How Is reaction intermediate predicted in the reaction?
Answer:
(1) When a reaction takes place in more than one steps, then a substance produced in one step is removed in the next step is called reaction intermediate.
(2) For example,
(I) NO(g) + O3(g) → NO3(g) + O(g)
(ii) NO3(g) + O(g) → NO2(g) + O(g)
In the reaction. NO3 and O are reaction intermediates.

Question 33.
A certain reaction occurs in the following steps :
(i) Cl(g) + O3(g) → ClO(g) + O2(g)
(ii) ClO(g) + O(g) → Cl(g) + O2(g)
(a) Write the chemical equation for overall reaction.
(b) Identify the reaction intermediate.
(c) Identify the catalyst.
(d) What is the molecularity of each step?
Answer:
Step I : Cl(g) + O3(g) → ClO(g) + O2(g)
Step II : ClO(g) + O(g) → Cl(g) + O2(g)
(a) Overall reaction is obtained by adding both the reactions.
O3(g) + O(g) → 2O2(g)
(b) Reaction intermediate is ClO(g) which is formed in the first step and removed in the second step.
(c) Cl(g) acts as a catalyst. It is an example of homo-geneous catalysis in which catalyst Cl(g) forms an intermediate ClO(g) and again is released in the second step.
(d) Since both the steps involve two reactants each, both the steps are bimolecular.

Question 34.
The rate law for the reaction 2H2(g) + 2NO(g) → N2(g) + 2H2O(g) is given by rate = k [H2] [NO]2.
The reaction occurs in the following two steps :
(i) H2(g) + 2NO(g) → N2O(g) + H2O(g)
(ii) N2O(g) + H2(g) → N2(g) + H2O(g)
What is the role of N2O in the mechanism? What is the molecularity of each of the elementary steps?
Answer:
N2O is a reaction intermediate which is formed in the first step and removed in the second step. Molecularity of the elementary steps :
(a) First step – Termolecular.
(b) Second step-Bimolecular.

Question 35.
What is the rate law for the reaction,
NO2(g) + CO(g) → NO(g) + CO2(g)
The reaction occurs in the following steps :
NO2 + NO2 → NO3 + NO (slow)
NO3 + CO → NO2 + CO2 (fast)
What is the role of NO3?
Answer:
Overall reaction :
NO2(g) + CO(g) → NO(g) + CO2(g)
Step-I NO2 + NO2 → NO3 + NO (slow) (slow)
Step-II NO3 + CO → NO2 + CO2 (fast)

(A) From first rate determining slow step, rate law is, Rate = k[NO2]2
(B) Role of NO3 : In the reaction, NO3 is the reaction intermediate which is formed in first step and removed in the second step.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 36.
The rate law for the reaction 2NO(g) + Cl2(g) → 2NOCl(g) is given by rate = k[NO][Cl2]. The reaction occurs in the following steps :
(i) NO(g) + Cl2(g) → NOCl2(g)
(ii) NOCl2(g) + NO(g) → 2NOCl(g)
(a) Is NOCl2 a catalyst or reaction intermedi-ate? Why?
(b) Identify the rate determining step.
Answer:
(a) NOCl2 is a reaction intermediate since it is formed in the first step and removed in the second step. It is not a catalyst since it was not present in the first step or on reactant side nor in the second step on product side.
(b) Since rate law is, Rate = k[NO][Cl2], and the sub-stances NO and Cl2 are present in the first step as reactants, it is the slow and rate-determining step.

Question 37.
The rate law for the reaction 2H2(g) + 2NO(g) → N2(g) + 2H2O(g) is given by rate = k[H2][NO]2. The reaction occurs in the following steps :
(i) H2 + 2NO → N2O + H2O
(ii) N2O + H2 → N2 + H2O
What is the role of N2O in the mechanism? Identify the slow step.
Answer:
(a) N2O is the reaction intermediate since it is formed in the first step and removed in the second step.
(b) By rate law, Rate = k [H2][NO]2. Since the first step involves the substances H2 and NO, it is the slow and rate-determining step.

Question 38.
What are integrated rate laws?
Answer:
Integrated rate laws : The equations which are obtained by integrating the differential rate laws (expressions) and which provide direct relationship between the concentrations of the reactants and time are called integrated rate laws.

For example, integrated rate law for first order reaction is represented as,
\(k=\frac{2.303}{t} \log _{10} \frac{[\text { Reactant }]_{\text {final }}}{[\text { Reactant }]_{\text {initial }}}\)

Question 39.
Derive the expression for integrated rate law (equation) for the first-order reaction.
Answer:
Consider the following first-order reaction, A → B The rate of the chemical reaction is given by the rate law expression as, Rate, R = k [A] where [A] is the concentration of the reactant A and k is the velocity constant or specific rate of the reaction.
The instantaneous rate is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 52

If [A0] is the initial concentration of the reactant and [A]t at time t, then by integrating the above equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 53

This is the integrated rate equation for the first order reaction. This is also called integrated rate law.

Question 40.
How is the integrated rate equation for the first order reaction represented by considering the concentration of the product?
Answer: The
integrated rate equation for the first order reaction can be represented as,
\(k=\frac{2.303}{t} \log _{10} \frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{[\mathrm{~A}]_{t}}\) where [A]0 is the initial concentration of the reactant (at time, 1 = 0) and [A]t is that at time t. Consider the reaction, A → B
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 54

If a is the initial concentration of the reactant A and x is the concentration of the product B after time t, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 55

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 41.
Explain the exponential rate law expression for the first order reaction.
Answer:
The integrated rate equation for the first order reaction can be represented as,
\(k=\frac{1}{t} \log _{\mathrm{e}} \frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{[\mathrm{~A}]_{t}}\)
where k is a rate constant, [A]0 and [A]t are initial and final concentrations of the reactant after time t.
∴ k = \(-\frac{1}{t} \log _{\mathrm{e}} \frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{t}}{[\mathrm{~A}]_{0}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 56
where [A]0 and [A]t are the concentrations of the reactant when t = 0 and t = t respectively.

Thus, the concentration of the reactant decreases exponentially with time and the time required to complete the first order reaction will be infinity.

Another feature of the exponential behaviour is the time required to complete a definite fraction of the reaction is always constant. Therefore, the first order reactions are also described in terms of the half-life of the reaction ™.

Question 42.
What are the units of rate constant of first order reaction?
Answer:
The units of rate constant (k) for the first order reaction is per time (or s-1).

Question 43.
Give three examples of first order reaction.
Answer:
The examples of first order reaction are :
(1) Decomposition of H2O2 :
2H2O2(I) → 2H2O(1) + O2(g) Rate = k[H2O2]
(2) Decomposition of N2Os :
2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g) Rate = k[N2O5]
(3) Isomerisation of cyclopropane to propene :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 67

Question 44.
Write a note on a zero order reaction.
OR
What is a zero order reaction? Explain.
Answer:
(1) Definition : Zero order reaction : A reaction in which the rate of the reaction does not depend on the concentration of any reactant taking part in the reaction is called zero order reaction.
(2) Explanation : For example, consider photochemical reaction between H2 and Cl2 gases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 72
In this the rate of the reaction remains constant throughout the progress of the reaction, even if the concentrations of the reactants decrease with time, until the reactant has reacted entirely.

Hence, by the rate law,
R = k [H2]° [Cl2]° = k (constant).

Question 45.
Derive the expression for integrated rate law for zero-order reaction A → Products.
Answer:
Consider a zero order reaction, A → Products
The rate of the reaction is, Rate \(=\frac{-d[\mathrm{~A}]}{d t}\)

By rate law,
Rate = k x [A]0 = k
∴ – d[A] = k x dt

If [A]0 is the initial concentration of the reactant A at t = 0 and [A]t is the concentration of A present after time t, then by integrating above equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 73
This is the integrated rate law expression for rate constant for zero order reaction.
∴ k x t = [A]0 – [A]t
∴ [A]t = – kt + A0

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 46.
How would you obtain the unit of the velocity constant k for (i) the first order reaction (ii) the zero order reaction?
Answer:
(i) For a first order reaction :
Consider the reaction,
A → B
The rate (R) of the reaction will be, R = k [A] = kc, where [A] is concentration in mol dm-3Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 74
Hence, the SI unit of velocity constant for the first order reaction is second-1.

(ii) For a zero order reaction :
The rate of reaction is R = k [A]0 = k
Hence, the velocity constant k has the unit of the rate of the reaction, i.e., mol dm-3 s-1.

Question 47.
Obtain an expression for half-life period of zero order reaction.
Answer:
The rate law expression for zero order reaction is, [A]t = – kt + [A]0
where [A]0 and [A]t are the concentrations of the reactant at time, t = 0 and after time t respectively, Half-life period, t1/2 is the time when the concentration reduces from [A]0 to [A]0/2. i.e., at t = t1/2, [A]t = [A]0/2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 75
Hence for a zero-order reaction, the half-life period is directly proportional to the initial concentration of the reactant.

Question 48.
Give the examples of zero order reactions.
Answer:
Zero order reactions are not common. They take place under special conditions. They are hetero-geneous catalysed reactions generally involving metals as catalysts.

(1) Decomposition NH3 on Pt surface :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 79
(2) Decomposition of N2O to N2 and O2 on Pt :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 80
(3) Decomposition of PH3 on hot tungsten catalyst at high pressure.

Question 49.
Decomposition of NH3(g) on platinum surface at high temperature is a zero order reaction. Explain.
Answer:

  • The decomposition of NH3(g) on platinum surface is represented as,
    2NH3(g) \(\frac{1130 \mathrm{~K}}{\mathrm{Pt}}\) N2(g) + 3H2(g)
  • Since it is a heterogeneous catalysed reaction, NH3 gaseous molecules at high pressure are adsorbed on the metal surface covering the surface area.
  • The number of NH3 molecules adsorbed is small compared to NH3 molecules in the gaseous phase.
  • Only the molecules adsorbed on the surface get decomposed. Hence rate of the decomposition becomes independent of the concentration (pressure) of NH3. Therefore the decomposition reaction is zero order.

Question 50.
The catalysed decomposition of nitrous oxide (N2O) to nitrogen and oxygen is a zero order reaction. Explain.
Answer:

  • The decomposition of N2O(g) on platinum can be represented as, \(2 \mathrm{~N}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})} \stackrel{\mathrm{Pt}}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{~N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
  • Since it is heterogeneously catalysed reaction, N2O gaseous molecules are adsorbed on the metal surface covering the surface area.
  • The number of N2O molecules adsorbed is small compared to N2O molecules in the gaseous phase.
  • Only the molecules adsorbed on the metal surface get decomposed. Hence rate of decomposition becomes independent of the concentration (pressure) of N2O. Therefore the decomposition of N2O is a zero order reaction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 51.
Inversion of cane sugar (sucrose) is a pseudo-first-order reaction. Explain.
OR
The reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 82
Can it be of pseudo-first-order type?
Answer:
The inversion of cane sugar (sucrose) is an acid catalysed hydrolysis reaction which can be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 83

This is a bimolecular reaction. Hence, the true rate law for the reaction should be, Rate = k[C12H22O11] [H2O]. This shows that the reaction should be second order.

Since water (H2O) is in large excess, its concentration remains constant and the rate depends only upon the concentration of cane sugar.

∴ Rate = k[C12H22O11]

Therefore the second order true rate law becomes first order rate law. Hence the inversion of cane sugar is a pseudo first order reaction.

Solved Examples 6.4-6.5

Question 52.
Solve the following :

(1) For the reaction 2A + B → products, find the rate law from the following data :

[A]/M[B]/Mrate/Ms-1
0.30.050.15
0.60.050.30
0.60.21.20

Solution:
In steps (i) and (ii), the concentration of A is doubled but the concentration of B remains constant. Since the rate is doubled the rate is proportional to the concentration of A or R α [A] and hence with respect to A order of the reaction is 1 or nA = 1.

In steps (ii) and (iii), the concentration of A is kept constant but the concentration of B is increased 4 times and rate of the reaction is increased 4 times. Hence the rate of reaction is proportional to concentration of B, R α [B] and hence with respect of B, order is 1 or nB = 1. Hence rate law will be, Rate = k [A] x [B].

(2) In a first order reaction A → product, 80 % of the given sample of compound decomposes in 40 min. What is the half life period of the reaction ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 91
Answer:
Half life period = 17.22 min

(3) The reaction A + B → products is first order in each of the reactants.
(a) How does the rate of reaction change if the concentration of A is increased by factor 3?
(b) What is the change in the rate of reaction if the concentration of A is halved and concen­tration of B is doubled?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 92
Hence the rate remains the same.
Answer:
(a) The rate increases by factor 3.
(b) The rate remains the same.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(4) Half-life period of a first order reaction is 41.09 min. Calculate rate constant in per second.
Solution :
Given : Half-life period = t1/2
= 41.09 min = 41.09 x 60 s
= 2.465 x 103s
Rate constant = k = ?
For a first order reaction,
\(\begin{aligned}
k &=\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}} \\
&=\frac{0.693}{2.465 \times 10^{3}}
\end{aligned}\)
= 2.81 x 10-4 s-1
Answer:
Rate constant = k = 2.81 x 10-4 s-1

(5) A first order reaction takes 15 minutes to com­plete 25%. How much will it take to complete 65 %?
Solution:
(i) Given : For 25% completion, t1 = 15 min.
For 35 % completion, t2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 94
Answer:
Time required to complete 65 % reaction = 547 min

(6) Gaseous A2 dissociates as, A2(g) → 2A(g). Initial pressure of A2 is 0.8 atm. After 20 minutes the pressure is 1.1 atm. Calculate rate constant and half-life period for the reaction.
Solution :
Given : [A]0 = Initial pressure = P0 = 0.8 atm
Final pressure = Total pressure = PT = 1.1 atm
Rate constant = k = ?
Half life period = t1/2 = ?
A2(g) → 2A(g)
P0 – x 2x
Pressure of A2 = Pt = P0 – x
Total pressure of the mixture,
PT = P0 – x + 2x = P0 + x
∴ x = PT – P0
∴ Pt = P0 – X = P0 – (PT – P0) – 2P0 – PT
\(k=\frac{2.303}{t} \log _{10} \frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{[\mathrm{~A}]_{t}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 95
Answer:
Rate constant = k = 2.35 x 10-2 min-1
Half-life period = t1/2 = 29.5 min

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(7) The decomposition of N2O5(g) at 320 K according to the following equation follows first order reaction :
N2O5(g) → 2NO2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)O2(g)
The initial concentration of N2O5(g) is 1-24 x 10-2 mol. L-1 and after 60 minutes,
0.20 x 10-2 mol. L-1. Calculate the rate con­stant of the reaction at 320 K.
Solution :
Given :
Initial concentration
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 96

(8) From the following data for the liquid phase reaction A → B, determine the order of reaction and calculate its rate constant:

t/s060012001800
[A]/Mol L-10.6240.4460.3180.226

Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 97
Answer:
Rate constant = k = 5.618 x 10-4 s-1

(9) The concentration of a reactant in a first-order reaction A → products, varies with time as follows :

t/min010203040
[AJ/M0.08000.05360.03590.02410.0161

Show that the reaction is first order.
Solution :
Given : A → Products
[A]0 = 0.08 M
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 98
Since all the values of rate constant using first order rate law equation come constant, the reaction is of first order.
Answer:
Order of the reaction is one.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(10) In a first order reaction x → y, 40% of the given sample of compound remains unreacted in 45 minutes. Calculate rate constant of the reac­tion.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 99
Answer:
k = 0.02036 min-1

(11) If the half-life period of a zero order reaction with initial concentration 0.1 M is 21.3 min, what will be the half-life when the concentration is 0.3 M?
Solution :
Given : Reaction is zero order. t1/2 = 21.3, when
initial concentration = [A]1 x = 0.1 M t1/2 = 2 when
initial concentration = [A]2 = 0.3 M
For zero order reaction, t1/2 = \(\frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{2 k}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 100
Answer:
Half life period = 63.9 min

(12) Consider the reaction 2A + 2B → 2C + D.
From the following data, calculate the order and rate constant of the reaction.

[A]0/M[B]0/Mr0/Ms_1
0.4880.1600.24
0.2440.1600.06
0.2440.3200.12

Write the rate law of the reaction.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 101

Hence the reaction is 2nd order in A.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 102
Hence the reaction is first order in B.
The order of overall reaction = n = nA + nB = 2 + 1 = 3
By rate law,
Rate = R = k[A]2[B]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 103
Answer:
(i) Order of reaction = 3
(ii) Rate constant = k = 63M-2s-1
(iii) Rate law : Rate = k [A]2 [B]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(20) In acidic solution, sucrose is converted to a mixture of glucose and fructose in pseudo first order reaction. It has been found that the con-centration of sucrose decreased from 20 mmol L-1 to 8 mmol L-1 in 38 minutes. What is the half-life of the reaction?
Solution :
Given :
Initial concentration = [A]0 = [sucrose]0
= 20 mmol L-1
= 20 x 10-3 mol L-1

Final concentration = [A]t = [sucrose]t
= 8 mmol L-1
= 8 x 10-3 mol L-3
time = t = 38 min
Half-life period = t1/2 =?
For first order reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 106
Answer:
Half-life period = t1/2 = 28.74 min

(21) The half-life of a first order reaction is 1.7 hours. How long will it take for 20 % of the reactant to disappear?
Solution :
Given : Half-life period = t1/2 = 1.7 hrs.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 107
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 108
Answer:
Time required for 20% reaction = 32.86 min

(22) The gaseous reaction A2 → 2A is first order in A2. After 12.3 minutes, 65% of A2 remains un­decomposed. How long will it take to decompose 90% of A2? What is the half-life of the reaction?
Solution :
Given : A2 → 2A
t1 = 12.3 min
[A]0 = 100, [A], = 65
t2 = ? for 90 % decomposition Half-life period = t1/2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 109
Answer:
(i) Time required for 90% reaction = 65.8 min
(ii) Half-life periods = t1/2 = 19.8 min

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(23) Sucrose decomposes in acid solution to give glucose and fructose according to the first-order rate law. The half-life of the rection is 3 hours. Calculate the fraction of sucrose which will remain after 8 hours.
Solution :
Given : Half-life period = t1/2 = 3 hrs
Time = t = 8 hrs
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 110
Answer:
Fraction of sucrose left = 0.1576

(24) The rate constant of a first order reaction is 6.8 x 10-4 s-1. If the initial concentration of the reactant is 0.04 M, what is its molarity after 20 minutes? How long will it take for 25% of the reactant to react?
Solution :
Given : Rate constant = k = 6.8 x 10-4s-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 111
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 112
Answer:
(i) Molarity of reactant after 20 min = 0.0177 M
(ii) Time for 25 % of the reaction = 7.05 min

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(25) The rate constant of a certain first-order reaction is 3.12 x 10-3 min-1,
(a) How many minutes does it take for the reactant concentra­tion to drop to 0.02 M if the initial concentration of the reactant is 0.045 M?
(b) What is the molarity of the reactant after 1.5 hr?
Solution :
Given : Rate constant = k = 3.12 x 10-3 min-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 113
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 114
Answer:
(i) Time required to drop the concentration to 0.02 M = 260 min
(ii) Molarity after 1.5 hr = 0.034 M

(26) From the following data for the decomposition of azoisopropane,
(CH32)2 CHN = NCH(CH3)2 → N2 + C6H14 estimate the rate of the reaction when total pressure is 0.75 stm.

Time/sTotal pressure/atm
00.65
2001.0

Solution :
Given :
(CH3)2CHN = NCH(CH3)2(g) → N2(g) + C6H14(g)
At time t P0 – x x x
At t = 0, [A]0 = P0 = 0.65 atm
At t = 200 s,
Total pressure = PT = 0.75 atm, Rate =?
From the reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 115
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 116
Answer:
Rate of the reaction = 2.13 x 10-3 atm s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(27) The rate constant for a zero order reaction is 0.04 Ms-1. Calculate the half-life period of the reaction, when the initial concentration of the reactant is 0.01 M.
Solution :
Given : Order of the reaction = 0
Rate constant = k = 0.04 Ms-1
Concentration = [A]0 = 0.01 M
Half-life period = t1/2 =?
For zero order reaction,
\(t_{1 / 2}=\frac{[\mathrm{A}]_{0}}{2 k}=\frac{0.01}{0.04}=0.25 \mathrm{~s}\)
Answer:
Half-life period = t1/2 = 0.25 s

(28) A flask contains a mixture of A and B. Both the compounds decompose by first order kinetics. The half-lives are 60 min for A and 15 min for B. If the initial concentrations of A and B are equal, how long will it take for the concentration of A to be three times that of B?
Solution :
Given :
For A : tm = 60 min For B : t1/2 = 15 min
Let initial concentrations of
[A]0 = [B]0 = M mol dm-3
After time t, let the concentrations be, [B]t = x, then [A]t = 3x
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 117
Answer:
After 31.8 min, concentration of A will be three time that of B. ‘

Question 53.
Obtain Arrhenius equation from collision theory of bimolecular reactions.
Answer:
Consider a bimolecular reaction,
A – B + C → A + B – C
(i) Collisions of reactant molecules : The basic
requirement for a reaction to occur is reacting species A – B and C must come together and collide. The rate of reaction will depend on the rate and frequency of collisions between them. As the i concentration and temperature increase, rate of collisions increases, hence the rate of reaction increases. But the rate of reaction is low as com-pared to the rate of collisions.

(ii) Energy of activation : For fruitful collisions, the colliding molecules must possess a certain amount of energy called activation energy Ea. Due to collisions between A – B and C, there is a change in electron distribution about three nuclei namely A, B and C so that old A – B bond is weakened while new bond is partially formed between B and C, and results in the formation of an activated complex or a transition state.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 119

Therefore transition state always has higher energy than reactants or products. Due to high energy, activated complex is unstable, short lived and decomposes into the products.

To form activated complex, the reactant mol-ecules have to climb the potential energy barrier i. e., activation energy level, hence molecular collision energy of colliding molecules must be high so that reactant molecules form activated complex and further decompose into products.

The fraction (f) of molecules at temperature T having activation energy Ea is given by f = e-Ea/RT.

If P represents the probability of Z collisions with proper orientation then,
Reaction rate = P x Z x e-Ea/RT,

Hence the rate constant k of the reaction may be represented as, k = A x e-Ea/RT where A is called frequency factor or pre-exponential factor and ΔH is the enthalpy change of the reaction. This equation is called Arrhenius equation.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 54.
Define :
(i) Transition state or activated complex.
Answer:
Transition state or activated complex : The configuration of atoms formed from reactant molecules and which is at the peak of barrier in energy profile diagram having maximum potential energy compared to reactants and products is called transition state or activated complex.

Question 55.
If a gaseous reaction has activation energy 75k J mol-1 at 298 K, find the fraction of successful collisions.
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 75 kJ mol-1 = 75000 mol-1; Temperature = T = 298 K The fraction (f) of successful collisions between the molecules with an energy equal to Ea is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 120
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 121
This shows that only 7 collisions out of 1014 collisions are sufficiently energetic to convert reactants into products.

Question 56.
Draw energy profile diagram and show
(i) Activated complex
(ii) Energy of activation for forward reaction
(iii) Energy of activation for backward reaction
(iv) Heat of reaction.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 122
(i) B → Activated complex
(ii) Ef → Energy of activation for forward reaction
(iii) Eb → Energy of activation for backward reaction
(iv) ΔH → Heat of reaction.

Question 57.
Obtain Arrhenius equation, k = A x e-Ea/RT
Answer:
(i) From experimental observations of variation in rate constants with temperature, Arrhenius developed a mathematical equation between reaction rate con­stant (k), activation energy (Ea) and temperature T.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 123

When a graph of Ink is plotted against reciprocal of temperature (1/T) a straight line with a negative slope is obtained. This is described by a mathematical equation as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 124

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

where k is a rate constant, R is the gas constant, E.a is activation energy, T is absolute temperature and the parameter A is called frequency factor or preexponential factor. This is Arrhenius equation.

Question 58.
What is a frequency factor or pre-exponential factor?
Answer:
In Arrhenius equation, k=A x e-Ea/RT the factor A is called frequency factor and since it is a coefficient of exponential expression, e~Ea/RT it is also called a pre-exponential factor.

In the above equation k is a rate constant at temperature T, Ea is the energy of activation and R is a gas constant.

A is related to frequency of collisions (Z) or rate of collisions. It is represented as, A = P x Z where P is the probability of collisions with proper orientations and Z is the frequency of collisions of reacting molecules.

The units of A are same as that of k.

Question 59.
Obtain a relation, \(\log _{10} \frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}=\frac{E_{\mathrm{a}}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}{2.303 R \times T_{1} \times T_{2}}\),
OR
Obtain a relation showing variation in rate constant with temperature.
Answer:
By arrhenius equation, the rate constant k of the reaction at a temperature T is represented as, k = A x e-Ea/RT where A is a frequency factor, R is a gas constant and Ed is the energy of activation.

By taking logarithm to the base e, we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 126

If kt and k2 are the rate constants at temperatures T1 and T2 respectively, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 127
By measuring the rate constants k1 and k2 at two different temperatures T1 and T2, the energy of activation Ea of the reaction can be obtained.

Question 60.
How is the energy of activation determined from rate constants at two different temperatures?
Answer:
For the given reaction, rate constants k1 and k2 are measured at two different temperatures T1 and T2 respectively. Then \(\log _{10} \frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}=\frac{E_{\mathrm{a}}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}{2.303 R \times T_{1} \times T_{2}}\) where Ea is the energy of activation.

Hence by substituting appropriate values, energy of activation Ea for the reaction is determined.

Question 61.
Obtain a relation, \(\frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}=\frac{\left(t_{1 / 2}\right)_{2}}{\left(t_{1 / 2}\right)_{1}}\), where k1 and k2 are rate constants while (t1/2)1 and (t1/2)2 are halflife periods of the first order reaction at temperatures T1 and T2 respectively. Write the relation for activation energy.
Answer:
The rate constant k and half-life period t1/2 are related as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 129

Question 62.
How does a catalyst differ from reaction intermediate?
Answer:

  • A catalyst accelerates the rate of reaction, while reaction intermediate has no effect on the rate of the reaction.
  • The catalyst is always present at the start of the reaction whereas reaction intermediate is produced during the mechanism of the reaction.
  • A catalyst is consumed in one of the steps of mechanism and regenerated in a subsequent step while the reaction intermediate is formed in one step and consumed in subsequent step.
  • The catalyst is stable but the reaction intermediate is unstable and short lived.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

Question 63.
How is lowering of activation energy in the presence of a catalyst obtained?
Answer:

  • In the presence of a catalyst, activation energy of a reaction is lowered, hence rate and rate constant increase.
  • If ΔEa is lowering of activation energy, while k1 and k2 are the rate constants of the reaction in the absence and presence of the catalyst respectively then,
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 135

Question 64.
The rate constant of a reaction of 400 K is 1.35 x 102s-1. When a nickel catalyst is used, the rate constant of the reaction becomes 3.8 x 102s-1. Find activation energy. If the initial activation energy is 20 KJ, what will be activation energy in the presence of the catalyst?
Answer:
In the presence of a catalyst, the activation energy is lowered and rate constant is increased.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 136
The decrease activation energy of the reaction in the presence of a catalyst will be Ea = 20 – 3.446 = 16.554 kJ.

Solved Examples 6.6-6.7

Question 65.
Solve the following :

(1) Calculate activation energy for a reaction of which rate constant becomes four times when temperature changes from 30 °C to 50 °C. (Given : R = 8.314 K-1mol-1)
Solution :
Given : k2 = 4k1
T1 = 273 + 30 = 303 K
T2 = 273 + 50 = 323 K
Activation energy = Ea =?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 141
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 56.41 kJ

(2) The rate constant of a first order reaction are 0.58 s-1 at 313 K and 0.045 s-1 at 293 K. What is the energy of activation for the reaction?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 142
Answer:
Energy of activation = Ea = 97.46 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(3) The energy of activation for a first order reaction is 104 kJ mol-1. The rate constant at 25°C is 3.7 x 10-5s-1. What is the rate constant at 30 °C?
Solution :
Given : Energy of activation = Ea = 104 kJ mol-1 = 104 x 103 mol-1
Initial rate constant – k1= 3.7 x 10-5 s-1
Initial temperature = T1 = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Final temperature = T2 = 273 + 30 = 303 K
Final rate constant = k2 =?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 143
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 144
Answer:
Rate constant at 30 0C = 7.4 x 10-4 s-1

(4) What is the activation energy for a reaction whose rate constant doubles when temperature changes from 30 °C to 40 °C?
Solution :
Given :
Initial rate constant = k1
and final rate constant = k2; \(\frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}\) = 2
Initial temperature = T1 = 273 + 30 = 303 K
Final temperature = T2 = 273 + 40 = 313 K
Energy of activation = Ea = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 145
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 54.66 kj mol-1

(5) The activation energy for a certain reaction is 334.4 kj mol-1. How many times larger is the rate constant at 610 K than the rate constant at 600 K?
Solution :
Given :
Activating energy = Ea = 334.4 kJ mol-1
= 334.4 x 103 J mol-1
Initial temperature = T1 = 600 K
Final temperature = T2 = 610 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 146
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 147
Answer:
Rate constant increase three time.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(6) The rate of a reaction at 600 K is 7.5 x 105 times the rate of the same reaction at 400 K. Calculate the energy of activation for the reaction. (Hint: The ratio of rates is equal to the ratio of rate constants.)
Solution :
Given : \(\frac{R_{2}}{R_{1}}\) = 7.5 x 105.
From the hint, \(\frac{R_{2}}{R_{1}}=\frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}\) = 7.5 x 10s
Initial temperature = T1 = 400 K
Final temperature = T2 = 600 K
Energy of activation = Ea = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 148
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 135 kj mol-1

(7) The rate constant of a first order reaction at 25 °C is 0.24 s’. If the energy of activation of the reaction is 88 kJmol-1, at what temperature would this reaction have rate constant of 4 x 10-2s-1?
Solution :
Given : k2 =0.24s-1; k2 =4 x 10-2s-1 T1 = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Energy of activation = Ea
= 88 kJ mol-1 = 88000 J mol-1
T2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 149
Answer:
Temperature = 283.6 K

(8) The half-life of a first order reaction is 900 min at 820 K. Estimate its half-life at 720 K if the energy of activation ot the reaction is 250 kJ mol-1 (1.464 x 105 mm).
Solution:
Given: Initial half-life period = (t1/2)1 = 900 min
Energy of activation = 250 kJ mol-1
= 250 x 103 kJ mol-1
Initial temperature = T1 = 820 K
Final temperature = T2 = 720 K
Final half-life period = (t1/2)2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 150
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 151
Answer:
Half-life period = 1.46 x 105 min

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(9) The rate of a gaseous reaction is 6.08 x 10-2 Ms-1 at 50°C. What will be its rate at 60°C? Energy of activation of the reaction is 18.26 kj mol-1. (R = 8.314k-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Initial rate = R1 = 6.08 x 10″2Ms-1
Energy of activation = Ea = 18.26 kJmol-1 = 18260 mol-1
Initial temperature = T1 = 273 + 50 = 323 K
Final temperature = T2 = 273 + 60 = 333 K
Final rate of the reaction = R2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 152
Answer:
Rate of reaction at 37°C = 7.46 x 10-2 Ms-1

(10) A first order gas-phase reaction has an energy of activation of 240 kj mol-1. If the frequency factor of the reaction is 1.6 x 1013 s-1, calculate its rate constant at 600 K.
Solution :
Given : Energy of activation = Ea = 240 kJ mol-1 = 240 x 103 mol-1
Frequency factor = A = 1.6x 1013 s-1
Temperature = T= 600 K
Rate constant = k = ?
By Arrhenius equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 153
Answeer:
Rate constant = k = 2.01 x 10-8 s-1

(11) In the Arrhenius equation for a first order reaction, the values of ‘A’ and ‘Ea’ are 4 x 1013 sec-1 and 98.6 kJ mol-1 respectively. At what temperature will its half-life period be 10 minutes? [R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-2]
Solution :
Given
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 154
= 311.3 K
Answer:
Temperature = T = 311.3 K

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

(12) The frequency factor for a second-order reaction is 4.83 x 1012M-1s-1 at 27°C. If the rate con­stant of the reaction is 1.37 x 10-3M-1s-1, find the energy of activation.
Solution :
Given : Frequency factor = A
= 4.83 x 1012 M-1s-1
Rate constant = k= 1.37 x 10-3 M-1s-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 27 = 300 K
Energy of activation = Ea = ?
By Arrhenius equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 155
Answer:
Energy of activation = Ea = 89.305 kJ mol1

(13) Rate constants (k) for a reaction were measured at different temperatures. When log10ft was plotted against 1/T, the slope of the graph was 3.28 x 103. Calculate the energy of activation.
Solution :
Given : Slope of a graph = 3.28 x 103
Activation energy = Ea = ?
From Arrhenius equation, k = A x e-Ea/RT
\(\log _{10} k=\frac{-E_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 R} \times \frac{1}{T}+\log _{10} A\)

The graph is a straight line with slope equal to Ea/2.303R
∴ \(\frac{E_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 R}\) = 3.28 x 103
∴ Ea = 2.303/? x 3.28 x 103
= 2.303 x 8.314 x 3.28 x 103
= 62.8 x 103 mol-1
= 62.8 kJ mol-1
Answer:
Activation energy = Ea = 62.8 kj mol-1

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 66.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. The rate of a reaction is expressed in the units
(a) L mol-1t-1
(b) mol dm-3 t-1
(c) Ms
(d) M-1s-1
Answer:
(b) mol dm-3 t-1

2. For a gaseous reaction the unit of rate of reaction is
(a) L atm s-1
(b) atm mol-1s-1
(c) atm s-1
(d) mol s
Answer:
(c) atm s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

3. In the reaction A 4- 3B → 2C, the rate of formation of C is
(a) the same as rate of consumption of A
(b) the same as the rate of consumption of B
(c) twice the rate of consumption of A
(d) 3/2 times the rate of consumption of B
Answer:
(c) twice the rate of consumption of A

4. The units of rate of a reaction and rate constant are same for a reaction of order.
(a) zero
(b) one
(c) two
(d) fractional
Answer:
(a) zero

5. During the progress of a reaction, the rate constant of a reaction
(a) increases
(b) decreases
(c) remains unchanged
(d) first increases and then decreases
Answer:
(a) increases

6. For the reaction, 2A → 3C, the reaction rate is equal to
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 158
Answer:
(c)

7. For the reaction, 2X + 3Y → 4Z, reaction may be represented as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 159
Answer:
(b)

8. For the reaction 2N2O5(g) → 4NO2(g) + O2(g) liquid bromine, which of the following rate equation is ‘incorrect’?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 160
Answer:
(b)

9. The rate of reaction for certain reaction is expressed as :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 161
The reaction is
(a) 3A → 2B + C
(b) 2B → 3A + C
(c) 2B+C → 3A
(d) 3A + 2B → C
Answer:
(c) 2B+C → 3A

10. Order of a reaction is
(a) number of molecules reacting in a reaction
(b) the number of molecules whose concentration changes during a reaction
(c) the number of molecules of reactants whose concentration determine the rate
(d) increase in number of molecules of products
Answer:
(c) the number of molecules of reactants whose concentration determine the rate

11. The unit of rate constant for zero order reaction is
(a) t-1
(b) mol dm-3 t-1
(c) mol-1 dm3 t-1
(d) mol-2 dm6 t-1
Answer:
(b) mol dm-3 t-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

12. A → B is a first order reaction with rate 6.6 x 10-5 ms-1. When [A] is 0.6 m, rate constant of the reaction is-
(a) 1.1 x 10-5 s-1
(b) 1.1 x 10-4 s-1
(c) 9 x 10-5 s-1
(d) 9 x 10-4 s-1
Answer:
(b) 1.1 x 10-4 s-1

13. For a first order reaction, when the rate of a reaction is plotted against concentration of the reactant, then the graph obtained is
(a) a curve
(b) a straight line with negative slope
(c) a straight line with a positive slope
(d) a straight line with positive intercept
Answer:
(c) a straight line with a positive slope

14. For a chemical reaction, A → products, the rate of reaction doubles when the concentration of ‘A’ is increased by a factor of 4, the order of reaction is
(a) 2
(b) 0.5
(c) 4
(d) 1
Answer:
(b) 0.5

15. The order of reaction between equimolar mixture of H2 and Cl2 in the presence of sunlight is
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
Answer:
(a) 0

16. Molecularity of reaction can be
(a) zero
(b) integral
(c) fractional
(d) negative
Answer:
(b) integral

17. The reaction,
CH3COOC2H5 + H2O \(\stackrel{\mathrm{H}^{+}}{\longrightarrow}\) CH3COOH + C2H5OH is of
(a) zero order
(b) first order
(c) second order
(d) pseudo first order reaction
Answer:
(d) pseudo first order reaction

18. A reaction is first order with respect to reactant A and second order with respect to reactant B. The rate law for the reaction is given by
(a) rate = k[A][B]2
(b) rate = [A][B]2
(c) rate = k [A]2[B]
(d) rate = k[A]0[B]2
Answer:
(a) rate = k[A][B]2

19. Molecularity of an elementary reaction
(a) may be zero
(b) is always integral
(c) may be semi-integral
(d) may be integral, fractional or zero.
Answer:
(b) is always integral

20. The unit of rate constant for first order reaction is
(a) min-2
(b) s
(c) s-1
(d) min
Answer:
(c) s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

21. The integrated rate equation for first order reaction A → products is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 162
Answer:
(b)

22. Time required to complete 90% of the first order reaction is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 163
Answer:
(a)

23. The rate constant of a first order reaction is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 164
Answer:
(d)

24. The half-life of a first order reaction is 30 min and the initial concentration of the reactant is 0.1M. If the initial concentration of reactant is doubled, then the half-life of the reaction will be
(a) 1800s
(c) 15 min
(b) 60 min
(d) 900s
Answer:
(a) 1800s

25. The rate constant for a first order reaction is loos the time required for completion of 50% of reaction is-
(a) 0.0693 milliseconds
(b) 0.693 milliseconds
(c) 6.93 milliseconds
(d) 69.3 milliseconds
Answer:
(c) 6.93 milliseconds

26. The slope of the straight line obtained by plotting rate versus concentration of reactant for a first order reaction is
(a) – k
(b) – k/2.303
(c) k/2.303
(d) k
Answer:
(d) k

27. If C0 and C are the concentrations of a reactant initially and after time t then, for a first order reaction
(a) C = C0ekr
(b) C0 = 1/C e-kr
(c) C = C0e-kr
(d) CO = C ekr
Answer:
(b) C0 = 1/C e-kr

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

28. A graph corresponding to a first order reaction is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 165
Answer:
(b)

29. For two first order reactions, A → products and B → products, k1 and k2 are the rate constants. The fIrst reaction (A) is slower than the second reaction (B). The graphical observation corresponding to this observation will be
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 166
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 167
Answer:
(b)

30. Half-life (t1/2) of first order reaction is
(a) dependent of concentration
(b) independent of concentration
(c) dependent of time
(d) dependent of molecularity
Answer:
(b) independent of concentration

31. For a first order reaction, the half-life period is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 168
Answer:
(c)

32. When half-life period of a zero order reaction is plotted against concentration of the reactant at constant temperature, the graph obtained is
(a) a curve
(b) a straight line with a positive slope
(c) a straight line with a negative slope
(d) an exponential graph
Answer:
(b) a straight line with a positive slope

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

33. The rate of a reaction between A and B is R = k [A]n x [B]m On doubling the concentration of A and halving the concentration of B, the ratio of the new rate to the earlier rate of the reaction will be
(a) m + n
(b) n – m
(c) 2(n-m)
(d) \(\frac{1}{{ }_{2} n+m}\)
Answer:
(c) 2(n-m)

34. Consider the reaction
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 169
(a) 0,052 M/s
(b) 0.114 M/s
(c) 0.026 M/s
(d) -0.026 M/s
Answer:
(c)

35. The rate of the first order reaction A → products is 0.01 M/s, when reactant concentration is 0.2 M. The rate constant for the reaction will be
(a) 0.05 s-1
(b) 0.05 min-1
(c) 0.1 s-1
(d) 0.01 s-1
Answer:
(a) 0.05 s-1

36. The rate constant of a reaction
(a) decreases with increasing Ea
(b) decreases with decreasing Ea
(c) is independent of Ea
(d) decreases with increasing temperature
Answer:
(a) decreases with increasing Ea

37. The slope of a graph In [A]t versus t for a first order reaction is -2.5 x 10-3s-1. The rate constant for the reaction will be
(a) 5.76 x 10-3s-1
(b) 1.086 x 10-3s-1
(c) -2.5 x 10-3s-1
(d) 2.5 x 10-3s-1
Answer:
(d) 2.5 x 10-3s-1

38. For the reaction, Cl2 + 2I → 2CI + I2, the initial concentration of I was 0.2 mol L and the concentration after 20 minutes was 0.18 mol L-1. Then the rate of formation of I2 in mol L min-1 will be
(a) 1 x 10-3
(b) 5 x 10-4
(c) 1 x 10-4
(d) 2 x 10-3
Answer:
(b) 5 x 10-4

39. A catalyst increases the rate of the reaction by
(a) increasing Ea
(b) increasing T
(c) decreasing Ea
(d) decreasing T
Answer:
(c) decreasing Ea

40. The Arrhenius equation is
(a) A = ke-Ea/RT
(b) A/k = e-Ea/RT
(c) k = AeEa/RT
(d) k = Aee-RT/Ea
Answer:
(b) A/k = e-Ea/RT

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

41. The Arrhenius equation is
(a) k = Ae-RT/Ea
(b) A = keEa/RT
(c) k = Ae-RT/Ea
(d) A = keEa/RT
Answer:
(d) A = keEa/RT

42. When the initial concentration of the reactant is doubled, the half-life period of the reaction is also doubled. Hence the order of the reaction is
(a) one
(b) two
(c) fraction
(d) zero
Answer:
(d) zero

43. If k1 and k2 are the rate constants of the given reaction in the presence and absence of the catalyst, then
(a) k1 = k2
(b) k1 > k2
(c) k1 < k2
(d) k1 > k2
Answer:
(b) k1 > k2

44. If the ratio of rate constants at two temperatures for the given reaction is 2.5, the ratio of corresponding half-life periods is
(a) 2.5
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 0.4
Answer:
(d) 0.4

45. For a zero order reaction, if Co is the initial concentration, then the half life period will be
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 170
Answer:
(c)

46. The order of nuclear disintegration reaction is
(a) zero
(b) one
(c) two
(d) fraction
Answer:
(b) one

47. The unit of rate constant for zero order reaction is
(a) mol L-2 s-1
(b) mol-1Ls-1
(c) mol2L-2s-1
(d) mol L-1 s-1
Answer:
(d) mol L-1 s-1

48. When a graph of log10k is plotted against 1 /T, the slope of the line is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 171
Answer:
(d)

49. The slope of a graph obtained by plotting half-life period and initial concentration of the reactant in zero order reaction is
\((a) \frac{2.303}{k}
(b) \frac{1}{k}
(c) \frac{1}{2 k}
(d) \frac{k}{2.303}\)
Answer:
(c)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics

50. When a graph of log, 0k against 1/T is plotted, for reaction, a graph with slope equal to 1 x 103 is obtained. Hence the activation energy is
(a) 8.314 x 103 Jmor-1
(b) 3.61 kJ mol-1
(c) 4.85 x 103 Jmol-1
(d) 19.1 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(d) 19.1 kJ mol-1

51. The correct expression for activation energy is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 172
Answer:
(c)

52. In the reaction, 2A(g) → B(g), the initial pressure of A is 2.5 atm. After 10 minutes the pressure becomes 2.2 atm. Hence the pressure of A is
(a) 1.2 atm
(b) 1.9 atm
(c) 2.3 atm
(d) 0.3 atm
Answer:
(b) 1.9 atm

53. The half-life period of zero order reaction A → product is given by –
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Chemical Kinetics 173
Answer:
(c)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 1.
What is electrochemistry?
Answer:
Electrochemistry: It is the branch of physical chemistry that involves the study of the inter-relation between chemical changes and electrical energy and is also concerned with the electrical properties of electrolytic solutions such as resistance and conductance.

Question 2.
What is electric conduction?
Answer:
The transfer of electric charge or electrons from one point to another is called electric conduction which results in an electric current.

Question 3.
What are the electric conductors?
Answer:
The substances that allow the flow of electricity or electric charge transfer through them are called electric conductors.

Question 4.
What is a flow of electricity or a transfer of electric charge?
Answer:
The flow of electricity or a transfer of electric charge through a conductor involves the transfer of electrons from one point to the other point. This takes place under the influence of applied electric potential.

Question 5.
What are the types of electric conductors? On what basis are they classified?
Answer:
The electric conductors are classified according to the mechanism of the transfer of electrons or charge. There are two types of conductors as follows :

(i) Electrons (or metallic) conductors : The electric conductors through which the conduction of electricity takes place by a direct flow of electrons under the influence of applied potential are called electronic conductors.

In this case, there is no transfer of matter like atoms or ions. For example, solid and molten metals such as Al, Cu, etc.

(ii) Electrolytic conductors : The conductors in which the conduction of electricity takes place by the migration of positive ions (cations) and negative ions (anions) of the electrolyte are called electrolytic conductors. In this, the conduction involves the transfer of matter and it is accompanied with chemical changes. For example, solutions of electrolytes (strong and weak), molten salts.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 6.
Distinguish between electronic and electrolytic conductors.
Answer:
Electronic conductors:

  1. The flow of electricity takes place by direct flow of electrons through the conductor.
  2. The conduction does not involve the transfer of a matter.
  3. No chemical change is involved during conduction.
  4. The resistance of the conductor increases and conductivity decreases with the increase in temperature.
  5. The conductance of metallic conductors is very high.
  6. Examples are solid or molten metals, such as Al, Cu, etc.

Electrolytic conductors:

  1. The electron transfer takes place by the migration of ions (cations and anions) of the electrolyte.
  2. The conduction involves the transfer of a matter.
  3. Chemical changes are always involved during the passage of an electric current.
  4. The resistance decreases and the conductivity increases with the increase in temperature.
  5. The conductance of the electrolytes is comparatively low.
  6. Examples are aqueous solutions of acids, bases or salts.

Question 7.
What information is provided by measurement of conductivities of solutions?
Answer:

  • The conducting and nonconducting properties of solutions can be identified by the measurement of their conductivities.
  • The substances like sucrose and urea which do not dissociate in aqueous solutions have same conductivity as that of water. Hence they are nonelectrolytes.
  • The substances like KCl, CH3COOH, NaOH, etc. dissociate in their aqueous solutions and their conductivities are higher than water. Hence they are electrolytes.
  • On the basis of high or low electrical conductivity, the electrolytes can be classified as strong and weak electrolytes. The solutions of strong electrolytes have high conductivities while solutions of weak electrolytes have lower conductivities.

Question 8.
What is Ohm’s law?
Answer:
Ohm’s law : According to Ohm’s law, the electrical resistance R of a conductor is equal to the electric potential difference, V divided by the electric current, I.
R = \(\frac{V}{I}\) ohm

Question 9.
What are SI units of
(a) electrical resistance
(b) potential and
(c) electric current?
Answer:
(a) The SI unit of electrical resistance is Ohm denoted by Ω (omega).
(b) The SI unit of potential is volt denoted by V.
(c) The SI unit of electric current is ampere denoted by A.

Question 10.
How is electrical conductance of a solution denoted ? What are its units ?
Answer:
The electrical conductance of a solution is denoted by G and it is the reciprocal of resistance, R.
G = \(\frac{1}{R}\)
The unit of G is siemens denoted by S or Ω-1.
Hence we can write, S = Ω-1 = AV-1 = CV-1S-1 where A is ampere and C is coulomb.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 11.
What is electrical conductance? What are its units ?
Answer:
The reciprocal of the electrical resistance of a solution is called the conductance. It is represented by G.
∴ Conductance (G) = \(\frac{1}{\text { Resistance }}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\)
The conductance has units of reciprocal of ohm (Ω-1, ohm-1 or mho). In SI units, conductance has units as Siemens, (S). (1 S = 1 Ω-1 = 1 ohm-1 = 1 mho = AV-1 = CV-1 S, where C represents electric charge in coulomb, and A represents current strength)

Question 12.
What is specific conductance or conductivity?
Answer:
The reciprocal of specific resistance or resistivity is called specific conductance or conductivity.
If ρ is the resistivity then,
conductivity = \(\frac{1}{\text { resistivity }}=\frac{1}{\rho}\)
Conductivity is denoted by κ (kappa), where κ = \(\frac{1}{\rho}\)
It is the conductance of a conductor that is 1 m in length and 1 m2 in cross section area in SI units. (In C.G.S. units, it is the resistance of a conductor that is 1 cm in length and 1 cm2 in cross section area.) It is the conductance of a conductor of volume 1 m3 (or in C.G.S. units, the volume of 1 cm3).

Question 13.
What are the units of specific conductance or conductivity?
Answer:
If ρ is a resistivity and κ is conductivity or specific conductance, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 1
(where S is Siemens)
(In C.G.S. system, the units of κ are Ω-1 cm-1 or S cm-1 which are commonly used.)

Question 14.
Define molar conductivity. What is the significance of it ?
Answer:
Molar conductivity: It is defined as a conductance of a volume of the solution containing ions from one mole of an electrolyte when placed between two parallel plate electrodes 1 cm apart and of large area, sufficient to accommodate the whole solution between them, at constant temperature. It is denoted by ∧m.

Thus, the significance of molar conductivity is the conductance due to ions from one mole of an electrolyte.

Question 15.
Obtain a relation between conductivity (κ) and molar conductivity (∧m).
Answer:
Conductivity or specific conductance (κ) is the conductance of 1 cm3 of the solution in C.G.S. units, while molar conductivity is the conductance of a solution containing one mole of an electrolyte. Consider C molar solution, i.e., C moles of an electrolyte present in 1 litre or 1000 cm3 of the solution.
∴ C moles of an electrolyte are present in 1000 cm3 solution.
∴ 1 mole of an electrolyte is present in \(\frac{1000}{\mathrm{C}}\) cm
solution.
Now,
∴ Conductance of 1 cm3 of this solution is κ,
∴ Conductance of \(\frac{1000}{\mathrm{C}}\) cm3 of the solution is \(\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{C}\)
This represents molar conductivity, ∧m.
∴ ∧m = \(\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{C}\) cm2 mol-1 (in C.G.S units)
[In case of SI units :
Consider a solution in which C moles of an electrolyte are present in 1 m3 of solution.
Conductivity κ is the conductance of 1 m3 of solution.
∵ C moles of an electrolyte are present in 1 m3 solution.
∴ 1 mol of an electrolyte is present in \(\frac{1}{C}\) solution.
∵ Conductance of 1 m3 of this solution is κ.
∴ Conductance of \(\frac{1}{C}\) m3 of the solution is \(\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{C}}\)
This represents molar conductivity, ∧m.
∴ ∧m = \(\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{C}}\)Ω-1 m2 mol-1 (In SI units).]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 16.
What are the units of molar conductivity, ∧m?
Answer:
In SI units: Conductivity κ is expressed in Ω-1m-1 (or S m-1) and concentration of the solution is expressed in mol m-3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 2
In C.G.S. units : Conductivity is expressed in Ω-1 cm-1 (or S cm-1) and concentration of the solution is expressed in mol L-1 or moles in 1000 cm3 of the solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 3

Question 17.
Explain the variation of molar conductivity with concentration for strong and weak electrolytes.
OR
How is the molar conductivity of strong electrolytes at zero concentration determined by graphical method? Why is this method not useful for weak electrolytes?
Answer:
(i) As the dilution of an electrolytic solution increases, the dissociation of the electrolyte increases, hence the total number of ions increases, therefore, the molar conductivity increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 4
Fig. 5.5 : Variation of molar conductivity with \(\sqrt{\mathbf{c}}\)
(ii) The increase in molar conductivity with increase in dilution or decrease in concentration is different for strong and weak electrolytes.
(iii) On dilution, the molar conductivity of strong electrolytes increases rapidly and approaches to a maximum limiting value at infinite dilution or zero concentration and represented as ∧ ∞ or ∧0 or ∧0m. In case of weak electrolytes which dissociate less as compared to strong electrolytes, the molar conductivity is low and increases slowly in high concentration region, but increases rapidly at low concentration or high dilution. This is because the extent of dissociation increases with dilution rapidly.
(v) ∧0 values for strong electrolytes can be obtained by extrapolating the linear graph to zero concentration (or infinite dilution). However ∧0 for the weak electrolytes cannot be obtained by this method, since the graph increases exponentially at very high dilution and does not intersect ∧m axis at zero concentration.

Question 18.
Why has the molar conductance of an electrolyte the maximum value at infinite dilution ?
Answer:

  • As the dilution of an electrolytic solution increases or concentration decreases, the dissociation of an electrolyte increases.
  • At infinite dilution, the dissociation of an electrolyte is complete (100% dissociation). Hence all the ions from one mole of an electrolyte are available to carry electricity.

Therefore the molar conductance at infinite dilute (∧0) for a given electrolyte has the highest or limiting value. It is always constant for the given electrolyte at constant temperature.

Question 19.
State Kohlrausch’s law.
OR
State and explain Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
Answer:
(A) Statement of Kohlrausch’s law : This states that at infinite dilution of the solution, each ion of an electrolyte migrates independently of its co-ions and contributes independently to the total molar conductivity of the electrolyte, irrespective of the nature of other ions present in the solution.

(B) Explanation : Both the ions, cation and anion of the electrolyte make a definite contribution to the molar conductivity of the electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration (∧0).
If \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\) are the molar ionic conductivities of cation and anion respectively at infinite dilution, then
0 = \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) + \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\)
This is known as Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
For an electrolyte, Bx Ay giving x number of cations and y number of anions,
0 = x\(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) + y\(\lambda_{-}^{0}\)

(C) Applications of Kohlrausch’s law :
(1) With this law, the molar conductivity of a strong electrolyte at zero concentration can be determined. For example,
\(\wedge_{0(\mathrm{KCl})}=\lambda_{\mathrm{K}^{+}}^{0}-\lambda_{\mathrm{Cl}^{-}}^{0}\)
(2) ∧0 values of weak electrolyte with those of strong electrolytes can be obtained. For example,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 5

Question 20.
State Kohlrausch’s law and write mathematical expression of molar conductivity of the given solution at infinite dilution.
Answer:
Statement of Kohlrausch’s law : This states that at infinite dilution of the solution, each ion of an electrolyte migrates independently of its co-ions and contributes independently to the total molar conductivity of the electrolyte, irrespective of the nature of other ions present in the solution.

This law of independent migration of ions is represented as
0 = \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) + \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\).
where ∧0 is the molar conductivity of the electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration while \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\) are the molar ionic conductivities of cation and anion respectively at infinite dilution.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 21.
Explain the determination of molar conductivity of a weak electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration using Kohlrausch’s law.
Answer:
Molar conductivity of a weak electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration cannot be measured experimentally.
Consider the molar conductivity (∧0) of a weak acid, CH3COOH at zero concentration. By Kohlrausch s law, ∧0CH3COOH = λ0CH3COOH + λ0 H+ where λ0 CH3COO and λ0 H+ are the molar ionic conductivities of CH3COO and H+ ions respectively.

If ∧0CH3COONa, ∧0HCl and ∧0NaCl are the molar conductivities of CH3COONa, HCl and NaCl respectively at zero concentration, then by
Kohlrausch’s law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 6
Hence, from ∧0 values of strong electrolytes, ∧0 of a weak electrolyte CH3COOH, at infinite dilution can be calculated.

Question 22.
How is the degree of dissociation related to the molar conductance of the electrolytic solution ?
Answer:
(i) At zero concentration or at infinite dilution, the molar conductivity has a maximum value denoted by ∧0.
(ii) This is due to complete dissociation of the weak electrolyte making all the ions available from one mole of the electrolyte to carry electricity at zero concentration.
(iii) If α is the degree of dissociation, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 7
This suggests that at zero concentration or infinite dilution, the electrolyte is completely (100%) dissociated.

Question 23.
Write the relation between molar conductivity and molar ionic conductivities for the following electrolytes :
(a) KBr, (b) Na2SO4, (c) AlCl3.
Answer:
(a) If ∧0 is molar conductivity of an electrolyte at infinite dilution and \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\) are molar ionic conductivities then,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 8

Question 24.
How is molar conductivity of an electrolytic solution measured ?
Answer:
The resistance of an electrolytic solution is measured by using a conductivity cell and Wheatstone bridge.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 9
Fig. 5.6 : Measurement of conductance

The measurement of molar conductivity of a solution involves two steps as follows :
Step I : Determination of cell constant of the conductivity cell :
KCl solution (0.01 M) whose conductivity is accurately known (κ = 0.00141 Ω-1 cm-1) is taken in a beaker and the conductivity cell is dipped. The two electrodes of the cell are connected to one arm while the variable known resistance (R) is placed in another arm of Wheatstone bridge.

A current detector D’ which is a head phone or a magic eye is used. J is the sliding jockey (contact) that slides on the arm AB which is a wire of uniform cross section. A source of A.C. power (alternating power) is used to avoid electrolysis of the solution.

By sliding the jockey on wire AB, a balance point (null point) is obtained at C. Let AC and BC be the lengths of wire.
If Rsolution is the resistance of KCl solution and Rx is the known resistance then by Wheatstone’s bridge principle,
\(\frac{R_{\text {solution }}}{\mathrm{BC}}=\frac{R_{x}}{\mathrm{AC}}\)
∴ Rsolution = \(\mathrm{BC} \times \frac{R_{x}}{\mathrm{AC}}\)
Then the cell constant ‘b’ of the conductivity cell is obtained by, b = κKCl × Rsolution.

Step II : Determination of conductivity of the given solution :
KCl solution is replaced by the given electrolytic solution and its resistance (Rs) is measured by Wheatstone bridge method by similar manner by obtaining a null point at D.
The conductivity (κ) of the given solution is, cell constant b
κ = \(\frac{\text { cell constant }}{R_{\mathrm{s}}}=\frac{b}{R_{\mathrm{s}}}\)

Step III: Calculation of molar conductivity :
The molar conductivity (∧m) is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 10
Since the concentration of the solution is known, ∧m can be calculated.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Solved Examples 5.3

Question 25.
Solve the following :

(1) The resistance of a solution is 2.5 × 103 ohm. Find the conductance of the solution.
Solution :
Given : Resistance of solution = R = 2.5 × 103
Conductance of solution = G = ?
G = \(\frac{1}{R}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2.5 \times 10^{3}}\) ohm-1 (Ω-1 or S)
= 4 × 10-3-1 (or S)
Ans. Conductance = G = 4 × 10-3-1

(2) A conductivity cell has two electrodes 20 mm apart and of cross section area 1.8 cm2. Find the cell constant.
Solution :
Given: Distance between two electrodes = l
= 20 mm
= 2 cm
Cross section area = a = 1.8 cm
Cell constant = b = ?
b = \(\frac{l}{a}=\frac{2}{1.8}\) = 1.111 cm-1
Ans. Cell constant = 1.111 cm-1

(3) The conductivity of 0.02 M AgNO3 at 25 °C is 2.428 × 10-3-1 cm-1. What is its molar conductivity ?
Solution :
Given : Concentration of solution = C = 0.02 M AgNO3
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Conductivity = κ = 2.428 × 10-3-1 cm-1 (or S cm-1)
Molar conductivity = ∧m = ?
m = \(\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{C}\)
= \(\frac{2.428 \times 10^{-3} \times 1000}{0.02}\)
= 121.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 (or 121.4 S cm2 mol-1)
Ans. Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 121.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

(4) 0.05 M NaOH solution offered a resistance of 31.6 in a conductivity cell at 298 K. If the cell constant of the cell is 0.367 cm-1, calculate the molar conductivity of NaOH solution.
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.05 M NaOH
Resistance = R = 31.6 Ω
Cell constant = b = 0.367 cm-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 11
Ans. Molar conductivity = ∧m = 232.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(5) A conductivity cell filled with 0.1 M KCl gives at 25 °C a resistance of 85.5 ohms. The conductivity of 0.1 M KCl at 25° is 0.01286 ohm-1 cm-1. The same cell filled with 0.005 M HCl gives a resistance of 529 ohms. What is the molar conductivity of HCl solution at 25 °C ?
Solution :
Given : Resistance of KCl solution = RKCl = 85.5 Ω
Conductivity of KCl solution = κKCl
= 0.01286 ohm-1 cm-1
Concentration = C = 0.005 M HCl
Resistance of HCl solution = Rsoln = 529 ohms
Molar conductivity of HCl = ∧m(HCl) = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 12
Ans. Molar conductivity of HCl solution = ∧m(HCl)
= 416 ohm-1 cm2 mol-1

(6) The molar conductivity of 0.05 M BaCl2 solution at 25 °C is 223 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. What is its conductivity?
Solution :
Given : Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 223 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Concentration = C = 0.05 M BaCl2
Conductivity = κ = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 13
Ans. Conductivity = κ = 0.01115 Ω-1 cm-1

(7) Conductivity of a solution is 6.23 × 10-5-1 cm-1 and its resistance is 13710 Ω. If the electrodes are 0.7 cm apart, calculate the cross-sectional area of electrode.
Solution :
Given : κ = 6.23 × 10-5-1 cm-1
R = 13710 Ω
l = 0.7 cm
a = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 14
Ans. Cross sectional area of electrode = 0.8195 cm2

(8) A conductivity cell filled with 0.01 M KCl gives at 25 °C the resistance of 604 ohms. The conductivity of KCl at 25 °C is 0.00141 Ω-1 cm-1. The same cell filled with 0.001 M AgNO3 gives a resistance of 6529 ohms. Calculate the molar conductivity of 0.001 M AgNO3 solution at 25 °C.
Solution :
Given : Resistance of KCl solution = RKCl
= 604 ohm (Ω)
Conductivity of KCl solution = κKCl
= 0.00141 Ω-1 cm-1
Concentration = C = 0.001 M AgNO3
Resistance of solution = Rsol = 6529 ohm (Ω)
Molar conductivity = ∧m = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 15
cell constant b
= 130.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Ans. Molar conductivity of AgNO3 solution = ∧m
= 130.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

(9) Resistance and conductivity of a cell containing 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K are 1500 Ω and 1.46 × 10-4 S.cm-1 respectively. What is cell constant.
Solution :
Given : Resistance of KCl solution = 1500 Ω, conductivity of KCl solution = κ = 1.46 × 10-4 S.cm-1, Cell constant = b = ?
Cell constant = Conductivity (k) × Resistance
= 1.46 × 10-4 × 1500
= 0.219 cm-1
Ans. Cell constant = 0.219 cm-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(10) A conductivity cell filled with 0.02 M H2SO4 gives at 25 °C resistance of 122 ohms. If the molar conductivity of 0.02 H2SO4 is 618 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1, what is the cell constant?
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.02 M H2SO4
Resistance of H2SO4 solution = Rsoln = 122 Ω
Molar conductivity = ∧m = 618 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Cell constant = b = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 16
Ans. Cell constant = b = 1.51 cm-1

(11) A conductivity cell filled with 0.02 M AgNO3 gives at 25 °C resistance of 947 ohms. If the cell constant is 2.3 cm-1, what is the molar conductivity of 0.02 M AgNO3 at 25 °C?
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.02 M AgNO3
Resistance of solution = Rsoln = 947 Ω
Cell constant = b = 2.3 cm-1
Molar conductivity = ∧m = ?
Conductivity of soln = κ
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 17
Ans. Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 121.5 Ω-1 m2 mol-1

(12) Resistance of conductivity cell filled with 0.1 M KCl solution is 100 ohms. If the resistance of the same cell when filled with 0.02 M KCl solution is 520 ohms, calculate the conductivity and molar conductivity of 0.02 M KCl solution. [Given : Conductivity of 0.1 M KCl solution is 1.29 Sm-1.]
Solution:
Given : Resistance of 0.1 M KCl solution = R1 = 100 Ω
Resistance of 0.02 M KCl solution = R2 = 520 Ω
Conductivity of 0.02 M KCl solution = κ2 = ?
Molar conductivity of 0.02 M KCl solution = ∧m = ?
Conductivity of 0.1 M KCl solution = κ1
= 1.29 S m-1
Cell constant = b = κ1 × R1 = 1.29 × 100
= 129 m-1
= 1.29 cm-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 18

(13) The molar conductivities at zero concentration (or at infinite dilution) of CH3COONa, HCl and NaCl in Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 are 90.8,426.2 and 126.4 respectively. Calculate the molar conductivity of CH3COOH at infinite dilution.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 19
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 20

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(14) The molar conductivities at zero concentrations of NH4Cl, NaOH and NaCl are respectively 149.7Ω-1 cm2 mol-1, 248.1 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 and 126.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. What is the molar conductivity of NH4OH at zero concentration ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 21

(15) What is the molar conductivity of AgI at zero concentration if the ∧0 values of NaI, AgNO3 and NaNO3 are respectively 126.9 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1, 133.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 and 121.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 22
Adding equations (i) and (ii) and subtracting equation (iii) we get equation I.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 23

(16) Molar conductivity of KCl at infinite dilution is 150.3 S cm2 mol-1. If the molar conductivity of K+ is 73.4, calculate that of Cl.
Solution :
Given : Molar conductivity at infinite dilution
= ∧(KCl) = 150.3 S cm2 mol-1
Molar conductivity of K+
= \(\lambda_{\mathrm{K}^{+}}^{0}\) = 73.4 S cm2 mol-1
Molar conductivity of Cl = \(\lambda_{\mathrm{Cl}^{-}}^{0}\) = ?
By Kohlrausch’s law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 24

(17) Molar conductivities at infinite dilution of Mg2+ and Br are 105.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 and 78.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 respectively. Calculate molar conductivity at zero concentration of MgBr2.
Solution :
Given : \(\lambda_{\mathrm{Mg}^{2+}}^{0}\) = 105.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{Br}^{-}}^{0}\) = 78.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
\(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{MgBr}_{2}\right)}\) = ?
By Kohlrausch’s law,
\(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{MgBr}_{2}\right)}\) = \(\lambda_{\mathrm{Mg}^{2+}}^{0}\) + 2\(\lambda_{\mathrm{Br}^{-}}^{0}\)
= 105.8 + 2 × 78.2 = 105.8 + 156.4
= 262.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Ans. Molar conductivity of MgBr2 at zero concentration = \(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{MgBr}_{2}\right)}\) = 262.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(18) The molar conductivity of 0.1 M CH3COOH at 25 °C is 15.9 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. If the molar conductivities of CH3COO and H+ ions in Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 at zero concentration are 40.8 and 349.6 respectively, calculate degree of dissociation of 0.1 M CH3COOH.
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.1 M CH3COOH
Molar conductivity = ∧m = 15.9 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^{0}\) = 40.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1;
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^{0}\) = 349.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Degree of dissociation = α = ?
By Kohlrausch’s law,
\(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}\right)}=\lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^{0}+\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^{0}\)
= 40.8 + 349.6
= 390.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
α = ∧m/∧0
= \(\frac{15.9}{390.4}\) = 0.0407
Ans. The degree of dissociation of CH3COOH = 0.0407

(19) The dissociation constant of a weak monoacidic base is 1.2 × 10-5 at 25 °C. The molar conductivity of the base at zero concentration is 354.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 at 25°C. Calculate the percentage dissociation and molar conductivity of the weak base at 0.1 M concentration.
Solution :
Given : Dissociation constant of the base = Kb = 1.2 × 10-5
Concentration = C = 0.1 M
0 = 354.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Percentage dissociation = ?
m = ?
Ka = \(\frac{\mathrm{C} \alpha^{2}}{1-\alpha}\); For a week electrolyte, α is small,
∴ Ka = cα2;
∴ α = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{C}}}=\left(\frac{1.2 \times 10^{-5}}{0.1}\right)^{\frac{1}{2}}\) = 1.0954 × 10-2
∴ Percentage dissociation = α × 100
= 1.0954 × 10-2 × 100 = 1.0954%
Now, α = \(\frac{\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}}{\wedge_{0}}\)
∴ ∧m = α × ∧0 = 1.954 × 10-2 × 354.8
= 6.932 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Ans. Percentage dissociation = 1.0954
Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 6.932 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Question 26.
What is an electrochemical cell? What does it consist of?
Answer:
Electrochemical cell : It consists of two electronic conductors such as metal plates dipping into an electrolytic or ionic conductor which is an aqueous electrolytic solution or a pure liquid of a molten electrolyte.

Question 27.
What are electrochemical reactions ?
Answer:

  1. Electrochemical reactions : The chemical reactions occurring in electrochemical cells which involve transfer of electrons from one species to other are called electrochemical reactions. They are redox reactions.
  2. These reactions are made of two half reactions namely oxidation at one electrode (anode) and reduction at another electrode (cathode) of the electrochemical cell.
  3. The net reaction is the sum of the above two half reactions.

Question 28.
Define electrode.
Answer:
Electrode : The arrangement consisting of a metal rod dipping in an aqueous solution or molten electrolyte containing ions and conduct electric current due to oxidation or reduction half reactions occurring on its surface is called an electrode.

The electrodes which take part in the reactions are called active electrodes while those which do not take part in the reactions are called inert electrodes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 29.
Define : (a) Anode (b) Cathode.
Answer:
(a) Anode : An electrode of an electrochemical cell, at which oxidation half reaction occurs due to the loss of electrons from some species is called an anode.
(b) Cathode : An electrode of an electrochemical cell at which reduction half reaction occurs due to gain of electrons by some species is called a cathode.

Question 30.
What are the types of electrochemical cells ?
Answer:
There are two types of electrochemical cells as follows :

  1. Electrolytic cells
  2. Voltaic or galvanic cells.

Question 31.
Define : (1) Electrolytic cell (2) Voltaic or galvanic cell.
Answer:
(1) Electrolytic cell : An electrochemical cell in which a non-spontaneous chemical reaction is forced to occur by passing direct electric current into the solution from the external source and where electrical energy is converted into chemical energy is called an electrolytic cell. E.g. voltameter, electrolytic cell for deposition of a metal.

(2) Voltaic or galvanic cell : An electrochemical cell in which a spontaneous chemical reaction occurs producing electricity and where a chemical energy is converted into an electrical energy is called voltaic cell or galvanic cell. E.g. Daniell cell, dry cell, lead storage battery, fuel cells, etc.

Question 32.
Define electrolysis.
Answer:
Electrolysis : The process of a non-spontaneous chemical decomposition of an electrolyte by the passage of an electric current through its aqueous solution or fused mass and in which electrical energy is converted into chemical energy is called electrolysis. E.g. Electrolysis of fused NaCl.

Question 33.
Describe electrolysis of aqueous NaCl.
Answer:
(1) Construction of an electrolytic cell : It consists of a vessel containing aqueous solution of NaCl. Two inert electrodes (graphite electrodes) are dipped in it and connected to an external source of electricity like battery. The electrode connected to the negative terminal is a cathode and that connected to a positive terminal is an anode.

(2) Working of the cell :
(A) NaCl(aq) and H2O(l) dissociate as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 25
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 26

(3) Reactions in electrolytic cell :
(i) Reduction half reaction at cathode : There are Na+ and H+ ions but since H+ are more reducible than Na+, they undergo reduction liberating hydrogen and Na+ are left in the solution.
2H2O(l) + 2e → H2(g) + \(2 \mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (reduction)
E0 = -0.83 V
(ii) Oxidation half reaction at anode : At anode there are Cl and OH. But Cl ions are preferably oxidised due to less decomposition potential.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 27
Net cell reaction : Since two electrons are gained at cathode and two electrons are released at anode for each redox step, the electrical neutrality is maintained. Hence we can write,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 28
Since Na+ and OH are left in the solution, they form NaOH(aq).

(4) Results of electrolysis :

  • H2 gas is liberated at cathode.
  • Cl2 gas is liberated at anode.
  • NaOH is formed in the solution and it reacts basic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 34.
Define and explain the following electrical units : (1) Coulomb (2) Ampere (3) Volt (4) Joule (5) Ohm.
Answer:
(1) Coulomb : It is a quantity of electricity obtained when one ampere current flows for one second.
It is the unit of quantity of electricity.
Q = I × t Coulomb (C)
where Q is the charge or quantity of electricity in coulombs.

(2) Ampere : It is a strength of an electric current obtained when one coulomb of electricity is passed through a circuit for one second.
∴ I = Q/t

(3) Volt : It is the potential difference between two points of an electric conductor required to send a current of one amphere through a resistance of one ohm.
∴ V = I × R
where V is the potential difference in volts and R is the resistance of a conductor in ohms.

(4) Joule : It is the electrical work or energy produced when one coulomb of electricity is passed through a
potential difference of one volt.
∴ Electrical work = Q × V J
where Q is electrical charge in coulombs and V is the potential difference.

(5) Ohm : It is the resistance of an electrical conductor across which when potential difference of 1 volt is applied, a current of one ampere is obtained. It has units, Ω or per siemens.

Question 35.
Explain quantitative aspects of electrolysis.
Answer:
(1) Calculation of quantity of electricity : If an electric current of strength I A is passed through the cell for t seconds, then quantity of electricity (Q) obtained is given by,
Q = I × t C (Coulomb)

(2) Calculation of moles of electrons passed : The charge carried by one mole of electrons is referred to as one faraday (F). If total charge passed is Q C, then moles of electrons passed = \(\frac{Q(\mathrm{C})}{F\left(\mathrm{C} / \mathrm{mol} \mathrm{e}^{-}\right)}\)

(3) Calculation of moles of product formed : Consider one mole of ions, \(\mathbf{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{n^{+}}\) which will require n moles of electrons for reduction.
\(\mathbf{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{n^{+}}\) + ne → M (Reduction half reaction)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 29

(4) Calculation of mass of product : Mass, W of product formed is given by,
W = moles of product × molar mass of product (M)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 30
When two electrolytic cells containing different electrolytes are connected in series so that same quantity of electricity is passed through them, then the masses W1 and W2 of products produced are given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 31

Question 36.
Define Faraday.
Answer:
Faraday : It is defined as the quantity of the electric charge carried by one mole of electrons.
It has value, 1F = 96500 C/mol

Question 37.
Obtain a charge on one electron from Faraday’s value.
Answer:

  • One Faraday is the electric charge on one mole of electrons (6.022 × 1023 electrons).
  • 1 Faraday = 96500 (per mol of electrons).
  • Hence the charge on one electron is, change on one electron = \(\frac{96500}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\)
    = 1.602 × 10-9 C.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Solved Examples 5.4-5.5

Question 38.
Solve the following :

(1) An electric current of 100 mA is passed through an electrolyte for 2 hours, 20 minutes and 20 seconds. Find the quantity of electricity passed.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 100 mA
= 100 × 10-3 A
= 0.1 A
Time = t = 2 hrs + 20 min + 20 s
= 2 × 60 × 60 + 20 × 60 + 20
= 8420 s
The quantity of electricity = Q = ?
Q = I × t
= 0.1 × 8420
= 842 C
Ans. Quantity of electricity passed, Q = 842 C

(2) An electric current of 500 mA is passed for 1 hour and 30 minutes. Calculate the
(i) Quantity of electricity (or charge)
(ii) Number of Faradays of electricity
(iii) Number of electrons passed (Charge on 1 electron = 1.602 × 10-19 C)
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 500 mA
= 500 × 10-3 A = 0.5 A
Time = t = 1 hr + 30 min
= 1 × 60 × 60 + 30 × 60
= 5400 s
(i) The quantity of electricity = Q = ?
(ii) Number of Faradays of electricity = ?
(iii) Number of electrons passed = ?

(i) Q = I × t = 0.5(A) × 5400(s) = 2700 C
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 32
(iii) 1F is the electric charge on 6.022 × 1023 electrons.
∴ 0.028F is the charge on,
0.028 × 6.022 × 1023 = 1.686 × 1022 electrons
∴ Number of electrons passed = 1.686 × 1022
Ans. (i) The quantity of electricity = Q = 2700 C
(ii) Number of Faradays of electricity = 0.028 F
(iii) Number of electrons passed = 1.686 × 1022

(3) How much electricity in terms of Faraday is required to produce :
(a) 20 g of Ca from molten CaCl2
(b) 40 g of Al from molten Al2O3
(Given : Molar mass of Calcium and Aluminium are 40 g mol-1 and 27 g mol-1 respectively.)
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 33

(4) For the following conversions,
calculate
(i) number of moles of electrons
(ii) number of Faradays
(iii) Amount of electricity :
(A) 0.1 mol conversion of Zn2+ to Zn.
(B) 0.08 mol conversion of \(\mathbf{M n O}_{4}^{2-}\) to Mn2+
(C) 1.1 mol conversion of \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathbf{O}_{7}^{2-}\) to Cr3+.
Solution :
(i) Number of moles of electrons = ?
(ii) Number of Faradays = ?
(iii) Amount of electricity = Q = ?
(A) Number of moles of Zn2+ =0.1 mol
Zn2+ + 2e → Zn
(i) ∵ 1 mol Zn2+ requires 2 mol electrons
0.1 mol Zn2+ will require
∴ 0.1 × 2 = 0.2 mol electrons
(ii) ∵ 1 mol electrons = 1 Faraday
∴ 0.2 mol electrons = 0.2 × 1
= 0.2 Faradays
(iii) ∵ 1 Faraday = 96500 C
∴ 0.2 Faraday = 96500 × 0.2 = 48250 C
Amount of electricity required =48250C

(B) Number of moles of \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\) = 0.08 mol
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}+5 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}^{2+}\)
(i) ∵ 1 mol \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\) requires 5 mol electrons
∴ 0.08 mol \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\) will require
5 × 0.08 = 0.4 mol electrons
(ii) Number of Faradays = 0.4 × 1 = 0.4
(iii) Amount of electricity = Q = 0.4 × 96500
= 38600 C

(C) Number of moles of \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7}^{2-}\) = 1.1 mol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 34
(i) ∵ 1 mol \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7}^{2-}\) requires 6 mol electrons
∴ 1.1 mol \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7}^{2-}\) will require
6 × 1.1 = 6.6 mol electrons
(ii) Number of Faradays = 1 × 6.6 = 6.6
(iii) Amount of electricity = 6.6 × 96500
= 6.369 × 105 C
Ans.
(A) (i) Number of moles of electrons = 0.2 mol
(ii) Number of Faradays = 0.2
(iii) Amount of electricity = 48250 C

(B) (i) Number of moles of electrons = 0.4 mol
(ii) Number of Faradays = 0.4
(iii) Amount of electricity = 38600 C

(C) (i) Number of moles of electrons = 6.6 mol
(ii) Number of Faradays = 6.6
(iii) Amount of electricity = 6.369 × 105 C

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(5) What mass of aluminium is produced at the cathode during the passage of 4 ampere current through Al2(SO4)3 solution for 100 minutes? Molar mass of aluminium is 27 g mol-1.
Solution :
Given : I = 4 A; t = 100 × 60 = 600 s
F = 96500 C mol-1, M = 27 g mol-1, WAl = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 35

(6) How long will it take to produce 2.415 g Ag metal from its salt solution by passing a current of 3 amperes? How many moles of electrons are required ? Molar mass of Ag is 107.9 gmol-1.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 3A
Mass of Ag produced = 2.415 g
Molar mass of Ag = Atomic mass of Ag
= 107.9 gmol-1
Time = t = ? Number of moles of electrons = ?
Reduction half reaction at cathode :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 36
From the reaction,
∵ 1 mole of Ag requires 1 mole of electrons
∴ 0.02238 mole of Ag will require,
0.02238 mol electrons
∵ 1 mole of electrons carries a charge of 96500 C,
∴ 0.02238 mole of electrons will carry a charge, 0.02238 × 96500 = 2160 C
∴ Quantity of electricity passed = Q = 2160 C
Let I be the current strength and t be time of electrolysis. Then,
∵ Q = I × t
∴ t = \(\frac{Q}{I}=\frac{2160}{3}\) = 720 s = \(\frac{720}{60}\) min = 12 min.
Ans. Time of electrolysis = 12 min
Moles of electrons = 0.02238 mol

(7) What current strength in ampere will be required to produce 2.369 × 10-3 kg of Cu from CuSO4 solution in one hour? How many moles of electrons are required? Molar mass of copper is 63.5 gmol-1.
Solution :
Given : Mass of Cu produced = 2.369 × 10-3 kg
= 2.369 g
Time = t = 1 hr = 1 × 60 × 60 = 3600 s
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Strength of current = I = ?
1 Faraday = 96500 C = 1 mol electrons
1 mol Cu = Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g
Reduction half reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 37
Moles of Cu deposited = \(\frac{2.369}{63.5}\) = 0.0373 mol Cu
From the reaction,
∵ 1 mol of Cu requires 2 mol electrons
∴ 0.0373 mol Cu will require 2 × 0.0373
= 0.0746 mol electrons
Now,
∵ 1 mol electrons = 96500 C
∴ 0.0746 mol electrons = 96500 × 0.0746 = 7199 C
∴ Quantity of electricity required = Q = 7199 C
∴ Q = I × t
∴ Current, I = \(\frac{Q}{t}=\frac{7199}{3600}\) = 2A
Ans. Current strength = I = 2A
Moles of electrons required = 0.0746 mol

(8) A current of 6 amperes is passed through AlCl3 solution for 15 minutes using Pt electrodes, when 0.504 g Al is produced. What is the molar mass of Al ?
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 6 A
Time = t = 15 min = 15 × 60 s = 900 s
Mass of Al produced = 0.504 g
Molar mass of Al = ?
Reduction half reaction,
\(\mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}\)
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 6 × 900 = 5400 C
Number of moles of electrons = \(\frac{Q}{F}=\frac{5400}{96500}\)
= 0.05596 mol
From half reaction,
∵ 3 moles of electrons deposit 1 mole Al
∴ 0.05596 moles of electrons will deposit,
\(\frac{0.05596}{3}\) = 0.01865 mol Al
Now,
∵ 0.01865 mole Al weighs 0.504 g
∴ 1 mole Al will weigh, \(\frac{0.504}{0.01865}\) = 27 g
Hence molar mass of Al is 27 g mol-1
Ans. Molar mass of Al = 27 g mo-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(9) How many moles of electrons are required for the reduction of (i) 3 moles of Zn2+ to Zn,
(ii) 1 mol of Cr3+ to Cr ?
How many Faradays of electricity will be required in each case ?
Solution :
(i) Given : For reduction of 3 mol Zn2+ to Zn;
Number of moles of electrons required = ?
Reduction half reaction,
Zn2+ + 2e → Zn
∵ 1 mole of Zn2+ requires 2 moles of electrons
∴ 3 moles of Zn2+ will require,
∵ 3 × 2 = 6 moles of electrons
∴ 1 mole of electrons = 1 F 6 moles of electrons = 6 F

(ii) Given : Reduction of 1 mol of Cr3+ to Cr :
Reduction half reaction,
Cr3+ + 3e → Cr
Hence 1 mole of Cr3+ will require 3 moles of electrons
∵ 1 mole of electrons = 1
∴ 3 moles of electrons = 3 F
Ans. (i) 6 mol electrons and 6 Faradays.
(ii) 3 mol electrons and 3 Faradays.

(10) In an electrolysis of AgNO3 solution, 0.7 g of Ag is deposited after a certain period of time. Calculate the quantity of electricity required in coulomb. (Molar mass of Ag is 107.9 g mol-1.)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Ag deposited = 0.7 g
Molar mass of Ag = 107.9 g mol-1
Quantity of electricity = Q = ?
Reduction half reaction is,
Ag+ + e → Ag
1 mole of Ag = 107.9 g Ag requires 1 mole of electrons
∴ 0.7 g Ag will require, \(\frac{0.7}{107.9}\) = 6.49 × 10-3 mole of electrons
∵ 1 mole of electrons carry 96500 C charge
∴ 6.49 × 10-3 mole of electrons will carry, 96500 × 6.49 × 10-3 = 626 C
Ans. Quantity of electricity required = 626 C,

(11) Calculate the amounts of Na and Chlorine gas produced during the electrolysis of fused NaCl by the passage of 1 ampere current for 25 minutes. Molar masses of Na and Chlorine gas are 23 g mol-1 and 71 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 1 ampere
Time = t = 25 minutes = 25 × 60 s = 1500 s
Molar mass of Na = 23 g mol-1
Molar mass of Cl2 = 71 g mol-1
Mass of Na produced = ?, Mass of Cl2 produced = ?
Reactions during electrolysis :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 38
Quantity of electricity = Q = I × t = 1 × 1500
= 1500 C
Number of moles of electrons passed
= \(\frac{Q}{F}=\frac{1500}{96500}\) = 0.01554
From half reaction (i),
∵ 2 moles of electrons deposit 2 moles of Na
∴ 0.01554 moles of electrons will deposit, \(\frac{0.01554 \times 2}{2}\) = 0.01554 mol Na
Mass of Na = Moles of Na × Molar mass of Na
= 0.01554 × 23 = 0.3572 g Na
From half reaction (ii)
∵ 2 moles of electrons produce 1 mole Cl2
∴ 0.01554 moles of electrons will produce,
\(\frac{0.01554 \times 1}{2}\) = 7.77 × 10-3 × 71
∴ Mass of Cl2 gas = Moles of Cl2 × Molar mass
= 7.77 × 10-3 × 71
= 0.5518 g
Ans. Mass of Na deposited = 0.3572 g
Mass of Cl2 liberated = 0.5518 g

(12) Calculate the mass of Mg and the volume of Chlorine gas at NTP produced during the electrolysis of molten MgCl2 by the passage of 2 amperes of current for 1 hour. Molar masses of Mg and Cl2 are 24 g mol-1 and 71 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 2A
Time = t = 1 hr = 1 × 60 × 60 s = 3600 s
Molar mass of Mg = 23 g mol-1
Molar mass of Cl2 = 71 g mol-1
Mass of Mg produced = ?
Volume of Cl2 at NTP produced = ?
Reactions during electrolysis :
(i) Mg2+ + 2e → Mg (Reduction half reaction)
(ii) 2Cl → Cl2(g) + 2e (Oxidation half reaction)
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 2 × 3600 = 7200 C
∵ 1 Faraday = 1 mol electrons
∴ Number of moles of electrons passed
= \(\frac{Q}{F}=\frac{7200}{96500}\) = 0.07461 mol
From half reaction (i),
∵ 2 moles of electrons deposit 1 mole of Mg
∴ 0.07461 moles of electrons will deposit, \(\frac{0.07461 \times 1}{2}\) = 0.037305 mol Mg
Mass of Mg = Moles of Mg × Molar mass of Mg
= 0.037305 × 24 = 0.8953 g Mg
From half reaction (ii),
∵ 2 moles of electrons produce 1 mol Cl2 gas
∴ 0.07461 moles of electrons will produce,
\(\frac{0.07461}{2}\) = 0.037305 mol Cl2
∵ 1 mole of Cl2 occupies 22.4 dm at NTP
∴ 0.037305 mole of Cl2 will occupy,
22.4 × 0.037305 = 0.8356 dm3
∴ Volume of Cl2 gas produced
= 0.8356 dm3
= 0.8356 × 103 cm3
= 835.6 cm3
Ans. Mass of Mg produced = 0.8953 g
Volume of Cl2(g) at NTP produced = 835.6 cm3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(13) How many Faradays would be required to plate out one mole of free metal from the following cations?
(a) Mg2+ (b) Cr3+ (c) Pb2+ (d) Cu+
Solution :
(a) Reduction half reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 39
∵ 1 mol electrons = 1 Faraday
Since to deposite 1 mol Mg, two moles of electrons are required,
∴ To plate one mole Mg, 2 Faradays of electricity will be required.

(b) Reduction half reaction :
\(\mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
∴ 1 mol Cr will require 3 mol electrons, hence 3 Faradays of electricity are required.

(c) Reduction half reaction :
\(\mathrm{Pb}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Pb}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
∴ 1 mol Pb will require 2 mol electrons, hence 2 Faradays are required.

(d) Reduction half reaction :
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
∴ 1 mol Cu will require 1 mol electrons hence one Faraday of electricity is required.

(14) In a certain electrolysis experiment, 0.561 g of Zn is deposited in one cell containing ZnSO4 solution. Calculate the mass of Cu deposited in another cell containing CuSO4 solution in series with ZnSO4 cell. Molar masses of Zn and Cu are 65.4 g mol-1 and 63.5 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Mass of Zn deposited = WZn = 0.561 g
Molar mass of Zn = 65.4 g mol-1
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Mass of Cu deposited = ?
Number of moles of Zn deposited
= \(\frac{\text { Mass of Zn deposited }}{\text { Molar mass of } \mathrm{Zn}}=\frac{0.561}{65.4}\)
= 8.578 × 10-3 mol Zn
Reactions of electronics:
(i) Zn++ + 2e → Zn (Half reaction in ZnSO4 cell)
(ii) Cu++ + 2e → Cu (Half reaction in CuSO4 cell)
Mole ratio of Zn
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 40
∴ Mass of Cu produced
= moles of Cu × molar mass of Cu
= 8.578 × 10-3 × 63.5
= 0.5447 g Cu
Ans. Mass of Cu deposited = 0.5447 g

(15) Two electrolytic cells, one containing AlCl3 solution and the other containing ZnSO4 solution are connected in series. The same quantity of electricity is passed through the cells. Calculate the amount of Zn deposited in ZnSO4 cell if 1.2 g of Al are deposited in AlCl3 cell. The molar masses of Al and Zn are 27 g mol-1 and 65.4 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Mass of Al deposited = 1.2 g
Molar mass of Al = 27 g mol-1
Molar mass of Zn = 65.4 g mol-1
Mass of zinc deposited = ωZn = ?
Reduction reactions in electrolysis :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 41
Number of moles of Al deposited = \(\frac{1.2}{27}\)
= 0.04444 mol.
From reaction (i),
∵ 1 mol Al requires 3 mol electrons
∴ 0.04444 mol Al requires 3 × 0.04444
= 0.1333 mol electrons
Hence 0.1333 moles of electrons are passed through both the cells in the series.
From reaction (ii),
∵ 2 moles of electrons deposit 1 mol Zn
∴ 0.1333 moles of electrons will deposit, \(\frac{0.1333}{2}\) = 0.06665 mol Zn
Mass of Zn deposited = 0.06665 × 65.4 = 4.36 g
Ans. Mass of Zn deposited = 4.36 g

(16) How much quantity of electricity in coulomb is required to deposit 1.346 × 10-3 kg of Ag in 3.5 minutes from AgNO3 solution ?
(Given : Molar mass of Ag is 108 × 10-3 kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Ag deposited = 1.346 × 10-3 kg
Molar mass of Ag = 108 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Time = t = 3.5 × 60 s
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 42
∵ 108 × 10-3 kg Ag requires 1 Faraday
1.346 × 10-3 kg Ag will require,
\(\frac{1.346 \times 10^{-3}}{108 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 0.01246 F
∵ If F = 96500 C
∴ 0.01246 F = 96500 × 0.01246 = 1202 C
Ans. Amount of electricity required = 1202 C

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(17) How many electrons will have a total charge of 1 Coulomb ?
Solution :
Given : Charge = 1 Coulomb
Number of electrons = ?
1 Faraday = 96500 C per mol electrons
∵ 96500 C electric charge is present on 1 mol electrons
∴ 1C charge is present on \(\frac{1}{96500}\) mol electrons
∴ Number of electrons = \(\frac{1}{96500}\) × 6.022 × 1023
= 6.24 × 1018 electrons
Ans. 1 Coulomb charge is present on 6.24 × 1018 electrons.

(18) A constant electric current flows for 4 hours through two electrolytic cells connected in series. One contains AgNO3solution and second contains CuCl2 solution. During this time, 4 grams of Ag are deposited in the first cell.
(a) How many grams of Cu are deposited in the second cell?
(b) What is the current flowing in amperes? (Atomic mass : Cu = 63.5 gmol-1; Ag = 107.9 gmol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Ag deposited = 4 g
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Molar mass of Ag = 107.9 g mol-1
Time = t = 4 hrs = 4 × 60 × 60 = 14400 s
Mass of Cu deposited = WCu = ?
Current = I = ?
(a) Number of moles of Ag deposited
\(=\frac{\text { Mass of } \mathrm{Ag}}{\text { Molar mass of } \mathrm{Ag}}=\frac{4}{107.9}\)
= 0.03707 mol of Ag
Reactions of electrolysis :
(i) Ag+ + e → Ag (Half reaction in AgNO3 cell)
(ii) Cu2+ + 2e → Cu (Half reaction in CuCl2 cell)
Mole ratio of Ag
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 43
∴ Mass of Cu produced = 0.01854 × 63.5 = 1.177 g

(b) From the reaction,
∵ 1 mol Ag+ requires 1 mol electrons
∴ 0.03707 mol Ag will require 0.03707 mol electrons
∵ 1 mol electrons = 1 Faraday
∴ 0.03707 mol electrons = 0.03707 Faraday
∵ 1 Faraday = 96500 C
∴ 0.03707 Faraday
= 0.03707 × 96500 = 3577 C
∴ Quantity of electricity = Q = 3577 C.
Q = I × t
∴ I = \(\frac{\mathrm{Q}}{t}=\frac{3577}{14400}\) = 0.25 A
Ans. (a) Mass of Cu deposited = 1.177 g
(b) Current passed = 0.25 A

(19) The passage of 0.95 A current for 40 minutes deposited 0.7493 g Cu from CuSO4 solution. Calculate the molar mass of Cu.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 0.95 A
Time = f = 40 min = 40 × 60 = 2400 s
Mass of Cu deposited = 0.7493 g
Molar mass of Cu = ?
Reduction half reaction,
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
Quantity of electricity = Q = I × t
= 0.95 × 2400
= 2280 C
Number of moles of electrons = \(\frac{2280}{96500}\)
= 0.02362 mol
∵ 2 mol electrons deposit 1 mol Cu
∴ 0.02362 mol electrons will deposit,
\(\frac{0.02362}{2}\) = 0.01181 mol Cu
Now,
0.01181 mol Cu weighs 0.7493 g
∴ 1 mol of Cu weigh, \(\frac{0.7493 \times 1}{0.01181}\) = 63.44 g
Hence molar mass of Cu 63.44 g mol-1
Ans. Molar mass of Cu = 63.44 g mol-1

(20) A quantity of 0.3 g of Cu was deposited from CuSO4 solution by passing 4A through the solution for 3.8 min. Calculate the value of Faraday constant. (Atomic mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Cu deposited = 0.3 g
Electric current = I = 4A
Time = t = 3.8 min = 3.8 × 60 = 228 s
Value of Faraday = ?
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 4 × 228 = 912 C
Reduction half reaction,
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
Number of moles of Cu deposited 0.3
= \(\frac{0.3}{63.5}\) = 0.004724 mol
From reduction half reaction,
1 mol Cu ≡ 2 mol electrons
∴ 0.004724 mol Cu = 2 × 0.004724
= 0.009448 mol electrons
Now
∵ 0.009448 mol electrons = 912 C
∴ 1 mol electrons = \(\frac{912}{0.009448}\) = 96528 C
∵ 1 Faraday charge is equal to charge on 1 mol electrons
∴ 1 Faraday = 96528 C
Ans. 1 Faraday = 96528 C

(21) In the electrolysis of water, one of the half reactions is
2H+(aq) + 2e → H2(g)
Calculate the volume of H2 gas collected at 25 °C and 1 atm pressure by passing 2A for 1h through the solution. R = 0.08205 L atm K-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Reduction half reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 44
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Pressure = P = 1 atm
Electric current = I = 2A
Time = t = 1 hr = 1 × 60 × 60 = 3600 s
R = 0.08205 L atm K-1 mol-1
Volume of H2 = VH2 = ?
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 2 × 3600 = 7200 C
Number of moles of electrons = \(\frac{Q}{F}\)
\(\frac{7200}{96500}\) = 0.0746 mol
From the reaction,
∵ 2 mol electrons produces 1 mol H2 gas
∴ 0.0746 mol electrons will produce \(\frac{0.0746}{2}\)
= 0.0373 mol H2.
pVH2 = nRT
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 45
= 0.912 L
Ans. Volume H2 gas = 0.912 L

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(22) Calculate the current strength and number of moles of electrons required to produce 2.369 × 10-3 kg of Cu from CuSO4 solution in one hour. (Molar mass of Cu is 63.5 g/mol)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Cu deposited = 2.369 × 10-3 kg;
t = 1 hr = 3600 s
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
I = ?; Number of moles of electrons = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 46
∵ For 63.5 × 10-3 kg Cu Q = 2 × 96500 C
∴ For 2.369 × 10-3 kg Cu
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 47
Ans. I = 2A; Number of moles of electrons = 0.07461

Question 39.
Define : Galvanic cell or voltaic cell.
Answer:
Galvanic or voltaic cell : An electrochemical cell which is used to produce electrical energy by a spontaneous chemical reaction inside it is called an electrochemical cell. In this chemical energy is converted into electrical energy.
Example : Daniell cell.

Question 40.
Define : Half cell or Electrode.
Answer:
Half cell or Electrode : It is a metal electrode dipped in the electrolytic solution and capable of establishing oxidation reduction equilibrium with one of the ions of electrolyte solution and develop electrode potential. E.g. Zn in ZnSO4 solution.

Question 41.
What are the functions of a salt bridge ?
Answer:
The functions of a salt bridge are :

  1. It maintains the electrical contact between the two electrode solutions of the half cells.
  2. It prevents the mixing of electrode solutions.
  3. It maintains the electrical neutrality in both the solutions of two half cells by a flow of ions.
  4. It eliminates the liquid junction potential.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 42.
What are the conventions used to write galvanic cell or cell diagram (cell formula) ?
Answer:
A galvanic cell or voltaic cell is represented by a short notation or diagram which includes electrodes, aqueous solutions of ions and other species that may or may not involve in the cell reaction.
The following conventions are used to represent the cell or write the cell notation :
(1) The metal electrodes or the inert electrodes like platinum are placed at the ends of the cell formula.
(2) The galvanic cell consists of two half cells or electrodes. The electrode on the extreme left hand side is anode where oxidation takes place and it carries negative (-) charge while extreme right hand electrode is cathode where reduction takes place and it carries positive (+) charge.
(3) The gases or insoluble substances are placed in the interior positions adjacent to the metal electrode.
(4) A single vertical line is written between two phases like solid electrode and aqueous solution containing ions.
(5) A double vertical line is drawn between two solutions of two electrodes which indicates a salt bridge connecting them electrically.
(6) The concentration of solutions or ions or pressures of gases are written in brackets along with the substances in the cell.
(7) Different ions in the same solution are separated by a comma.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 48
(8) Examples of electrochemical cells :
(i) Daniel cell is represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 49

Question 43.
How to write cell reaction for a galvanic cell ?
Answer:
(1) A galvanic cell consists of two half cells or electrodes.
(2) Write oxidation half reaction for left hand electrode which is an anode and reduction half reaction for right hand electrode which is a cathode.
(3) Balance the number of electrons in the oxidation and reduction reactions.
(4) By adding both the reactions, overall cell reaction is obtained.
(5) For example, consider following cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 50

Question 44.
Why is anode in a galvanic cell considered to be negative?
Answer:

  1. According to IUPAC conventions, the electrode of a galvanic cell where de-electronation or oxidation takes place releasing electrons is called anode. Zn(s) → \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) + 2e
  2. The electrons released due to oxidation reaction are accumulated on the metal electrode surface charging it negatively.

Hence anode in the galvanic cell is considered to be negative.

Question 45.
Why is cathode in a galvanic cell considered to be positive electrode?
Answer:
(1) According to IUPAC conventions, the electrode of the galvanic cell where electronation or reduction takes place is called cathode. In this, the electrons from the metal electrode are removed by cations required for their reduction.
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) + 2e → Cu(s)

(2) Since the electrons are lost, the metal electrode acquires a positive charge.
Hence cathode in the galvanic cell is considered to be positive.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 46.
Give the cell reactions in the case of the following cells :
(1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 51
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 52

(2)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 53
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 54

(3) Pt, H2(g) | H+(aq) || Cl(aq) | Cl2(g), Pt
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 55

(4) Ni(s)|Ni2+ (1 M) || Al3+ (1 M) | Al(s)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 56

Question 47.
Represent the half cells or electrodes for the following reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 57
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 58

Question 48.
Formulate a cell from the following electrode reactions :
(a) Cl2(g) + 2e → 2Cl(aq)
(b) 2I(aq) → I2(s) + 2e
Answer:
(a) Cl2(g) + 2e → 2Cl(aq) (Reduction half reaction)
(b) 2I(aq) → I2(s) + 2e (Oxidation half reaction)
The galvanic cell is,
Pt |I2(s)|I(aq) (1 M) | Cl(aq) (1 M) | Cl2(g, PCl2)|Pt

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 49.
Formulate a cell for each of the following reactions :
(a) \(\mathrm{Sn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) + 2AgCl(s) → \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}\) + 2Ag(s) + \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
(b) Mg(s) + Br2(l) → \(\mathrm{Mg}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
Answer:
(a) \(\mathrm{Sn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) + 2AgCl(s) → \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}\) + 2Ag(s) + \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
The overall reaction takes place into two steps :
(i) \(\mathrm{Sn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) → Sn4+ + 2e (Oxidation half reaction)
(ii) 2AgCl(s) + 2e → 2Ag(s) + \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (Reduction half reaction)
Hence the cell is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 59

(b) Mg(s) + Br2(l) → \(\mathrm{Mg}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
The overall reaction takes place into two steps :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 60

Question 50.
What is electrode potential?
Answer:
(1) Electrode potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential established due to electrode half reaction between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium at constant temperature.

(2) Explanation : When a metal is immersed into a solution containing its ions there arises oxidation (or reduction) reaction involving a release of electrons (or gain of electrons). This gives rise to the formation of an electrical double layer, consisting of a charged metal surface and an ionic layer. The potential across this double layer i.e., between metal and the solution is an electrode potential.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 61
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 62

Question 51.
Define :
(1) Oxidation potential,
(2) Reduction potential.
Answer:
(1) Oxidation potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium developed due to oxidation reaction at anode and at constant temperature.

(2) Reduction potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium developed due to reduction reaction at cathode and at constant temperature.

Question 52.
What is a standard state of a substance ?
Answer:
The standard state of a substance is that state in which the substance has unit activity or concentration at 25 °C. i.e., For solution having concentration 1 molar, gas at 1 atm, pure liquids or solids are said to be in their standard states.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 53.
Define the following terms :
(1) Standard electrode potential
(2) Standard oxidation potential
(3) Standard reduction potential.
Answer:
(1) Standard electrode potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it equilibrium when all the substances involved in the electrode reaction are in their standard states of unit activity or concentration at constant temperature.

(2) Standard oxidation potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium due to oxidation reaction, when all the substances involved in the oxidation reaction are in their standard states of unit activity or concentration at constant temperature.

(3) Standard reduction potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium due to reduction reaction, when all the substances involved in the reduction reaction are in their standard states of unit activity or concentration at constant temperature.

Question 54.
What is the standard potential of an electrode according to IUPAC convention?
Answer:
Standard reduction potential : According to IUPAC convention, the standard potential of an electrode due to reduction reaction at 298 K is taken as the standard reduction potential. In this active mass of the substance has unit value.

Question 55.
What is cell potential or emf of a cell ?
Answer:
Cell potential or emf of a cell : It is defined as the potential difference between two electrodes, responsible for an external flow of electrons from the left hand electrode at higher potential (anode), to the right hand electrode at lower potential (cathode), when connected to form an electrochemical or galvanic cell.

Since there is oxidation reaction at left hand electrode (LHE) or anode and reduction reaction at right hand electrode (RHE) or cathode, emf of the galvanic, Ecell, is given by
Ecell = (Eoxi)anode + (Ered)cathode
Since by IUPAC conventions, generally reduction potentials are used, hence, for the given cell,
(∵ Eoxi = -Ered)
∴ Ecell = (Ered)cathode – (Ered)anode
Similarly, standard emf of the cell, E0cell is given by
E0cell = (E0red)cathode – (E0red)anode

Question 56.
Explain dependence of cell potential on concentration.
OR
Explain Nernst equation for cell potential.
Answer:
Consider following general reaction taking place in the galvanic cell.
aA + bB → cC + dD
The cell voltage is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 63
where,
T → temperature
R → Gas constant
F → Faraday
n → Number of electrons in the redox cell reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 64
This is Nernst equation for cell potential. It is used to calculate cell potential and electrode potentials.

Question 57.
State (or write) Nernst equation for the electrode potential and explain the terms involved.
Answer:
The Nernst equation for the single electrode reduction potential for a given ionic concentration in the solution in the case, \(M_{(a q)}^{n+}\) + ne → M(s) is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 65

\(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{M}^{\mathrm{n}+} / \mathrm{M}}\) is the single electrode potential,
\(E_{\mathrm{M}^{n+} / \mathrm{M}}^{0}\) is the standard reduction electrode potential,
R is the gas constant = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T is the absolute temperature,
n is the number of electrons involved in the reaction,
F is Faraday (96500 C)
[Mn+] is the molar concentration of ions.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 58.
Obtain Nernst equation for the following cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 66
Answer:
Electrode reactions and a cell reaction for the given cell are,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 67
Here, n = 2
By Nernst equation, the cell potential is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 68

Question 59.
Obtain Nernst equation for the electrode potential for the electrode, \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \mid \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\).
Answer:
For the electrode, \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \mid \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\),
the reduction reaction is,
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\) ∴ n = 2
By Nernst equation, the reduction electrode potential is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 69
where E0zn2+/zn is the standard electrode potential of zinc electrode.

Question 60.
Obtain a relation between cell potential and Gibbs energy for the cell reaction.
Answer:
Consider a galvanic cell which involves n number of electrons in the overall cell reaction. Since one mole of electrons involve the electric charge equal to one Faraday (F) which is equal to 96500 C, the total charge involved in the reaction is,
Electric charge = n × F
If Ecell is the cell potential, then Electrical work = n × F × Ecell
According to thermodynamics, electric work is equal to decrease in Gibbs energy, -ΔG, we can write,
Electric work = n × F × Ecell = -ΔG
∴ ΔG = -nFEcell
Under standard conditions, we can write
∴ ΔG0 = -nF\(E_{\text {cell }}^{0}\)
where \(E_{\text {cell }}^{0}\) is the standard cell potential and ΔG0 is the standard Gibbs free energy change.

Question 61.
Write Nernst Equation for the following reactions :
(a) Cr(s) + 3Fe3+(aq) → Cr3+(aq) + 3Fe2+(aq)
(b) Al3+(aq) + 3e → Al(s)
Answer:
(a) Cr(s) + 3Fe3+(aq) → Cr3+(aq) + 3Fe2+(aq)
The cell formulation is,
Cr(s)|Cr3+(aq) || Fe3+(aq), Fe2+(aq)| Pt
Hence cell potential is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 70

Question 62.
A single electrode potential can’t be measured but the cell potential can be measured. Explain.
Answer:
(1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 71
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 72
According to Nemst theory, electrode potential is the potential difference between the metal and ionic layer around it at equilibrium, i.e. the potential across the electric double layer.

(2) For measuring the single electrode potential, one part of the double layer, that is metallic layer can be connected to the potentiometer but not the ionic layer. Hence, single electrode potential can’t be measured experimentally.

(3) When an electrochemical cell is developed by combining two half cells or electrodes, they can be connected to the potentiometer and the potential difference or cell potential can be measured.
Ecell = E2 – E1
where E1 and E2 are reduction potentials of two electrodes.

(4) If one of the electrode potentials is known or arbitrarily assumed and Ecell is measured by potentiometer, then potential of another electrode can be obtained. Therefore it is necessary to choose a reference electrode with arbitrarily fixed potential and measure the potentials of other electrodes.

(5) Therefore Standard Hydrogen Electrode (SHE) is selected assuming arbitrary potential 0.0 volt. Hence potentials of all other electrodes are referred to as hydrogen scale potentials.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 63.
Describe the construction and working of the standard hydrogen electrode (S.H.E.). Give its advantages and disadvantages.
OR
What is the standard hydrogen electrode
OR
Primary reference electrode? Write the construction and working of it.
Answer:
A single electrode potential cannot be measured, but the cell potential can be measured experimentally. Hence, it is necessary to have a reference electrode. S.H.E. is a primary reference electrode.
(1) Construction :
(1) The standard hydrogen electrode (S.H.E.) consists of a glass tube at the end of which a piece of platinised platinum foil is attached as shown in Fig. 5.14. Around this plate there is an outer jacket of glass which has a side inlet through which pure and dry hydrogen gas is bubbled at one atmosphere pressure. The inner tube is filled with a little mercury and a copper wire is dipped into it. This provides an electrical contact with the platinum foil. The outer jacket ends into a broad opening.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 73
(2) The whole assembly is kept immersed in a solution containing hydrogen ions (H+) of unit activity.
(3) This electrode is arbitrarily assigned zero potential.
(4) The platinised platinum foil is used to provide an electrical contact for the electrode. This permits rapid establishment of the equilibrium between the hydrogen gas adsorbed by the metal and the hydrogen ions in solution.

(2) Representation of S.H.E. :
H+ (1 M) | H2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt

(3) Working :
Reduction : H+(aq) + e ⇌ \(\frac {1}{2}\)H2(g) E0 = 0.00 V
H2 gas in contact with H+(aq) ions attains an equilibrium establishing a potential.

(4) Applications of SHE : A reversible galvanic cell with the experimental (indicator) electrode, Zn2+ (1M) | Zn(s) and SHE can be developed as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 74
Thus the potential can be directly obtained.

(5) Disadvantages (Drawbacks or Difficulties) :

  • It is difficult to construct and handle SHE.
  • Pure and dry H2 gas cannot be obtained.
  • Pressure of H2 gas cannot be maintained exactly at 1 atmosphere.
  • The active mass or concentration of H+ from HCl cannot be maintained exactly unity.

Question 64.
How is the potential of hydrogen electrode obtained?
Answer:
Hydrogen gas electrode is represented as,
H+(aq) | H2 (g, PH2) | Pt
Electrode reduction reaction is,
2H+(aq) + 2e → H2(g)
By Nernst equation, the reduction potential is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 75

If H2 gas is passed at 1 atm, then PH2 = 1 atm
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 76

Question 65.
Draw the diagram for the determination of standard electrode potential with SHE.
Answer:
Consider the following cell :
Zn | Zn2+(aq) || HCl | H2(g, 1atm) | Pt
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 77

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 66.
A voltaic cell consisting of Fe2+(aq)|Fe(s) and Bi3+(aq) | Bi(s) electrodes is constructed. When the circuit is closed, mass of Fe electrode decreases and that of Bi electrode increases.
(a) Write cell formula, (b) Which electrode is cathode and which electrode is anode ? (c) Write electrode reactions and overall cell reaction.
Answer:
(a) Since the mass of Fe electrode decreases, it undergoes oxidation and it is an anode or an oxidation electrode while as the mass of Bi electrode increases, there is a reduction of Bi3+ to Bi and it is cathode or a reduction electrode. Hence the cell formula is,
\(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{s})}\left|\mathrm{Fe}_{\mathrm{(aq})}^{2+}(1 \mathrm{M}) \| \mathrm{Bi}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}(1 \mathrm{M})\right| \mathrm{Bi}\)

(b) The left hand electrode is an anode and right hand electrode is a cathode.

(c) Reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 78

Solved Examples 5.7 – 5.9

Question 67.
Solve the following :

(1) Write the reaction and calculate the potential of the half cell,
\(\mathbf{Z n}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{2+}\) (0.2M) | Zn. (E0Zn2+/Zn = – 0.76 V).
Solution :
Given : E0Zn2+/Zn = -0.76 V
Concentration of Zn2+ = [Zn2+] = 0.2 M
EZn2+/Zn = ?
Reduction reaction for the half cell,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 79
= – 0.76 + 0.0296 (-0.6990)
= -0.76 – 0.02069
= -0.78069 V
Ans. E0Zn2+/Zn = -0.78069 V

(2) Write a reaction and calculate the potential of the electrode, \(\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (0.05 M) | Cl2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt E0Cl2/Cl = 1.36 V.
Solution :
Given : Reduction reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 80
= 1.36 – 0.0592 (- 2 + 0.6990)
= 1.36 – 0.0592 (-1.3010)
= 1.36 + 0.077
= 1.437 V
Ans. Potential of the electrode = 1.437 V

(3) Calculate the potential of the electrode,
pH = 4.5 | H2 (g, 1 atm) |Pt.
Solution :
Given : pH = 4.5
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 81
∴ EH+/H2 = -0.0592 pH
= -0.0592 × 4.5
= -0.2664 V
Ans. EH+/H2 = -0.2664 V

(4) If the standard cell potential of Daniell cell is 1.1 V, calculate standard free energy change for the cell reaction.
Solution :
Given : Daniell cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 82
= – 2 × 96500 × 1.1
= -212300 J
= -212.3 kJ
Ans. Standard free energy change = ΔG0
= -212.3 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(5) Write balanced equations for the half reactions and calculate the reduction potentials at 25 °C for the following half cells :
(a) Cl (1.2 M) | Cl2(g, 3.6 atm) E0 = 1.36 V
(b) Fe2+ (2 M) | Fe(s) E0 = – 0.44 V
Solution :
(a) Given : Half cell,
\(\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (1.2 M) | Cl2(g, 3.6 atm)|Pt
E0Cl2/Cl = 1.36 V
The reduction reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 83
= 1.36 – 0.0296 (-0.3979)
= 1.36 + 0.01178
= 1.37178
≅ 1.372 V

(b) Given: Half cell, \(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) (2M) |Fe(s)
E0 Fe2+/Fe = -0.44 V
The reduction reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 84
= – 0.44 – 0.0296 × (- 0.3010)
= -0.44 + 0.00891
= -0.43109 V
Ans. (a) Half reaction : Cl2(g) + 2e → \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{\text {(aq) }}^{-}\)
ECell = 1.372 V
(b) \(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) + 2e → Fe(s)
ECell = -0.43109 V.

(6) Using Nernst equation, calculate the potentials for the following half reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 85
Solution :
(a) Given :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 86
= 0.535 – 0.0296 [ – 4 + 0.9542]
= 0.535 – 0.0296 [-3.0458]
= 0.535 + 0.0902
= 0.6252 V
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 87
Ans. (a) Potential of the half cell = 0.6252 V
(b) Potential of the half cell = 0.7118 V.

(7) Write the cell reaction and calculate the standard potential of the cell,
Ni(s) | Ni2+(1 M) || Cl(1M) | Cl2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt
E0Cl2 = 1.36 V and E0Ni = – 0.25 V.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 88
= 1.36 – (-0.25)
= 1.36+ 0.25 = 1.61V
Ans. Cell reaction : Ni(s) + Cl2(g) → \(\mathrm{Ni}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
E0Cell = 1.61 V

(8) Write the cell reaction and calculate cell potential and standard free energy change for a cell reaction in the following cell :
\(\mathbf{A l}_{(\mathrm{s})}\left|\mathbf{A l}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{3+}(1 \mathbf{M}) \| \mathbf{C d}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{2+}(1 \mathrm{M})\right| \mathbf{C} d\)
E0Al3+/Al = -1-66 V and E0cd2+/cd = -0.403 V
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 89
Since concentrations of ions are 1 M each, it is a standard cell, hence the cell potential is E0Cell.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 90
Standard free energy change ΔG0 is given by,
ΔG0= – nFE0Cell
= -6 × 96500 × 1.257
= – 727800 J
= -727.8 kJ
Ans. Cell reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 91

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(9) Write the cell reaction and calculate cell potential and the standard free energy change for the cell reaction in the following cell :
Pt | H2 (g, 1 atm) | \(\mathbf{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\)(1M) || \(\mathrm{Cu}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) (1M) | Cu(s).
Mention anode and cathode and direction of flow of electrons in the external circuit. (E0Cu2+/Cu = 0.337 V)
Solution :
Given : E0Cu2+/Cu = 0.337 V;
E0H+/H2 = E0SHE = 0.0V
Pt | H2(g, 1 atm) | \(\mathbf{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) (1M) || \(\mathrm{Cu}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) (1M) | Cu(s)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 92
Anode : Hydrogen gas electrode (LHE)
Cathode : Copper electrode (RHE)
E0Cell = E0Cu2+/Cu – E0H+/H2
= 0.337 – (0.0)
= 0.337 V
ΔG0 = – nFE0 = -2 × 96500 × 0.337
= – 65040J
= – 65.04 kJ
Electrons in the external circuit will flow from (LHE) hydrogen gas electrode to (RHE) copper electrode.
Ans. Cell reaction : H2(g) + \(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) → 2 \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) + Cu(s)
Cell potential = E0Cell = 0.337 V
ΔG0 = -65.04 kJ

(10) Calculate the reduction potential of the electrode, Zn2+ (0.02 M) | Zn(s). E0Zn++/Zn = – 0.76 V.
Solution :
Given :E0red = E0Zn++/Zn = -0.76 V;
Concentration of \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) = [Zn2+] = 0.02 M
The reduction reaction for the electrode,
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) +2e → Zn(s); ∴ n = 2
The reduction potential is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 93
= – 0.76 + 0.0296 (- 1.6990)
= -0.76 – 0.0296 × 1.6990
= -0.76 – 0.0503
= -0.8103 V
Ans. Ered = EZn2+/Zn = -0.8103 V

(11) Calculate the potential of the following cell at 25 °C :
Zn | Zn2+(0.6 M) ||H+(1.2 M) | H2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt
E°Zn2+/Zn = -0.763 V
Solution :
Given : E0Zn2+/Zn = -0.763 V;
Concentrations : [Zn2+] = 0.6 M; [H+] = 1.2 M
[H2]g = 1 atm
Cell potential = Ecell = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 94
= 0.763 – 0.0296 × (- 0.3801)
= 0.763 + 0.01125
= 0.77425 V
Ans. Cell potential = E0cell = 0.77425 V

(12) The following redox reaction occurs in a galvanic cell.
2Al(s) + 3Fe2+(1 M) → 2Al3+(1 M)+ 3Fe(s)
(a) Write the cell notation.
(b) Identify anode and cathode
(c) Calculate E0cell if E0anode = – 1.66 V and E0cathode = – 0 44 V
(d) Calculate ΔG0 for the reaction.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 95
(a) In the cell reaction, Al is oxidised from zero to 3+ while Fe3+ is reduced from 3+ to zero. Hence the cell notation is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 96

(b) Anode : Al electrode at LHE
Cathode : Fe electrode at RHE

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 97

(d) The standard free energy change ΔG0 is given by,
ΔG0 = – nFE0cell
= – 6 × 96500 × 1.22
= – 70640 J
= – 706.4 kJ
Ans. (a) Cell notation :
\(\mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{s})}\left|\mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}(1 \mathrm{M}) \| \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}(1 \mathrm{M})\right| \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
(b) Anode : Al; Cathode : Fe
(c) E0cell = 1.22 V
(d) ΔG0 = – 706.4 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(13) Construct a cell consisting of \(\mathbf{N i}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) | Ni(s) half cell and H+ | H2(g) | Pt half cell.
(a) Write the cell reaction
(b) Calculate emf of the cell if [Ni2+] = 0.1M,
PH2 = 1 atm [H+] = 0.05 M and
E0Ni = – 0.257 V.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 98
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 99
= 0.257 – 0.0296 × 1.6020
= 0.257 – 0.04742
= 0.20958
≅ 0.2096 V
Ans.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 100

(14) Calculate the cell potential of the following cell at 25°C,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 101
Standard reduction potentials (SRP) of Zn and Cu are -0.76 V and 0.334 V respectively.
Solution:
Given:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 102

(15) Set up the cell consisting of \(\mathbf{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+} \mid \mathbf{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\) and \(\mathbf{P b}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{2+}\) | Pb(s) electrodes. Calculate the emf at 25 °C of the cell if [Pb2+] = 0.1 M,
[H+] = 0.5 M and hydrogen gas is at 2 atm pressure. E0pb2+/pb = – 0.126 V.
Solution :
Given : Half cells :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 103
Concentrations : [H+] = 0.5 M; [Pb2+] = 0.1M;
[H2]g = PH2 = 2 atm; E0H+/H2 = ESHE = 0.0 V;
E0pb2+/pb = -0.126 V
Since E0pb2+/pb (reduction) < E0H+/H2 the Pb electrode is anode and hydrogen gas electrode is cathode.
The cell formulation :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 104
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 105
= 0.126 – 0.0296 (- 0.0969)
= 0.126 + 0.002868
= 0.128868
≅ 0.1289 V
Ans. Ecell = 0.1289 V

(16) Consider a galvanic cell that uses the half reactions,
2H+(aq) + 2e → H(g)
Mg2+(aq) + 2e → Mg(s)
Write balanced equation for the cell reaction. Calculate E0cell, Ecell and ΔG0 if concentrations are 1M each and PH2 = 10 atm
E0Mg2+/Mg = -2.37 V.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 106
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 107
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 108
The standard free energy change ΔG0 is given by
ΔG0= – nFE0cell
= – 2 × 96500 × 2.37
= -457400 J
= – 457.4 kJ
Ans. E0cell = 2.37 V; Ecell = 2.3404 V;
ΔG0 = -457.4 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(17) Calculate Ecell and ΔG for the following at 28 °C : Mg(s) + Sn2+ (0.04M) → Mg2+ (0.06M) + Sn(s)
E0cell = 2.23 V
Is the reaction spontaneous ?
Solution:
Given:
Mg(s) + Sn2+ (0.04 M) → Mg2+ (0.06 M) + Sn
[Sn2+] = 0.4 M
[Mg2+] = 0.06 M
E0cell = 2.23V
Ecell = ?
ΔG = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 109
2.23 – 0.0296 × 0.1761
= 2.23 – 0.005213
= 2.224V
ΔG = – nFE
= – 2 × 96500 × 2.224
= – 4.292 × 105 J
= -429.2 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the electrochemical reaction is spontaneous.

(18) The standard potentials for Sn2+/Sn and Fe2+/Fe half reactions are -0.136 V and -0.440 V respectively. At what relative concentrations of Sn2+ and Fe2+ will these have the same reduction potentials?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 110
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 111
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 112
Hence when relative concentrations of Sn2+ and Fe2+ i.e., [Sn2+]/[Fe2+] = 5.37 × 10-11, both the electrodes will have same potential.

(19) Write the cell reaction and calculate the emf of the cell at 25 °C.
Cr(s) | Cr3+(0.0065 M) || Co2+(0.012 M) | Co(s)
E0Co = – 0.280 V, E0Cr = – 0.74 V
What is ΔG for the cell reaction ?
Solution :
Given :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 113
By Nernst equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 114
Ecell = 0.4463 V
ΔG = -nFECell
= – 6 × 96500 × 0.4463
= – 258407 J
= – 258.4 kJ
Ans. Cell reaction :
\(2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{s})}+3 \mathrm{Co}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{Co}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
ECell = 0.4463 V; ΔG = – 258.4 kJ.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(20) Calculate E0Cell, ΔG0 and equilibrium constant for the reaction 2Cu+ → Cu2+ + Cu.
E0Cu+/Cu = 0.52 V and E0Cu2+,Cu+ = 0.16 V.
Solution :
Given : Cell reaction : 2Cu+(aq) → Cu2+(aq) +Cu(s)
E0Cu+/Cu = 0.52V; E0Cu2+,Cu+ = 0.16 V
1F = 96500 C
E0Cell = ? ΔG0 = ? K=?
(i) The formulation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 115
(ii) ΔG0 = – nFE0Cell = – 1 × 96500 × 0.36
= – 34740 J
= – 34.74 kJ
(iii) Electrochemical redox reactions are considered as reversible reactions. If K is the equilibrium constant for the electrochemical redox reaction, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 116
Ans. E0Cell = 0.36 V; ΔG0 = – 34.74 kJ; Equilibrium constant = K= 1.2 × 106 mol-1 dm3.

(21) Calculate the equilibrium constant for the redox reaction at 25 °C.
Sr(s) + Mg2+ → Sr2+(aq) + Mg(s),
that occurs in a galvanic cell. Write the cell formula.
E0Mg = – 2.37 V and E0Sr = – 2.89 V.
Solution :
Given :
Cell reaction : Sr(s) + Mg2+ → Sr2+(aq) + Mg(s)
E0 Mg2+/Mg = -2.37 V; E0 Sr2+/Sr = -2.89 V
Equilibrium constant K = ?
The formation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 117
Ans. Equilibrium constant = K = 3.698 × 1017

(22) The equilibrium constant for the following reaction at 25 °C is 2.9 × 109. Calculate standard voltage of the cell.
Cl2(g) + 2Br(aq) ⇌ Br2(l) + 2Cl(aq)
Solution :
Given : Cell reaction : Cl2(g) + 2Br(aq) ⇌ Br2(l) + 2Cl(aq)
Equilibrium constant = K = 2.9 × 109 atm-1
Standard voltage of the cell = E0Cell = ?
The formulation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 118

(23) Write the cell representation and calculate equilibrium constant for the following redox reaction :
Ni(s) + 2 Ag+(aq) (1M) → Ni2+(aq) (1 M) + 2Ag(s)
at 25 °C
E0Ni = – 0.25 V and E0Ag = 0.799 V
Solution :
Given : E0Ni2+/Ni = – 0.25 V; E0Ag+/Ag = 0.799 V
Equilibrium constant = K = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 119

(24) Calculate the cell potential of the following galvanic cell :
Pt|H2 (g, 1 atm)|\(\mathbf{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+} \mathbf{p H}\) = 3.51||Calomel electrode
Ecal = 0.242 V at 25 °C.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 120
= -0.0592 × pH
= -0.0592 × 3.5
= -0.2072 V
∴ Ecell = Ecal – EH+/H2
= 0.242 – (-0.2072)
= 0.242 + 0.2072
= 0.4492 V
Ans. Ecell = 0.4492 V

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 68.
How are the voltaic cells classified ?
Answer:
The voltaic cells are classified as primary and secondary voltaic cells.
(1) Primary voltaic cells : These are the voltaic cells in which the electrical energy or cell potentials are developed within the cells due to oxidation and reduction reactions at the reversible electrodes.

The chemicals and electrode materials consumed during the discharging can be regenerated by passing the current in opposite direction from the external source of electricity i.e., these cells can be recharged. For example, Daniell cell. There are the examples where the primary cells can’t be recharged. E.g. Dry cell.

(2) Secondary voltaic cells :
(i) These are the voltaic cells in which the electrical energy or cell potentials are not developed within the cell but electrical energy can be stored or cell potentials can be regenerated by passing electricity from the external source of electricity. Since the electrical energy obtained is second hand, these cells are called secondary cells or accumulators or storage cells.

(ii) These cells can be recharged by passing electric current in opposite direction from the external source of higher emf. Therefore the secondary cells are reversible cells. For example, lead accumulator (lead storage battery).

Question 69.
Explain the construction and working of a dry cell (or Leclanche’s cell).
OR
Write a note on dry cell.
Answer:
(A) Principle :

  • Leclanche’s cell is a primary voltaic cell.
  • It doesn’t contain mobile liquid electrolyte but contains moist viscose aqeuous paste of the electrolytes.
  • It is an irreversible voltaic cell which can’t be recharged.

(B) Construction :
(i) It consists of a small zinc vessel which serves as an anode (negative electrode).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 121
(ii) The zinc vessel contains a porous paper bag containing an inert graphite (C) electrode which serves as cathode, immersed in a paste of MnO2 and carbon black. This paper bag divides the dry cell into two compartments, namely anode and cathode compartments.
(iii) The rest of the cell is filled with a moist paste of NH4Cl and ZnCl2 which acts as an electrolyte for zinc anode.
(iv) The graphite rod is fitted with a metal cap and the cell is sealed to prevent the drying of moist paste by evaporation.

(C) The dry cell can be represented as,
Zn|ZnCl2(aq), NH2Cl(aq), MnO2(s)|C+.

(D) Reactions in the dry cell :
(i) Oxidation at zinc anode :
Zn(s) → \(\mathrm{Zn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) + 2e (oxidation half reaction)
(ii) Reduction at graphite (C) cathode :
The electrons released in the oxidation reaction at anode, flow to cathode through external circuit.
Hydrogen in NH4 ion is reduced to molecular hydrogen which reduces MnO2 to Mn2O3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 122
(iii) Zn2+ react with NH3 and form a complex.
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+4 \mathrm{NH}_{3(\text { aq) }} \longrightarrow\left[\mathrm{Zn}\left(\mathrm{NH}_{3}\right)_{4}\right]^{2+}{ }_{(\mathrm{aq})}\)
Since Zn2+ ions are removed, the overall cell reaction can’t be reversed.

(E) Uses of dry cell :

  • Dry cell is used as a source of electric power in radios, flashlights, torches, clocks, etc.
  • Since they are available in small size and portable, they can be used conveniently.

Question 70.
Describe the construction and working of lead accumulator (lead storage cell).
OR
Draw a neat labelled diagram of the lead accumulator. Explain the reactions involved in discharging and charging this cell. Represent this cell using cell conventions.
Answer:
(A) Principle :
(1) The lead accumulator is a secondary electrochemical cell since electrical energy and emf are not developed within the cell but it is previously stored by passing an electric current. Hence it is also called lead accumulator or lead storage battery.
(2) It is reversible since the electrochemical reaction can be reversed by passing an electric current in opposite direction and consumed reactants can be regenerated.
(3) Hence battery can be charged after it is discharged.

(B) Construction : In a lead accumulator, the negative terminal (anode) is made up of lead sheets packed with spongy lead, while the positive terminal (cathode) is made up of lead grids packed with PbO2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 123
Sulphuric acid of about 38% strength (%w/w) or specific gravity 1.28 or 4.963 molar is the electrolyte in which the lead sheets and lead grids are dipped. The positive terminal and negative terminal are alternatively arranged in the electrolyte and are separately interconnected.

(C) Representation of lead accumulator :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 124

(D) Working of a lead accumulator :
(1) Discharging : When the electric current is withdrawn from lead accumulator, the following reactions take place :
Oxidation at the – ve electrode or anode :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 125

(2) Net cell reaction :
(i) Thus, the overall cell reaction during discharging is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 126
OR
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)
The cell potential or emf of the cell depends upon the concentration of sulphuric acid. During the operation, the acid is consumed and its concentration decreases and specific gravity decreases from 1.28 to 1.17. As a result, the emf of the cell decreases. The emf of a fully charged cell is about 2.0 V.

(ii) Recharging of the cell : When the discharged battery is connected to external electric source and a higher external potential is applied the cell reaction gets reversed generating H2SO4.
Reduction at the – ve electrode or cathode :
PbSO4(s) + 2e → Pb(s) + \(\mathrm{SO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}\)
Oxidation at the + ve electrode or anode :
PbSO4(s) + 2H2(l)O → PbO2(s) + 4H+(aq) + \(\mathrm{SO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}\) + 2e
The net reaction during charging is
2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l) → Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 4H+(aq) + 2\(\mathrm{SO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}\)
OR
2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O → Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq)
The emf of the accumulator depends only on the concentration of H2SO4.

(E) Applications :

  1. It is used as a source of d.c. electric supply.
  2. It is used in automobile in ignition circuits and lighting the head lights by connecting 6 batteries giving 12V potential.
  3. It is also used in invertors.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 71.
In lead accumulator which electrode is coated with PbO2 ? Anode or cathode ?
Answer:
In lead accumulator, cathode is coated with PbO2.

Question 72.
Write net charging and discharging reactions for lead storage battery.
Answer:
For lead storage battery :
Net charging reaction :
2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l) → Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq)
Net discharging reaction :
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)

Question 73.
Write a note on Nickel-Cadmium (NICAD) cell.
Answer:
(1) Nickel-Cadminum (NICAD) cell is a secondary dry cell.
(2) It is rechargable, hence it is a reversible cell.
(3) It consists of a cadmium electrode in contact with an alkali and acts as anode while nickel (IV) oxide, NiO2 in contact with an alkali acts as cathode. The alkali used is moist paste of KOH.
(4) Reactions in the cell :
(i) Oxidation at cadmium anode :
Cd(s) + 2OH(aq) → Cd(OH)2(s) + 2e
(ii) Reduction at Ni02(s) cathode :
NiO2(s) + 2H2O(l) + 2e → Ni(OH)2(s) + 2OH(aq)
The overall cell reaction is the combination of above two reactions.
Cd(s) + NiO2(s) + 2H2O(l) → Cd(OH)2(s) + Ni(OH)2(s)
(5) Since the net cell reaction doesn’t involve any electrolytes but solids, the voltage is independent of the concentration of alkali electrolyte.
(6) The cell potential is about 1.4 V.
(7) This cell has longer life than other dry cells.

Question 74.
Write a note on mercury battery.
Answer:
(1) Mercury battery is a rechargeable secondary dry cell.
(2) It consists of zinc anode amalgamated with mercury.
(3) The cathode consists of a paste of Hg and carbon.
(4) The electrolyte is a paste of KOH and ZnO in a strong alkaline medium.
(5) Reactions:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 127
(6) The overall reaction involves only solid substances and electrolytic composition remains unchanged.
(7) Therefore mercury battery provides constant voltage (1.35 V) over a long period.
(8) It is superior to Leclanche’s cell in durability.
(9) Uses : It is used in hearing aids, electric watches, pacemakers, etc.

Question 75.
Describe the construction and working of hydrogen-oxygen (H2-O2) fuel cell.
Answer:
(A) Principle :
(i) The functioning of the fuel cell is based on the combustion reaction like,
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(g) is exothermic redox reaction and hence it can be used to produce electricity.
(ii) The reactants of this fuel cell can be continuously supplied from outside, hence this can be used to supply electrical energy for a very long period.

(B) Construction :
(i) In fuel cell the anode and cathode are porous electrodes with suitable catalyst like finely divided platinum.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 128
(ii) The electrolyte used is hot aqueous KOH solution in which porous anode and cathode carbon rods are immersed.
(iii) H2 is continuously bubbled through anode while O2 gas is bubbled through cathode.

(C) Working (cell reactions) :
(i) Oxidation at anode : At anode, hydrogen gas is oxidised to H2O.
2H2(g) + 4OH(aq) → 4H2O(l) + 4e (oxidation half reaction)
(ii) Reduction at cathode : The electrons released at anode travel to cathode through external circuit and reduce oxygen gas to OH-.
O2(g) + 2H2O(l) + 4e → 4OH(aq) (reduction half reaction)
(iii) Net cell reaction: Addition of both the above reactions at anode and cathode gives a net cell reaction.
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l) (overall cell reaction)

(D) Representation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 129
The overall cell reaction is an exothermic combustion reaction. However in this, H2 and O2 gases do not react directly but react through electrode reactions. Hence the chemical energy released in the formation of O-H bonds in H2O, is directly converted into electrical energy.

(E) Advantages :

  1. The fuel cell operates continuously as long as H2 and O2 gases are supplied to the electrodes.
  2. The cell reactions do not cause any pollution.
  3. The efficiency of this galvanic cell is the highest about 70% as compared to ordinary galvanic cells.

(F) Drawbacks of H2-O2 fuel cell :

  1. The cell requires expensive electrodes like Pt, Pd.
  2. In practice, voltage is less than 1.23 volt due to spontaneous reactions at the electrodes.
  3. H2 gas is expensive and hazardous.

(G) Applications :

  1. It was successfully used in spacecraft.
  2. It has potential applications in automobiles, power generators for domestic and industrial uses.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 76.
What are the applications of the fuel cells?
Answer:

  1. Fuel cells have been used in the space programme providing electrical energy for a long duration.
  2. The fuel cells have been used in automobiles on experimental basis.
  3. In case of H2-O2 fuel cell, used in spacecraft, the water produced is used for drinking for astronauts.
  4. The fuel cells using methanol as a fuel for combustion are used in electronic products such as cell phones and laptop computers.
  5. The fuel cells have many potential applications as power generators for domestic and industrial uses.

Question 77.
In what way fuel cell differs from ordinary galvanic cells ?
Answer:

  1. Fuel cell is a modified galvanic cell in which the thermal energy of combustion reactions is directly converted into electrical energy.
  2. In the fuel cell, the reactants are not placed within the cell like ordinary galvanic cells, but they are continuously supplied to the electrodes from outside reservoir.
  3. They cannot be recharged unlike ordinary galvanic cell.

Question 78.
Define electrochemical series or electromotive series.
Answer:
Electrochemical series (Electromotive series) : It is defined as the arrangement in a series of electrodes of elements (metal or non-metal in contact with their ions) with the electrode half reactions in the decreasing order of their standard reduction potentials.

Question 79.
Explain electrochemical series or electromotive series.
Answer:
The conventions used in the construction of electrochemical series (or electromotive series) are as follows :

  • The (reduction) electrodes or half cells of the elements are written on the left hand side of the series and they are arranged in the decreasing order of their standard reduction potentials (E°red).
  • Reduction half reactions are written for each half cell in such a way that the species with higher oxidation state and electrons are on left hand side while reduced species with lower oxidation state are on right hand side.
  • The standard reduction potential of standard hydrogen electrode is 0.00 V, i.e., E0H+/H2 = 0.0 V. The electrodes and half cell reactions with positive E0red values are located above hydrogen and those with negative E0red values below hydrogen. Above hydrogen, positive E0red values increase, while below hydrogen negative E0 values increase.
  • The positive E0red values indicate the tendency for reduction and the negative E0red values indicate the tendency for oxidation.
  • The elements, whose electrodes are at the top of the series having high positive values for E0red are good oxidising agents.
  • The elements, whose electrodes are at the bottom of the series having high negative values for E0red are good reducing agents.

Question 80.
What are the applications of electrochemical series (or electromotive series) ?
Answer:
The applications of electrochemical series (or electromotive series) are as follows :
(1) Relative strength of oxidising agents in terms of E0red values : The E0red value is a measure of the tendency of the species to be reduced i.e., to accept electrons and act as an oxidising agent. The species mentioned on left hand side of the half reactions are oxidising agents.

The substances in the upper positions in the series and hence in the upper left side of the half reactions have large positive E0red values hence are stronger oxidising agents. For example, F2, Ce4+, Au3+, etc. As we move down the series, the oxidising power decreases. Hence from the position of the elements in the electrochemical series, oxidising agents can be selected.

(2) Relative strength of reducing agents in terms of E0red values : The lower E0red value means lower tendency to accept electrons but higher tendency to lose electrons. The tendency for reverse reaction or oxidation increases as E0red becomes more negative and we move towards the lower side of the series. For example, Li, K, Al, etc. are good reducing agents.

(3) Identifying the spontaneous direction of reaction : From the standard reduction potentials, E0red, the spontaneity of a redox reaction can be determined. The difference between E0red values for any two electrodes represents cell potential E0cell, constituted by them.

If E°cell is positive then the reaction is spontaneous while if E0cell is negative the reaction is non-spontaneous. For example, E0Mg2+/Mg and E0Ag+/Ag have values -2.37 V and 0.8 V respectively. Then Mg will be a better reducing agent than Ag. Therefore Mg can reduce Ag+ to Ag.

The corresponding reactions will be:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 130

Therefore above reaction in the forward direction will be spontaneous while in the reverse direction will be non-spontaneous since for it E0cell = -3.17V.

(4) Calculation of standard cell potential E0cell : From the electrochemical series, the standard cell potential, E0cell from the E0red values for the half reactions given can be calculated.
For example,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 131

Question 81.
Write any four applications of electrochemical series.
Answer:
The applications of electrochemical series are as follows :

  1. Predicting relative strength of oxidising agents.
  2. Predicting relative strength of reducting agents.
  3. Identifying the spontaneous direction of a reaction.
  4. To calculate the standard cell potential E°cell.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 82.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. The cell constant of a conductivity cell is given by
(a) l × a
(b) \(\frac{a}{l}\)
(c) \(\frac{1}{l \times a}\)
(d) \(\frac{l}{a}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{l}{a}\)

2. A conductivity cell has two platinum electrodes of area 1.2 cm2 and 0.92 cm apart. Hence the cell constant is
(a) 1.104 cm-1
(b) 1.304 cm-1
(c) 0.906 cm-1
(d) 0.767 cm-1
Answer:
(d) 0.767 cm-1

3. The conductivity of 0.02 M KI solution is 4.37 × 10-4 Ω-1 cm-1. Hence its molar conductivity is
(a) 8.74 × 10-6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(b) 21.85 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) 4.58 × 10-4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(d) 136.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(b) 21.85 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

4. The specific conductance of 0.02 M HCl is 8.2 × 10-3 Ω-1 cm-1. Hence its molar conductivity is
(a) 164 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(b) 6.1 × 103Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) 239.6 S cm2 mol-1
(d) 410 S cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(d) 410 S cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

5. Molar conductivity of an electrolyte is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 132
Answer:
(c) \(\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{\mathrm{C}}\)

6. The units of molar conductivity are
(a) Ω cm-2 mol-1
(b) Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) Ω-1 cm-1 mol-1
(d) Ω cm-1 mol-2
Answer:
(b) Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

7. If conductivity is expressed in Ω-1 m-1 and concentration of the electrolytic solution in mol m-3 then, the molar conductance is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 133
Answer:
(b) \(\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{\kappa}{C}\)

8. Kohlrausch’s law is represented as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 134
Answer:
(a) \(\wedge_{0}=\lambda_{+}^{0}+\lambda_{-}^{0}\)

9. The degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 135
Answer:
(c) α = \(\frac{\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}}{\wedge_{0}}\)

10. ∧0 for CH3COOH is 390.7 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. If ∧0 for CH3COOK, and HBr in Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 are 115 and 430.4 respectively, then ∧0 for KBr is
(a) 74.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(b) 180.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) 154.7 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(d) 706.1 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(c) 154.7 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

11. The molar conductivity of cation and anion of salt BA are 180 and 220 mhos respectively. The molar conductivity of salt BA at infinite dilution is
(a) 90 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
(b) 110 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
(c) 200 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
(d) 400 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
Answer:
(d) 400 mhos · cm2 · mol-1

12. If ∧m and ∧0 are the molar conductivities of a weak electrolyte at concentration C and at zero concentration, then the dissociation constant Ka is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 136
Answer:
(b) Ka = \(\frac{\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}^{2} \times \mathrm{C}}{\Lambda_{0}\left(\wedge_{0}-\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}\right)}\)

13. What is the ratio of volumes of H2 and O2 liberated during electrolysis of acidified water ?
(a) 1 : 2
(b) 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 8
(d) 8 : 1
Answer:
(b) 2 : 1

14. What weight of copper will be deposited by passing 2 Faradays of electricity through a cupric salt? (atomic mass = 63.5)
(a) 63.5 g
(b) 31.75 g
(c) 127 g
(d) 12.7 g
Answer:
(a) 63.5 g

15. The S.I. unit of cell constant for conductivity cell is
(a) m-1
(b) S·m-2
(c) cm-2
(d) S·dm2·mol-1
Answer:
(a) m-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

16. The charge of how many coulomb is required to deposit 1.0 g of sodium metal (molar mass 23.0 g mol-1) from sodium ions is
(a) 2098
(b) 96500
(c) 193000
(d) 4196
Answer:
(d) 4196

17. The amount of electricity equal to 0.05 F is
(a) 48250 C
(b) 3776 C
(c) 4825 C
(d) 4285 C
Answer:
(c) 4825 C

18. The number of electrons that have a total charge of 965 coulombs is
(a) 6.022 × 1023
(b) 6.022 × 1022
(c) 6.022 × 1021
(d) 3.011 × 1023
Answer:
(c) 6.022 × 1021

19. When 0.2 Faraday of electricity is passed through an electrolytic solution, the number of electrons involved are
(a) 96500
(b) 1.603 × 10-19
(c) 1.2046 × 1023
(d) 12 × 106
Answer:
(c) 1.2046 × 1023

20. When a charge of 0.5 Faraday is passed through AlCl3 solution, the amount of aluminium deposited at the cathode is (Atomic weight of Al = 27)
(a) 4.5
(b) 18
(c) 27
(d) 2.7
Answer:
(a) 4.5

21. The quantity of electricity required to deposit 54 g of silver from silver nitrate solution is
(a) 0.5 Coulomb
(b) 0.5 Ampere
(c) 0.5 Faraday
(d) 0.5 Volt
Answer:
(c) 0.5 Faraday

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

22. Passage of 5400 C of electricity through an electrolyte deposited 5.954 × 10-3 kg of the metal with atomic mass 106.4. The charge on the metal ion is
(a) + 1
(b) + 2
(c) + 3
(d) + 4
Answer:
(a) + 1

23. On calculating the strength of current in amperes if a charge of 840 C (coulomb) passes through an electrolyte in 7 minutes, it will be
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

24. On passing 1.5 F charge, the number of moles of aluminium deposited at cathode are [Molar mass of Al = 27 gram mol-3]
(a) 1.0
(b) 13.5
(c) 0.50
(d) 0.75
Answer:
(c) 0.50

25. Number of faradays of electricity required to liberate 12 g of hydrogen is
(a) 1
(b) 8
(c) 12
(d) 16
Answer:
(c) 12

26. Daniell cell is
(a) Secondary cell
(b) Irreversible cell
(c) primary irreversible cell
(d) primary reversible cell
Answer:
(d) primary reversible cell

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

27. In the representation of galvanic cell, the ions in the same phase are separated by a
(a) single vertical line
(b) comma
(c) double vertical lines
(d) semicolon
Answer:
(b) comma

28. In the Daniell cell, reduction occurs at the
(a) anode
(b) zinc rod
(c) negative electrode
(d) positive electrode
Answer:
(d) positive electrode

29. The standard hydrogen electrode is represented as
(a) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\)|H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt
(b) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 1M | H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt
(c) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 1M|H2(g)|Pt
(d) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 0.1M|H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt
Answer:
(b) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 1M | H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt

30. The essential condition to set a standard hydrogen electrode is
(a) 298 K
(b) pure and dry H2 gas at 1 atm
(c) solution containing H+ at unit activity
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

31. In hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell, the carbon rods are immersed in hot aqueous solution of
(a) KCl
(b) KOH
(c) H2SO4
(d) NH4Cl
Answer:
(b) KOH

32. The emf of cell is 1.3 volt. The positive electrode has potential of 0.5 volt. The potential of negative electrode is
(a) 0.8 V
(b) -0.8 V
(c) 1.8 V
(d) – 1.8 V
Answer:
(b) -0.8 V

33. The electrode potential of a silver electrode dipped in 0.1 M AgNO3 solution at 298 K is (E0red of Ag = 0.80 volt)
(a) 0.0741 V
(b) 0.0591 V
(c) 0.741 V
(d) 0.859 V
Answer:
(c) 0.741 V

34. Which of the following species gains electrons more easily ?
(a) Na+
(b) H+
(c) Mg+
(d) Hg+
Answer:
(b) H+

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

35. In Nernst equation the constant 0.0592 at 298 K represents the value of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 137
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{2.303 R T}{F}\)

36. The concept of electrode potential is explained on the basis of
(a) Arrhenius’ theory
(b) Ostwald’s theory
(c) Nemst’s theory
(d) Faraday’s law
Answer:
(c) Nemst’s theory

37. The standard reduction potentials of metals A and B are x and y respectively. If x > y, the standard emf of the cell containing these electrodes would be
(a) 2x – y
(b) y – x
(c) x – y
(d) x + y
Answer:
(c) x – y

38. The emf of the cell,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 138
(E0red = 0.34 V)
(a) -1.34
(b) 0.34 V
(c) -0.34 V
(d) 1.34
Answer:
(b) 0.34 V

39. The Electromotive Force of the following Cell Cu|Cu++ (1 M)||A+g (1 M)|Ag is …………….. if E0cu++ = 0.33 V and E0 Ag++/Ag = 0.79 V
(a) 0.46 V
(b) – 0.46 V
(c) 1.12 V
(d) – 112 V
Answer:
(a) 0.46 V

40. The standard cell potential of the following cell is 0.463 V Cu|Cu++ (1 M)||Ag+ (1 M)|Ag. If E0Ag = 0.8 V, what is the standard potential of Cu electrode ?
(a) 1.137 V
(b) 0.337 V
(c) 0.463 V
(d) – 0.463 V
Answer:
(b) 0.337 V

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

41. The metal which cannot displace hydrogen from dil. H2SO4 solution is
(a) Zn
(b) Al
(c) Fe
(d) Ag
Answer:
(d) Ag

42. In the Lead storage battery during discharging
(a) pH of the electrolyte increases
(b) pH decreases
(c) pH remain unchanged
(d) pH increases or decreases depends on the extent of discharging
Answer:
(a) pH of the electrolyte increases

43. During the discharging of a lead storage battery,
(a) H2SO4 is consumed
(b) PbSO4 is consumed
(c) Pb2+ ions are formed
(d) Pb is formed
Answer:
(a) H2SO4 is consumed

44. In lead accumulator, anode and cathode are
(a) (Pb + PbO2), Pb
(b) Pb, PbO2
(b) PbO2, Pb
(d) Pb, (Pb + PbO2)
Answer:
(d) Pb, (Pb + PbO2)

45. The efficiency of the hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell is about
(a) 20%
(b) 40%
(c) 70%
(d) 90%
Answer:
(c) 70%

46. The strongest oxidizing agent among the species In3+ (E0 = – 1.34 V), Au3+ (E0 = 1.4 V), Hg2+ (E0 = 0.86 V), Cr3+ (E0 = – 0.74 V) is
(a) Cr3+
(b) Au3+
(c) Hg2+
(d) In3+
Answer:
(b) Au3+

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

47. The reaction, \(2 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Br}_{2(\mathrm{l})}+\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
with the standard potentials, E0Sn = -0.114 V, E0Br2 = + 1.09 V, is
(a) spontaneous in reverse direction
(b) spontaneous in forward direction
(c) at equilibrium
(d) non-spontaneous in reverse direction
Answer:
(a) spontaneous in reverse direction

48. The cell potential of the following cell is
(E0Al3+/Al = – 1.66 V)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 139
(a) 1.66 V
(b) -1.66 V
(c) 0.5533 V
(d) 2.14 V
Answer:
(a) 1.66 V

49. The standard reduction potentials of Sn, Hg and Cr are – 1.36 V, 0.854 V and – 0.746 V respectively. The increasing order of oxidising power of the given elements is
(a) Sn < Hg < Cr
(b) Hg < Cr < Sn
(c) Sn < Cr < Hg
(d) Cr < Hg < Sn
Answer:
(c) Sn < Cr < Hg

50. If standard reduction potentials for Pb, K, Zn and Cu are -0.126 V, -2.925 V, -0.763 V and 0.337 V, the decreasing order of reducing power is
(a) Zn > Pb > K > Cu
(b) Cu > Pb > Zn > K
(c) K > Zn > Pb > Cu
(d) K > Pb > Cu > Zn
Answer:
(c) K > Zn > Pb > Cu+

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 1.
Define the term energy.
Answer:
The energy of a system is defined as its capacity to perform the work. A system with higher energy can perform more work.

Question 2.
What are different forms of energy?
Answer:
The energy of a system has many different forms as follows :

  • Kinetic energy arises due to motion, like rotational, vibrational and translational.
  • Potential energy arises due to position and state of a matter. If depends upon the temperature of the system.
  • Heat energy (or thermal energy) which is transferred from the hotter body to the colder body.
  • Radiant energy is associated with electro-magnetic or light radiation.
  • Electrical energy is produced in the galvanic cells.
  • Chemical energy is stored in chemical substances.

All these various forms of energy can be converted from one form to another without any loss.

Question 3.
Explain the concept of interconversion of different forms of energy.
Answer:
There are various forms of energy like kinetic energy, potential energy, heat or thermal energy, radiant energy, electrical energy and chemical energy.

All these forms of energy are interconvertible. For example, a body at very high level possesses higher potential energy. When it falls down, potential energy is converted into kinetic energy. Falling of water from high level is used to drive turbines converting potential energy into kinetic energy which is further converted into electrical energy.

In galvanic cells, chemical energy is converted into electrical energy.
In electrolytic cells, chemical energy is converted into electrical energy. But during interconversion, the energy can neither be created nor destroyed, and there is a conservation of energy.

Question 4.
What is thermodynamics ? What are its drawbacks?
Answer:
Thermodynamics : It is concerned with the energy changes in physical and chemical changes.

Drawbacks :

  • It does not give information on the rates of physical or chemical changes.
  • It does not explain mechanisms involved in physical and chemical processes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 5.
Define and explain :
(1) System (2) Surroundings (3) Boundary.
Answer:
(1) System : The portion of the universe under thermo-dynamic consideration to study thermodynamic properties is called a system.
Explanation :

  • As such any portion of the universe under thermodynamic consideration is a system. The thermodynamic consideration involves the study of thermodynamic parameters like pressure, volume, temperature, energy, etc.
  • The system may be very small or very large.
  • The system is confined by a real or an imaginary boundary.

(2) Surroundings : The remaining portion of the universe other than under thermodynamics study i.e„ the system is called the surroundings.
Explanation :

  • Surroundings represent a large stock of mass and energy and can be exchanged with the system when allowed.
  • For a liquid in an open vessel, the surrounding atmosphere around it represents the surroundings.

(3) Boundary : The wall or interface separating the system from its surrounding is called a boundary.
Explanation :

  • This boundary may be either real or imaginary.
  • Through this boundary, exchange of heat and matter between the system and surroundings can take place, e.g. when a liquid is placed in a beaker the walls of beaker represent real boundaries while open portion of the beaker is imaginary boundary.
  • Everything outside the boundary represents surroundings.

Question 6.
What are the types of systems ?
Answer:
Following are the types of systems :

  1. Open system
  2. Closed system
  3. Isolated system
  4. Homogeneous system
  5. Heterogeneous system.

Question 7.
Define and explain the following :
(1) Open system
(2) Closed system
(3) Isolated system.
Answer:
(1) Open system :it is defined as a system which can exchange both matter and energy with its surroundings, e.g. a beaker containing water. The water continuously absorbs energy from the surroundings and forms vapour which diffuse in the surroundings. So that this system exchanges energy and matter (or mass), with the surroundings.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 1
Fig. 4.1 : Open system

(2) Closed system : it is defined as a system which can exchange only energy but not the matter with its surroundings, e.g. A closed vessel containing hot water so that only heat is lost to the surroundings and not the matter.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 2
Fig. 4.2 : Closed system

(3) Isolated system : it is defined as a system which can neither exchange energy nor matter with its surroundings, e.g. hot water filled in a thermally insulated closed vessel like thermos flask.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 3
In actual practice, perfectly isolated system is not possible.
Universe represents an isolated system.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 8.
‘Universe is an isolated system’. Explain.
Answer:
Universe represents an isolated system due to the following reasons :

  • The total mass and energy of the universe remain constant.
  • The universe has no boundary.
  • The universe has no surroundings.

Question 9.
Define and explain :
(1) Homogeneous system
(2) Heterogeneous system.
Answer:
(1) Homogeneous system : A system consisting of only one uniform phase is called a homogeneous system.
Explanation :
(1) The properties of homogeneous system are uniform throughout the phase or system.
(2) The homogeneous systems are :

  • Solutions of miscible liquids (water and alcohol) or soluble solids in liquids, (NaCl in water), etc.
  • Mixture of gases. H2 and N2, NH3 and H2, etc.

(2) Heterogeneous system : A system consisting of two or more phases separated by interfacial boundaries is called a heterogeneous system.
Explanation : These systems are :

  • Mixture of two or more immiscible liquids. E.g. Water and benzene.
  • Solid in equilibrium with liquid.
    E.g. Ice ⇌ water.
  • Liquid in equilibrium with vapour.
    E.g. Water ⇌ vapour.

Question 10.
Explain : (A) Extensive property (B) Intensive property of a system.
OR
What is the difference between extensive and intensive properties?
Answer:
The properties of a system are classified as (A) Extensive property and (B) Intesive property.
(A) Extensive property : It is defined as a property of a system whose magnitude depends on the amount of matter present in the system.
Explanation :

  • More the quantity (or amount) of the matter of the system, more is the magnitude of extensive property, e.g., mass, volume, heat, energy, enthalpy, etc.
  • The extensive properties are additive.

(B) Intensive property : It is defined as a property of a system whose magnitude is independent of the amount of matter present in the system.
Explanation :

  • Intensive property is characteristic of the system, e.g., refractive index, density, viscosity, temperature, pressure, boiling point, melting point, freezing point of a pure liquid, surface tension, etc.
  • The intensive properties are not additive.

Question 11.
Select extensive and intensive properties in the following :
Moles, molar heat capacity, entropy, heat capacity.
Answer:
Extensive property : Moles, entropy, heat capacity.
Intensive property : Molar heat capacity.

Question 12.
What is a state function ? Give examples.
Answer:
State function : The property which depends on the state of the system and independent of the path followed by the system to attain the final state is called a state function.
For example, pressure, volume, temperature, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 13.
Classify the following properties as intensive or extensive :
(i) Temperature (ii) Density (iii) Enthalpy (iv) Mass (v) Energy (vi) Refractive index (vii) Pressure (viii) Viscosity (ix) Volume (x) Weight.
Answer:
(1) Intensive properties : Temperature, Density, Refractive index. Pressure, Viscosity.
(2) Extensive properties : Enthalpy, Mass, Energy, Volume, Weight.

Question 14.
What are path functions?
Answer:
Path functions : The properties which depend on the path of the process are called path functions. For example, work (W) and heat (Q).

Question 15.
Define thermodynamic equilibrium. Mention different types of thermodynamic equilibria.
Answer:
Thermodynamic equilibrium : A system is said to have attained a state of thermodynamic equilibrium if there is no change in any thermodynamic functions or state functions like energy, pressure, volume, etc. with time.

For a system to be in thermodynamic equilibrium, it has to attain following three types of equilibrium :

  • Thermal equilibrium
  • Chemical equilibrium
  • Mechanical equilibrium

Question 16.
Distinguish between :
(1) Open system and Closed system :
Open system:

  1. An open system can exchange both matter and energy with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of matter does not remain constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in an open beaker.

Closed system:

  1. A closed system can exchange only energy, but not matter with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of matter remains constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in a closed glass flask.

(2) Closed system and Isolated system :
Closed system:

  1. A closed system can exchange only energy, but not matter with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of energy does not remain constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in a sealed glass flask.

Isolated system:

  1. An isolated system can exchange neither matter nor energy with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of energy remains constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in a thermos flask.

(3) Open system and Isolated system :
Open system:

  1. An open system can exchange matter with the surroundings.
  2. It can exchange energy with the surroundings.
  3. In this, the total amount of energy does not remain constant.
  4. Example : Hot water kept in an open beaker.

Isolated system

  1. An isolated system cannot exchange matter with the surroundings.
  2. It cannot exchange energy with the surroundings.
  3. In this, the total amount of energy remains constant.
  4. Example : Hot water kept in a thermos flask.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 17.
What is a thermodynamic process ? What are different types of processes ?
Answer:
(i) Thermodynamic process : It is defined as a transition by which a state of a system changes from initial equilibrium state to final equilibrium state.

The process is carried out by changing the state functions or thermodynamic variables like pressure, volume and temperature. During the process one or more properties of the system change.

(ii) Types of processes :

  • Isothermal process
  • Isobaric process
  • Isochoric process
  • Adiabatic process
  • Reversible process
  • Irreversible (spontaneous) process.

Question 18.
Define and explain different types of processes.
Answer:
There are following types of processes :
(1) Isothermal process : It is defined as a process in which the temperature of the system remains constant throughout the change of a state of the system.
In this, ΔT = 0.

Features :

  • In this process, the temperature at initial state, final state and throughout the process remains constant.
  • In this process, system exchanges heat energy with its surroundings to maintain constant temperature. E.g., in case of exothermic process liberated heat is given to the surroundings and in case of endothermic process heat is absorbed from the surroundings so that temperature of the system remains constant and ΔT = 0.
  • Isothermal process is carried out with a closed system.
  • Internal energy (U) of the system remains constant, hence, Δ U = 0.
  • In this process, pressure and volume of a gaseous system change.

(2) Isobaric process : It is defined as a process which is carried out at constant pressure. Hence, Δ P = 0.
Features :

  • In this process, the volume (of gaseous system) changes against a constant pressure.
  • Since the external atmospheric pressure remains always constant, all the processes carried out in open vessels, or in the laboratory are isobaric processes.
  • In this volume and temperature change.
  • Internal energy of a system changes, hence, ΔU ≠ 0.

(3) Isochoric process : It is defined as a process which is carried out at constant volume of the system.
Features :

  • In this process, temperature and pressure of the system change but volume remains constant.
  • Since ΔV = 0, no mechanical work is performed.
  • In this internal energy (U) of the system changes. The example of this process in cooking takes place in a pressure cooker.

(4) Adiabatic process : It is defined as a process in which there is no exchange of heat energy between the system and its surroundings. Hence, Q = 0.
Features :

  • An adiabatic process is carried out in an isolated system.
  • In this process, temperature and internal energy of a system change, ΔT ≠ 0, Δ U ≠ 0.
  • During expansion, temperature and energy decrease and during compression, temperature and energy increase.
  • If the process is exothermic, the temperature rises and if the process is endothermic the temperature decreases in the adiabatic process.

(5) Reversible process : A process carried out in such a manner that at every stage, the driving force is only infinitesimally greater than the opposing force and it can be reversed by an infinitesimal increase in force and the system exists in equilibrium with its surroundings throughout, is called a reversible process.
Features :

  • This is a hypothetical process.
  • Driving force is infinitesimally greater than the opposing force throughout the change.
  • The process can be reversed at any point by making infinitesimal changes in the conditions.
  • The process takes place infinitesimally slowly involving infinite number of steps.
  • At the end of every step of the process, the system attains mechanical equilibrium, hence, throughout the process, the system exists in temperature-pressure equilibrium with its surroundings.
  • In this process, maximum work is obtained.
  • Temperature remains constant throughout the isothermal reversible process.

(6) Irreversible process : it is defined as the unidirectional process which proceeds in a definite direction and cannot be reversed at any stage and in which driving force and opposing force differ in a large magnitude. It is also called a spontaneous process.
Features :

  • It takes place without the aid of external agency.
  • All irreversible processes are spontaneous.
  • All natural processes are irreversible processes.
  • Equilibrium is attained at the end of process.
  • They are real processes and are not hypothetical.

Examples :

  • Flow of heat from a matter at higher temperature to a matter at lower temperature.
  • Flow of a gas from higher to lower pressure.
  • Flow of water from higher level to lower level.
  • Flow of a solvent into a solution through a semipermeable membrane due to osmosis.
  • Flow of electricity from higher potential terminal to lower potential terminal.

Question 19.
Distinguish between :
(1) Isothermal process and Adiabatic process.
(2) Reversible and irreversible processes.
Answer:
Isothermal process:

  1. In an isothermal process, the temperature of the system remains constant. ΔT = 0
  2. In this process, the system exchanges heat with the surroundings. Q ≠ 0 (Closed system)
  3. The total internal energy of the system remains constant.
  4. In this process, the system is not thermally isolated.
  5. In this process, Q = -W as ΔU = 0.
  6. ΔH = 0.

Adiabatic process:

  1. In an adiabatic process, the temperature of the system changes. ΔT ≠ 0
  2. In this process, the system does not exchange heat with the surroundings. Q = 0 (Isolated system)
  3. The total internal energy of the system changes. ΔU ≠ 0
  4. In this process, the system is thermally isolated.
  5. In this process, W = ΔU.
  6. ΔH ≠ 0.

(2) Reversible and irreversible processes.
Reversible process:

  1. The process whose direction can be reversed at any stage by an infinitesimal increase in the opposing force is called a reversible process.
  2. Such a process is not spontaneous and takes place infinitesimally slowly and takes infinite time for completion.
  3. In this process, the thermodynamic equilibrium is always maintained between the system and the surroundings at every step.
  4. The opposing force is infinitesimally less than the driving force.
  5. It is an ideal or hypothetical process.
  6. Maximum work can be derived from such a process.

Irreversible process:

  1. The process whose direction cannot be reversed by an infinitesimal increase in the opposing force is called an irreversible process.
  2. Such a process is spontaneous and takes finite time for completion.
  3. The thermodynamic equilibrium is attained only at the end of the process.
  4. The opposing force is significantly less than the driving force.
  5. It is a practical or real and spontaneous process.
  6. Work derived from such a process is always less than the maximum work.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 20.
Show that pressure times volume (PV) is equal to work.
Answer:
The work is defined as the energy by which a body is displaced through a distance d by applying a force f.
∴ W = f × d
If area is A = d2 and volume V = d3 then,
PV = \(\frac{f}{A}\) × d3 = \(\frac{f}{d^{2}}\) × d3 = f × d = W
∴ The term PV represents the pressure-volume work.

Question 21.
Explain the process of (A) expansion and (B) compression with suitable examples.
Answer:
(A ) Expansion : Consider an ideal cylinder fitted with a piston and filled with H2O2(l).
2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(l)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 4
Fig. 4.5 : Decomposition of H2O2
The oxygen gas produced pushes the piston upwards lifting the mass. Thus, the system performs the work on the surroundings and loses energy by expansion. In this work is done by the system.

(B) Compression : Consider an ideal cylinder fitted with a piston and containing gaseous NH3(g) and HCl(g).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 5
Fig. 4.6 : Reaction between NH3(g) and HCl(g)
NH3(g) + HCl(g) → NH4Cl(s)
As the reaction proceeds, due to consumption of gases, the volume decreases and there is work due to compression. In this work is done on the system by surroundings and the system gains energy.

Question 22.
What are the sign conventions for Q and W in (A) expansion, (B) compression?
Answer:
(A) For expansion, work is done by the system hence,
Q = -ve and W = -ve
(B) For compression, work is done on the system hence,
Q = -ve and W = +ve
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 6
Fig. 4.7 : Sign conventions

Question 23.
Explain sign convention of work during expansion and compression.
OR
Explain +W and -W.
Answer:
(A) Expansion of a gas :
(1) When a gas expands against a constant pressure, Pex changing the volume from initial volume V1 to final volume V2,
Change in volume, Δ V = V2 – V1
The mechanical work = W = -Pex × Δ V
= -Pex (V2 – V1)

(2) During expansion V2 > V1. The work is said to be performed by the system on the surroundings. This results in the decrease in the (work) energy of the system. Hence the work is negative, i.e. W is -ve.

(B) Compression of a gas : During compression, V2 < V1. The work is said to be performed on the system by the surroundings. This results in the increase in the (work) energy of the system. Hence the work is positive, i.e. W is + ve.

Question 24.
What are different units of energy and work ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 7

Question 25.
What are the characteristics of maximum work?
Answer:
(1) The process is carried out at constant temperature.
(2) During the complete process, driving force is infinitesimally greater than opposing force.
(3) Throughout the process, the system exists in equilibrium with its surroundings.
(4) The work obtained is maximum. This is given by,
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
OR
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)
where n, P, V and T represent number of moles, pressure, volume and temperature respectively.
(5) ΔU = 0, ΔH = 0.
(6) The heat absorbed in reversible manner
Qrev, is completely converted into work.
Qrev = -Wmax.
Hence work obtained is maximum.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.3

Question 26.
Solve the following :

(1) 2.5 moles of an ideal gas are expanded isothermally from 12 dm3 to 25 dm3 against a pressure of 3.0 bar. Calculate the work obtained.
Solution :
Given : n = 2.5 mol; V1 = 12 dm3;
V2 = 25 dm3
Pext = 3.0 bar; W = ?
W = -Pext × (V2 – V1)
= – 3 × (25 – 12)
= -39 dm3 bar
∵ V1 dm3 = 100 J
∴ W = -39 × 100 = -3900 J = -3.9kJ
Ans. W= -3.9 kJ

(2) When 2.2 moles of an ideal gas are expanded from 3.5 dm3 to 12 dm3 against a constant pressure, the work obtained is 3910 J. Estimate the external pressure.
Solution :
Given : n = 2.2 mol; V1 = 3.5 dm3; V2 = 12 dm3
W= -3910 J = \(\frac{-3910}{100}\)dm3 bar
W = -Pex (V2 – V1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 8
= 4.6 bar
Ans. Pex = 4.6 bar

(3) Three moles of an ideal gas are expanded isothermally from a volume of 300 cm3 to 2.5 dm3 at 300 K against a pressure of 1.9 bar. Calculate the work done in L atm and joules.
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of a gas = n = 3 mol
Initial volume = V1 = 300 cm3
= 0.3 dm3
Final volume = V2 = 2.5 dm3
External pressure = Pex =1.9 bar
Temperature = T = 300 K
∵ W = -Pex (V2 – V1)
= -1.9 (2.5 – 0.3)
= -4.18 dm3 bar
Now, 1 dm3 bar = 100 J
∴ W = -4.18 × 100
= -4180 J
Ans. Work of expansion = W = -4180 J

(4) Calculate the constant external pressure needed to compress an ideal gas from 25 dm3 to 15 dm3. The amount of work done in the compression process is 3500 joules.
Solution :
As the compression of the gas takes place against a constant pressure, the work done is given by
W = -Pex(V2 – V1)
W = Work done by the gas against the external pressure = 3500 J
∴ W = \(\frac{3500}{100}\) = 35 dm3 bar
P = Constant external pressure = ?
V2 = Final volume = 15 dm3
V1 = Initial volume = 25 dm3
∴ 35= -P × (15 – 25)
∴ 35 = 10 × P
∴ P = \(\frac{35}{10}\) = 3.5 bar
Ans. External pressure = 3.5 bar

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(5) Three moles of an ideal gas are compressed isothermally and reversibly to a volume of 2 dm3. The work done is 2.983 kJ at 22°C. Calculate the initial volume of the gas.
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of a gas = n = 3 mol
Final volume = V2 = 2 dm3
Initial volume = V1 = ?
For compression,
Wmax = +2.983 kJ = 2983 J
Temperature = T = (273 + 22) K = 295 K
Wmax= -2.303 nRT log10\(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
∴ \(\frac{2983}{2.303 \times 3 \times 8.314 \times 295}\)
= -[log102 – log10V1]
0.1760 = -log102 + log10 V1
= -0.3010 + log10V1
∴ log10 V1 = 0.1760 + 0.3010 = 0.4770
∴ V1 = Antilog 0.4770
= 3.0 dm3
Ans. Initial volume of the gas = 3.0 dm3

(6) A chemical reaction takes place in a container of cross sectional area 100 cm2. As a result of the reaction, a piston is pushed out through 10 cm against an external pressure of 1.0 bar. Calculate the work done by the system.
Solution :
Given : Cross sectional area = A = 100 cm2
Displacement of a piston = 1 = 10 cm
External pressure = P = 1.0 bar
Work = W = ?
Volume change = A × l
∴ ΔV = 100 × 10
= 1000 cm3
= 1 dm3
Work = W = -P × ΔV
= -1 × 1
= -1 dm3 bar
= – 1 × 100 J
= -100 J
Ans. Work = W = -100 J

(7) 5 moles of helium expand isothermally and reversibly from a pressure 4 atm to 0.4 at 300 K. Calculate the work done, change in internal energy and heat absorbed during the expansion. (R = 8.314 J k-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : n = 5 mol
P1 = 4 atm
P2 = 0.4 atm
T = 300 K
Wmax = ?, ΔU = ?, Q = ?
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 (\(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\))
= -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 log10 \(\frac{4}{0.4}\)
= -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × 1
= -28720 J
= -28.72 kJ
For an isothermal process, ΔU = 0
By first law, ΔU = Q + Wmax
∴ Q = -Wmax
= – (-28.72) = 28.72 kJ
Ans. Wmax = – 28.72 kJ; ΔU = 0;
Q = 28.72 kJ

(8) 2.8 × 10-2 kg of nitrogen is expanded isothermally and reversibly at 300 K from 15.15 × 105 Pa when the work done is found to be -17.33 kJ. Find the final pressure.
Solution :
Given : Mass of nitrogen = m = 2.8 × 10-2 kg
Temperature = T = 300 K
Work obtained in expansion = Wmax = -17.33 kJ
= – 17330 J
Initial pressure = P1 = 15.15 × 105 Pa
= 1.515 × 106 Pa
Molar mass of nitrogen (N2) = MN2
= 28 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Final pressure = P2 = ?
Number of moles of N2 = n = \(\frac{m}{M_{\mathrm{N}_{2}}}\)
= \(\frac{2.8 \times 10^{-2}}{28 \times 10^{-3}}=1 \mathrm{~mol}\)
Wmax = -2.303 × nRT log10 \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)
17330 = 2.303 × 1 × 8.314 × 300 × \(\log _{10} \frac{1.515 \times 10^{6}}{P_{2}}\)
∴ \(\frac{17330}{2.303 \times 1 \times 8.314 \times 300}\)
= [log10 1.515 × 106 – log10P2]
3.017 = 6.1804 – log10P2
∴ log10P2 = 6.1804 – 3.017 = 3.1634
∴ P2 = Antilog 3.1634
= 1456.8 Pa
Ans. Final pressure = 1456.8 Pa

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(9) Carbon monoxide expands isothermally and reversibly at 300 K doing 4.754 kJ of work. If the initial volume changes from 10 dm3 to 20 dm3, calculate the number of moles of carbon monoxide. (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
Wmax = Maximum work done = -4.754 kJ
= -4754 J, n = Number of moles = ?,
= 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = 300 K, V1 = Initial volume of carbon monoxide = 10 dm3
V2 = Final volume of carbon monoxide = 20 dm3
∴ -4754 = 22.303 × n × 8.314 × 300 log10 \(\frac {20}{10}\)
∴ -4754 = – 2.303 × n × 8.314 × 300 × log102
∴ – 4754 = – 2.303 × n × 8.314 × 300 × 0.3010
∴ n = \(\frac{-4754}{-2.303 \times 8.314 \times 300 \times 0.3010}\)
= 2.75 mol
Ans. Number of mol = 2.75 mol

(10) Given that the work done in isothermal and reversible expansion is 6.4 kJ when 2 moles of an ideal gas expanded to double its volume. Calculate the temperature at which expansion takes place.
Solution :
Given : Work = Wmax = -6.4 kJ (For expansion)
= – 6400 J
Number of moles = 2
If 1 = x L
V2 = 2 L
Temperature = T = ?
For isothermal reversible expansion,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 9

(11) 300 mmol of perfect gas occupies 13 dm3 at 320 K. Calculate the work done in joules when the gas expands :
(a) Isothermally against a constant external pressure of 0.20 bar,
(b) Isothermal and reversible process,
(c) Into vacuum until the volume of gas is increased by 3 dm3. (R = 8.314 J mol-1K-1)
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of a gas = n
= 300 mmol = 0.3 mol
Initial volume = V1 = 13 dm3
Increase in volume = ΔV = 3 dm3
Pressure = Pex = 0.2 atm
Temperature = 320 K

(a) Expansion against constant pressure is an irreversible process.
∴ W = -Pex × ΔV
= -0.2 × 3
= -0.6 dm3 bar
= -0.6 × 100 J
= -60 J

(b) For isothermal reversible process,
Wmax = 2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
Now, V2 = V1 + ΔV = 13 + 3 = 16 dm3
Wmax = – 2.303 × 0.3 × 8.314 × 320 log10 \(\frac {16}{13}\)
= -165.4 J

(c) In vacuum, Pex = 0
∴ W = -Pex × ΔV
= -0 × 3
= 0
Ans. (a) W= -60.78 J
(b) Wmax = -165.4 J
(c) W = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 27.
Define and explain the term internal energy.
Answer:
Internal energy : It is defined as the total energy constituting potential energy and kinetic energy of the molecules present in the system.
Explanation :

  • The internal energy of a system is a state function and thermodynamic function. It is denoted by U.
  • Its value depends on the state of a system.
  • The change in internal energy (Δ U) depends only on the initial state and the final state of the system.
    Δ U = U2 – U1
  • It is an extensive property of the system.
  • It has same unit as heat and work.
  • Total internal energy U of the system is,
    Total energy = Potential energy + Kinetic energy

Question 28.
Explain the formulation of first law of thermodynamics.
OR
Deduce mathematical equation for the first law of thermodynamics. Justify its expression.
Answer:
(1) The first law of thermodynamics is based on the principle of conservation of energy.
(2) If Q is the heat absorbed by the system and if W is the work done by surroundings on the system then the internal energy of the system will increase by Δ U.
(3) From the conservation of energy we can write,
Increase in internal energy of the system = Quantity of heat absorbed by the system + Work done on the system
∴ ΔU = Q + W
(4) For an infinitesimal change,
dU = dQ + dW

Question 29.
Deduce the mathematical expression of first law of thermodynamics for the following processes :
(1) Isothermal process
(2) Isobaric process
(3) Isochoric process
(4) Adiabatic process.
Answer:
(1) Isothermal process :This is a process which is carried out at constant temperature. Since internal energy, U of the system depends on temperature there is no change in the internal energy U of the system. Hence ΔU = 0.
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q +W
∴ 0 = Q + W
∴ Q = -W or W = -Q.

  • Hence in expansion, the heat absorbed by the system is entirely converted into work on the surroundings.
  • In compression, the work done on the system is converted into heat which is transferred to the surroundings by the system, keeping temperature constant.

(2) Isobaric process : In this, throughout the process pressure remains constant. Hence the system performs the work of expansion due to volume change ΔV.
W= -Pext × ΔV
Let QP be the heat absorbed by the system at constant pressure.
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = QP + W.
∴ ΔU = QP – PexΔV
or QP = ΔU + PexΔV
In this process, the heat absorbed QP is used to increase the internal energy (ΔU) of the system.

(3) Isochoric process : In this process the volume of the system remains constant. Hence ΔV = 0. Therefore, the system does not perform mechanical work.
∴ W = -PΔV = -P × (0) = 0
Let QV be the heat absorbed at constant volume.
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
∴ ΔU = QV.

(4) Adiabatic process : In this process, the system does not exchange heat, Q with its surroundings.
∴ Q = 0.
Since by first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
∴ ΔU = Wad.
Hence,
(i) the increase in internal energy ΔU is due to the work done on the system by surroundings. This results in increase in energy and temperature of the system.
(ii) if the work is done by the system on surroundings, like expansion, then there is a decrease in internal energy (-ΔU) and temperature of the system decreases.

Question 30.
What are the IUPAC sign conventions of Q, U and W?
Answer:
In thermodynamics, the sign conventions are adopted according to IUPAC convention, based on acquisition of energy.
(i) Heat absorbed = +Q
Heat evolved = -Q
(ii) Internal energy change :
Increase in energy = + Δ U
Decrease in energy = – Δ U
(iii) Work done by the system = – W
Work done on the system = + W

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 31.
Define and explain the term enthalpy.
OR
What is meant by enthalpy of a system ?
Answer:
Enthalpy (H) : It is defined as the total energy of a system consisting of internal energy (U) and pressure – volume (P × V) type of energy, i.e. enthalpy represents the sum of internal energy U and product PV energy. It is denoted by H and is represented as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 10

Explanation :

  • Enthalpy represents total heat content of the system.
  • Enthalpy is a thermodynamic state function.
  • Enthalpy is an extensive property.
  • The absorption of heat by a system increases its enthalpy. Hence enthalpy is called heat content of the system.

Question 32.
Derive the expression, ΔH = ΔU + PΔV.
Answer:
Enthalpy (H) of a system is defined as
H = U + PV
where U is internal energy
P is pressure and V is volume.
Consider a process in which a state of a system changes from an initial state A to a final state B. Let H1, U1, P1, V1 and H2, U2, P2, V2 be the state functions of the system in initial and final states.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 11
Then,
H1 = U1 + P2V2 and H2 = U2 + P2V2
The enthalpy change ΔH is given by,
ΔH = H2 – H1
= (U2 + P2V2) – (U1 + P1V1)
= (U2 – U1) + (P2V2 – P1V1)
= ΔU + ΔPV
where ΔU = U2 – U1
At constant pressure, P1 = P2 = P
∴ P2V2 – P1V1 = PV2 – PV1
= P(V2 – V1)
= P × ΔV
Hence, ΔH = ΔU + PΔV
This is a relation for enthalpy change.

Question 33.
Show that the heat absorbed at constant pressure is equal to the change in enthalpy of the system.
OR
Why is enthalpy called heat content of the system?
Answer:
By the first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
where ΔU is the change in internal energy
Q is heat supplied to the system
W is the work obtained.
∴ Q = ΔU – W
If QP is the heat absorbed at constant pressure by the system, so that the volume changes by Δ V against constant pressure P then,
W = -PΔV
∴ QP = ΔU – (-PΔV)
∴ QP = ΔU + PΔV ……… (1)
If ΔH is the enthalpy change for the system, then
ΔH = ΔU + PΔV ……….. (2)
By comparing above equations, (1) and (2), we can write, QP = ΔH
Hence heat absorbed at constant pressure is equal to the enthalpy change for the system.
Since by increase in enthalpy heat content of the system increases, enthalpy is also called as the heat content of the system.

Question 34.
What are the conditions under which ΔH = ΔU?
Answer:

  1. For any thermodynamic process or a chemical reaction at constant volume, Δ V = 0.
  2. Since ΔH = ΔU + PΔV, at constant volume ΔH = ΔU.
  3. In the reactions, involving only solids and liquids, Δ V is negligibly small, hence ΔH = ΔH.
  4. In a chemical reaction, in which number of moles of gaseous reactants and gaseous products are equal, then change in number of moles, Δ n = n2 – n1 = 0. Since ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT, as Δn = 0, ΔH = ΔU.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.6 – 4.8

Question 35.
Solve the following :

(1) Calculate the change in internal energy when a gas is expanded by supplying 1500 J of heat energy. Work done in expansion is 850 J.
Solution :
Given : Q = 1500 J
W = -850 J (For expansion work is negative)
ΔU = ?
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
= 1500 + (- 850)
= 650 J
Ans. Change in internal energy = Δ U = 650 J

(2) A system absorbs 520 J of heat and performs work of 210 J. Calculate the change in internal energy.
Solution :
Given : Since the heat is absorbed by the system, the work is of expansion.
Q = 520 J
W= -210 J
ΔV = ?
ΔU = Q + W
= 520 + (- 210)
= 310 J
Ans. Internal energy change = Δ U = 310 J

(3) A gas expands from 6 litres to 20 dm3 at constant pressure 2.5 atmosphere. If the system is supplied with 5000 J of heat, calculate W and ΔU.
Solution :
Given : V1 = 6 dm3
V2 = 20 dm3
P = 2.5 atm
Q = 5000 J
W = ?; ΔU = ?
For expansion,
W = -Pex(V2 – V1)
= -2.5 (20 – 6)
= – 35
= – 35 × 100 J
= – 3500 J
ΔU = Q + W
= 5000 + (-3500)
= -1500 J
Ans. W= -3500 J; ΔU = – 1500 J

(4) An ideal gas expands against a constant pressure of 2.026 × 105 Pa from 5 dm3 to 15 dm3. If the change in the internal energy is 418 J, calculate the change in enthalpy.
Solution :
As the expansion takes place at a constant pressure, the change in enthalpy is given by
ΔH = ΔU + P(V2 – V1)
ΔH = Change in enthalpy = ?
ΔU = Change in internal energy = 418 J
P = Constant pressure = 2.026 × 105 Pa
V2 = 15 dm3 = 15 × 10-3 m3
V1 = 5 dm3 = 5 × 10-3 m3
∴ ΔH = 418 + 2.026 × 105 × (15 × 10-3 – 5 × 10-3)
= 418 + 2026
∴ ΔH = 2.444 × 103 J = 2.444 kJ
Ans. Change in enthalpy = 2.444 × 103 J
= 2.444 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(5) In a reaction, 2.5 kJ of heat is released from the system and 5.5 kJ of work is done on the system. Find ΔU.
Solution :
Given : Q = -2.5 kJ (since heat is released)
W= + 5.5 kJ (since the work will be of compression)
ΔU = ?
ΔU = Q + W
= -2.5 + 5.5
= +3 kJ
Internal energy of the system will increase by 3 kJ.
Ans. Δ U = 3 kJ

(6) A chemical reaction is carried out by supplying 8 kJ of heat. The system performs the work of 2.7 kJ. Calculate ΔH and ΔU.
Solution :
Given : Q = + 8 kJ (since heat is absorbed by the system)
W = -2.7 kJ (It will be a work of expansion)
ΔH = ?, ΔU = ?
ΔU = Q + W = 8 + (-2.7) = 5.3 kJ
Internal energy of the system will increase by 5.3 kJ.
Due to expansion, Δ V > 0,
∴ PΔV = +2.7 kJ
ΔH = ΔU + PΔV = 5.3 + 2.7 = 8 kJ
Enthalpy of the system will increase by 8 kJ
Ans. ΔU = 5.3 kJ, ΔH = 8 kJ

(7) A sample of gas absorbs 4000 kJ of heat, (a) if volume remains constant. What is ΔU? (b) Suppose that in addition to absorption of heat by the sample, the surroundings does 2000 kJ of work on the sample. What is Δ U ? (c) Suppose that as the original sample absorbs heat, it expands against atmospheric pressure and does 600 kJ of work on its surroundings. What is ΔU ?
Solution :
Given : Q = + 4000 kJ (since heat is absorbed)
(a) Since volume remains constant, Δ V = 0.
W = -Pex (V2 – V1)
= -PexΔV = -Pex(0) = 0
∴ ΔU = Q + W = 4000 + 0 = 4000 kJ

(b) Q = + 4000 kJ
W = + 2000 kJ (Work done on the system)
ΔU = Q + W = 4000 + 2000 = 6000 kJ

(c) W = -600 kJ (Work of expansion)
ΔU = Q + W
ΔU = 4000 + (-600) = 3400 kJ
Ans. (a) Δ U = 4000 kJ
(b) Δ U = 6000 kJ
(c) Δ U = 3400 kJ

(8) Calculate the internal energy change at 298 K for the following reaction :
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathbf{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{3}{2} \mathbf{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathbf{N H}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}\)
The enthalpy change at constant pressure is -46.0 kJ mol-1. (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : \(\frac{1}{2} \mathbf{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{3}{2} \mathbf{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathbf{N H}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}\)
ΔH= -46.0 kJ mol-1
ΔH = Heat of formation of NH3 at constant pressure
= -46.0 kJ mol-1 = -4600 J mol-1
Δ U = Change in internal energy = ?
Δn = (Number of moles of ammonia) – (Number of moles of hydrogen + Number of moles of nitrogen)
= [1 – (\(\frac {1}{2}\) + \(\frac {3}{2}\))]= -1 mol
R= 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = Temperature in kelvin = 298 K
ΔH = Δ U + ΔnRT
∴ -46000 = ΔU + (-1 × 8.314 × 298)
∴ -46000 = ΔU – 2477.0
∴ ΔU = -46000 + 2477.0
= -43523 J
= -43.523 kJ
Ans. Change in internal energy = -43.523 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(9) 5 moles of helium expand isothermally and reversibly from a pressure 40 × 10-5 Nm-2 to 4 × 10-5 Nm-2 at 300 K. Calculate the work done, change in internal energy and heat absorbed during the expansion. (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
Solution :
As the expansion takes place isothermally and reversibly, the work done is given by
Wmax = -2.203 nRT log\(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)
Wmax = Maximum work done
n = Number of moles of helium = 5 moles
R = Gas constant = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = 300 K
P1 = Initial pressure = 40 × 10-5 Nm-2
P2 = Final pressure = 4 × 10-5 Nm-2
∴ Wmax = -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × log \(\frac {40}{4}\)
= – 2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × log 10
= -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × 1
= – 28720J
As the expansion takes place isothermally, i.e., at the same temperature, there is no change in the internal energy of the system.
Q = ΔU + W
∴ Q = – W= + 28720 J as ΔU = 0
Ans. Work done = -28720 J, Heat absorbed = 28720 J, Change in internal energy = 0

(10) Calculate the work done in each of the following reactions. State whether work is done on or by the system.
(a) The oxidation of one mole of SO2 at 50°C.
2SO2(g) + O2(g) → 2SO3(g)
(b) Decomposition of 2 moles of NH4NO3 at 100°C
NH4NO3(s) → N2O(g) + 2H2O(g)
Solution :
(a) Given reaction :
2SO2(g) + O2(g) → 2SO3(g)
For 1 mole of SO2,
SO2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) → SO2(g)
∴ Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= 1 – (1 + \(\frac {1}{2}\))
= -0.5 mol
Since there is decrease in number of moles of gases, there will be compression, hence, the work will be done on the system by the surroundings.
Work is given by,
∴ W = – ΔnRT
= – (- 0.5) × 8.314 × (273 + 50)
= + 1342.7 J

(b) Given reaction :
NH4NO3(s) → N2O(g) + 2H2O(g)
For 2 moles of NH4NO3,
2NH4NO3(s) → 2N2O(g) + 4H2O(g)
∴ Change in number of moles,
Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= (2 + 4) – 0
= 6 mol
Since there is an increase in number of moles of gases, work of expansion is done by the system on the surroundings.
∴ W = -ΔnRT
= – 6 × 8.314 × (273+ 100)
= – 18606 J
= – 18.606 kJ
Ans. (a) W = 1342.7 J (b) W= -18.606 kJ

(11) The amount of heat evolved for the combustion of ethane is -900kJ mol-1 at 300K and 1 atm.
C2H6(g) + \(\frac {7}{2}\)O2(g) → 2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)
Calculate W, ΔH and ΔU for the combustion of 12 × 10-3 kg ethane.
Solution :
Given : ΔH = -900 kJ mol-1
Temperature = T = 300 K
Pressure = P = 1 atm
Mass of ethane = m = 12 × 10-3 kg
Molar mass of ethane (C2H6) = 30 × 10-3 kg mol-1
ΔH = ? Δ U = ? for given ethane.
Number of moles of C2H6 = n = \(\frac{m \mathrm{~kg}}{M \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= \(\frac{12 \times 10^{-3}}{30 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 0.4 mol
For the given reaction,
C2H6(g) + \(\frac {7}{2}\)O2(g) → 2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)
Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= 2 – (1 + \(\frac {7}{2}\)) = -2.5 mol
For 1 mol of C2H6, Δn = -2.5 mol
∴ For 0.4 mol of C2H6, Δn = -2.5 × 0.4
= -1 mol
Since there is a decrease in number of moles, the work is of compression on the system.
W = -ΔnRT
= – (-1) × 8.314 × 300
= + 2494 J
= + 2.494 kJ
For 1 mol of C2H6 ΔH = -900 kJ
∴ For 0.4 mol of C2H6, ΔH= – 900 × 0.4
= – 360 kJ
ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT
ΔU = ΔH – ΔnRT
= -360 – (-1) × 8.314 × 300× 10-3
= – 360 + 2.494
= – 357.506 kJ
Ans. W = + 2.494 kJ, ΔH = -360 kJ;
ΔU= – 357.506 kJ

(12) The latent heat of evaporation of water is 80 kJ mol-1. If 100 g water are evaporated at 100 °C and 1 atm, calculate W, ΔH, ΔU and Q.
Solution :
Given : Latent heat of evaporation = ΔH
= 80 kJ mol-1 of water
Temperature = T = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Pressure = P = 1 atm
Mass of water = m = 100 g
Molar mass of water = 18 g mol-1
W = ?, ΔH = 1, U = ?, Q = ?
Number of moles of water = \(\frac{m}{M}=\frac{100}{18}\) = 5.556 mol
H2O(l) → H2O(g)
5.556 mol 5.556 mol
Change in number of moles = Δn = 5.556 – 0
= 5.556 mol
For evaporation of 1 mol H2O, ΔH = 80 kJ
For 5.556 mol H2O, ΔH= 80 × 5.556 = 444.5 kJ
In this reaction, the work will be of expansion.
W= -ΔnRT
= -5.556 × 8.314 × 373
= – 17230 J
= -17.23 kJ
Now,
ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT
ΔU = ΔH – ΔnRT
= 444.5 – 5.556 × 8.314 × 373 × 10-3
= 444.5 – 17.23
= 427.27 kJ
In this, Q = QP = ΔH = 444.5 kJ
Ans. W= -17.23 kJ; ΔH = 444.5 kJ
ΔU= 427.21 kJ, Q = 444.5 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(13) Oxidation of propane is represented as
C3H8(g) + 5O2(g) → 3CO2(g) + 4H2O(g), ΔH0 = -2043 kJ
How much pressure volume work is done and what is the value of AU at constant pressure of 1 bar when the volume change is + 22.4 dm3.
Solution :
Given :
ΔH0 = – 2043 kJ
Change in volume = ΔV = +22.4 L
ΔU = ?
C3H8(g) + 5O2(g) → 3CO2(g) + 4H2O(g)
Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= (3 + 4) – (1 + 5)
= 1 mol
Since there is an increase in number of moles, the work will be of expansion.
W = -P × ΔV dm3 bar
= – 1 × 22.4
= – 1 × 22.4 × 100 J
= – 2240 J
= -2.240
ΔH = ΔU + PΔV
ΔU = ΔH – PΔV
= – 2043 – (2.24)
= – 2040.7 kJ
Ans. W = -2.27 kJ, ΔU = -2040.7 kJ

(14) How much heat is evolved when 12 g of CO reacts with NO2 ? The reaction is :
4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g),
ΔrH0 = -1200 kJ
Solution :
Given : 4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g)
Molar mass of CO = 28 g mol-1
ΔrH0 = – 1200 kJ;
Molar mass of CO = 28 g mol-1
mco = 12 g, ΔH = ?
From the reaction,
∵ For 4 × 28 g CO, ΔH0 = – 1200 kJ
∵ For 12g CO ΔH0 = \(\frac{(-1200) \times 12}{4 \times 28}\)
= -128.6 kJ
Ans. Heat evolved = 128.6 kJ

Question 36.
What is phase transformation?
Answer:
Phase transformation (or transition) :

  • The transition of one phase (physical state) of a matter to another phase at constant temperature and pressure without change in chemical composition is called phase transformation.
  • During phase transformation, both the phases exist at equilibrium.
    Solids ⇌ Liquid; Liquid ⇌ Vapour.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 37.
Mention different types of phase transitions.
Answer:
The following are the types of phase changes :
(1) Fusion : This involves the change of a matter from solid state to liquid state. In this heat is absorbed, hence it is endothermic (ΔH > 0).
H2O(s) → H2O(l)
(2) Vaporisation or evaporation : This involves the change of a matter from liquid state to gaseous state. In this heat is absorbed, hence it is endothermic (ΔH > 0).
H2O(l) → H2O(g)
(3) Sublimation : This involves the change of matter from solid state directly into gaseous state. In this heat is absorbed, hence it is endothermic (ΔH > 0).
Camphor(s) → Camphor(g)

Question 38.
Define and explain enthalpy of freezing.
Answer:
Enthalpy of freezing (ΔfreezH) : The enthalpy change that accompanies the solidification of one mole of a liquid into solid at constant temperature and pressure is called enthalpy of freezing.
For example,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 273 \mathrm{~K}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
ΔfreezH = -6.01 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when one mole of water freezes (solidifies) at 0 °C (273 K) and 1 atmosphere, 6.01 kJ of heat will be released to the surroundings.

Question 39.
Define and explain the following :
(A) Enthalpy of vaporisation.
(B) Enthalpy of sublimation.
Answer:
(A) Enthalpy of vaporisation (ΔvapH) : The enthalpy change that accompanies the vaporisation of one mole of a liquid at constant temperature and pressure is called heat of vaporisation or evaporation. For example,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 373 \mathrm{~K}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\)
ΔvapH = +40.7 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when one mole of water is evaporated at 100 °C (373 K) and 1 atmosphere, 40.7 kJ of heat will be absorbed.

(B) Enthalpy of sublimation (ΔsubH) : The enthalpy change or the amount of heat absorbed that accompanies the sublimation of one mole of a solid directly into its vapour at constant temperature and pressure is called enthalpy of sublimation.
For example,
\(\mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 195 \mathrm{~K}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
ΔsubH = 25.2 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when 1 mole of dry solid carbon dioxide, CO2(s) sublimes forming gaseous CO2(g), 25.2 kJ of heat will be absorbed.

Question 40.
Explain process of sublimation and enthalpy of sublimation ?
OR
How is enthalpy of sublimation related to enthalpy of fusion and enthalpy of vaporisation ?
Answer:
(1) The sublimation involves the conversion of a solid into vapour at constant temperature and pressure. For example,
H2O(s) → H2O(g), ΔsubH = 51.08 kJ mol-1 at 0°C.
(2) This conversion takes place in two steps, first melting of solid into liquid and second vaporisation of the liquid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 12
Hence we can write,
ΔsubH = ΔfusH + ΔvapH

Question 41.
Arrange the following in order of increasing enthalpy :
H2O(s), H2O(g), H2O(l)
Answer:
The increasing order of enthalpy of the given substance will be,
HH2O(g), < HH2O(l), < HH2O(s)
This is because the conversion of H2O(s) to H2O(l) and further to H2O(g) involves absorption of heat.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 42.
Define and explain :
(A) Enthalpy of atomisation
(B) Enthalpy of ionisation.
Answer:
(A) Enthalpy of atomisation (ΔatoH) : The enthalpy change or amount of heat absorbed accompanying the dissociation of the molecules in one mole of a gaseous substance into free gaseous atoms at constant temperature and pressure is called enthalpy of atomisation.
For example,
Cl2(g) → 2Cl(g), ΔatoH = 242 kJ mol-1
CH4(g) → C(g) + 4H(g), ΔatoH = 1660 kJ mol-1.

(B) Enthalpy of ionisation (ΔionH) : The enthalpy change or amount of heat absorbed accompanying the removal of one electron from each atom or ion in one mole of gaseous atoms or ions is called enthalpy of ionisation.
For example,
Na(g) → Na+(g) + e ΔionH = 494 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when one mole of gaseous sodium atoms, Na(g) are ionised forming gaseous ions, Na+(g), the energy required is 494 kJ.

Question 43.
Define and explain electron gain enthalpy.
Answer:
Electron gain enthalpy (ΔegH) : It is defined as the enthalpy change, when mole of gaseous atoms of an element accept electrons to form gaseous ion.
E.g. Cl(g) + e → Cl(g) ΔegH = – 349 kJ mol-1.
It is the reverse of ionisation process.

Question 44.
Define enthalpy of solution.
Answer:
Enthalpy of solution : It is defined as the enthalpy change in a process when one mole of a substance is dissolved in specified amount of a solvent.
NaCl(s) + aq ⇌ NaCl(aq) ΔsolnH = 4 kJ mol-1

Question 45.
Define enthalpy of solution at infinite dilution.
Answer:
Enthalpy of solution (ΔsolnH) : It is defined as the enthalpy change when one mole of a substance is dissolved in a large excess of a solvent, so that further dilution will not change the enthalpy at constant temperature and pressure.
For example,
HCl(g) + aq → HCl(aq) ΔsolnH
= -75.14 kJ mol-1

Question 46.
Explain the enthalpy of solution of an ionic compound.
Answer:
An ionic compound dissolves in a polar solvent like water in two steps as follows :
Step-I : The ions are separated from the molecule involving crystal lattice enthalpy ΔLH.
\(\mathrm{MX}_{(\mathrm{s})} \rightarrow \mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}+\mathrm{X}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{-} \quad \Delta_{\mathrm{L}} H\)
ΔLH is always positive.

Step-II : The gaseous ions are hydrated with water molecules involving hydration energy, ΔhydH.
\(\mathbf{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}\) + xH2O(l) → [M(H2O)x]+
\(\mathrm{X}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{-}\) + yH2O(l) → [X(H2O)y]
ΔhydH is always negative.
The enthalpy change ΔsolnH of solution is given by,
ΔsolnH = ΔLH + ΔhydH
For example, consider enthalpy of solution of NaCl(s).
ΔLHNaCl = 790 kJ mol-1
ΔhydHNaCl = -786 kJ mol-1
Hence enthalpy change for solution of NaCl(s) is,
ΔsolnH = ΔLHNaCl + ΔhydHNaCl
= 790 + (-786)
= + 4 kJ mol-1
Therefore dissolution of NaCl in water is an endothermic process.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.9

Question 47.
Solve the following :

(1) Heat of fusion of ice at 0 °C and 1 atmosphere is 6.1 kJ mol-1 and heat of evaporation of water at 100 °C is 40.7 kJ mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy change for the conversion of 1 mole of ice at 0 °C into vapour at 100 °C. Heat capacity of water is 4.184 JK-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Heat of fusion of ice = ΔfusH = 6.01 kJ mol-1
Heat of evaporation of water = ΔvapH = 40.7 kJ mol-1
Temperature of ice = 273 K
Temperature of vapour = (273 + 100) K = 373 K
Heat capacity of water = 4.184 JK-1 g-1
Heat capacity of 1 mole of water
= CH2O = 4.184 × 18
= 75.312 JK-1 mol-1
The conversion of ice at 0 °C to water at 100°C takes place in three steps as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 13
ΔH1 = nice × ΔfusH = 1mol × 6.01kJ mol-1 = 6.01 kJ
ΔH2 is the enthalpy change for raising the temperature from 273 K to 373 K.
ΔH2 = nwater × CH2O × (T2 – T1)
= 1mol × 75.312JK-1 mol-1 × (373 – 273)K
= 7531 J
= 7.531 kJ
ΔH3 = nwater × ΔvapH
= 1 × 40.7
= 40.7 kJ
Hence total enthalpy change will be ΔH = ΔH1 + ΔH2 + ΔH3
= 6.01 + 7.531 + 40.7
= 54.241 kJ
Ans. ΔH = 54.241 kJ

(2) Heat of sublimation of ice at 0°C and 1 atmosphere is 6.01 kJ mol-1 and heat of evaporation of water at 0 °C and 1 atmosphere is 45.07 kJ mol-1. Calculate the heat of sublimation of one mole of ice at 0 °C and 1 atmosphere. Write the equation for the same.
Solution :
The sublimation of ice can be represented by following equation,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{s})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 0^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\)
This is a process of two steps.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 14
ΔH1 = nH2O × ΔfusH
= 1 × 6.01 =6.01 kJ
ΔH2 = nH2O × ΔvapH
= 1 × 45.07 = 45.07
Heat of sublimation = ΔH = ΔH1 + ΔH2
= 6.01 + 45.07
= 51.08 kJ
Ans. Heat of sublimation of ice = 51.08 kJ

(3) Heat of evaporation of ethyl alcohol at 78.5 °C and 1 atmosphere is 38.6 kJ mol-1. If 100 g ethyl alcohol vapour is condensed, what will be ΔH ?
Solution :
Given : ΔvapHC2H5OH = 38.6 kJ mol-1
Mass of C2H5OH = m = 100 g
Molar mass of C2H5OH = M = 46 g mol-1
ΔcondHC2H5OH = ?
Number of moles of C2H5OH = \(\frac{m}{M}=\frac{100}{46}\)
= 2.174 mol
Heat of condensation = ΔcondH = -38.6 kJ mol-1
∴ ΔcondH = n × ΔcondH
= 2.174mol × (-38.6)kJ mol-1 kJ = – 83.9 kJ
Ans. Heat of condensation = ΔcondH = -83.9 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(4) The hydration enthalpies of Li+(g), and Br(g) are -500 kJ mol-1 and -350 kJ mol-1 respectively and the lattice energy of LiBr(s) is 807 kJmol-1. Write the thermochemical equations for enthalpy of solution of LiBr(s) and calculate its value.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy of hydration of Li+(g)
= ΔhydH1
= -500 kJmol-1
Enthalpy of hydration of Br(g) = ΔhydH2
= -350 kJ mol-1
Lattice energy of LiBr(s) = ΔLH3 = 807 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of solution of LiBr(s) = ΔsolnΔH = ?
The thermochemical equation for the dissolution of LiBr(s) forming a solution is,
LiBr(s) + aq → Li+(aq) + Br(aq) (I) ΔsolH = ?
This takes place in two steps as follows :
(i) LiBr(s) → Li+(g) + Br(g) ΔLH3
(ii) (a) Li+(g) + aq → Li+(aq) ΔhydH1
(b) Br(g) + aq → Br(aq) ΔhydH2
Hence by adding equations (i) and (ii) (a) and (b) we get equation I.
∴ ΔsolH = ΔLH3 + ΔhydH1 + ΔhydH2
= 807 + (-500) + (-350)
= -43 kJ mol-1
Ans. Heat of solution of LiBr(s) = ΔsolH = -43 kJ mol-1

(5) Heat of solution of NaCl is 3.9 kJ mol-1. If the lattice energy of NaCl is 787 kJ mol-1, calculate the hydration energies of ions of the salt.
Solution :
Given : Heat of solution of NaCl
= ΔsolnH0
= ΔH1 = 3.9 kJmol-1
Lattice energy of NaCl = ΔLH
= ΔH2 = 787 kJ mol-1
Hydration energy of Na+(g) and Cl(g)
= ΔhydH(Na+ + Cl)
= ΔH3 = ?
Thermochemical equation for dissolution of NaCl(s) is;
NaCl(s) + aq → Na+(aq) + Cl(aq)…ΔH1
NaCl(s) → Na+(g) + Cl(g)… ΔH2
Na+(g) + Cl(g) + aq → Na+(aq) + Cl(aq) ΔH3
∴ ΔH1 = ΔH2 + AH3
3.9 = 787 + AH3
∴ ΔH3 = -787 + 3.9= -783.1 kJmol-1
Ans. Hydration energy of Na+(g) and Cl(g)
= -783.1 kJmol-1

(6) Enthalpies of solution are given as follows :
CuSO4(s) + 10H2O → CUSO4(10H2O)
ΔH1 = -54.5 kJ mol-1
CuSO4(s) + 100 H2O → CUSO4(100H2O)
ΔH2 = -68.4 kJ mol-1
A solution contains 1 mol of CuSO4 in 180 g water at 25 °C. If it is diluted by adding 1620 g water, calculate the enthalpy of dilution.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy of solution of CuSO4 in 10 mol H2O
= ΔsolnH = ΔH1 = -54.5 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of solution of CuSO4 in 100 mol
H2O = ΔH2
= -68.4 kJmol-1
Mass of water = 1620 g
For dilution, ΔdilH = ?
Now 180 g H2O = \(\frac {180}{18}\) = 10 mol H2O
And, 1620 g H2O = \(\frac {1620}{18}\) = 90 mol H2O
Hence for heat of dilution,
CUSO4(10H2O) + 90H2O(l) → CUSO4(100H2O) ΔdilH = ?
∴ ΔdilH = ΔH2 -ΔH1
= -68.4 – (54.5)
= -13.9 kJmol-1
Ans. Heat of dilution = ΔdilH = -13.9 kJ mol-1

(7) Heat of solution and heat of hydration of AgF are -20.5kJmol-1 and -930kJmol-1 respectively. Calculate lattice energy of AgF.
Solution :
Given : Heat of solution of AgF = ΔsolnH
= -ΔH1 = -20.5 kJmol-1
Heat of hydration of AgF = ΔhydH = ΔH2
= -930 kJ mol-1
Lattice energy of AgF = ΔLH = ΔH3 = ?
For heat of solution, AgF(s) + aq → AgF(aq) ΔH1
For heat of hydration,
Ag+(g) + F(g) + aq → Ag+(aq) + F(aq) ΔH2
For Lattice energy, Ag+(g) + F(g) → AgF(s)
ΔLH = ?
From above equations,
∴ ΔH3 = ΔH2 – ΔH1
= -930 – (-20.5)
= -909.5 kJmol-1
Ans. Lattice energy of AgF(s) = -909.5 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(8) Bond enthalpy of H2 is 436kJmol-1 while hydration energy of hydrogen ion is -1075 kJ mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy of formation of H+(aq). (Ionisation energy of hydrogen is 1312 kJ mol-1
Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpy of H2(g) = ΔH0H2(g)
= 436 kJ mol-1
Hydration energy of H+(g) = ΔH2 = -1075 kJmol-1
Ionisation energy of H(g) = ΔH3 = 1312 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of formation of H+(aq) = ΔfH = ?
Thermochemical equation for the formation of H+(aq)
\(\frac {1}{2}\)H2(g) + aq → H+(aq)ΔfH
This takes place in three steps as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 15
Hence heat of formation of H+(aq) is
ΔfH = ΔH1 + ΔH2 + ΔH3
= \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 436 + (-1075) + 1312
= 218 – 1075 + 1312.
= 455 kJ mol-1
Ans. Enthalpy of formation of H+(aq) = 455 kJmol-1

(9) Calculate lattice energy of crystalline sodium chloride from the following data :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 16
Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpy of Cl2 = ΔH0 = 244 kJmol-1
Thermochemical equation for the formation of 1 mole of NaCl(s),
\(\mathrm{Na}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{2} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NaCl}_{(s)} \quad \Delta_{\mathrm{f}} H_{\mathrm{NaCl}}^{0}=-411 \mathrm{~kJ}\)
Lattice energy, ΔLH = ?
Since enthalpy is a state function, this reaction can be written in various steps as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 17
By Hess’s law,
ΔLH0 = ΔsubH0+ ΔionH0 + \(\frac {1}{2}\)ΔH0cl2 + ΔegH0 + ΔLH0
-411 = 109 + 496 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 244 + (-348) + ΔLH
= 109 + 496 + 122 – 348 + ΔLH
∴ ΔLH= -790 kJ mol-1.
Ans. Lattice energy of NaCl(s) = -790 kJ mol

(10) Calculate the internal energy at 298 K for the formation of one mole of ammonia, if the enthalpy change at constant pressure is -42.0 kJ mol-1.
(Given : R = 8.314 J K-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : ΔH = -42.0 kJ mol-1, T = 298 K, ΔU = ?
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}\)
Δn = 1 – (\(\frac {1}{2}\) + \(\frac {3}{2}\)) = -1 mol
ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT
∴ ΔU = ΔH – ΔnRT
= -42 – (- 1) × 8.314 × 298 × 10-3
= -42 + 2.477
= -39.523 kJ
Ans. ΔU = -39.523 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 48.
What is thermochemistry ? Explain.
Answer:
Thermochemistry : Thermodynamic study of heat changes or enthalpy changes during the chemical reactions is called thermochemistry.
Consider a reaction, Reactants → Products
The heat changes ΔH for the reaction may be represented as,
ΔHreaction = Σ Hproducts – Σ Hreactants
where H represents enthalpy.
The energy released or absorbed during a chemical change appears in the form of heat energy.

Question 49.
Define and explain the term, enthalpy or heat of reaction.
Answer:
Enthalpy or heat of reaction : The enthalpy of a chemical reaction is the difference between the sum of the enthalpies of products and that of the reactants with every substance in a definite physical state and in the amounts (moles) represented by the coefficients in the balanced equation.
Explanation : Consider the following general reaction,
aA + bB → cC + dD
The heat of the reaction ΔH is the difference in sum of enthalpies of products and sum of enthalpies of reactants.
∴ ΔH = Σ Hproducts – Σ Hreactants
= [cHC + dHD] – [aHA + bHB]
= ΣPH – ΣRZ
where H represents enthalpy of the substance.
For endothermic reaction, ΔH is positive, (ΔH > 0).
For exothermic reaction, ΔH is negative, (ΔH < 0).

Question 50.
Explain the sign convention used for ΔH.
Answer:
The change in enthalpy or heat of reaction ΔH is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 18
(i) If the sum of enthalpies of products, ΣH and reactants, ΣRH are equal then ΔH for the reaction is zero, (ΔH = 0).
i. e. ΣPH = ΣRH
∴ ΔH = ΣPH – ΣRH = 0
(ii) If the sum of enthalpies of products ΣPH is greater than the sum of enthalpies of reactants ΣRH, then ΔH is positive, (ΔH > 0). Since such reactions take place with the absorption of heat from surroundings, they are called endothermic reactions.
∴ ΣHproducts > ΣHreactants
∴ ΔH > 0
(iii) If the sum of enthalpies of products ΣPH is less than the sum of enthalpies of reactants, ΣRH then ΔH is negative, (ΔH < 0). Since in such reactions heat is given out to the surroundings, they are called exothermic reactions.
∴ ΣPH < ΣRH
∴ ΔH < 0

Question 51.
Define : (i) Exothermic process (ii) Endothermic process.
Answer:
(i) Exothermic process : A process taking place with the evolution of heat is called exothermic process.
For this process, Q is -ve, ΔH is -ve.
(ii) Endothermic process : A process taking place with the absorption of heat (from the surroundings) is called endothermic process.
For this process, Q is +ve, ΔH is +ve.

Question 52.
Distinguish between Endothermic reaction and Exothermic reaction.
Answer:
Endothermic reaction:

  • In endothermic reaction heat is absorbed from suroundings.
  • Sum of enthalpies of products is greater than sum of enthalpies of reactants i.e. ΣPH > ΣRH
  • Heat of reaction, ΔH is positive.
  • Products are less stable than reactants.
  • C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g)
    ΔH = -394 kJ
  • This reaction requires supply of thermal energy.

Exothermic reaction:

  • In exothermic reaction heat is given out to surroundings.
  • Sum of enthalpies of products is less than sum of enthalpies of reactants.
    i.e. ΣPH < ΣRH
  • Heat of reaction, ΔH is negative.
  • Products are more stable than reactants.
  • N2(g) + O2(g) → 2NO
    ΔH = + 180 kJ
  • This reaction does not require supply of thermal energy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 53.
Explain the standard state of an element.
Answer:
Standard state of an element : It is defined as the most stable state of an element at 298 K and 1 atmosphere (or 1 bar).
In this state, the enthalpy of the element is assumed to be zero.
∴ H0element or in general Helement = 0
∴ H0graphite = HH2(g) = 0; HNa(s) = 0; HHg(l) = 0

Question 54.
What is a thermochemical equation? Explain with an example.
Answer:
Thermochemical equation : It is defined as a balanced chemical equation along with the corresponding heat of reaction (ΔH) and physical states and number of moles of all reactants and all products appropriately mentioned.
E.g. C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g) = 6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l)
ΔH = -2808 kJ mol-1

Question 55.
What are the guidelines followed for writing thermochemical equations?
Answer:
According to IUPAC conventions, while writing thermochemical equations, following rules must be followed :
(1) Reaction is represented by balanced chemical equation for the number of moles of the reactants and the products. E.g.
CH4(g) + 2O2(g) = CO2(g) + 2H2O(l)
ΔrH°= -890 kJ mol-1
(2) The physical states of all the substances in the reaction must be mentioned. E.g. (s) for solid, (l) for liquid and (g) for gas.
(3) Heat or enthalpy changes are measured at 298 K and 1 atmosphere (or 1 bar).
(4) ΔH0 is written at right hand side of thermochemical equation.
(5) Proper sign must be indicated for ΔH0. For endothermic reaction ΔH0 is positive, (+ΔH0) and for exothermic reaction ΔH is negative, (-ΔH0).
(6) The enthalpy of the elements in their standard states is taken as zero. (H0Element = 0; H0C(s) = 0, H0H2(g) = 0)
(7) When all the substances taking part in the reaction are in their standard states, the enthalpy change is written as ΔH0.
(8) The enthalpy of any compound is equal to its heat of formation.
(9) In case of elements, the allotropic form must be mentioned. E.g. C(graphite), S(rhombic), Sn(white)
(10) For the reverse reaction, ΔH0 value has equal magnitude but opposite sign.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 56.
Define the following terms giving examples :
(1) Standard enthalpy of reaction.
(2) Standard enthalpy of formation or standard heat of formation
(3) Standard enthalpy of combustion or standard heat of combustion.
Answer:
(1) Standard enthalpy of reaction : it is defined as the difference between the sum of enthalpies of products and that of the reactants with every substance in its standard state at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atm).
Reactants → Products
ΔH0reaction = ΣH0products – ΣH0reactants

(2) Standard enthalpy of formation or standard heat of formation (ΔfH0) : It is defined as the enthalpy change ΔH0 when one mole of a pure compound is formed in its standard state from its constituent elements in their standard states at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atmosphere or 1 bar). It is denoted by ΔfH0. E.g.
C(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ΔfH0= -394 kJ mol-1
fH0 may be positive or negative.)

(3) Standard enthalpy of combustion or standard heat of combustion : it is defined as the enthalpy change when one mole of a substance in the standard state undergoes complete combustion in a sufficient amount of oxygen at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atmosphere or 1 bar). It is denoted by ΔcH0.
E.g. CH3OH(l) + \(\frac {3}{2}\)O2(g) = CO2(g) + 2H2O
ΔCH0 = -726 kJ mol-1
cH0 is always negative.)
[Note : Calorific value : It is the enthalpy change or amount of heat liberated when one gram of a substance undergoes combustion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 19

Question 57.
Show that the standard heat of formation of a compound is equal to its enthalpy.
Answer:
Consider the formation of one mole of gaseous CO2 in the standard state at 298 K and 1 atmosphere. The thermochemical equation for formation can be represented as,
C(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ΔfH0 = -394 kJ mol-1
Now heat of this reaction, ΔH0 is,
ΔH0reaction = ΣPH0 – ΣRH0
∴ ΔfH0co2(g) = H0co2(g) – [H0c(s) + H0O2(g)]
Since the enthalpies of elements in their standard states are zero,
i.e.
H0c(s) = o, H0O2(g) = 0
∴ ΔfH0co2(g) = H0co2(g) – [0 + 0]
∴ ΔfH0co2 = Hco2(g)
Therefore standard heat of formation of a compound is equal to its enthalpy.

Question 58.
Standard enthalpy of formation of various following compounds are given. Write thermochemical equation for each :

CompoundΔfH0 KJ mol-1
Cao(s)-635.1
Al2Cl6(s)-1300
C2H6(g)-84.7
CH3COOH(l)-484.7
C2H5OH(l)-277.7
NaNO3(s)-950.8

Answer:
(Hint: Write one mole of the compound on right hand side and corresponding constituent elements along with their standard physical states on left hand side.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 20

Question 59.
Standard enthalpy of combustion of different substances are given. Write thermochemical equation for each.

SubstanceΔCH0 KJ mol-1
C(graphite)-393.5
C6H6(l)-3268
C2H5OH(l)-1409
CH3CHO-1166

Answer:
In the combustion reaction, C forms CO2(g),
H forms H2O(l), etc.
(1) C(graphite) + O2(g) → CO2(g)
ΔCH0 = -393.5 kJ mol-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 21

Question 60.
Write the thermochemical equations for enthalpy of solution of :
(1) Glucose (C6H12O6)
(2) NaCl(s)
(3) CaBr2(s)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 22

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 61.
How is standard enthalpy of formation useful to calculate standard enthalpy of reaction ?
Answer:
(1) The standard enthalpies of formation, ΔfH0 of the compounds can be used to determine the standard enthalpy of reaction (ΔrH0).
(2) ΔrH0 of a reaction can be obtained by subtracting the sum of ΔfH0 values of all the reactants from the sum of ΔfH0 values of all the products with each ΔfH0 value multiplied by the appropriate coefficient of that substance in the balanced thermochemical equation.
(3) Consider following reaction :
aA + bB → cC + dD
The standard enthalpy of the reaction is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 23
where a, b, c and d are the coefficients (moles) of the substances A, B, C and D respectively.

Question 62.
Write the balanced chemical equation that have ΔH0 value equal to ΔfH0 for each of the following substances :
(1) C2H2(g)
(2) KCIO3(s)
(3) C12H22O11(s) (4) CH3-CH2-OH(1)
Answer:
ΔfH0 represents the standard enthalpy of formation of each given substance. Hence it is necessary to write thermochemical equation for the formation of each substance. ΔH0 of this formation reaction is equal to standard heat of formation, ΔfH0.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 24

Question 63.
Consider the chemical reaction,
OF2(g) + H2O(g) → O2(g) + 2HF(g) ΔH0 = -323 kJ
What is ΔH0 of the reaction if (a) the equation is multiplied by 3, (b) direction of reaction is reversed?
Answer:
(a) If the given thermochemical equation is multiplied by 3 then,
ΔrH0 = 3ΔH0 = 3 × (-323) = -969 kJ
(b) If the direction of equation is reversed, then the reaction will be,
O2(g) + 2HF(g) → OF2(g) + H2O(g)
∴ ΔrH0 = – ΔH0 = – (- 323) = + 323 kJ

Question 64.
Define bond enthalpy (or bond energy).
Answer:
Bond enthalpy (or Bond energy) : The enthalpy change or amount of heat energy required to break one mole of particular covalent bonds of gaseous molecules forming free gaseous atoms or radicals at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atmosphere) is called bond enthalpy or bond energy. For example, bond enthalpy of H2 is 436.4 kJ mol-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 65.
Explain bond enthalpy of diatomic molecules.
Answer:
In case of diatomic molecules, since there is only one bond, the bond enthalpy is equal to heat of atomisation. For example, heat of atomisation of
HCl(g) is 431.9 kJ mol-1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 25
(Bond enthalpy is generally denoted by D).

Question 66.
Explain bond enthalpy in polyatomic molecules.
Answer:
Consider bond enthalpy in H2O. The thermochemical equation for dissociation of H2O(g) is,
H2O(g) → 2H(g) + O(g), ΔrH0 = 927 kJ mol-1
In this, two O – H bonds are broken. It can be represented in stepwise as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 26
In above, even if two identical O – H bonds are borken, the energies required to break each bond are different.
The average bond enthalpy of O – H bond is,
ΔrH0 = \(\frac {927}{2}\) = 463.5 kJ mol-1

Solved Examples 4.10

Question 67.
Solve the following :

(1) Standard enthalpy of formation of ethane, C2H6(g) is -84.7 kJ mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy change for the formation of 0.1 kg ethane.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy of formation of C2H6(g)
= ΔfH0 = ΔH1 = -84.7 kJ mol-1
Mass of C2H6(g) = 0.1 kg = 100 g
Molar mass ofC2H6 = 30 g mol-1
ΔH0 for the formation of 0.1 kg C2H6 = 100 g
C2H6 = ΔH2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 27
Ans. Heat of formation = -282.3 kJ

(2) When 10 g C2H5OH(l) are formed, 51 kJ heat is liberated. Calculate standard enthalpy of formation of C2H5OH(l).
Solution :
Given : Mass of C2H5OH(l) = m = 10 g
Heat liberated = ΔH1 = -51 kJ
Molar mass of C2H5OH = 46 gmol-1
Standard enthalpy of formation of C2H5OH(l)
= ΔfH = ?
Standard enthalpy of formation is the enthalpy change for the formation of 1 mole C2H5OH(l) i.e., 46 g C2H5OH(l).
Now,
∵ For the formation of 10 g C2H5OH(l)
ΔH1 = -51 kJ
∴ For the formation of 46 g C2H5OH,
ΔfH0 = \(\frac{-51 \times 46}{10}\) = – 234.6 kJ mol-1
Ans. Standard enthalpy of formation of C2H5OH = ΔfH0 = – 234.6 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(3) Standard enthalpy of combustion of CH3OH is -726kJ mol-1. Calculate enthalpy change for the combustion of 0.5 kg CH3OH.
Solution :
Given : Standard enthalpy of combustion of
CH3OH = ΔCH0 = ΔH1 = -726 kJ mol-1
Mass of CH3OH = m = 0.5 kg = 500 g
Molar mass of CH3OH = 32 g mol-1
Enthalpy of combustion = ΔCH = ΔH2 = ?
Now,
Enthalpy of combustion is ΔH for the combustion of 1 mole CH3OH = 32 g CH3OH.
∵ For 1 mole CH3OH = 32g CH3OH
ΔH1 = – 726 kJ
∴ For 500 g CH3OH, ΔH2 = \(\frac{-726 \times 500}{32}\)
= -11344 kJ
Ans. Enthalpy change for combustion of 0.5 kg CH3OH = – 11344 kJ

(4) The heat evolved in a reaction of 7.5 g of Fe2O3 with enough CO is 1.164 kJ.
Calculate ΔH0 for the reaction,
Fe2O3(s) + 3CO(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3CO2(g)
Solution :
Fe2O3(s) + 3CO(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3CO2(g)
ΔH = -1.164 kJ
Atomic mass of Fe = 56 g mol-1
Atomic mass of O = 16 g mol-1
Mass of Fe2O3 = 7.5 g
ΔH = -1.164 kJ
ΔH0 for reaction = ?
Molar mass of Fe2O3 = 2 × 56 + 3 × 16
= 160 g mol-1
∵ For 7.5 g Fe2O3 ΔH= – 1.164 kJ
∴ For 160 g Fe2O3
ΔH0 = \(\frac{-1.164 \times 160}{7.5}\) = -24.86 kJ mol-1
Ans. ΔH0 for the reaction = -24.83 kJ mol-1

(5) Calculate the standard enthalpy of the reaction,
2C (graphite) + 3H2(g) → C2H6(g), ΔH0 = ? from the following ΔH0 values :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 28
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 29
Ans. Standard enthalpy of formation of C2H6 = -84.4 kJ mol-1

(6) The enthalpy of combustion of ethane is -1300 kJ. How much heat will be evolved by combustion of 1.3 × 10-3 kg of ethane?
Solution :
Given : ΔCHC2H6(g) = -1300 kJ mol-1
ΔH = ?
Amount of C2H6(g) = 1.3 × 10-3 kg
Molar mass of C2H6 = 30 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Number of moles of C2H6
= nC2H6 = \(\frac{1.3 \times 10^{-3}}{30 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 4,333 × 10-2 mol
For, combustion of 1 mol C2H6 ΔH = -1300 kJ
∴ For combustion of 4.333 × 10-2 mol C2H6,
ΔH = 4.333 × 10-2 × ( -1300) = – 56.33 kJ
Ans. Heat evolved is -56.33 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(7) Calculate heat of formation of pentane from the following data :
(i) C(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ΔH0 = -393.51 kJ
(ii) H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) = H2O(l) ΔH0 = -285.80 kJ
(iii) C5H12 + 😯2(g) = 5CO2(g) + 6H2O1 ΔH0 = -3537 kJ
Solution :
Given :
(i) CO(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ….. (1)
\(\Delta H_{1}^{0}\) = -393.51 kJ mol-1
(ii) H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) = H2O(l) … (2)
\(\Delta H_{2}^{0}\) = – 285.80 kJ mol-1
(iii) C5H12(g) + 😯2(g) = 5CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) ….. (3)
\(\Delta H_{3}^{0}\) = -3537 kJ mol-1
Required thermochemical equation :
5C(s) + 6H2(g) → C5H12(g) – ΔH = ?
Add 5 × equation (1) and 6 × equation (2) and subtract equation (3), then we get the required equation.
∴ ΔH0 = 5 \(\Delta H_{1}^{0}\) + 6 \(\Delta H_{2}^{0}\) – \(\Delta H_{3}^{0}\)
= 5( -393.52) + 6( -285.8) – (-3537)
= -1967.6 – 1714.8 + 3537
= -145.4 kJ mol-1
Ans. ΔfH0C5H12 = -145.4 kJ mol-1

(8) How much heat is evolved when 12 g of CO react with NO2 according to the following reaction,
4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g), ΔH0 = -1198 kJ ?
Solution :
Given : Mass of CO(g) = m = 12 g
Molar mass of CO = 28 g mol-1
4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g)
ΔrH0 = -1198 kJ
Mass of 4 moles of CO = 4 × 28 g CO = 112 g CO
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 30
Ans. Heat evolved during combustion of 12 g CO = 128.4 kJ, or ΔCH = -128.4 kJ

(9) The heats of formation of C12H22O11(S), CO2(g) and H2O(l) are -2271.82, – 393.50 and 285.76 kJ respectively. Calculate the amount of cane sugar (C12H22O11(S)) which will supply 11296.8 kJ of energy.
Solution :
Given : ΔfHC12H22O11(S) = -2271.82 J mol-1
ΔfHCO2(g) = – 393.5 kJ mol-1
ΔfHH2O(l) = – 285.76 kJ mol-1
Energy required = 11296.8 kJ
Thermochemical equation for combustion of C12H22O11(S) is represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 31
= [ 12(-393.5) + 11 (-285.76] – [-2271.82 + 12(0)]
= [ -4722 – 3143.36] + 2271.82
= -5593.54 kJ mol-1
Molar mass of C12H22O11(S) = 342
To obtain 5593.5 kJ energy, C12H22O11(S) required is 342 gram.
Hence for 11296.8 energy, the amount of C12H22O11(S) required as = \(\frac{11296.8 \times 342}{5593.54}\)
= 690.7 g
Ans. Amount of sugar required = 690.7 g

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(10) 6.24 g of ethanol are vaporized by supplying 5.89 kJ of heat energy. What is enthalpy of vaporization of ethanol?
Solution :
Given : Mass of ethanol (C2H5OH) = m = 6.24 g
Heat energy supplied = ΔH = 5.89 kJ
Heat of vaporisation of ethanol = ΔvapH = ?
Molar mass of ethanol, C2H5OH = 46 g mol-1
∵ For 6.24 g C2H5OH ΔH = 5.89kJ
∴ For 1 mole C2H5OH = 46 g C2H5OH
ΔH = \(\frac{5.89 \times 46}{6.24}\)
= 43.42 kJ mol-1
∴ Enthalpy of vaporisation of C2H5OH(l)
= 43.42 kJ
Ans. Enthalpy of vaporisation of C2H5OH(l)
= 43.42 kJ

(11) Given the following equations calculate the standard enthalpy of the reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 32
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 33
By subtracting eq. (ii) from eq. (iii), we get eq. (i)
∴ eq. (i) = eq. (iii) – eq. (ii)
\(\Delta H_{1}^{0}=\Delta H_{3}^{0}-\Delta H_{2}^{0}\)
= -1670 – (-847.6)
= – 822.4 kJ
∴ ΔrH0 = ΔH01 = -822.4 kJ
Ans. Standrad enthalpy of the reaction = ΔrH0 = -822.4 kJ

(12) Calculate the standard enthalpy of combustion of CH2COOH(l) from the following data : ΔfH0(CO2) = -393.3 kJ mol-1
ΔfH0(H2O) = -285.8 kJ mol-1
ΔfH0(CH3COOH) = -483.2 kJ mol-1
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 34
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 35
∴ ΔH1 = 2ΔH2 + 2ΔH3 – ΔH4
= 2(-393.3) + 2(-285.8) – (-483.2)
= -786.6 – 571.6 + 483.2
= -875 kJ mol-1
Ans. Standard enthalpy of combustion of CH3COOH = -875 kJ mol-1.

(13) The bond enthalpies of H2(g), Br2(g) and HBr(g) are 436 kJ mol-1, 193 kJ mol-1 and 366 kJ mol-1 respectively. Calculate the enthalpy change for the following reaction,
H2(g) + Br2(g) → 2HBr(g).
Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpy of H2(g) = ΔH0H2(g)
= 436 kJ mol-1
Bond enthalpy of Br2(g) = ΔH0Br2(g) = 193 kJ mol-1
Bond enthalpy of HBr(g) = ΔH0HBr(g) = 366 kJ mol-1
Given reaction,
H2(g) + Br2(g) → 2HBr(g)
OR
H-H(g) + Br-Br(g) → 2H-Br(g)
The enthalpy change of the reaction is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 36
= [436 + 193] – 2[366]
= 629 – 732
= -103 kJ
Ans. Enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0
= -103 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(14) Calculate ΔrH0 of the reaction
CH4(g) + O2(g) → CH2O(g) + H2O(g)
From the following data:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 37
Solution:
Given:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 38
Standard enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 39
= [ 2ΔH0C-H + ΔH0o=o ] – [ΔH0C=o + 2ΔH0o-H]
= [2 × 414 + 499] – [745 + 2 × 464]
= [828 + 499] – [745 + 928]
= -346 kJ
Ans. Standard enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0 = -346 kJ

(15) Calculate C-Cl bond enthalpy from the following data :
CH3Cl(g) + Cl2(g) → CH2Cl2(g) + HCl(g) ΔH0 = – 104 kJ

BondC–HCl–ClH–Cl
ΔH0/KJ mol-1414243431

(330 kJ mol-1)
Solution :
Given :

BondC–HCl–ClH–Cl
ΔH0/KJ mol-1414243431

For the given reaction, ΔrH0 = -104 kJ
Bond enthalpy of C-Cl = ΔH0C–Cl] = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 40
In this reaction, 1 C–H, 1 Cl–Cl bonds of the reactants are broken while 1C–Cl and 1H–Cl bonds of the products are formed.
Sum of bond enthalpies of bonds formed of the products
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 41
Ans. Bond enthalpy of C–Cl = ΔH0C–Cl
= 330 kJ mol-1

(16) The enthalpy change for the atomisation of 1010 molecules of ammonia is 1.94 × 10-11 kJ. Calculate the bond enthalpy of N-H bond.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy change for atomisation of 1010 molecules = 1.94 × 10-11 kJ
Number of NH3 molecules dissociate = 1010
Bond enthalpy of N-H = ΔH = ?
1 mole of NH3 contains 6.022 × 1023 NH3 molecules.
∵ For atomisation of 1010 molecules of NH3
ΔH = 1.94 × 10-11 kJ
∴ For atomisation of 6.022 × 1023 molecules of NH3,
ΔH = \(\frac{1.94 \times 10^{-11} \times 6.022 \times 10^{23}}{10^{10}}\)
= 1168 kJ mol-1
In NH3 three N-H bonds are broken on atomisation.
NH3(g) → N(g) + 3H(g) ΔH = 1168 kJ mol-1
∴ Average bond enthalpy of N-H bond is,
ΔH = \(\frac{1168}{3}\) = 389.3 kJ mol-1
Ans. Bond enthalpy of N-H bond
= 389.3 kJ mol-1

(17) Calculate the enthalpy of atomisation (or dissociation) of CH2Br2(g) at 25°C from the following data :

Bond enthalpiesC-HC-Br
ΔH0 kJ mol-1414352

Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpies : ΔH0C-H
= 414 kJ mol-1;
ΔH0C-Br = 352 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of atomisation of CH2Br2(g) = ?
Thermochemical equation for atomisation (or dissociation) of CH2Br2 is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 42
ΔatomH° = sum of bond enthalpies of all bonds broken
= 2ΔH0C-H + 2ΔH0C-Br
= 2 × 414 + 2 × 352
= 828 + 704
= 1532 kJ mol-1
Ans. Enthalpy of atomisation of CH2Br2(g)
= 1532 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(18) Enthalpy of sublimation of graphite is 716 kJ mol-1.

Bond enthalpyH-HC-H
ΔH0 kJ mol-1436.4414

Calculate standard enthalpy of formation of CH4.
Solution :
Given : ΔsubH0graphite = 716 kJ mol-1

Bond enthalpyH-HC-H
ΔH0 kJ mol-1436.4414

Thermochemical equation for the formation of CH4,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 43
= [716 + 2 × 436.4] – [4 × 414]
= [716+ 872.8] – [1656]
= 1588.8 – 1656
= -67.2 kJ mol-1
Ans. Standard enthalpy of formation of CH4 = ΔfH0CH4(g) = -67.2 kJ mol-1

(19) Calculate enthalpy of formation of propane from the following data :
Heat of sublimation of graphite is 716 kJ mo-1.

Bond enthalpyH-HC-HC-C
ΔH0 kJ mol-1436.4414350

Solution :
Given: Enthalpy of sublimation of graphite = ΔsubH0C
= 716 kJmol-1

Bond enthalpyH-HC-HC-C
ΔH0 kJ mol-1436.4414350

Enthalpy of formation of propane = ΔfH0 = ?
Thermochemical equation of the formation of propane, CH3-CH2-CH3,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 44
= [3 × 716 + 4 × 436.4] – [2 × 350 + 8 × 414]
= [2148 + 1745.6] – [700 + 3312]
= -118.4 kJmol-1
Ans. Enthalpy of formation of propane (C3H8)
= -118.4 kJmol-1

(20) The standard enthalpy of formation of propene, CH3-CH = CH2 is -13.2 kJ mol-1. Enthalpy of sublimation (atomisation) of graphite is 716 kJmol-1.

Bond enthalpyH-HC-HC-C
ΔH0 kJ mol-1436.4414350

Calculate bond enthalpy of C = C
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 45
Bond enthalpy of C = C = ΔH0C=C = ?
For the formation of propene, (CH3 – CH = CH2),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 46
13.2 = [3 × 716 + 3 × 436.4] – [6 × 414 + 350 + \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) ]
= [2148 + 1309.2] – [2484 + 350 + \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) ]
= [3457.2] – [2834 + \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) ]
= 3457.2 – 2834 – \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\)
\(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) = 3457.2 – 2834 – 13.2
= 610 kJmol-1
Ans. Bond enthalpy of C = C = \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\)
= 610 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(21) Calculate the enthalpy of the reaction,
CH3COOH(g) + CH3CH2OH(g) → CH3COOCH2CH3(g) + H2O(g)
Bond enthalpies of O-H, C-O, in kJmol-1 are 464, 351 respectively.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 47
In this reaction 1O-H and 1C-0 bond of the reactants are broken while 1C-0 and 1O-H bonds of the products are formed. Enthalpy of reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 48
Ans. Hence Enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0 = 0.

Question 68.
(1) What is a spontaneous process?
(2) What are its characteristics?
Answer:
(1) Spontaneous process : It is defined as a process that takes place on its own or without the intervention of the external agency or influence. For example, expansion of a gas or flow of a gas from higher pressure to low pressure or a flow of heat from higher temperature to lower temperature.

(2) Characteristics :

  • It occurs on its own and doesn’t require external agency.
  • It proceeds in one direction and can’t be completely reversed by external stimulant.
  • These processes may be fast or slow.
  • These processes proceed until an equilibrium is reached.

Question 69.
Give the examples of spontaneous processes.
Answer:
The examples of the spontaneous processes are as follows :

  1. All natural processes are spontaneous.
  2. A flow of gas from higher pressure to lower pressure.
  3. Flow of water on its own from higher level to lower level.
  4. Flow of heat from hotter body to colder body.
  5. Acid-base neutralisation is a spontaneous reaction.

Question 70.
What is relation between spontaneity and energy of a system ?
Answer:
(1) The spontaneous process takes place in a direction in which energy of the system decreases. For example, neutralisation reaction between NaOH and HCl solution is exothermic with release of energy.

(2) The spontaneous process also takes place with the increase in energy by absorbing heat. For example,
(a) Melting of ice at 0 °C by absorption of heat
(b) Dissolution of NaCl,
NaCl(s) + aq → NaCl(aq) → Na+(aq) + Cl(aq)
ΔH0 = + 3.9 kJ mol-1

Question 71.
Which of the following are spontaneous ?
(a) Dissolving sugar in hot coffee.
(b) Separation of Ar and Kr from their mixture.
(c) Spreading of fragrance when a bottle of perfume is opened.
(d) Flow of heat from cold object to hot object.
(e) Heat transfer from ice to room temperature at 25 °C.
Answer:
The spontaneous processes are :
(a) Dissolving sugar in hot coffee.
(b) Separation of Ar and Kr from their mixture.
(c) Spreading of fragrance when a bottle of perfume is opened.

The non-spontaneous processes are :
(d) Flow of heat from cold object to hot object.
(e) Heat transfer from ice to room temperature at 25 °C.

Question 72.
Explain : (a) Order in a system.
(b) Disorder in a system.
Answer:
(a) (i) When the atoms, molecules or ions constituting the system are arranged in a perfect order then the system is said to be in order. For example, in the solid state, the constituent atoms, molecules or ions are tightly placed at lattice points in the crystal lattice.
(ii) When solid melts forming a liquid or when a liquid vaporises, the constituents are separated and are in random motion imparting maximum disorder.
(iii) As energy of the system decreases order increases.

(b) Increase in entropy is a measure of disorder in the system. Consider following process :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 49
Fig. 4.11 : Order decreases and disorder increases, Entropy increases

Question 73.
What is the change in order and entropy in the following :
(i) Dissolution of solid I2 in water.
(ii) Dissociation of H2(g) into atoms ?
Answer:
(i) For dissolution of solid I2,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 50
In the solid I2, there is ordered arrangement which collapses in solution increasing disorder and entropy, hence ΔS is positive.

(ii) In the dissociation of H2(g)
H2(g) → 2H(g) (ΔS > 0)
In the molecular state, two H atoms in every molecule are together but in atomic state the disorder is increased with the increase in entropy and hence ΔS > 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 74.
How does addition of heat to a system at different temperatures changes disorder or ΔS ?
Answer:

  • The amount of heat added to a system at higher temperature causes less disorder than when the heat is added at lower temperature.
  • Since disorder depends on the temperature at which heat is added, ΔS relates reciprocally to temperature.
  • This can also be explained from equation,
    ΔS = \(\frac{Q_{\text {rev }}}{T}\)

Question 75.
Explain the change in entropy for the following processes :
(i) 2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
(ii) 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l)
(iii) When ice melts at 0 °C and water vaporises at 100 °C.
Answer:
(i) In the following reaction,
2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g) ΔS = + 126 JK
Due to formation of O2 gas from liquid, entropy increases.
(ii) In the reaction, entropy decreases due to formation of liquid H2O from gaseous H2 and O2.
(iii) \(\text { Ice } \stackrel{0^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \text { water } \stackrel{100^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \text { vapour }\)
In these two steps, entropy increases due to increase in disorder from solid ice to liquid water and further to gaseous state.

Question 76.
How does entropy change in the following processes ? Explain.
(a) freezing of a liquid
(b) sublimation of a solid
(c) dissolving sugar in water
(d) condensation of vapour.
Answer:
(a) Freezing of a liquid results in decrease in randomness and disorder, hence entropy decreases, ΔS < 0.
(b) Sublimation of a solid converts it into vapour where the molecules or atoms are free to move randomly. Hence disorder increases accompanying increase in entropy, ΔS > 0.
(c) Dissolving sugar in water separates the molecules of sugar in the solution increasing disorder and entropy, ΔS > 0.
(d) Condensation of vapour decreases the disorder and randomness, hence entropy, ΔS < 0.

Question 77.
Predict the sign of ΔS in the following processes. Give reasons for your answer :
OR
Explain with reason sign conventions of ΔS in the following reactions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 51
Answer:
(a) N2O4(g) → 2NO2(g)
Since 1 mole N2O4 on dissociation gives two moles of NO2, the number of molecules increase, disorder increases hence entropy increases, ΔS > 0.

(b) Fe2O3(s) + 3H2(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3H2O(g)
In the reaction number of moles of gaseous reactants and products are same, hence ΔS = 0.

(c) N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g)
In the reaction, 4 moles of gaseous reactants form 2 moles of gaseous products (Δn < 0). Therefore disorder decreases and hence entropy decreases, ΔS < 0.

(d) MgCO3(s) → MgO(s) + CO2(g)
In this 1 mole of orderly solid MgCO3 gives 1 mole of solid MgO and 1 mole of gaseous CO2 (Δn > 0) with more disorder. Hence entropy increases, ΔS > 0.

(e) CO2(g) → CO2(s)
In this system from higher disorder in gaseous state changes to less disorder in the solid state, hence entropy decreases, ΔS < 0.

(f) Cl2(g) → 2Cl(g)
Since the dissociation of Cl2 gas gives double Cl atoms, the number of atoms increases (Δn >0) increasing the disorder of the system. Hence ΔS > 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 78.
Identify which of the following pairs has larger entropy ? Why ?
(a) He(g) in a volume of 1 L or He(g) in a volume of 5 L both at 25 °C.
(b) O2(g) at 1 atm or O2(g) at 10 atm both at the same temperature.
(c) C2H5OH(l) or C2H5OH(g)
(d) 5 mol of Ne or 2 mol of Ne.
Answer:
(a) Atoms of He in 5 L at 25 °C occupy more volume than in 1 L. Hence, the randomness and disorder is more in 5 L. Expansion of a gas always increases its entropy. Therefore He(g) in 5L will have larger entropy.

(b) O2(g) at 1 atm will occupy more volume than O2(g) at 10 atm at the same temperature. Hence at 1 atm O2(g) will have higher disorder and hence higher entropy.

(c) The molecules of gaseous C2H5OH(g) will have more disorder and randomness due to free motion of molecules than C2H5OH(l). Hence entropy of C2H5OH(g) will be larger.

(d) 5 mol Ne will contain more Ne atoms than 2 mol Ne. Hence disorder in 5 mol will be more. Therefore 5 mol Ne will have larger entropy.

Question 79.
Mention entropy change (ΔS) for :
(i) spontaneous process
(ii) nonspontaneous process
(iii) at equilibrium.
Answer:
(a) ΔStotal > 0, the process is spontaneous
(b) ΔStotal < 0, the process is non-spontaneous
(c) ΔStotal = 0, the process is at equilibrium.

Question 80.
Define Gibbs free energy and change in free energy. What are the units of Gibbs free energy ?
OR
Derive the relation between ΔG and ΔS Total.
Answer:
(i) Gibbs free energy, G is defined as,
G = H – TS
where H is the enthalpy, S is the entropy of the system at absolute temperature T.
Since H, T and S are state functions, G is a state function and a thermodynamic function.

(ii) At constant temperature and pressure, change in free energy ΔG for the system is represented as, ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 52
This is called Gibbs free energy equation for ΔG. In this ΔS is total entropy change, i.e., ΔSTotal.

(iii) The SI units of ΔG are J or kJ (or Jmol-1 or kJmol-1).
The c.g.s. units of ΔG are cal or kcal (or cal mol-1 or kcal mol-1.)

Question 81.
Explain Gibbs free energy and spontaneity of the process.
Answer:
The total entropy change for a system and its surroundings accompanying a process is given by,
ΔSTotal = ΔSsystem + ΔSsurr
By second law, for a spontaneous process,
ΔSTotal > 0. If + ΔH is the enthalpy change (or enthalpy increase) for the process, or a reaction at constant temperature (T) and pressure, then enthalpy change (or enthalpy decrease) for the surroundings will be -ΔH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 53
By Gibbs equation,
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
By comparing above two equations,
∴ ΔG = -TΔSTotal
As ΔSTotal increases, ΔG decreases.
For a spontaneous process, ΔSTotal > 0
which is according to second law of thermodynamics.
∴ ΔG < 0.
Hence in a spontaneous process, Gibbs free energy decreases (ΔG < 0) while entropy increases (ΔS > 0).
Therefore for a non-spontaneous process Gibbs free energy increases (Δ G > 0).
It can be concluded that for a process at equilibrium, ΔG=0.
Hence,

  • For the spontaneous process, Δ G < 0
  • For the non-spontaneous process, Δ G > 0
  • For the process at equilibrium, Δ G = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 82.
How does second law of thermodynamics explain the conditions of spontaneity ?
Answer:
The second law explains the conditions of spontaneity as below :
(i) ΔStotal  > 0 and ΔG < 0, the process is spontaneous.
(ii) ΔStotal  < 0 and ΔG > 0, the process is nonspontaneous.
(iii) ΔStotal = 0 and ΔG = 0, the process is at equilibrium.

Question 83.
Discuss the factors, ΔH, ΔS and ΔG for spontaneous and non-spontaneous processes.
OR
What can be said about the spontaneity of reactions when (1) ΔH and ΔS are both positive (2) ΔH and ΔS are both negative (3) ΔH is positive and ΔS is negative (4) ΔH is negative and ΔS is positive.
Answer:
For a spontaneous or a non-spontaneous process, ΔH and ΔS may be positive or negative (ΔH < 0 or ΔH > 0; ΔS < 0 or ΔS > 0). But ΔG must decrease, i.e., ΔG < 0. If ΔG > 0, the process or a reaction will definitely be non-spontaneous. This can be explained by Gibbs equation, ΔG = ΔH – TΔS.
(1) If ΔH and ΔS are both negative, then ΔG will be negative only when TΔS < ΔH or when temperature T is low. Such reactions must be carried out at low temperatures.
(2) If ΔH and ΔS are both positive then ΔG will be negative if, TΔS > ΔH; such reactions must be carried out at high temperature.
(3) If ΔH is negative (ΔH < 0) and ΔS is positive (ΔS > 0) then for all temperatures ΔG will be negative and the reaction will be spontaneous. But as temperature increase, ΔG will be more negative, hence the reaction will be more spontaneous at higher temperature.
(4) If ΔH is positive, (ΔH > 0) and ΔS is negative (ΔS < 0), ΔG will be always positive (ΔG > 0) and hence the reaction will be non-spontaneous at all temperatures.

This can be summarised in the following table :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 54

Question 84.
Obtain a temperature condition for equilibrium.
Answer:
For a system at equilibrium, free energy change ΔG is,
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
where ΔH is enthalpy change, ΔS is entropy change at temperature, T. Since ΔG = 0 at equilibrium,
O = ΔH – TΔS
∴ TΔS = ΔH
OR T = \(\frac{\Delta H}{\Delta S}\)
Hence at temperature T, changeover between forward spontaneous step and backward non-spontaneous step occurs and the system attains an equilibrium.
Here ΔH and ΔS are assumed to be independent of temperature.

Question 85.
Predict the signs of ΔH, ΔS and ΔG of the system when a solid melts at 1 atmosphere and at (a) -55 °C (b) -95 °C (c) -77 °C, if the normal melting point of the solid is -77 °C.
Answer:
Since the normal melting point of the solid is -77°C, to melt the solid at any temperature other than at -77 °C, the pressure is required to be changed. During the phase change, the system will be at equilibrium, hence Δ G = 0.
(a) In case a solid at -55 °C, the temperature should be decreased (ΔH < 0, ΔS < 0) to -77 °C and then it will melt, so ΔH > 0, ΔS > 0, ΔG = 0.
(b) In case of a solid at -95 °C, it represents supercooled system and the temperature should be raised to -77 °C (ΔH > 0, ΔS > 0) and then it will melt so ΔH > 0, ΔS > 0, ΔG = 0.
(c) At -77 °C, solid will melt, solid and liquid will be at equilibrium. Melting involves absorption of heat,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 55
ΔH >0, ΔS > 0, ΔG = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.11

Question 86.
Solve the following :

(1) In an isothermal reversible process, 6 kJ heat is absorbed at 27 °C. Calculate the entropy change.
Solution :
Given : Temperature = T = 273 + 21 = 300 K
Heat absorbed = Qrev = 6 kJ = 6000 J
Entropy change = ΔS = ?
ΔS = \(\frac{Q_{\text {rev }}}{T}=\frac{6000}{300}\) = 20 JK-1
Ans. Entropy change = ΔS = 20 JK-1

(2) The latent heat of evaporation of water is 2.26 kJ g-1 at 1 atm and 100 °C. Calculate the entropy change for evaporation of 1 mole of water at 100 °C.
Solution :
Given : Latent heat of evaporation = ΔvapH0
= 2.26 kJ g-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Molar mass of water = 18 g mol-1
ΔS = ?
For 1g H2O(l) ΔvapH0 = 2.26 KJ
∴ For 1 mol H2O(l) = 18 g H2O(l)
ΔvapH0 = 2.26 × 18
= 40.68 kJ
= 40680 J
Entropy change, ΔS is given by,
ΔS = \(\frac{\Delta_{\mathrm{vap}} H^{0}}{T}=\frac{40680}{373}\) = 109.06 JK-1 mol-1
Ans. Entropy change = ΔS = 109.06 JK-1 mol-1

(3) Calculate the standard (absolute) entropy change for the formation of CO2(g).

SubstanceC(graphite)O2(g)CO2(g)
Standard molar enthalpy JK-1 mol-15.74205213.7

Solution:
Given:

SubstanceC(graphite)O2(g)CO2(g)
Standard molar enthalpy S0 JK-1 mol-15.74205213.7

For the formation of CO2(g),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 56

(4) The standard entropies of H2(g), O2(g) and H2O(g) in JK-1 mol-1 are 130, 205 and 189 respectively. The heat of formation of H2O(g) is -242 kJ mol-1. Calculate ΔS for formation of H2O(g), for the surroundings and the universe at 298 K. Mention whether the reaction is spontaneous or non-spontaneous.
Solution :
Given :

SubstanceH2(g)O2(g)H2O(g)
Standard entropy S0 JK-1 mol-1130205189

ΔfH0 = -242 kJ mol-1
ΔSuniverse = ?, ΔSsurr = ?
Thermochemical equation for the formation of H2O(g)
H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) → H2O(g)
ΔS0 = [S0H2O] – [H0H2 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) H0O2]
= 189 – [130 + \(\frac {1}{2}\)(205)]
= 189 – [232.5]
= -43.5 JK-1 mol-1
Hence, ΔSsystem = -43.5 JK-1 mol-1
Since for the formation of H2O(g)
ΔfH0 = -242 kJmol-1 = -242 × 103 Jmol-1, the reaction is exothermic. Hence the surroundings gains heat energy 242 × 103J. Therefore entropy of the system decreases while entropy of surroundings increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 57
Hence, ΔSsys < 0 but ΔSuniverse > 0, hence the reaction is spontaneous.
Ans. ΔSH2O(g) = -43.5 JK-1 mol-1
ΔSsurr = 813 JK-1 mol-1
ΔSuniverse = 769.5 JK-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(5) Calculate ΔSTotal and hence show whether the following reaction is spontaneous at 25 °C.
Hg(s) + O2(g) → Hg(l) + SO2(g) ΔH0 = – 238.6 kJ
ΔS0 = +36.7 JK-1
Solution :
Given : Hg(s) + O2(g) → Hg(l) + SO2(g)
ΔrH0 = – 238.6 kJ
ΔS0 = +36.7 JK-1
T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
ΔSTotal = ?
ΔSTotal = ΔSsys + Δ Ssurr
Now, ΔSsys = 36.7 JK-1
Since the reaction is exothermic, system loses heat to surroundings. Hence the entropy of the surroundings increases.
ΔHsurr = + 238.6 kJ = 238600 J
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 58
∵ ΔSTotal > 0, the reaction is spontaneous.
Ans. ΔSTotal = 837.4 JK-1
The reaction is spontaneous.

(6) What is the value of ASsurr for the following reaction at 298 K ?
6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) → C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g),
ΔG0 = 2879 kJ mol-1, ΔS0 = -210 JK-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given :
6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) → C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g),
ΔG0 = 2879 kJmol-1;
ΔS0 = -210 JK-1mol-1 = -0.210 kJ K-1 mol-1
T = 298 K ΔH0 = ?
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
∴ ΔH0 = ΔG0 + TΔS0
= 2879 + 298(-0.210)
= 2879 – 62.58
= 2816.42 kJ mol-1
Since ΔH0 > 0, the reaction is endothermic, and system absorbs heat from surroundings. Hence surroundings loses heat,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 59
Ans. ΔS0surr = -9.45 kJ K-1

(7) Calculate ΔSsurr when on mole of methanol (CH3OH) is formed from its elements under standard conditions if ΔfH0(CH3OH) = -238.9 J mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of ethanol,
(C2H5OH) = n = 1 mol
ΔfH0(CH3OH) = -238.9 kJ mol-1
= -238.9 × 103J mol-1
Temperature = T = 298 K
ΔS = ?
ΔSsurr = ?
Since ΔfH0 is negative, the reaction for the formation of one mole of C2H5OH is exothermic.
As heat is released to the surroundings,
ΔH0surr = + 238.9 kJ mol-1
∴ ΔSsurr = \(\frac{\Delta H_{\text {surr }}^{0}}{T}=\frac{+238.9 \times 10^{3}}{298}\)
= +801.7 JK-1
Thus entropy of the surroundings increases.
Ans. ΔSsurr = +801.7 JK-1

(8) What is the value of ΔSsurr for the following reaction at 298 K –
6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) → C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g)
Given that: ΔG° = 2879 KJ mol-1
ΔS0 = -210 J K-1 mol-1
Solution :
Given : ΔG0 = 2879 KJ mol-1 = 2879 × 103 J mol-1
ΔS0 = -210 JK-1 mol-1
ΔSsurr = ?
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
∴ ΔH0 = ΔG0 + TΔS0
= 2879 × 103 + 298 × (- 210)
= 2879 × 103 – 62580
= 2816420 J
Since, for a system, ΔH0 is +2816420 J, the surrounding loses heat to system,
∴ ΔH0surr = – 2816420 J
∴ ΔS0surr = \(\frac{\Delta H_{\text {surr }}^{0}}{T}\)
= \(\frac{-2816420}{298}\)
= -9451 JK-1
= -9.451 kJ K-1
Ans. ΔSsurr = -9.451 kJ K-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(9) Determine whether the reactions with the following ΔH and ΔS values are spontaneous or non-spontaneous. State whether they are exothermic or endothermic.
(a) ΔH = -110 kJ and ΔS = +40 JK-1 at 400 K
(b) ΔH = +50 kJ and ΔS = -130 JK-1 at 250 K.
Solution :
(a) Given : ΔH= -110 kJ ΔS = 40 JK-1 = 0.04 kJK-1
Temperature = T = 400 K ΔG = ?
Since ΔH is negative, the reaction is exothermic
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= -110 – 400 × 0.04
= -110 – 16
= -126 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous.

(b) Given : ΔH=50 kJ,
ΔS= -130 JK-1 = -0.13 kJ K-1
Temperature = T = 250 K
ΔG = ?
Since ΔH is positive, the reaction is endothermic.
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= 50 – 250 × (-0.13)
= 50 + 32.5
= 82.5 kJ
Since ΔG > 0, the reaction is non-spontaneous.
Ans. (a) ΔG = -126 kJ; The reaction is exothermic and spontaneous.
(b) ΔG = 82.5 kJ; The reaction is endothermic and non-spontaneous.

(10) For a certain reaction, ΔH0 = -224 kJ and ΔS0 = -153 JK-1. At what temperature will it change from spontaneous to non-spontaneous ?
Solution :
Given : ΔH0 = – 224 kJ = – 224000 J
ΔS0 = – 153 JK-1
Temperature (T) at which, reaction changes from spontaneous to non-spontaneous = ?
Find the temperature at equilibrium, where ΔG0 = 0
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
∴ TΔS0 = ΔH0
∴ T = \(\frac{\Delta H^{0}}{\Delta S^{0}}\)
= \(\frac{224000}{153}\)
= 1464 K.
Hence reaction will be spontaneous below 1464 K. It will be at equilibrium at 1464 K and non-spontaneous above 1464 K.
Ans. Change over temperature from spontaneous to non-spontaneous = 1464 K.

(11) Determine whether the reactions with the following ΔH and ΔS values are spontaneous or non-spontaneous. State whether the reactions are exothermic or endothermic.
(a) ΔH = -110 kJ, ΔS = +40 JK-1 at 400 K
(b) ΔH = + 40 kJ, ΔS = – 120 JK-1 at 250 K
Solution :
(a) Given : ΔH = -110 kJ, ΔS = +40 JK-1 at T = 400K
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 60
= -110 – 16
= -126 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous.
Since ΔH is negative, the reaction is exothermic.

(b) Given : ΔH = + 40 kJ, ΔS = -120 JK-1 at T = 250 K
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 61
= 40 + 30
= 70 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous.
Since ΔH is negative, the reaction is exothermic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(12) Determine whether the following reaction will be spontaneous or non-spontaneous under standard conditions.
Zn(s) + Cu2+ → Zn2+ +Cu(s) ΔH0 = -219 kJ, ΔS0 = -21 JK-1
Solution :
Given : ΔH0 = -219 kJ;
ΔS0 = -21 JK-1= 0.021 kJ K-1
ΔG0 = ?
For standard conditions : Pressure = 1 atm
Temperature = T = 298 K
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
= -219 – 298 × (-0.021)
= -219 + 6.258
= -212.742 kJ
Since ΔG < 0, the reaction is spontaneous.
Ans. The reaction is spontaneous.

(13) The equilibrium constant for a gaseous reversible reaction at 200 °C is 1.64 × 103 atm2. Calculate ΔG° for the reaction.
Solution :
Given : Equilibrium constant = KP = 1.64 × 103 atm2
Temperature = T = 273 + 200 = 473 K
ΔG0 = ?
ΔG0 = -2.303 RTlog10 Kp
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 473 × log10 1.64 × 103
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 473 × (3.2148)
= -29115 J
= -29.115 kJ
Ans. ΔG0 = -29.115 kJ

(14) Calculate ΔG for the reaction at 25°C
CO(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ CH3OH(g)
ΔG0 = -24.8 kJ mol-1.
if Pco = 4 atm, PH2 = 2 atm, PCH3OH = 2 atm.
Solution :
Given : Partial pressures : pco = 4 atm,
PH2 = 2 atm,
PCH3OH = 2 atm
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
ΔG0 = -24.8 kJ mol-1
CO(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ CH3OH(g)
The reaction quotient, Q is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 62
= – 24.8 + 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × log10 0.125
= – 24.8 + 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × (\(\overline{1} \cdot 09691\))
= – 24.8 + 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × (- 0.90709)
= – 24.8 – 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × 0.90709 × 10-3
= -24.8 – 5.176
= -29.976 kJ mol-1.
Ans. ΔG = – 29.976 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(15) Calculate KP for the reaction,
C2H4(g) + H2(g) ⇌ C2H6(g),
ΔG0 = -100 kJ mol-1, at 25°C.
Solution :
Given : ΔG0 = – 100 kJ mol-1 = – 100 × 103 J mol-1
= -1 × 105 Jmol-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Equilibrium constant = KP = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 63

(16) KP for the reaction,
MgCO3(s) → MgO(s) + CO2(g) is 9 × 10-10.
Calculate ΔG0 for the reaction at 25 °C.
Solution :
Given : KP = 9 Δ 10-10
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
ΔG0 = ?
ΔG0 = -2.303 RTlog10KP
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × log109 × 10-10
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × \([\overline{10} \cdot 9542]\)
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × [ – 9.0458]
= 51683 Jmol-1
= 51.683 kJmol-1
Ans. ΔG0 = 51.653 kJ mol-1

(17) Calculate ΔH, ΔS and ΔG for melting of 10 g ice at 0 °C and 1 atm. (ΔfusH0 = 6.02 kJ mol-1 for ice)
Solution :
Given : ΔfusH0 = 6.02 kJ mol-1 = 6.02 × 103 Jmol-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 0 = 273 K
Mass of ice = 10 g
Molar mass of H2O = 18 g mol-1
ΔH= ?, ΔS = ?, ΔG = ?
For melting of ice,
H2O(s) ⇌ H2O(l)
For 1 mol ice = 18 g ice ΔfusionH = 6.05 kJ
∴ For 10 g ice
ΔH = \(\frac{6.02 \times 10}{18}\)
= 3.344 kJ
ΔH = 3.344 kJ = 3.344 × 103 J
∴ ΔS = \(\frac{\Delta H}{T}=\frac{3.344 \times 10^{3}}{273}\) = 12.25 JK-1
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= 3.344 – 273 × 12.25 ×10-3 kJ
= 3.344 – 3.344
= 0
Since ΔG = 0, the system is at equilibrium.
Ans. ΔH = 3.344 kJ; ΔS = 12.25 JK-1; ΔG = 0

(18) Calculate Kp, ΔG0 for the reaction,
C(s) + H2O(g) ⇌ CO(g) + H2(g)
at 990 K if the equilibrium concentrations are as follows :
[H2O] = 1.10 mol dm--3,
[CO] = [H2] = 0.2 mol dm-3,
R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given : [H2O] = 1.1 mol dm-3,
[CO] = 0.2 mol dm-3,
[H2] = 0.2 mol dm-3, T = 990 K,
R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1
KP = ? ΔG0 = ?
C(s) + H2O(g) ⇌ CO(g) + H2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 64
KP = KC × (RT)Δn
= 0.03636 × (0.08206 × 990)
= 2.954 atm
ΔG0 = -2.303 RTlog10KP
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 990 × log10 2.954
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 990 × 0.4704
= -8917 J
= -8.917 kJ
Ans. KP = 2.954 atm; ΔG0 = -8.917 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 87.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. For an isochoric process, the change in
(a) pressure is zero
(b) volume is negative
(c) volume is zero
(d) temperature is zero
Answer:
(c) volume is zero

2. Which of the following is an extensive property ?
(a) Surface tension
(b) Refractive index
(c) Energy
(d) Temperature
Answer:
(c) Energy

3. Which of the following is an intensive property ?
(a) Enthalpy
(b) Weight
(c) Refractive index
(d) Volume
Answer:
(c) Refractive index

4. Which of the following pairs is an intensive property ?
(a) Density, viscosity
(b) Surface tension, mass
(c) Viscosity, internal energy
(d) Heat capacity, volume
Answer:
(a) Density, viscosity

5. The property which is not intensive is
(a) freezing point
(b) viscosity
(c) temperature
(d) free energy
Answer:
(d) free energy

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

6. Which of the following is not an extensive property ?
(a) molarity
(b) molar heat capacity
(c) mass
(d) volume
Answer:
(b) molar heat capacity

7. Which of the following is NOT a state function ?
(a) Work
(b) Enthalpy
(c) Temperature
(d) Pressure
Answer:
(a) Work

8. In an adiabatic process
(a) ΔT ≠ 0
(b) ΔU ≠ 0
(c) Q = 0
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

9. For an isothermal and reversible process
(a) P1V1 = P2V2
(b) P1V1 ≠ P2V2
(c) ΔV ≠ 0
(d) ΔH ≠ 0
Answer:
(a) P1V1 = P2V2

10. For the process to occur under adiabatic conditions, the correct condition is :
(a) ΔT = 0
(b) Δp = 0
(c) Q = 0
(d) W = 0
Answer:
(c) Q = 0

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

11. What is true for an adiabatic process ?
(a) ΔT = 0
(b) ΔU
(c) ΔH = ΔU
(d) Q = 0
Answer:
(d) Q = 0

12. ΔU = 0 is true for
(a) Adiabatic process
(b) Isothermal process
(c) Isobaric process
(d) Isochoric process
Answer:
(b) Isothermal process

13. When a gas expands in vacuum, the work done by the gas is
(a) maximum
(b) zero
(c) less than zero
(d) greater than zero
Answer:
(b) zero

14. When a sample of an ideal gas is allowed to expand at constant temperature against an atomospheric pressure,
(a) surroundings does work on the system
(b) ΔU = 0
(c) no heat exchange takes place between the system and surroundings
(d) internal energy of the system increases
Answer:
(b) ΔU = 0

15. In what reaction of the following work is done by the system on the surroundings ?
(a) Hg(l) → Hg(g)
(b) 3O2(g) → 2O3(g)
(c) H2(g) + Cl2(g) → 2HCl(g)
(d) N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g)
Answer:
(a) Hg(l) → Hg(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

16. A gas does 0.320 kJ of work on its surroundings and absorbs 120 J of heat from the surroundings. Hence, ΔU is
(a) 440 kJ
(b) 200 J
(c) 120.32 J
(d) -200J
Answer:
(d) -200J

17. For an isothermal and reversible expansion of 0.5 mol of an ideal gas, Wmax is -3.918 kJ. The value of ΔU is
(a) 3.918 kJ
(b) zero
(c) 1.959 kJ
(d) 3918 J
Answer:
(b) zero

18. The mathematical expression of the first law of thermodynamics for an adiabatic process is
(a) W = Q
(b) W = -ΔU
(c) W = +ΔU
(d ) W = -Q
Answer:
(c) W = +ΔU

19. A gaseous system absorbs 600 kJ of heat and performs the work of expansion equal to 130 kJ. The internal energy change is
(a) 730 kJ
(b) -470 kJ
(c) -730 kJ
(d) 470 kJ
Answer:
(d) 470 kJ

20. When a gas is compressed, the work obtained is 360 J while the heat transferred is 190 J. Hence the change in internal energy is
(a) -170 J
(b) 170 J
(c) 550 J
(d) -550 J
Answer:
(b) 170 J

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

21. For the reaction N2(g) + 3H2(g) = 2NH3(g); Which of the following is valid ?
(a) ΔH = ΔU
(b) ΔH < ΔU
(c) ΔH > ΔU
(d) ΔH = 2ΔH
Answer:
(b) ΔH < ΔU

22. For which reaction ΔH = ΔU ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 65
Answer:
(b) \(\mathrm{C}_{6} \mathrm{H}_{12} \mathrm{O}_{6(\mathrm{~s})}+6 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow 6 \mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+6 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})}\)

23. For the following reaction at 298 K
H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{8}\)O2(g) = H2O(l)
Which of the following alternative is correct ?
(a) ΔH = ΔU
(b) ΔH > ΔU
(c) ΔH < ΔU
(d) ΔH = 1.5 ΔU
Answer:
(c) ΔH < ΔU

24. The heat of combustion of carbon is 394 kJ mol-1. The heat evolved in combustion of 6.023 × 1021 atoms of carbon is
(a) 3940 kJ
(b) 3940.0 kJ
(c) 3.94 kJ
(d) 0.394 kJ
Answer:
(c) 3.94 kJ

25. Which of the reactions defines the heat of formation ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 66
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathrm{HCl}_{(\mathrm{g})}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

26. ΔUo of combustion of methane is -X kJ mol-1. The value of ΔH0 is
(a) = ΔUo
(b) > ΔUo
(c) < ΔUo
(d) =0
Answer:
(c) < ΔUo

27. The enthalpy of combustion of 5(rhomic)is -297.4 kJ mol-1. The amount of sulphur required to produce 29.74 kJ of heat is
(a) 32 × 10-2 kg
(b) 3.2 × 10-3 kg
(c) 3.2 × 10-2 kg
(d) 6.4 × 10-3 kg
Answer:
(b) 3.2 × 10-3 kg

28. The heat of formation of SO2(g) and SO3(g) are -269 kJ mol-1 and -395 kJ mol-1 respectively the value of ΔH for the reaction
SO2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) → SO3(g) is
(a) -664 kJ mol-1
(b) -126 kJ mol-1
(c) 63 kJ mol-1
(d) 126 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(b) -126 kJ mol-1

29. The enthalpy of combustion of methane, graphite and dihydrogen at 298 K are, -890.3 kJ mol-1, -393.5 kJ mol-1 and -285.8 kJ mol-1 respectively. Enthalpy of formation of CH4(g) will be
(a) – 74.8 kJ mol-1
(b) – 52.27 kJ mol-1
(c) + 74.8 kJ mol-1
(d) + 52.26 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(a) – 74.8 kJ mol-1

30. The enthalpies of formation of N2O(g) and NO(g) are 82 kJ mol-1 and 90 kJ mol-1 respectively. Then enthalpy of a reaction 2N2O(g) + O2(g) → 4NO(g) is …………
(a) 8 kJ
(b) -16 kJ
(c) 88 kJ
(d) 196 kJ
Answer:
(d) 196 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

31. The heat of combustion of naphthalene (C10H8) to CO2 gas and water vapour at 298 K and at constant pressure is -5.1567 × 106 J. The heat of combustion at constant volume at 298 K is (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
(a) -5.1567 × 106 J
(b) -5.6161 × 106 J
(c) -5.1616 × 106 J
(d) -5.7161 × 106 J
Answer:
(c) -5.1616 × 106 J

32. Given the reaction,
2NH3(g) → N2(g) + 3H2(g) ΔH = 92.6 kJ
The enthalpy of formation of NH3 is
(a) -92.6 kJ
(b) 92.6 kJ mol-1
(c) -46.3 kJmol-1
(d) -185.2 kJmol-1
Answer:
(c) -46.3 kJmol-1

33. Calculate the heat of reaction at 298 K for the reaction C2H4(g) + H2(g) = C2H6(g)
Given that the heats of combustion of ethylene, hydrogen and ethane are 337.0, 68.4 and 373.0 kcal respectively.
(a) 23.4 kcal
(b) 62.2 kcal
(c) 32.4 kcal
(d) 34.2 kcal
Answer:
(c) 32.4 kcal

34. Entropy change for a process is given by,
(a) Qrev × T
(b) Qrev/T
(c) \(\frac{T}{Q_{\text {rev }}}\)
(d) ΔHrev × T
Answer:
(b) Qrev/T

35. For a spontaneous process, total entropy change for a system and its surroundings is
(a) ΔStotal < 0
(b) ΔStotal = 0
(c) ΔStotal > 0
(d) ΔStotal ≤ 0
Answer:
(c) ΔStotal > 0

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

36. For a system at equilibrium,
(a) ΔStotal = 0
(b) ΔStotal > 0
(c) ΔStotal < 0
(d) ΔStotal ≥ 0
Answer:
(a) ΔStotal = 0

37. If the enthalpy of vaporisation of water at 100°C is 186.5 J·mol-1, the entropy of vaporization will be-
(a) 4.0 J·K-1 mol-1
(b) 3.0 J·K-1 mol-1
(c) 1.5 J·K-1 mol-1
(d) 0.5 J·K-1 mol-1
Answer:
(d) 0.5 J·K-1 mol-1

38. Heat of fusion of ice is 6.02kJmol-1 at 0 °C. If 100 g water is frozen at 0 °C, entropy change will be
(a) -0.1225 JK-1
(b) 310.6 JK-1
(c) -122.6 JK-1
(d) 92.8 JK-1
Answer:
(c) -122.6 JK-1

39. If for a reaction ΔH is negative and ΔS is positive then the reaction is
(a) spontaneous at all temperatures
(b) non-spontaneous at all temperatures
(c) spontaneous only at high temperatures
(d) spontaneous only at low temperature
Answer:
(a) spontaneous at all temperatures

40. The relationship between ΔGo of a reaction and its equilibrium constant is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 67
Answer:
(c) \(\frac{R T \ln K}{\Delta G^{0}}=-1\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

41. Which of the following has highest entropy?
(a) Al(s)
(b) CaCO3(s)
(c) H2O(l)
(d) CO2(g)
Answer:
(d) CO2(g)

42. The entropy change for the formation of 3.5 mol NO(g) from the following data will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 68
Answer:
(b) 42.875 JK-1

43. Gibbs free energy change at equilibrium is
(a) ΔG = 0
(b) ΔG > 0
(c) ΔG < 0
(d) ΔG ≤ 0
Answer:
(a) ΔG = 0

44. For spontaneous process,
(a) ΔG = 0
(b) ΔG > 0
(c) ΔG < 0
(d) ΔG ≤ 0
Answer:
(c) ΔG < 0

45. A substance which shows highest entropy is
(a) SrCO3(S)
(b) Cu(S)
(c) NaC(aq)
(d) Cl2(g)
Answer:
(d) Cl2(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

46. For which of the following reactions ΔS is negative ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 69
Answer:
(a) \(\mathrm{Mg}_{(s)}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathrm{MgCl}_{2(s)}\)

47. For a reaction, at 300K enthalpy is 138 kJ and entropy change is 115 JK-1. Hence the free energy change of the reaction is
(a) 130.5 kJ
(b) 103.5 kJ
(c) 82.8 kJ
(d) – 60.5 kJ
Answer:
(b) 103.5 kJ

48. Bond enthalpies of H2-1, I2(g) and HI are 436, 151 and 298 kJ mol-1 respectively. Hence enthalpy of formation of HI(g) is
(a) -9 kJmol-1
(b) -4.5kJmol-1
(c) 4.5 kJ mol-1
(d) 9 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(b) -4.5kJmol-1

49. The average bond energy of C-H bond is 410 kJmol-1. The enthalpy change of atomisation of 3.2 g CH4(g) is
(a) 1312 kJ
(b) 29.8 kJ
(c) 328 kJ
(d) 120 kJ
Answer:
(c) 328 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

50. For a chemical reaction ΔS = -0.035 kJ/K and ΔH = -20 kJ. At what temperature does the reaction turn non-spontaneous ?
(a) 5.14 K
(b) 57.14 K
(c) 571.4 K
(d) 5714.0 K
Answer:
(c) 571.4 K

51. For a certain reaction, ΔH = -50 kJ and ΔS = -80 JK-1, at what temperature does the reaction turn from spontaneous to non-spontaneous.
(a) 6.25 K
(b) 62.5 K
(c) 625 K
(d) 6250 K
Answer:
(c) 625 K

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 1.
What are electrolytes?
Answer:
Electrolytes: The substances which in their aqueous solutions (or in any polar solvents) dissociate or ionize forming positively charged ions (cations) and negatively charged ions (anions) are called electrolytes. For example, NaCl, HCl, etc.

Question 2.
What is an ionic equilibrium?
Answer:
Ionic equilibrium: The equilibrium between ions and unionized molecules of an electrolyte in solution is called an ionic equilibrium.
\(\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\)

Question 3.
What are the types of electrolytes?
Answer:
There are two types of electrolytes as follows :
(a) Strong electrolyte The electrolytes which ionise completely or almost completely are called strong electrolytes. For example, NaCl, HCl, H2SO4, etc.
(b) Weak electrolytes: The electrolytes which dissociate to a less extent are called weak electrolytes. For example, CH3COOH, NH4OH, etc.

Question 4.
Define degree of dissociation.
Answer:
Degree of dissocsavIt is defined as a fraction of total number of moles of an electrolyte that dissociate into its ions at equilibrium.
It is denoted by a and represented by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 1
OR α = \(\frac{\text { Per cent dissociation }}{100}\)
∴ Per cent dissociation = α × 100

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 5.
Define acid and base. Give examples.
Answer:
Acid : A hydrogen containing substance which gives H+ ions in aqueous solution is called an acid. For example, HCl, CH3COOH, etc.
\(\mathrm{HCl}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Base : A substance that contains OH group and produces hydroxide ions (OH) in aqueous solution is called a base.
\(\mathrm{NaOH}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Na}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Question 6.
What are the limitations of Arrhenius acid-base theory ?
Answer:
Limitations of Arrhenius theory :

  1. This theory is applicable only for aqueous solutions and not for non-aqueous solutions.
  2. It fails to explain the acidic nature of non-hydrogen compounds like BF3, AlCl2, FeCl3, etc.
  3. It fails to explain the basic nature of non-hydroxy compounds like NH3, amines, Na2CO3, KCN, aniline, etc. in their aqueous solutions.
  4. It does not explain role of solvent or existence of H3O+ in an aqueous solution of an acid.

Question 7.
Explain neutralisation reaction according to Arrhenius theory.
Answer:
Neutralisation reaction : According to Arrhenius theory neutralisation is a reaction between an acid and a base in their aqueous solutions produciijg salt and unionised water.
\(\mathrm{HCl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{NaOH}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \rightarrow \mathrm{NaCl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})}\)
Since strong acid, strong base and salt dissociate completely, the above reaction is represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 2
Hence, according to Arrhenius theory neutralisation reaction is defined as a reaction between H+ ions and OH ions forming unionised water molecules.

Question 8.
Explain Bronsted-Lowry theory of acids and bases.
Answer:
Acid : According to Bronsted-Lowry theory acid is a substance that donates a proton (H+) to another substance.
Base : According to this theory base is a substance that accepts a proton (H+) from another substance. For example,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 3
Since HCl donates a proton it is an acid while NH3 accepts a proton it is a base.

Question 9.
For each of the following reactions, identify the Lowry-Bronsted conjugate acid-base pairs :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 4
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 5
In this Acid-1 (CH3COOH) and Base-1 (CH3COO) is one acid base conjugate pair while Base-2 (NH3) and Acid-2 \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\) is another conjugate pair.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 6

Question 10.
Mention a conjugate acid and a conjugate base for each of the following :
(a) H2O (b) \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\) (C) Br (d) H2CO3 (e) \(\mathbf{H}_{2} \mathbf{P O}_{4}^{-}\) (f) \(\mathbf{N H}_{4}^{+}\)
Answer:

SubstanceConjugate acidConjugate base
(a) H2OH3O+OH
(b) \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\)H2SO4\(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{-2}\)
(c) BrHBr
(d) H2CO3\(\mathrm{HCO}_{3}^{-}\)
(e) \(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{PO}_{4}^{-}\)H3PO4\(\mathrm{HPO}_{4}^{-2}\)
(f) \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\)NH3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 11.
Identify conjugate acid-base pairs in the following :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 7
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 8
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 9

Question 12.
Define acids and bases on the basis of Lewis concept. Give examples.
Answer:
Lewis concept of an acid and a base is based on the electronic theory.
Acid : It is defined as any species (molecule or ion) that can accept a pair of electrons. E.g. BF3, AlCl3 and all electron deficient species like cations (K+, Ag+) and molecules having incomplete octet, like BeF2, BF3.

Base : It is defined as any species (molecule or ion) that can donate a pair of electrons. E.g. NH3, C2H5NH2 and all electron rich species like anions (Cl, OH) and all molecules with lone pair of electrons.

Question 13.
Explain : (A) BF3 is a Lewis acid, (B) NH3 is a Lewis base.
Answer:
(A) According to Lewis theory, an acid is a substance which can accept a pair of electrons.
In BF3 molecule, the octet of B is incomplete, hence it needs two electrons or a pair of electrons to complete its octet. Hence BF3 acts as a Lewis acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 10
(B) According to Lewis theory, a base is a substance which can donate a pair of electrons.
In NH3 molecule, nitrogen atom has one lone pair of elctrons to donate.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 11
The reaction between BF3 and NH3 can be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 12

Question 14.
Classify the following into Lewis acids and bases :
CN, Cl, S2-, Cu++, H2O, OH, BF3, Ag+.
Answer:
(1) Lewis acid : Cu++, BF3, Ag+
(2) Lewis bases : CN, Cl, S2-, OH.

Question 15.
Explain amphoteric nature of water.
Answer:
(1) Since water acts as an acid as well as a base, it is amphoteric in nature.
(2) H2O has a tendency to donate a proton forming OH as well as has a tendency to accept a proton forming H3O+.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 13
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 14
Therefore H2O is amphoteric in nature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 16.
How are acids and bases classified on the basis of extent of their dissociation?
Answer:
On the basis of extent of dissociation acids and bases are classified as follows :
(1) Strong acids and strong bases : The acids and bases which dissociate to a greater extent or almost completely are called strong acids and strong bases.
\(\mathrm{HCl}_{\text {(aq) }} \longrightarrow \mathrm{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}+\mathrm{Cl}_{\text {(aq) }}^{-}\)
\(\mathrm{NaOH}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Na}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

(2) Weak acids and weak bases : The acids and bases which dissociate partially are called weak acids and weak bases. There exists an equilibrium between undissociated molecules and ions in solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 15

Question 17.
Give examples of (a) strong acids and strong bases, (b) weak acids and bases.
Answer:
(a) Strong acids : HCl, H2SO4
Strong bases : NaOH, KOH
(b) Weak acids : HCOOH, CH3COOH
Weak bases : NH4OH, C2H5NH2

Question 18.
Define and explain dissociation constant of a weak acid.
Answer:
Dissociation constant of a weak acid : It is defined as the equilibrium constant for dissociation equilibrium of a weak acid and denoted by Ka.
Explanation : Consider an aqueous solution of a weak acid HA.
\(\mathrm{HA}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{A}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
The equilibrium constant called dissociation constant Ka is represented as,
Ka = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right] \times\left[\mathrm{A}^{-}\right]}{[\mathrm{HA}]}\)

Question 19.
Derive the expression of Ostwald’s dilution law in case of a weak acid (HA).
OR
Derive the relationship between degree of dissociation and dissociation constant of a weak acid.
Answer:
Expression of Ostwald’s dilution law in case of a weak acid : Consider the dissociation of a weak acid HA. Let V dm3 of a solution contain one mole of weak acid HA. Then the concentration of a solution is, C = \(\frac{1}{V}\) mol dm3-3. Let α be the degree of dissociation of HA.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 16a
Applying the law of mass action to this dissociation equilibrium, we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 17a
As the acid is weak, a is very small as compared to unity,
∴ (1 – α) ≈ 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 18a
This is an expression for Ostwald’s dilution law. This shows that the degree of dissociation of a weak acid is directly proportional to the volume of solution containing one mole of acid or inversely proportional to square root of its concentration.

Question 20.
Derive the relationship between degree of dissociation and dissociation constant of a weak base.
OR
Derive the expression of Ostwald’s dilution law in case of a weak base.
Answer:
Expression of Ostwald’s dilution law in case of a weak base : Consider the dissociation of a weak base BOH. Let V dm3 of a solution contain one mole of weak base BOH. Then the concentration of a solution is, C = \(\frac{1}{V}\) mol dm-3. Let α be the degree of dissociation of BOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 19a
Consentration at equilibrium (mol dm-3) \(\frac{(1-\alpha)}{V} \quad \frac{\alpha}{V} \quad \frac{\alpha}{V}\)
Applying the law of mass action to this dissociation equilibrium, we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 20
This is an expression of Ostwald’s dilution law. Thus, the degree of dissociation of a weak base is directly proportional to the square root of the volume of the solution containing one mole of a base or inversely proportional to the square root of its concentration.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Solved Examples 3.4

Question 21.
Solve the following:

(1) At 298 K, 0.01 M formic acid solution is 1.2% dissociated. Calculate the dissociation constant of formic acid.
Solution :
Given : Concentration of HCOOH = C = 0.01 M
Percent dissociation = 1.2
Dissociation constant = Ka = ?
∴ Degree of dissociation = \(\frac{\text { Percent dissociation }}{100}\)
α = \(\frac{1.2}{100}\)
= 1.2 × 10-2
Ka = Cα2
= 0.01 × (1.2 × 10-2)2
= 1.44 × 10-6
Ans. Dissociation constant = Ka = 1.44 × 10-6

(2) The degree of dissociation of ammonium hydroxide is 0.0232 in 0.5 M solution. What will be the dissociation constant of ammonium hydroxide ?
Solution :
Given : Degree of dissociation = α = 0.0232
Concentration of NH4OH = C = 0.5 M
Dissociation constant = Kb = ?
Kb = Cα2
= 0.5 × (0.0232)2
= 2.692 × 10-4
Ans. Dissociation constant of NH4OH
= Kb = 2.692 × 10-4.

(3) Calculate the hydrogen ion concentration in 0.1 M acetic acid solution when the acetic acid is 2% dissociated in the solution.
Solution : The dissociation of acetic acid is represented below :
CH3COOH ⇌ CH3 – COO + H+
Given : Dissociation = 2%, C = 0.1 M
[H3O+] = ?
The concentration of hydrogen ion, [H+], is given by the following formula :
[H3O+] = αC
α = Degree of dissociation = \(\frac{\text { Per cent dissociation }}{100}\)
= \(\frac{2}{100}\) = 0.02
[H3O+] = Hydrogen ion concentration = ?
C = Molar concentration of acetic acid
= 0.1 M = 0.1 mol dm-3
∴ [H3O+] = C × α = 0.1 × 0.02
= 0.002 = 2.0 × 10-3 mol dm-3
Ans. Hydrogen ion concentration = 2.0 × 10-3 mol dm-3.

(4) Calculate the percentage dissociation of 0.01 M NH4OH solution. The Kb for NH4OH is 1.75 × 10-5.
Solution :
Given : Concentration of NH4OH = C = 0.01 M
Dissociation constant of NH4OH
= Kb= 1.75 × 10-5
Percentage dissociation = ?
Kb = Cα2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 21
∴ Per cent dissociation = α × 100
= 4.183 × 10-2 × 100
= 4.183
Ans. Dissociation of NH4OH = 4.183%

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

(5) 0.01 mole of a weak base is dissolved in 8 dm3 of water. The dissociation constant of the base is 4.0 × 10-10. Calculate the degree of dissociation of the base in the solution.
Solution :
Given : V = 8 dm3; n = 0.01 mole; Kb = 4 × 10-10
α = ?
The degree of dissociation and dissociation constant of a weak base are related to each other by the following formula :
Kb = α2C OR α = \(\sqrt{\frac{K_{b}}{C}}\)
Kb = Dissociation constant of the base = 4.0 × 10-10
α = Degree of dissociation of the base = ?
C = Molar concentration of the base
= 0.01 mole in 8 dm3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 22
Ans. Degree of dissociation of the base = 5.656 × 10-4

(6) The dissociation constant of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) is 6.6 × 10-5. Calculate the hydrogen ion concentration of a solution containing 1.22 g of benzoic acid in 2000 mL of water.
Solution :
Given : Ka = 6.6 × 10-5; V = 2000 mL;
W = 1.22 g; [H+] = ?
Molar mass of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) = 122
The concentration of the solution is 1.22 g benzoic acid in 2000 ml (2 dm3) of solution.
1.22 g = \(\frac{1.22}{122}\) = 0.01 mol
∴ Molar concentration of benzoic acid = \(\frac{0.01}{2}\)
= 0.005 mol dm-3
The dissociation constant and degree of dissociation of a weak acid are,
Ka = α2C OR α = \(\sqrt{\frac{K_{\mathrm{a}}}{C}}\)
α = Degree of dissociation of benzoic acid = ?
C = 0.005 mol dm-3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 23
Since benzoic acid is a monobasic acid, [H+] = aC
∴ [H+] = 0.1149 × 0.005
= 5.745 × 10-4 mol dm-3
Ans. Hydrogen ion concentration
= 5.745 × 10-4 mol dm-3

(7) The degree of dissociation of acetic acid in its 0.1 M solution is 0.0132 at 25 °C. Calculate the degree of dissociation in its 0.01 M solution.
Solution :
Given : C = 0.1 M, α = 0.0132, C’ = 0.01 M,
α = 0.0132, α’= ?
Ka = α2C
C = Molar concentration of acetic acid = 0.1 M
α = Degree of dissociation in 0.1 M solution = 0.0132
∴ α = \(\sqrt{\frac{K_{\mathrm{a}}}{C}}\)
If the concentration is C’, α’ = \(\sqrt{\frac{K_{\mathrm{a}}}{C^{\prime}}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 24
Ans. Degree of dissociation in 0.01 M solution = 4.175 × 10-2

Question 22.
Explain autoionisation of water. Derive a relation for ionic product of water.
Answer:
Pure water ionises to a very less extent. The ionisation equilibrium is represented as follows,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{H}_{3} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
The equilibrium constant K for the above equilibrium is represented as,
K = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_{3} \mathrm{O}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\right]^{2}}\)
∴ K × [H2O]2 = [H3O+] × [OH]
Since K and active mass of pure water [H2O] are constant we can write,
K × [H2O] = Kw,
∴ Kw= [H3O+] × [OH]
where Kw is called ionic product of water. At 25 °C,
Kw= 1 × 10-14.

Question 23.
Define ionic product of water.
Answer:
Ionic product of water : It is defined as the product of molar concentrations of hydronium ions (or hydrogen ions) and hydroxyl ions at equilibrium in pure water at constant temperature.
It is represented as,
Kw = [H3O+] × [OH]
At 25 °C, Kw= 1 × 10-14.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 24.
Define the following :
(i) pH (2) pOH. (2 marks)
Ans.
(1) pH : The negative logarithm, to the base 10, of the molar concentration of hydrogen ions, H+ is known as the pH of a solution.
PH = -log10 [H+]
(2) pOH : The negative logarithm, to the base 10, of the molar concentration of hydroxyl ions, OH is known as the pOH of a solution.
pOH = -log10 [OH]

Question 25.
What are approximate concentrations of H3O+ and OH in, (a) pure water or neutral solution, (b) acidic solution and (c) basic solution ? Also mention pH values.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 25

Question 26.
Write a note on pH scale.
Answer:
Most of the chemical reactions and industrial processes are carried out in aqueous solutions, hence there is a need to know concentration of H+ and OH ions in the solution.
Sorensen developed a convenient scale to represent the acidic, basic or neutral nature of the solution.
The pH scale is used to express the concentration of H+ and OH along with pH and pOH of the solution.
According to Sorensen,
pH = -log10 [H+], pOH = -log10 [OH]
pH + pOH = 14.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 26
Acids, basic and neutral solutions.

Question 27.
Solve the following :

(1) At 50 °C the value of ionic product of water is 5.5 × 10-14. What are the concentrations of [H3O+] and OH in a neutral solution at 50°C temperature ?
Solution :
Given : at 50 °C
Ionic product of water = Kw = 5.5 × 10-14
[H3O+] = ? OH = ?
Water at any temperature will be neutral.
Hence, [H3O+] = [OH] = x mol dm-3
[H3O+] × [OH] = Kw
x × x = 5.5 × 10-14
∴ x = 2.345 × 10-7
∴ [H+] = [OH] = 2.345 × 10-7 M
Ans. Concentrations : [H3O+] = [OH]
= 2.345 × 10-7 M

(2) The concentration of H+ ion in lemon juice is 2.5 × 10-3 M. Calculate the OH ion concentration and classify the solution as acidic, basic or neutral.
Solution :
Given : [H3O+] = 2.5 × 10-3 M, Kw = 1 × 10-4
[OH] = ?
By ionic product of water,
[H3O+] × [OH] = Kw
∴ [OH] = \(\frac{K_{\mathrm{w}}}{\left[\mathrm{H}_{3} \mathrm{O}^{+}\right]}\)
= \(\frac{1 \times 10^{-14}}{2.5 \times 10^{-3}}\)
Ans. Concentration of OH
= [OH] = 4 × 10-12 M
Hence the solution of lemon juice is acidic.

(3) Calculate pH and pOH of 0.02 M HCl solution.
Solution :
Given : C = 6.02 M HCl; pH = ? pOH = ?
\(\begin{aligned}
\mathrm{HCl}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow & \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \\
& 0.02 \mathrm{M}
\end{aligned}\)
[H+] = [H3O+] = 0.02 M
PH= -log10 [H3O+]
= -log10 0.02
= -(\(\overline{2} .3010\))
= 2 – 0.3010 = 1.699
pH + pOH = 14
∴ pOH = 14 – pH
= 14 – 1.699
= 12.3010
Ans. pH = 1.6990; pOH = 12.3010.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

(4) The pH of a solution is 6.06. Calculate its [H3O+] ion concentration.
Solution :
Given : pH = 6.06, [H3O+] = ?
PH = -log10 [H3O+]
∴ log10 [H3O+] = -pH
∴ [H3O+] = Antilog – pH
= Antilog – 6.06
= Antilog \(\overline{7} .94\)
= 8.714 × 10-7 M
Ans. [H3O+] = 8.714 × 10-7 M.

(5) Calculate number H+ ions present in 1 mL of 0.01 M H2SO4 solution.
Solution :
Given : C = 0.01 M H2SO4; Y = 1 mL
Number of H+ ions = ?
\(\begin{aligned}
\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow & 2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{SO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-} \\
& 0.01 \times 2 \mathrm{M}
\end{aligned}\)
∵ 1000 mL solution contains 0.02 mol H+
∴ 1 mL solution contains \(\frac{0.02}{1000}\) mol
= 2 × 10-5 mol H+
∴ Number of H+ ions = 2 × 10-5 × 6.022 × 1023
= 1.204 × 1019
Ans. Number of H+ ions = 1.204 × 1019

(6) The pH of a 0.1 M monoacidic base is 11.11. What is the percent dissociation of base ?
Solution :
Given : pH = 11.11; per cent Dissociation of base = ?
c = 0.1 M
\(\begin{gathered}
\mathrm{BOH}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{B}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \\
c(l-\alpha) \quad c \alpha \quad c \alpha
\end{gathered}\)
pH + pOH = 14
∴ pOH = 14 – pH= 14 – 11.11 = 2.89
POH = -log10 [OH]
∴ [OH] = Antilog – pOH
= Antilog – 2.89
= Antilog \(\overline{3} .11\)
= 1.29 × 10-3 M
∵ [OH] = cα
∴ α = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}{c}=\frac{1.29 \times 10^{-3}}{0.1}\) = 1.29 × 10-2
∴ Per cent dissociation = α × 100
= 1.29 × 10-2 × 100 = 1.29
Ans. Per cent dissociation = 1.29.

(7) Calculate the pH of dedmolar solution of sulphuric add aqueous solution. Assuming complete Ionization of sulphuric add.
Solution:
Given : Concentration of H2SO4 = decimolar
= 0.1 M
H2SO4 → 2H+ + \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{-2}\)
∴ [H+] = 2 × 0.1
= 0.2 M
PH = -log10 [H+]
= -log10 0.2 M
= \(-[\overline{1} .3010]\)
= 1 – 0.3010 = 0.6990
Ans. pH of H2SO4 solution = 0.6990.

(8) The pH of a 0.2 M solution of ammonia is 10.78. Calculate (i) OH ions concentration (ii) the degree of dissociation (iii) the dissociation constant.
Solution :
Given: pH = 10.78, C = 0.02 M, [OH] = ? Kb = ?
As NH3 is a base,
pOH = 14 – pH
pH = 10.78
∴ pOH = 14 – 10.78 = 3.22
pOH = -log10 [OH]
∴ 3.22 = -log10 [OH]
∴ -3.22 = log10 [OH]
[OH] = antilog (-3.22)
∴ [OH] = antilog \((\overline{4} .78)\)
= 6.026 × 10-4 M
As NH4OH is a monoacidic base, [OH]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 27

(9) NH4OH is 4.3% ionised at 298 K in 0.01 M solution. Calculate the ionization constant and pH of NH4OH.
Solution :
Given : Per cent dissociation = 4.3,
C = 0.01 M, Kb = ?, pH = ?
The degree of dissociation and dissociation constant of NH4OH are related to each other by the formula :
Kb = α2C
Kb = Dissociation constant of NH4OH = ?
α = Degree of dissociation of NH4OH = 4.3%
= 4.3 × 10-2
C = Molar concentration of NH4OH = 0.01 M
∴ Kb = (4.3 × 10-2)2 × 0.01
= 18.49 × 10-4 × 10-2
∴ Kb = 1.849 × 10-5
Since NH4OH is a monoacidic base,
[OH] = αC
= 4.3 × 10-2 × 0.01
= 4.3 × 10-4 mol dm-3
pOH = -log10 [OH-]
= -log10 4.3 × 10-4
= -[0.6335 – 4] = 3.3665
pH + pOH = 14
pH = 14 – 3.3665 = 10.6335
Ans. Kb = 1.849 × 10-5, pH = 10.6335

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 28.
Define hydrolysis.
Answer:
Hydrolysis : A reaction in which the cations or anions or both the ions of a salt react with water to produce acidity or basicity or sometimes neutrality is called hydrolysis.

Question 29.
What are the types of the salts? Give examples.
Answer:
A salt is formed by the reaction between equivalent amounts of an acid and a base. According to the nature of an acid and a base, there are four types of the salts as follows :
(1) Salt of a strong acid and a strong base :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 28
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 29

(2 ) Salt of a weak acid and a strong base :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 30

(3) Salt of a strong acid and a weak base :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 31

(4) Salt of a weak acid and a weak base : CH3COONH4 :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 32

Question 30.
A salt of strong acid and strong base does not undergo hydrolysis. Explain.
OR
An aqueous solution of sodium chloride is neutral. Explain.
Answer:
(1) Sodium chloride is a salt of strong acid HCl and strong base NaOH.
(2) In water, it reacts forming HCl and NaOH.
(3) As both are strong, they dissociate almost completely to liberate H+ and OH ions, respectively.
(4) H+ and OH ions combine together to form weakly dissociating H2O. As there are no free H+ ions and OH ions, the solution is neutral and the salt does not undergo hydrolysis.
NaCl + H2O ⇌ NaOH + HCl
Ionic equation :
Na+ + Cl +H2O ⇌ Na+ + OH + H+ + Cl
H2O ⇌ H+ + OH
Since the solution contains equal number of H+ and OH ions, it is neutral.
Hence the salt of strong acid and strong base does not undergo hydrolysis.

Question 31.
Explain the hydrolysis of the salt of strong acid and weak base.
OR
A solution of CuSO4 reacts acidic. Explain.
Answer:
(1) Consider a salt of strong acid and weak base, like CuSO4 obtained from strong acid H2SO4 and weak base Cu(OH)2.
(2) When it is dissolved in water it undergoes hydrolysis as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 33
(3) Since [H3O+] > [OH], the solution is acidic in nature.

Question 32.
Explain the hydrolysis of a salt of weak acid and strong base.
OR
A solution of sodium acetate, CH3COONa reacts basic explain.
Answer:
(1) Consider a salt of weak acid and strong base like CH3COONa. In aqueous solution it undergoes hydrolysis as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 34
(2) Since the base NaOH is strong, it dissociates completely while acid CH3COOH being weak dissociates partially.
(3) Hence [OH] > [H3O+] in the solution and the solution reacts basic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 33.
Explain the hydrolysis of the salt of weak acid and weak base.
Answer:
(1) Consider a salt BA of weak acid (HA) and weak base (BOH).
(2) In aqueous solution it undergoes hydrolysis as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 35
(3) The nature of the solution will depend upon relative strength of weak acid and weak base, hence will depend upon their dissociation constants Ka and Kb.

(i) A salt of weak acid and weak base for which Ka > Kb :
Consider hydrolysis of NH4F.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 36
Since Ka (7.2 × 10-4) for HF is greater than Kb (1.8 × 10-5) for NH4OH, the acid dissociates partially more than the base, hence, [H3O+] > [OH] and the solution reacts acidic after hydrolysis.

(ii) A salt of weak acid and weak base for which Ka < Kb :
Consider hydrolysis of NH4CN.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 37
Since Ka (4 × 10-10) for HF is less than Kb (1.8 × 10-5) for NH4OH, the base dissociates more than acid and hence [H3O+] < [OH] and the solution reacts basic after hydrolysis.

(iii) A salt of weak acid and weak base for which Ka = Kb:
Consider hydrolysis of CH3COONH4.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 38
Since Ka = Kb, the weak acid CH3COOH and weak base NH4OH dissociate to the same extent, hence, [H3O+] = [OH] and the solution reacts neutral after hydrolysis.

Question 34.
Define buffer solution.
OR
What is buffer solution?
Answer:
Buffer solution : It is defined as a solution which resists the change in pH even after the addition of a small amount of a strong acid or a strong base or on dilution or on addition of water.

Question 35.
What are the types of buffer solutions ?
Answer:
These are two types of buffer solutions :
(A) Acidic buffer solution : it is a solution containing a weak acid e.g. (CH3COOH) and its salt of a strong base. e.g. (CH3COONa).
pH of an acidic buffer is given by following Henderson Hasselbalch equation,
pH = \(\mathrm{p} K_{\mathrm{a}}+\log _{10} \frac{[\text { Salt }]}{[\text { Acid }]}\)
where pKa = -log10 Ka
and Ka is the dissociation constant of weak acid.

(B) Basic buffer solutions : It is a solution containing a weak base (e.g. NH4OH) and its salt of strong acid, (e.g. NH4Cl).
pOH of a basic buffer is given by Henderson Hassebalch equation,
pOH = \(\mathrm{p} K_{\mathrm{b}}+\log _{10} \frac{[\text { Salt }]}{[\text { Base }]}\)
where pKb = -log10 Kb
and Kb is the dissociation constant of a weak base.

Question 36.
Explain a buffer action of an acidic buffer.
Answer:
Mechanism of action of an acidic buffer :
(1) An acidic buffer is a mixture of a weak acid and its salt with a strong base. The weak acid dissociates feebly, but the salt dissociates almost completely. Moreover, due to the common ions, largely supplied by the salt, dissociation of the weak acid is further suppressed.
(CH3COOH + CH3COONa) :
CH3COONa(aq) → CH3COO(aq) + \(\mathrm{Na}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) (Complete)

(2) When a small quantity of strong acid (H+) is added to this mixture, hydrogen ions combine with acetate ions to form undissociated acetic acid. Thus, addition of an acid does not change the pH of the buffer.
\(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{CH}_{3}-\mathrm{COOH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}\)
This removal of added H+ is called reserved basicity.

(3) When a small quantity of a strong base (OH) is added, the hydroxide ions react with the acid producing the corresponding anions and water. Thus, the concentrations of H+ and OH in the solution do not change and the pH remains constant.
\(\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})}\)
This removal of added OH is called reserved acidity.

Question 37.
Explain a buffer action of a basic buffer.
Answer:
Mechanism of action of a basic buffer :
(1) A basic buffer solution is a solution containing a weak base and its salt with a strong acid. The weak base dissociates feebly, but the salt dissociates completely. Moreover, due to the presence of the common ion, largely supplied by the salt, the dissociation of the base is further suppressed. (NH4OH + NH4Cl) :
\(\mathrm{NH}_{4} \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \rightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (Complete)

(2) When a small quantity of a strong acid is added to the solution, the hydrogen ions combine with the base producing corresponding cations and water. Thus, the addition of an acid does not change the pH of the buffer.
\(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NH}_{4} \mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{NH}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})}\)
This removal of added H+ is called reserved basicity.

(3) When a small quantity of a strong base is added, the hydroxide ions combine with \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\) ions to form undissociated NH4OH. As a result, the hydrogen or hydroxyl ion concentration does not change. Thus, the pH of the solution does not change.
\(\mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{NH}_{4} \mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}\)
This removal of added OH is called reserved acidity.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 38.
What are properties of a buffer solution ?
OR
What are the advantages of a buffer solution ?
Answer:
Properties (or advantages) of a buffer solution :

  1. The pH of a buffer solution is maintained appreciably constant.
  2. By addition of a small amount of an acid or a base pH does not change.
  3. On dilution with water, pH of the solution doesn’t change.

Question 39.
What are the applications of a buffer solution ?
Answer:
Buffer solutions have many applications as follows :
(1) In a biochemical system : Blood in our body has pH 7.36 – 7.42 due to (\(\mathrm{HCO}_{3}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{CO}_{3}\)) and little change of 0.2 pH unit may be fatal. For example, saline solution used in intravenous injection contains a buffer solution maintaining pH of the blood in the required range.

(2) Agriculture : The properties of soil depend upon its pH. The salts present in soil such as phosphates, carbonates, bicarbonates and organic acids impart definite pH to the soil. Depending on pH the fertilizers are selected.

(3) Industry : In many industries, buffer solutions are used to carry out chemical processes very effectively, such as the industries of paper, dye, paints, drugs, ink, etc.

(4) Medicines : Many medicines particularly in the liquid state have a good stability and optimum activity at a definite pH, for which buffer solutions are used. For example penciline preparations are carried out in the presence of a buffer of sodium citrate. A buffer solution of magnesium citrate is prepared by adding citric acid to Mg(OH)2.

(5) Analytical chemistry : In a qualitative analysis, the precipitation of groups, the chemical tests for detection of ions, etc. are carried out at a definite pH. For example, precipitation of cations of IIIA are carried in the presence of a basic buffer of pH 8 – 10 obtained by using NH4OH and NH4Cl.

Solved Examples 3.8

Question 40.
Solve the following :

(1) Calculate the pH of a buffer solution containing 0.1 M CH3COOH and 0.05 M CH3COONa. Dissociation constant of CH3COOH is 1.8 × 10-5 at 25 °C.
Solution :
Given : [CH3COOH] = 0.1 M,
[CH3COONa] = 0.05 M; Ka = 1.8 × 10-5; pH = ?
pKa = -log10 Ka
= -log10 1.8 × 10-5
= -(\(\overline{5} \cdot 2553\))
= 5 – 0.2553
= 4.7447
pH = \(\mathrm{p} K_{\mathrm{a}}+\log _{10} \frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COONa}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}\right]}\)
= \(4.7447+\log _{10} \frac{0.05}{0.1}\)
= 4.7447 + \((\overline{1} .6990)\)
= 4.7447 + (-1 + 0.6990)
= 4.7447 – 0.3010
= 4.4437
Ans. pH = 4.4437

(2) A buffer solution contains 0.3 M NH4OH and 0.4 M NH4Cl. If Kb for NH4OH is 1.8 × 10-5, calculate pH of the solution.
Solution :
Given : [NH4OH] = 0.3 M; [NH4Cl] = 0.4 M
Kb =1.8 × 10-5; pH = ?
pKb = -log10 Kb
= -log10 1.8 × 10-5
= \(-(\overline{5} .2553)\)
= 4.7447
pOH = \(\mathrm{p} K_{\mathrm{b}}+\log _{10} \frac{[\text { Salt }]}{[\mathrm{Base}]}\)
= \(4.7447+\log _{10} \frac{0.4}{0.3}\)
= 4.7447 + log10 1.333
= 4.7447 + 0.1248
= 4.8695
∵ pH + pOH = 14
∴ pH = 14 – pOH
= 14 – 4.8695
= 9.1305
Ans. pH = 9.1305.

(3) 0.2 dm3 acidic buffer solution contains 1.18 g acetic acid and 2.46 g sodium acetate. If Ka for acetic acid is 1.8 × 10-5 at 25 °C, find pH of the solution.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 39
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 40

(4) A basic buffer solution contains 0.3 M NH4OH and 0.2 M (NH4)2SO4. If Kb for NH4OH at a certain temperature is 2 × 10-5, what is the pH of the solution ?
Solution :
Given : [NH4OH] = 0.3 M
[NH4+ ] = 2 × 0.2 = 0.4 M
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 41
pH + pOH = 14
∴ pH = 14 – pOH = 14 – 4.8239 = 9.1761
Ans. pH = 9.1761

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 41.
Define solubility. How is it expressed ?
Answer:
Solubility : It is defined as the maximum amount of a substance in moles, that can be dissolved at constant temperature to give one litre of its saturated solution.
It is expressed in moles per litre or moles per decimeter cube of a saturated solution at given temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 42

Question 42.
Derive a relationship between solubility and solubility product.
Answer:
Consider a saturated solution of a spraingly soluble electrolyte (or salt) AxBy at a given constant temperature. Let S mol dm-3 be the solubility of AxBy.
A following heterogeneous ionic equilibrium exists.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 43
By a law of mass action, the equilibrium constant K will be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 44
Since the active mass (concentration) of pure solid, AxBy(s) is treated as constant, [AxBy(s)] = K’
K × [AxBy(s)] = K × K’ = K(sp)
Therefore, Ksp = [Ay+]x × [Bx-]y
where Ksp is called solubility product of AxBy.
At equilibrium the concentrations are,
[Ay+] = xS mol dm-3
[Bx-]y = yS mol dm-3
∴ Ksp = [Ay+]x × [Bx-]y
= (xS)x × (yS)y
∴ Ksp = xx.yy.(S)x+y ……….(1)
Hence solubility S is given by,
S = \(\left(\frac{K_{(\mathrm{sp})}}{x^{x} \cdot y^{y}}\right)^{\frac{1}{x+y}} \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{dm}^{-3}\) …………(2)
The above equations, (1) and (2) give the relationship between solubility and solubility product.
Here x and y represent number of cations and anions respectively from the electrolyte.

Question 43.
Write expression for solubility and solubility product of following sparingly soluble salts : (1) AgBr (2) PbI2 (3) Al(OH)3
Answer:
In general, for a sparingly soluble salt AxBy,
Ksp = xx.yy.(S)x+y
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 45
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 46

Question 44.
What is ionic product?
Answer:
Ionic product (IP) : It is defined as the product of concentrations in mol dm-3 of ions of an electrolyte in the solution and denoted by IP.
In a saturated solution,
IP = Ksp where Ksp is the solubility product of the electrolyte.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Solved Examples 3.9

Question 45.
Solve the following :

(1) The solubility of AgBr in water is 1.28 × 10-5 mol/dm3 at 298 K. Calculate the solubility product of AgBr at the same temperature.
Solution :
Given : S = 1.28 × 10-5 mol dm-3; Ksp = ?
AgBr dissociates as,
\(\mathrm{AgBr} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
Ksp = [Ag+] [Br]
As the solubility of AgBr in water is 1.28 × 10-5 moles/dm3,
[Ag+] = [Br] = 1.28 × 10-5 mol dm3
∴ Ksp = [1.28 × 10-5] [1.28 × 10-5]
= 1.638 × 10-10
Ans. Solubility product of AgBr = 1.638 × 10-10.

(2) The solubility of lead sulphate is 3.03 × 10-5 kg/dm3. Calculate its solubility product. [Molecular mass of PbSO4 = 303]
Solution :
Given : S = 3.03 × 10-5 kg dm-3, Ksp = ?
Lead sulphate dissociates as
\(\begin{aligned}
&\mathrm{PbSO}_{4} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{Pb}^{2+}+\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-} \\
&\text { (solid) } \quad \text { (aq) } \quad \text { (aq) }
\end{aligned}\)
Molecular weight of PbSO4 = 303
= 303 × 10-3 kg
The solubility of PbSO4 is 3.03 × 10-5 kg/dm3.
Solubility in mol dm-3
Weight of PbSO4 per dm3 Molecular weight 3.03 × 10-5
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 47

(3) The solubility product of AgBr is 3.3 × 10-12 at 298 K. What concentration of Br ion is needed to precipitate AgBr from solution of 0.01 M Ag+?
Solution :
Given : Ksp = 3.3 × 10; [Ag+] = 1 × 10-2 M;
[Br] = ?
AgBr dissociates as
\(\begin{aligned}
&\mathrm{AgBr} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{Ag}^{+}+\mathrm{Br}^{-} \\
&\text {(solid) } \quad \text { (aq) } \quad \text { (aq) }
\end{aligned}\)
Ksp = [Ag+] [Br]
Ksp = Solubility product = 3.3 × 10-12
[Ag+] = Concentration of Ag+
= 0.01 = 1.0 × 10-2 M
[Br] = Concentration of Br = ?
∴ 3.3 × 10-12 = 1.0 × 10-2 × [Br]
∴ [Br] = 3.3 × 10-10 mol/dm3
Ans. The concentration of Br required for precipitation of AgBr should be greater than 3.3 × 10-10 mol/dm3.

(4) The solubility product of magnesium hydroxide is 1.4 × 10-11. Calculate the solubility of magnesium hydroxide.
Solution :
Given : Ksp =1.4 × 10-11; S = ?
Magnesium hydroxide dissociates as shown below :
Mg(OH)2 ⇌ Mg2+ + 2(OH)
Ksp = [Mg2+] [OH]2
Let the solubility of Mg(OH)2 be S mol dm-3.
∴ [Mg2+] = Concentration of Mg2+ ions
= S mol dm-3
∴ [OH] = Concentration of OH ions
= 2S mol dm-3
∴ Ksp = S × (25)2 = 4S3
Ksp = 1.4 × 10-11
∴ 1.4 × 10-11 =4S3
1.4 × 10-11 = 4S3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 48
S = 1.518 × 10-4 mol dm-3
Ans. Solubility of Mg(OH)2
= 1.518 × 10-4 mol dm-3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

(5) The solubility of silver chloride is 1.562 × 10-10 mol dm-3 at 298 K. Find its solubility in g dm-3 at the same temperature.
Solution :
Given :
Solubility of AgCl = S = 1.562 × 10-10 mol dm-3
Solubility of AgCl in g dm-3 = ?
Molar mass of AgCl = M = 143.5 g mol-1
Solubility in gram per dm3
= solubility in mol dm-3 × molar mass
= 1.562 × 10-10 × 143.5
= 2.241 × 10-5 g dm-3
Ans. Solubility of AgCl = 2.241 × 10-8 g dm-3

(6) The solubility of PbSO4 in water is 0.038 g dm-3 at room temperature. Calculate its solubility and solubility product at the same temperature. (Atomic weights : Pb = 207.3, S = 32, O = 16)
Solution :
Given : Solubility of PbSO4 = 0.038 g/dm-3
Molar mass of PbSO4 = 303.3 g mol-1
Solubility in mol dm-3 = ?
Ksp =?
Solubility in mol dm-3 = \(\frac{0.038}{303.3}\)
= 1.253 × 10-4 mol dm-3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 49
Ans. S = 1.253 × 10-4 mol dm-3;
Ksp = 1.57 × 10-8

(7) The solubility product of PbS at 298 K is 4.2 × 10-28, The concentration of Pb++ ion is 0.001 M. Calculate S2- ion concentration at which PbS just gets precipitated.
Solution :
Given :
Solubility product of PbS = Ksp = 4.2 × 10-28
Concentration of Pb++ = [Pb++] = 0.001 M
Concentration of S = [S] = ?
For PbS,
\(\mathrm{PbS}_{(\mathrm{s})} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{Pb}^{++}+\mathrm{S}^{–}\)
∴ Ksp = [Pb++] × [S]
∴ [S–] = \(\frac{K_{\mathrm{sp}}}{\left[\mathrm{Pb}^{++}\right]}\)
= \(\frac{4.2 \times 10^{-28}}{0.001}\)
= 4.2 × 10-25 M
To precipitate Pb++ as PbS, ionic product must be greater than 4.2 × 10-28.
Hence, [S] > 4.2 × 10-25 M.
Ans. Concentration of S required > 4.2 × 10-25 M

(8) At 298 K, the solubility of silver sulphate is 1.85 × 10-2 mol dm-3. Calculate the solubility product of silver sulphate.
Solution :
Given : Silver sulphate dissociates as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria 50
Solubility of Ag2SO4 = 1.85 × 10-2 mol dm-3
Ksp = Solubility product of Ag2SO4 = ?
[Ag+] = Concentration of Ag+ ion
= 2 × 1.85 × 10-2 = 3.70 × 10-2 mol dm-3
[latex]\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}[/latex] = Concentration of \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\)
= 1.85 × 10-2 mol dm-3
∴ Ksp = (3.70 × 10-2)2 × (1.85 × 10-2)
= 13.69 × 10-4 × 1.85 × 10-2
= 25.33 × 10-6
= 2.533 × 10-5
Ans. Solubility product of Ag2SO4
= 2.533 × 10-5

Question 46.
What is common ion?
Answer:
Common ion : An ion common to two electrolytes is called common ion. This is generally applicable to a mixture of a strong and a weak electrolyte. For example, a solution containing weak electrolyte CH3COOH and strong electrolyte salt CH3COONa.
CH3COONa → CH3COO + Na+;
CH3COOH ⇌ CH3COO + H+
Hence CH3COOH and CH3COONa have a common ion CH3COO.

Question 47.
Define the term common ion effect.
Answer:
Common ion effect : The suppression of the degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte by the addition of a strong electrolyte having an ion in common with the weak electrolyte is called common ion effect. For example, CH3COOH and CH3COONa have common ion CH3COO.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

Question 48.
Explain common ion effect with suitable example.
Answer:
A weak electrolyte dissociates partially in aqueous solution to produce cations and anions. Equilibrium exists between ions thus formed and the undissociated molecules.
BA ⇌ B+ +A
For such an equilibrium, the dissociation constant K is defined as
K = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{B}^{+}\right] \times\left[\mathrm{A}^{-}\right]}{[\mathrm{BA}]}\)
K is constant for the weak electrolyte at a given temperature.
Now, if another electrolyte BC or DA is added to the solution BA, having a common ion either B+ or A, then the concentration of either B+ or A is increased. However, as K is always constant, the increase in the concentration of any one of the ions shifts the equilibrium to left. In other words, the dissociation of BA is suppressed. This is called common ion effect. For example, the dissociation of a weak acid CH3COOH is suppressed by adding CH3COONa having common ion CH3COO.
CH3COOH ⇌ CH3COO + H+
CH3COONa → CH3COO + Na+

Question 49.
Explain the common ion effect on dissociation of a weak acid.
Answer:
(1) Consider the dissociation or ionisation of a weak acid, CH3COOH in its solution.
\(\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\)
The dissociation constant Ka for CH3COOH will be,
Ka = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}^{-}\right] \times\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}\right]}\)
Ka is constant for CH3COOH at constant temperature.

(2) If a strong electrolyte like salt CH3COONa is added to the solution of CH3COOH, then on dissociation it gives a common ion CH3COO.
CH3COONa → CH3COO + Na+

(3) Due to common ion CH3COO, overall concentration of CH3COO in the solution is increased, which increases the ratio,
\(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}^{-}\right] \times\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}\right]}\). In order to keep this ratio constant, the concentration of H+ is decreased, by shifting the equilibrium to the left hand side according to Le Chatelier’s principle.

(4) Thus the ionisation of a weak acid is suppressed by a common ion.

Question 50.
Explain the effect of common ion on the dissociation of weak base.
Answer:
(1) Consider the dissociation or ionisation of a weak base, NH4OH in its dilute solution. \(\mathrm{NH}_{4} \mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{NH}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
The dissociation constant Kb for NH4OH will be,
\(K_{\mathrm{b}}=\frac{\left[\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\right] \times\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{NH}_{4} \mathrm{OH}\right]}\)

(2) If a strong electrolyte like salt NH4Cl is added to the solution of NH4OH, then it gives common ion \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\).
NH4Cl → \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\) + Cl

(3) Due to common ion \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\), overall concentration of \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\) is increased, which increases the ratio \(\left[\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\right]\) × [OH]/[NH4OH],
In order to keep this ratio constant, the equilibrium is shifted to the left hand side which satisfies Le Chatelier’s principle.

(4) Thus the ionisation of a weak base is suppressed by a common ion.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 51.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. According to Lowry-Bronsted concept, base is a substance which acts as –
(a) a proton donor
(b) an electron donor
(c) a proton acceptor
(d) an electron acceptor
Answer:
(c) a proton acceptor

2. BF3 is a
(a) Lewis acid
(b) Lewis base
(c) amphoteric compound
(d) Electrolyte only
Answer:
(a) Lewis acid

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

3. Which of the following is a conjugate acid-base pair ?
(a) HCl, NaOH
(b) KCN, HCN
(c) NH4Cl, NH4OH
(d) H2SO4, \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\)
Answer:
(d) H2SO4, \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\)

4. The conjugate acid of \(\mathrm{NH}_{2}^{-}\) is
(a) NH3
(b) NH2OH
(c) \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\)
(d) N2H4
Answer:
(a) NH3

5. Which of the following molecules is not a Lewis base?
(a) H2O
(b) BF3
(c) NH3
(d) CO
Answer:
(b) BF3

6. In the following reaction
\(\mathrm{HC}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{PO}_{4}^{3-} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{HPO}_{4}^{2-}+\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{CO}_{4}^{2-}\) Which of two are Lowry-Bronsted bases ?
(a) \(\mathrm{HC}_{2} \mathrm{C}_{4}^{-} \text {and } \mathrm{PO}_{4}^{3-}\)
(b) \(\mathrm{HPO}_{4}^{2-} \text { and } \mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{4}^{2-}\)
(c) \(\mathrm{HC}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{4}^{-} \text {and } \mathrm{HPO}_{4}^{2-}\)
(d) \(\mathrm{PO}_{4}^{3-} \text { and } \mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{4}^{2-}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\mathrm{PO}_{4}^{3-} \text { and } \mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{4}^{2-}\)

7. According to the Arrhenius theory,
(a) an acid is a proton donor
(b) an acid is an electron pair acceptor
(c) a hydrogen ion exists freely in an aqueous solution
(d) a hydrogen ion is always hydrated to form a hydrogen ion
Answer:
(c) a hydrogen ion exists freely in an aqueous solution

8. The species which will behave both as a conjugate acid and base is
(a) NH4OH
(b) \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{–}\)
(c) \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\)
(d) H2SO4
Answer:
(c) \(\mathrm{HSO}_{4}^{-}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

9. According to the Lewis theory, an acid is
(a) nucleophile
(b) an electrophile
(c) a proton acceptor
(d) an electron donor
Answer:
(b) an electrophile

10. If a 0.1 M solution of HCN is 0.01% dissociated, the dissociation constant for HCN is,
(a) 10-3
(b) 10+3
(c) 10-7
(d) 10-9
Answer:
(d) 10-9

11. The pH of decimolar solution KOH is
(a) 1
(b) 4
(c) 10
(d) 13
Answer:
(d) 13

12. Ostwald’s dilution law is applicable in case of dilute solution of
(a) HCl
(b) H2SO4
(c) NaOH
(d) CH3COOH
Answer:
(d) CH3COOH

13. The degree of dissociation of a 0.1 M monobasic acid is 0.4%. Its dissociation constant is
(a) 0.4 × 10-4
(b) 4.0 × 10-4
(c) 1.6 × 10-6
(d) 0.8 × 10-5
Answer:
(c) 1.6 × 10-6

14. The ionic product of water will increase, if
(a) Pressure is decreased
(b) H+ ions are added
(c) OH ions are added
(d) Temperature is increased
Answer:
(d) Temperature is increased

15. The [OH] for a weak base of dissociation constant Kb and concentration C is nearly equal to
(a) \(\sqrt{\frac{K_{\mathrm{b}}}{C}}\)
(b) KbC
(c) \(\sqrt{K_{\mathrm{b}} C}\)
(d) \(\frac{C}{K_{\mathrm{b}}}\)
Answer:
(c) \(\sqrt{K_{\mathrm{b}} C}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

16. The [H+] for a weak acid of dissociation constant Ka and concentration C is nearly equal to
(a) \(\sqrt{\frac{K_{\mathrm{a}}}{C}}\)
(b) \(\sqrt{K_{\mathrm{a}} C}\)
(c) \(\frac{K_{\mathrm{a}}}{\sqrt{c}}\)
(d) \(\frac{c}{K_{\mathrm{a}}}\)
Answer:
(b) \(\sqrt{K_{\mathrm{a}} C}\)

17. Which of the following solution with same concentration will have highest pH
(a) Al(OH)3
(b) K2CO3
(c) NH4OH
(d) NaOH
Answer:
(d) NaOH

18. 10 ml of 0.1 M H2SO4 is mixed with 20 ml of 0.1 M KOH, the pH of resulting solution will be
(a) 0
(b) 7
(c) 2
(d) 9
Answer:
(b) 7

19. The gastric juice in our stomach contains enough hydrochloric acid to make the hydrogen ion concentration 0.01 mol/dm3. The pH of gastric juice is-
(a) 0.01
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 14
Answer:
(c) 2

20. If the hydrogen ion concentration of an acid is decreased ten times, its pH will be
(a) increased by one
(b) decreased by one
(c) remains unchanged
(d) increase by 10
Answer:
(a) increased by one

21. Which of the following metal sulphide is precipitated in an acidic medium ?
(a) NiS
(b) CoS
(c) CuS
(d) MnS
Answer:
(c) CuS

22. The relationship between the solubility and solubility product for silver carbonate is
(a) Ksp = s2
(b) \(\sqrt{K_{\mathrm{sp}}}\) = 4s2
(c) Ksp = 27S4
(d) Ksp = 4s3
Answer:
(d) Ksp = 4s3

23. If ‘S’ is solubility in mol dm-3 and Ksp is solubility product of BA2 type of salt, then relation between them is
(a) S = \(\sqrt{K_{\mathrm{sp}}}\)
(b) Ksp = 4S3
(c) Ksp = S3
(d) S = Ksp
Answer:
(b) Ksp = 4S3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

24. The addition of solid sodium carbonate to pure water results in
(a) an increase in H+ ion concentration
(b) an increase in pH
(c) no change in pH
(d) a decrease in OH concentration
Answer:
(b) an increase in pH

25. Which of the following salt, when dissolved in water will hydrolyse ?
(a) NaCl
(b) NH4Cl
(c) KCl
(d) Na2SO4
Answer:
(b) NH4Cl

26. A solution of blue vitriol is acidic in nature because
(a) CuSO4 reacts with water
(b) Cu2+ ions reacts with water
(c) SO42- ions reacts with water
(d) CuSO4 removes OH ions from water
Answer:
(a) CuSO4 reacts with water

27. What is the nature of the solution of salt FeCl3 ?
(a) Acidic
(b) Basic
(c) Neutral
(d) Amphoteric
Answer:
(a) Acidic

28. Which of the following salts does not hydrolyse in water ?
(a) Sodium acetate
(b) Sodium carbonate
(c) Sodium nitrate
(d) Sodium cyanide
Answer:
(c) Sodium nitrate

29. An aqueous solution of magnesium chloride changes blue litmus red due to
(a) the formation of Cl ions
(b) the formation Mg2+ ions
(c) reaction of Cl ions with water
(d) hydrolysis of the salt
Answer:
(d) hydrolysis of the salt

30. An aqueous solution of which of the following salts is basic ?
(a) CH3COONa
(b) NH4Cl
(c) KNO3
(d) CuSO4
Answer:
(a) CH3COONa

31. The number of moles of hydroxide ions (OH) produced from 2 moles of Na2CO3 is
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(d) 4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

32. The POH value for solution is 4, its hydrogen ion concentration will be
(a) 10-4
(b) 10-10
(c) 1010
(d) 104
Answer:
(b) 10-10

33. If an acid is diluted
(a) pH increases
(b) pH decreases
(c) no change occurs
(d) can vary depending on an acid
Answer:
(a) pH increases

34. pH of a solution is 13. H+ ions present in 1 cm3 of the solution is
(a) 6.023 × 1010
(b) 6.023 × 107
(c) 6.023 × 10-10
(d) 6.023 × 10-7
Answer:
(b) 6.023 × 107

35. pH of blood is maintained constant by mechanism of
(a) common ion effect
(b) buffer
(c) solubility
(d) all of these
Answer:
(b) buffer

36. The pH of 0.05 M solution of dibasic acid is
(a) +1
(b) -1
(c) +2
(d) -2
Answer:
(a) +1

37. The pH of a 0.63% nitric acid solution is (Equivalent weight of nitric acid is 63)
(a) 6
(b) 7
(c) 1
(d) 9
Answer:
(c) 1

38. 100 ml of 0.01 M solution of NaOH is diluted to 1 dm3. What is the pH of the dilute solution?
(a) 12
(b) 11
(c) 2
(d) 3
Answer:
(b) 11

39. If the H+ ion concentration in a solution is 0.01 M, the pOH of the solution is
(a) 12
(b) 10-10
(c) 2
(d) 14
Answer:
(a) 12

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

40. If the pH value of a solution is zero, the solution is
(a) a strong acid
(b) a very weak acid
(c) neutral
(d) a base
Answer:
(a) a strong acid

41. The pH of a solution is 5, when the hydroxyl ion concentration is
(a) 10-5 mol/dm3
(b) 10-7 mol/dm3
(c) 10-9 mol/dm3
(d) 10-14 mol/dm3
Answer:
(c) 10-9 mol/dm3

42. The pH of human blood in a normal person is approximately
(a) 4.7
(b) 6.04
(c) 7.40
(d) 8.74
Answer:
(c) 7.40

43. If molarity of NaOH is 3.162 × 10-3 M, its pH is
(a) 8.5
(b) 9.5
(c) 10.5
(d) 11.5
Answer:
(d) 11.5

44. The common ion effect is based on
(a) Sorensen’s principle
(b) Le Chatelier’s principle
(c) Heisenberg’s principle
(d) Freundlich’s principle
Answer:
(b) Le Chatelier’s principle

45. The ion that cannot be precipitated by both HCl and H2S is
(a) Pb2+
(b) Cu2+
(c) Ag+
(d) Ca2+
Answer:
(d) Ca2+

46. The correct representation for solubility product of SnS2 is
(a) [Sn4+] [S2-]2
(b) [Sn4+] [S2-]
(c) [Sn4+] [2S2-]
(d) [Sn4+] [2S2-]
Answer:
(a) [Sn4+] [S2-]2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

47. The solubility product of a salt BA at room temperature is 1.21 × 10-6. Its molar solubility is
(a) 1.21 × 10-3 M
(b) 1.1 × 10-4 M
(c) 1.1 × 10-3 M
(d) 1.21 × 10-2 M
Answer:
(c) 1.1 × 10-3 M

48. Among the following hydroxides, the one which has the lowest value of solubility product at temperature 298 K is,
(a) Mg(OH)2
(b) Ca(OH)2
(c) Ba(OH)2
(d) Be(OH)2
Answer:
(d) Be(OH)2

49. A solution becomes unsaturated when
(a) ionic product = solubility product
(b) ionic product < solubility product
(c) ionic product > solubility product
(d) ionic product ≥ solubility product
Answer:
(b) ionic product < solubility product

50. The solubility product of Fe(OH)3 is
(a) [latex]\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{e}}^{2+}[/latex] [OH]3
(b) [latex]\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{e}}^{3+}[/latex] [OH]2
(c) [latex]\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{e}}^{3+}[/latex] [OH]3
(d) [latex]\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{e}}^{3+}[/latex]3 [OH]3
Answer:
(c) [latex]\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{e}}^{3+}[/latex] [OH]3

51. The solubility product of PbS in 4.2 × 10-28 at 300 K. The sulphide ions concentration required to precipitate PbS from a solution containing 0.001 M of lead ion is
(a) ≥ 2.1 × 10-14 mol/dm3
(b) ≥ 4.2 × 10-14 mol/dm3
(c) ≥ 4.2 × 10-25 mol/dm3
(d) ≤ 4.2 × 10-28 mol/dm3
Answer:
(c) ≥ 4.2 × 10-25 mol/dm3

52. 0.025 M CH3COOH is dissociated 9.5%. Hence the pH of the solution is
(a) 2.6244
(b) 3.128
(c) 2.988
(d) 2.267
Answer:
(a) 2.6244

53. 0.1 M HCN is dissociated 0.01%. The dissociation constant of HCN is
(a) 1.1 × 10-6
(b) 1 × 10-8
(c) 1 × 10-9
(d) 1 × 10-7
Answer:
(c) 1 × 10-9

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Ionic Equilibria

54. The solubility of product of a sparingly soluble salt AB2 is 3.2 × 10-11. If solubility in mol dm-3 is
(a) 4 × 10-4
(b) 3.2 × 10-4
(c) 1 × 10-5
(d) 2 × 10-4
Answer:
(d) 2 × 10-4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 1.
What is solution?
Answer:
The solution is a homogeneous mixture of two or more components or pure substances. When the size of particles of the components is of the order of 10-10 m, then the solution is called a true solution. E.g. An aqueous solution of sugar.

Question 2.
Explain : (1) Homogeneous solution
(2) Heterogeneous solution.
Answer:
(1) Homogeneous solution : A solution in which solute and solvent form uniform homogeneous one phase due to attraction between their molecules/particles is called homogeneous solution.
E.g. A solution of NaCl or sugar.

(2) Heterogeneous solution : A solution consisting of two or more phases is called a heterogeneous solution. E.g. A colloidal solution of starch.

Question 3.
Define : (1) Solvent (2) Solute.
Answer:
(1) Solvent : The component in which solution formation takes place and which constitutes larger proportion of a solution is called solvent. For example, in an aqueous solution of sugar, water is the solvent.

(2) Solute : In a solution the component which dissolves and constitutes smaller proportion of a solution is called a solute. For example, in a sugar solution, sugar is the solute.

Question 4.
What are the different types of solutions?
Answer:
A solution consists of a solvent and a solute. Since the physical states of a solvent and a solute may be gaseous, liquid or a solid, there are nine types of solutions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 1

Question 5.
Mention the solvent and solute in the following :
(1) Smoke
(2) Moisture
(3) Alloy
(4) Soda water.
Answer:

SubstanceSolventSolute
1. SmokeGasSolid
2. MoistureGasLiquid
3. AlloySolidSolid
4. Soda waterLiquidGas

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 6.
What is a saturated solution?
Answer:
A solution which contains the maximum amount of dissolved solute and further the solute can’t be dissolved is called a saturated solution.

There exists a dynamic equilibrium which is represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 2

Question 7.
What is a supersaturated solution?
Answer:
A solution containing a solute more than that required to form a saturated solution at equilibrium is called a supersaturated solution.

When a tiny crystal of a solute is added to supersaturated solution, the excess solute separates out and forms saturated solution.

Question 8.
What is solubility of a solute ?
Answer:
Solubility : It is defined as amount of a solute present per unit volume in its saturated solution at a specific temperature.
It is expressed in mol L-1 or mol dm-3.

Question 9.
Explain the factors on which the solubility of a substance (solute) depends.
Answer:
The extent of dissolution of a substance (solute) depends upon the following factors :
(1) Nature of a solute : A solute may be crystalline, amorphous, ionic or covalent. Hence accordingly its tendency to dissolve changes. The substances having similar intermolecular forces tend to dissolve in each other.

(2) Nature of solvents : Solvents are classified as polar and nonpolar. Polar solutes dissolve in polar solvents. For example, ionic compounds dissolve in polar solvent like water. A solvent other than water is called a nonaqueous solvent. For example, C6H6, CCl4, etc. Solutions in these solvents are called nonaqueous solutions.
The solvent may be a gas, a liquid or a solid.

(3) Amount of a solvent : More amount of a solvent, will dissolve more quantity of the solute.

(4) Temperature : Depending on the nature of a solvent and a solute the solubility changes with termperature. The effect depends on the heat of solution, hydration energy, etc. Generally as the temperature increases, solubility of solid increases and that of gases decreases.

(5) Pressure :

  • Pressure has no effect on the solubilities of solids and liquids since they are incompressible.
  • The effect of pressure is important only for solutions which involve gases as solutes. With the increase in pressure and decrease in temperature, the solubility of gases increases.

Question 10.
Explain with the help of Le Chatelier’s principle the effect of temperature on solubility.
Answer:

  1. The effect of temperature on solubility depends on enthalpy of solution.
  2. For example, dissolution of KCl in water is an endothermic process since heat is absorbed during dissolution. In according to Le Chatelier’s principle by increasing temperature the solubility of KCl increases.
  3. Dissolution of CaCl2, Li2SO4, H2O in water is an exothermic process since heat is evolved during dissolution. In this, according to Le Chatelier’s principle by increasing the temperature the solubility decreases.

Question 11.
Explain the solubility of gases in liquids.
Answer:

  • Gases are soluble in water and other liquids and their solubility depends upon the nature of the gas.
  • Non-polar gases like O2, have less solubility in polar solvents.
  • Polar gases like CO2, NH3, HCl, etc. are more soluble in polar solvent like water. CO2 forms H2CO3, while NH3 forms NH4OH in aqueous solutions.
  • The solubility of gases in liquids increases with the increase in pressure and the decrease in temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 12.
Why does the solubility of a gas decrease with increase in temperature ?
OR
How does solubility of a gas in water varies with temperature ?
Answer:

  • The gases are soluble in water and other liquids.
  • According to Charles’ law, the volume of a given mass of a gas increases with the increase in temperature at constant pressure.
  • Hence, the volume of the dissolved gas increases with the increase in temperature.
  • This enormous increase in volume of the gases cannot be accommodated by the solvent molecules, hence excess of the gases escape out in the form of bubbles.

Therefore, the solubility of gases in liquids decreases with temperature.

Question 13.
Explain the effect of pressure on the solubility of the gases.
OR
State and explain Henry’s law.
Answer:
(1) Since the gases are compressible, their solubility in the liquids is influenced by external pressure of the gas. The solubility of gases increases with the increase in pressure.

(2) Henry’s law : It states that the solubility of a gas. in a liquid at constant temperature is proportional to the pressure of the gas above the solution.
(i) If S is the solubility of a gas in mol dm-3 at a pressure P and constant temperature then by Henry’s law,
S ∝ P or S = KH × P
where KH is called Henry’s law constant.
(ii) If P = 1 atm, then S = KH.
(iii) If several gases are present, then the solubility of any gas in the mixture is proportional to its partial pressure at given temperature.

(3) Illustration of Henry’s law : In case of aerated or carbonated drink beverage, the bottle is filled by dissolving CO2 gas at high pressure and then sealed.
Above the liquid surface there is air and undissolved CO2. Due to high pressure, the amount of dissolved CO2 is large.

When the cap of the aerated bottle is removed, the pressure on the solution is lowered, hence excess of CO2 and air escape out in the form of effervescence. Thus by decreasing the pressure, solubility of CO2 is decreased.

Question 14.
What are the exceptions to Henry’s law? Why ?
Answer:
(1) The gases like NH3 and CO2 do not obey Henry’s law.
(2) This is because, these gases react with water,
\(\mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{4 \text { (aq) }}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\text {aq })}^{-}\)
CO2(g) + H2O(l) → H2CO3(aq)
(3) Due to reactions of the gases like NH3, CO2(g), they have higher solubilities than expected by Henry’s law.

Question 15.
Oxygen gas is slightly soluble in water but it is highly soluble in blood. Explain.
Answer:
The vital constituent of blood, namely haemoglobin reacts with oxygen increasing the solubility of oxygen.
Haemoglobin + 4O2(g) → Haemoglobin O8
This oxygenated blood is circulated to the various parts of body, for the supply of oxygen.

Question 16.
Obtain the units of Henry’s law constant.
Answer:
By Henry’s law, S = KH × P, where S is solubility of the gas in mol dm-3, P is the pressure of the gas in atmosphere (or in bar) and KH is Henry’s law constant.
∴ KH = \(\frac{S^{\left(\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{dm}^{-3}\right)}}{P_{(\mathrm{atm})}}\) mol dm-3 atm-1 or mol dm-3 bar-1
Hence the units of Henry’s law constant KH are mol dm-3atm-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Solved Examples 2.4

Question 17.
Solve the following :
(1) For a gas, the Henry’s law constant is 1.25 × 10-3 mol dm-3 atm-1 at 25 °C. Calculate the solubility of the given gas at 2.5 atm and 25 °C.
Solution :
Given : Henry’s law constant = KH
= 1.25 × 10-3 mol dm-3 atm-1
Pressure of the gas = P = 2.5 atm
Solubility of the gas = S = ?
By Henry’s law
S = KH × P
= 1.25 × 10-3 mol dm-3 atm-1 × 2.5 atm
= 3.125 × 10-3 mol dm-3
Ans. Solubility of gas = 3.125 × 10-3 mol dm-3

(2) The solubility of dissolved oxygen to 27 °C is 2.6 × 10-3 mol dm-3 at 2 atm. Find its solubility at 8.4 atm and 27 °C.
Solution :
Given : Solubility of O2
= S1 = 2.6 × 10-3 mol dm-3
Initial pressure of O2 = P1 = 2 atm
Final pressure of O2 = P2 = 8.4 atm
Solubility of O2 = S2 = ?
(i) By Henry’s law,
S1 = KH × P1
∴ Henry’s law constant KH is,
KH = \(\frac{S_{1}}{P_{1}}=\frac{2.6 \times 10^{-3}}{2}\)
= 1.3 × 10-3 mol dm-3 atm-1
(ii) Now, S2 = KH × P2 = 1.3 × 10-3 × 8.4
= 10.92 × 10-3
= 1.092 × 10-2 mol dm-3
Ans. Solubility of O2 = 1.092 × 10-2 mol dm-3

(3) Henry’s law constant for the solubility of methane in benzene is 4.27 × 10-5 mm-1 Hg mold dm-3 at constant temperature. Calculate the solubility of methane at 760 mm Hg pressure at same temperature.
Solution :
Given : Henry’s law constant = KH
= 4.27 × 10-5mm-1 Hg mol dm-3
Pressure of the gas = P = 760 mm Hg
KH = 4.27 × 10-5 mm-1 mol dm-3
= 4.27 × 10-5 × 760 atm-1 mol dm-3
= 3245 × 10-5 atm-1 mol dm-3
= 3.245 × 10-2 atm-1 mol dm-3
P = 760 mm = \(\frac{760}{760}\) atm = 1 atm
By Henry’s law,
S = KH × P = 3.245 × 10-2 atm-1 mol dm-3 × 1 atm
= 3.245 × 10-2 mol dm-3
Ans. Solubility of methane = 3.245 × 10-2 mol dm-3

(4) The solubility of ethane at 25 °C is 0.92 × 10-3 g dm-3 at 1000 mm Hg pressure. Calculate Henry’s law constant.
Solution :
Given : Solubility of ethane
= S = 0.92 × 10-5 g dm-3
Pressure of ethane = P = 1000 mm Hg
Molar mass of ethane (C2H6) = 30 g mol-1
Henry’s law constant = KH = ?
S = 0.92 × 10-3 g dm-3
= \(\frac{0.92}{30}\) × 10-3
= 3.067 × 10-5 mol dm-3
P = 1000 mm = \(\frac{1000}{760}\)atm = 1.316 atm
By Henry’s law,
S = KH × P
∴ KH = \(\frac{S}{P}=\frac{3.067 \times 10^{-5}}{1.316}\)
= 2.33 × 10-5 mol dm-3 atm-1
Ans. Henry’s law constant = KH
= 2.33 × 10-5 mol dm-3 atm-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(5) The solubility of nitrogen at 30 °C is 2.5 × 10-3 g dm-3 at 760 mm pressure. What will be its solubility in mol dm-3 at 20,000 mm and same temperature?
Solution :
Given : Initial solubility of N2 = S1 =2.5 × 10-3 g dm-3
Initial pressure = P1 = 760 mm
Final pressure = P2 = 20,000 mm
Final solubility = S2 in mol dm-3 = ?
Molar mass of N2 gas = 28 g mol-1
S1 = 2.33 × 10-5 mol dm-3
= \(\frac{2.5 \times 10^{-3}}{28}\) mol dm-3
= 8.93 × 10-5 mol dm-3
P1 = \(\frac{760}{760}\) = 1 atm
P2 = \(\frac{20,000}{760}\) = 26.32 atm
By Henry’s law,
S1 = KH × P1
∴ KH = \(\frac{S_{1}}{P_{1}}=\frac{8.93 \times 10^{-5}}{1}\)
= 8.93 × 10-5 mol dm-3 atm-1
S2 = KH × P2 = 8.93 × 10-5 × 26.32
= 2.35 × 10-3 mol dm-3
Ans. Solubility of N2 gas
= 2.35 × 10-3 mol dm-3.

[Alternative method:
S1 = KHP1 and S2 = KHP2
∴ \(\frac{S_{2}}{S_{1}}=\frac{K_{\mathrm{H}} P_{2}}{K_{\mathrm{H}} P_{1}}=\frac{P_{2}}{P_{1}}\)
∴ S2 = S1 × \(\frac{P_{2}}{P_{1}}\) = 8.93 × 10-5 × \(\frac{20,000}{760}\)
= 2.35 × 10-3 mol dm-3]

Question 18.
Marine life like fish prefers to stay at lower level in water. Explain.
OR
Explain, why do aquatic animals prefer to stay at lower level of water during summer?
Answer:

  1. The solubility of oxygen gas decreases with the increase in temperature.
  2. In sea or lake water, the temperature of upper level is higher than the lower level.
  3. Therefore the dissolved oxygen content in water is more at lower level than at higher level required for the marine life.

Hence marine life like fish prefers to stay at lower level than upper level of water.

Question 19.
State and explain Raoult’s law.
Answer:
Statement of Raoult’s law : The law states that, at constant temperature, the partial vapour pressure of any volatile component of a solution is equal to the product of vapour pressure of the pure component and the mole fraction of that component in the solution.

Let P0 and P be the respective vapour pressures of a pure volatile component and a solution. If x1 is the mole fraction of a solvent then by Raoult’s law,
P = x1 × P0.

Explanation : Consider a solution containing two volatile components A and B having mole fractions x1 and x2 respectively.
Let \(P_{1}^{0}\) and \(P_{2}^{0}\) be the vapour pressures of pure components (or liquids) A and B respectively.
Then by Raoult’s law, vapour pressure of component A = P1 = X1 × \(P_{1}^{0}\), vapour pressure of component B = P2 = x2 × \(P_{2}^{0}\).
Here P1 and P2 represent partial vapour pressures of the two liquid components in the solution.
Hence the total vapour pressure, PT of the solution will be,
PT = P1 + P2
∴ PT = x1\(P_{1}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
∵ x1 + x2 = 1
∴ x1 = 1 – x2
∴ PT = (1 – x2)\(P_{1}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
= \(P_{1}^{0}\) – x2\(P_{1}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
= (\(P_{2}^{0}\) – \(P_{1}^{0}\))x2 + \(P_{1}^{0}\)
With the help of above equation, the vapour pressures of solutions having different concentrations (or mole fractions) can be calculated.

Question 20.
Explain the variation of vapour pressure with mole fraction of a solute in a liquid mixture.
Answer:
Consider a liquid mixture of two liquid components A and B having vapour pressures \(P_{1}^{0}\) and \(P_{2}^{0}\) and mole fractions x1 and x2 respectively.
By Raoult’s law, the vapour pressures P1 and P2 are,
P1 = x1\(P_{1}^{0}\) and P2 = x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
The vapour pressure of the solution is,
PT = P1 +P2 = x1\(P_{1}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 3
∴ PT = (\(P_{2}^{0}\) – \(P_{1}^{0}\))x2 + \(P_{1}^{0}\)
The plot of PT versus x2 is a straight line. The plots of P1 versus x1, and P2 versus x2 are straight lines passing through the origin.
When x1 = 1, x2 = 0, PT = \(P_{1}^{0}\) and when x1 = 0, x2 = 1, PT = \(P_{2}^{0}\) as shown by lines I and II in Fig. 2.2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 21.
Explain the composition of vapour phase above a liquid mixture.
Answer:
Consider a liquid mixture of two liquids A and B having vapour pressures \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) and \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) and mole fractions x1 and x2 respectively in the liquid phase.
By Raoult’s law, the vapour pressures of two liquids will be,
PA = x1\(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) and PB = x2\(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\)
The total vapour pressure of this liquid mixture is,
PT = PA + PB
PT = x1\(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\)
The vapour above liquid surface contains A and B. If y1 and y2 are the mole fractions of A and B components respectively in the vapour phase, then by Dalton’s law of partial pressures,
PA = y1PT and PB = y2PT
and total vapour pressure is,
PT = y1PT + y2PT.

Question 22.
What are ideal and nonideal solutions ?
Answer:

  • Ideal solutions : These are solutions which obey Raoult’s law over an entire range of concentrations at constant temperature.
  • Nonideal solutions : These are solutions which do not obey Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentrations.

Question 23.
What are the characteristics of ideal solutions ?
Answer:

  • The ideal solutions obey Raoult’s law over entire range of concentrations at constant temperature.
  • In the formation of an ideal solution, heat is neither evolved nor absorbed and enthalpy change for mixing is zero, i.e. Δmix H = 0.
  • In the formation of an ideal solution, there is no volume change on mixing two liquid components and the volume of solution is equal to the sum of volumes of two liquid components. Δmix V = 0
  • In the ideal solution, solvent-solvent, solute-solute and solvent-solute interactions are comparable.
  • The vapour pressure of an ideal solution lies between vapour pressures of two pure components.

Question 24.
Give an example of an ideal solution.
Answer:
A liquid mixture of benzene and toluene which have nearly identical physical properties and inter molecular forces forms an ideal solution.

Question 25.
What are the characteristics of nonideal solutions.
Answer:

  • Nonideal solutions do not obey Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentrations.
  • The vapour pressures of these solutions may be higher or lower than ideal solutions.
  • These solutions exhibit two types of deviations from Raoult’s law namely (a) positive deviation and (b) negative deviation.
  • These solutions give azeotropic mixtures.

Question 26.
Explain solutions with positive deviations from Raoult’s law.
Answer:
(i) A solution or a liquid mixture which has higher vapour pressure than theoretically calculated by Raoult’s law or higher than those of pure components is called a nonideal solution with positive deviation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 4
(ii) In these solutions, solute-solvent intermolecular attractions are weaker than those between solvent-solvent and solute-solute interactions.
(iii) For example, solutions of acetone and ethanol, carbon disulphide and acetone, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 27.
Explain solutions with negative deviations from Raoult’s law.
Answer:
(1) A solution or a liquid mixture which has lower vapour pressure than theoretically calculated by Raoult’s law or lower than those of pure components is called a nonideal solution with negative deviation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 5
(2) In these solutions, the intermolecular interactions between solvent and solute molecules are stronger than solvent-solvent or solute-solute interactions.
(3) For example, solutions of phenol and aniline, chloroform and acetone, etc.

Solved Examples 2.5

Question 28.
Solve the following :

(1) The vapour pressures of two liquids A and B are 400 mm Hg and 600 mm Hg respectively at 47 °C. A solution is prepared by dissolving 10 g of A of molar mass 60 g mol-1 in 80 g of B of molar mass 40 g mol-1. Find the vapour pressure of the solution.
Solution :
Given : \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 400 mm Hg; \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 650 mm Hg.
WA = 10 g and WB = 80 g.
MA = 60 g mol-1; MB = 40 g mol-1, Psoln = ?
nA = \(\frac{W_{\mathrm{A}}}{M_{\mathrm{A}}}=\frac{10}{60}\) = 0.1667 mol
nB = \(\frac{W_{\mathrm{B}}}{M_{\mathrm{B}}}=\frac{80}{40}\) = 2 mol
Total number of moles = n = nA + nB
= 0.1667 + 2
= 2.1667 mol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 6
= 0.07693 × 400 + 0.9230 × 600
= 30.772 + 553.8
= 584.572 mm Hg
Ans. Vapour pressure of solution
= Psoln = 584.572 mm Hg

(2) 2.5 mol of a liquid A is mixed with 4.5 mol of liquid B at 25 °C. If the vapour pressures of A and B at 25 °C are 160 mm Hg and 230 mm Hg respectively, calculate the vapour pressure of the liquid mixture.
Solution :
Given : nA = 2.5 mol; nB = 4.5 mol,
\(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 160 mm Hg; \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 230 mm Hg, Psoln = ?
Total number of moles = n = nA + nB
= 2.5 + 4.5
= 7.0 mol
Mole fraction of A = xA = \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{A}}}{n}=\frac{2.5}{7}\) = 0.3571
Mole fraction of B = 1 – xA = 1 – 0.3571
= 0.6429
\(P_{\text {soln }}=x_{\mathrm{A}} P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}+x_{\mathrm{B}} P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\)
= 0.3571 × 160 + 0.6429 × 230
= 57.136 + 147.9
= 205 mm Hg
Ans. Psoln = 205 mm Hg

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(3) The vapour pressures of pure liquids A and B are 400 mm Hg and 650 mm Hg respectively at 330 K. Find the composition of liquid and vapour if total vapour pressure of solution is 600 mm Hg.
Solution :
Given : \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 400 mm Hg; \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 650 mm Hg,
PT = 600 mm Hg, T = 330 K; xA = ? xB = ?, y1 = ? y2 = ?
(x is mole fraction in liquid phase while y is mole fraction in vapour phase.)
PT = (\(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) – \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\))xB + \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\)
600 = (650 – 400)xB + 400
= 250xB + 400
∴ xB = \(\frac{600-400}{250}\) = 0.8
∵ xA + xB = 1
∴ xA = 1 – xB = 1 – 0.8 = 0.2
The composition of A and B in liquid mixture is, xA = 0.2 and xB = 0.8.
If P1 and P2 are vapour pressures (or partial pressures) of A and B in vapour phase then by Raoult’s law,
P1 = xA × \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 0.2 × 400 = 80 mm Hg
P2 = xB × \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 0.8 × 650 = 520 mm Hg
If y1 and y2 are mole fractions of A and B respectively in vapour phase then, by Dalton’s law,
P1 = y1PT
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 7
(or y2 = 1 – y1 = 1 – 0.1333 = 0.8667)
Ans. Composition of liquid : xA = 0.2 and xB = 0.8
Composition of vapour: yA = 0.1333 and yB = 0.8667

(4) A mixture of two liquids A and B have vapour pressures 3.4 × 104 Nm-2 and 5.2 × 10 Nm-2. If the mole fractions of A is 0.85, find the vapour pressure of the solution.
Solution:
Given : Vapour pressure of pure liquid A
= \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 3.4 × 104 Nm-2
Vapour pressure of pure liquid B
= \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 5.2 × 104 Nm-2
Mole fraction of A = xA = 0.85
Mole fraction of B = xB = 1 – xA
= 1 – 0.85
= 0.15
The vapour solution is given by
\(P_{\text {soln }}=X_{A} P_{A}^{0}+X_{B} P_{B}^{0}\)
= 0.85 × 3.4 × 10 + 0.15 × 5.2 × 104
=2.89 × 104 + 0.78 × 104
=(2.89 + 0.78) × 104
Psoln = 3.67 × 104 Nm-2
Ans. Vapour pressure of a solution = 3.67 × 104 Nm-2

Question 29.
Define the term colligative property. Give examples.
Answer:
(1) Colligative Property : The property of a solution which depends on the total number of particles of the solute (molecules, ions) present in the solution and does not depend on the nature or chemical composition of solute particles is called colligative property of the solution.

(2) Examples of colligative properties : (a) lowering or relative lowering of vapour pressure of a solution (b) elevation in the boiling point (c) depression in the freezing point (d) osmotic pressure.

Question 30.
Explain and define the term vapour pressure of a liquid.
OR
What is vapour pressure of a liquid?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 8
(1) If a volatile liquid is placed in an open vessel, the liquid molecules have a tendency to escape in a gaseous state forming vapour and diffuse into surroundings. Hence evaporation takes place continuously, and no equilibrium is attained.

(2) If a liquid is placed in a closed vessel, the vapour molecules get accumulated on its surface. These vapour molecules are in continuous random motion. They collide with each other, with walls of a container and surface of the liquid, and return to the liquid state. This reverse phenomenon is called condensation.

(3) After some time, rates of evaporation and condensation become equal and an equilibrium is established between liquid and vapour phases. At this stage the vapour exerts a constant pressure called vapour pressure on liquid surface at constant temperature.

(4) Vapour pressure : The pressure exerted by the vapour of a liquid (or solid) when it is in equilibrium with the liquid (or solid) phase at a constant temperature is called the vapour pressure of the liquid (or solid).

(5) The vapour pressure of a liquid increases with the increase in temperature.

Question 31.
Explain the following terms :
(1) Relative vapour pressure of a solution
(2) Lowering of vapour pressure of a solution
(3) Relative lowering of vapour pressure.
Answer:
(1) Relative vapour pressure of a solution : If Po is the vapour pressure of a pure liquid (solvent) and P is the vapour pressure of a solution after adding a nonvolatile solute, then, relative vapour pressure = \(\frac{P}{P_{0}}\).

(2) Lowering of vapour pressure of a solution :
When a nonvolatile solute is added to a pure solvent, the surface area is covered by the solute molecule decreasing the rate of evaporation, hence its vapour pressure decreases. This decrease in vapour pressure is called lowering of vapour pressure.
If P0 is the vapour pressure of a pure solvent (liquid) and P is the vapour pressure of the solution, where P < P0, then, (P0 – P) is the lowering of the vapour pressure.

(3) Relative lowering of vapour pressure : If P0 and P are the respective vapour pressures of a pure liquid (solvent) and the solution containing a non-volatile solute then P < P0. Hence, P0 – P represents the lowering of the vapour pressure due to addition of a nonvolatile solute.
∴ Relative lowering of vapour pressure = \(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}=\frac{\Delta P}{P_{0}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 32.
State and explain Raoult’s law for solutions of nonvolatile solutes.
Answer:
(a) Statement of Raoult’s law : The law states that the vapour pressure of a solvent over the solution of a nonvolatile solute is equal to the vapour pressure of the pure solvent multiplied by mole fraction of the solvent at constant temperature.

(b) Explanation : Let P0 and P be the vapour pressures of a pure solvent and a solution respectively. If x1 is the mole fraction of the solvent then Raoult’s law can be represented as,
P = x1P0
For a binary solution containing one solute, if x1 and x2 are mole fractions of a solvent and a solute respectively then,
x1 + x2 = 1
∴ x1 = 1 – x2
∴ P = x1P0
= (1 – x2) P0
= P0 – x2P0
= P0 – P = x2P0
∴ P0 – P = x2P0
∴ x2 = \(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}\)
P0 – P = ΔP is the lowering of vapour pressure
∴ x2 = \(\frac{\Delta P}{P_{0}}\)
In the equation, P0 – P/P0 is called relative lowering of vapour pressure.
Hence Raoult’s law can also be stated as the relative lowering of vapour pressure is equal to mole fraction of the solute.

Question 33.
Show that relative lowering of vapour pressure is a colligative property.
Answer:
Consider a binary solution containing a nonvolatile solute. If P0 and P are vapour pressures of a pure solvent and the solution respectively then, Lowering of vapour pressure = ΔP = P0 – P
Relative lowering of vapour pressure = \(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}\)
By Raoult’s law,
\(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}=x_{2}\)
where x2 is mole fraction of the solute. Therefore the relative lowering of vapour pressure is a colligative property.

Question 34.
Explain the variation of vapour pressure with mole fraction of a solvent in solution.
OR
Explain the variation of vapour pressure with the concentration of a solution.
Answer:
The vapour pressure of a pure solvent decreases when a nonvolatile solute is dissolved in it. Consider a pure solvent with vapour pressure P0 and mole fraction x1. For a solution containing a non-volatile solute, if x1 and x2 are the mole fractions of a solvent and a solute respectively, then x1 + x2 = 1 and x1 < 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 9
By Raoult’s law, P = x1 × P0. As the mole fraction of a solvent in the solution increases the vapour pressure increases as shown in the above figure 2.5. When x1 becomes equal to 1, the vapour pressure becomes P0, i.e. the vapour pressure of a pure solvent.

If at any mole fraction of a solvent, the vapour of the solution is P, then the lowering of vapour pressure will be, ΔP = P0 – P.

Question 35.
Derive a relation between relative lowering of vapour pressure and molar mass of non-volatile solute.
Answer:
Consider a solution in which W1 gram of a solvent of molar mass (or molecular weight) M2 contains W2 gram of a solute of molar mass M2. Then
number of moles of a solvent = n1 = \(\frac{W_{1}}{M_{1}}\)
Number of moles of a solute = n2 = \(\frac{W_{2}}{M_{2}}\)
∴ Total number of moles = n = n1 + n2
Mole fraction of the solvent = x1 = \(\frac{n_{1}}{n}\)
Mole fraction of the solute = x2 = \(\frac{n_{2}}{n}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 10
In the case of an ideal solution which is a dilute solution, the concentration and the number of moles of the solute are very low, i.e. n2 << n1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 11
If P0 and P are the vapour pressures of a pure solvent and a solution respectively, then relative lowering of vapour pressure = \(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}\)
By Raoult’s law
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 12
Hence by measuring the vapour pressure of a pure solvent and a solution, the molar mass of the dissolved nonvolatile substances can be determined.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Solved Examples 2.6 – 2.7

Question 36.
Solve the following :

(1) The vapour pressure of a pure liquid at 298 K is 4 × 104 Nm-2. When a nonvolatile solute is dissolved the vapour pressure becomes 3.65 × 104 Nm-2. Calculate (A) relative vapour pressure, (B) lowering of vapour pressure and (C) relative lowering of vapour pressure.
Solution :
Given : P0 = 4 × 104 Nm-2
P = 3.65 × 104 Nm-2
(A) Relative vapour pressure = \(\frac{P}{P_{0}}\)
= \(\frac{3.65 \times 10^{4}}{4 \times 10^{4}}\)
= 0.9125

(B) Lowering of vapour pressure = ΔP = P0 – P
= 4 × 104 – 3.65 × 104
= (4 – 3.65) × 104
= 0.35 × 104 Nm-2 = 3.5 × 103 Nm-2

(C) Relative lowering of vapour pressure is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 13
Ans. (A) 0.9125 (B) 3.5 × 103 Nm-2 (C) 0.0875

(2) A pure liquid has vapour pressure 5.2 × 104 Pa at 298 K. When a solute is dissolved, the mole fraction of it is 0.02 in the solution. Find the vapour pressure of the solution.
Solution :
Given : P0 = 5.2 × 104 Pa
x2 = 0.02
P = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 14
Ans. Vapour pressure of the solution
= 5.096 × 104 Pa

(3) The vapour pressure of pure benzene is 640 mm of Hg. 2.175 × 10-3 kg of nonvolatile solute is added to 39 gram of benzene, the vapour pressure of solution is 600 mm of Hg. Calculate molar mass of solute (C = 12, H = 1).
Solution :
Given : P0 = 640 mm Hg
W1 = 39 g benzene = 39 × 10-3 kg
W2 = 2.175 × 10-3 kg
P = 600 mm Hg
M1 = 78 × 10-3 kg, M2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 15
Ans. Molar mass of a solute = 69.6 × 10-3 kg mol-1

(4) In an experiment, 18.04 g of mannitol were dissolved in 100 g of water. The vapour pressure of water was lowered by 0.309 mm Hg from 17.535 mm Hg. Calculate the molar mass of mannitol.
Solution :
Given : Mass of a solute (mannitol)
= W2 = 18.04 g
Mass of a solvent (water) = W1 = 100 g
Vapour pressure of a solvent (water)
= P0
= 17.535 mm Hg
Lowering of vapour pressure = ΔP = 0.309 mm Hg
Molar mass of H2O = M1 = 18 g mol-1
Molar mass of solute (mannitol) = M2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 16
Ans. Molar mass of mannitol = 184.3 g mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(5) The vapour pressure of 2.1% solution of a non-electrolyte in water at 100 °C is 755 mm Hg. Calculate the molar mass of the solute.
Solution :
Given : At 100 °C, vapour pressure of water = P0 = 760 mm Hg
Vapour pressure of the solution = P = 755 mm Hg
Since the solution is 2.1 % by mass,
Mass of solute (nonelectrolyte) = W2 = 2.1 g
Mass of water = W1 = 100 – 2.1 = 97.9 g
Molar mass of water = M1 = 18 g mol-1
Molar mass of nonelectrolyte = M2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 17
Ans. Molar mass of nonelectrolyte = 58.69 g mol-1

(6) Calculate the mass of a nonvolatile solute (molar mass 40 × 10-3 kg/mol) which is dissolved in 114 × 10-3 kg octane to reduce its vapour pressure to 80%.
Solution :
Given : Molar mass of solute = M2 =40 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Mass of solvent (octane) = W1 = 114 × 10-3 kg
If vapour pressure of octane = P0 = 100
Vapour pressure of solution = P = 80
Molar mass of octane (C8H18) = 114 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Mass of solute = W2 = ?
In this solution, since the vapour pressure is decreased by greater extent, 100 – 80 = 20% the solution must be concentrated and number of moles of solute must be large so that n1 + n2 ≠ n1
Hence Raoult’s law must be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 18
∴ Mass of solute dissolved = W
= moles × molar mass = 0.25 × 40 × 10-3
= 0.01 kg
Ans. Mass of solute dissolved = 0.01 kg

(7) The vapour pressure of water is 16.8 mm Hg at a certain temperature. If the vapour pressure of the solution is 16.78 mm, find the molality of the solution.
Solution :
Given : P0 = 16.8 mm Hg; P = 16.78 mm Hg
Molar mass of water = M1 = 18 g mol-1
Molality of the solution = m = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 19
Ans. Molality of the solution = 0.66 m

Question 37.
Explain the effect of temperature on the vapour pressure of a liquid.
Answer:
The vapour pressure of a liquid is the pressure of the vapour in equilibrium with the liquid at a given temperature. The evaporation of a liquid requires thermal energy. Hence, as temperature rises, the vapour pressure rises until it becomes equal to the external pressure, generally the atmospheric pressure, 101.3 kNm-2 (1 atm). This temperature is called the normal boiling point of the liquid.

Question 38.
What is boiling point of liquid?
OR
Define boiling point.
Answer:
The boiling point of a liquid is defined as the temperature at which the vapour pressure of the liquid becomes equal to the external pressure, i.e., the atmospheric pressure (1 atm), e.g., the boiling point of water at 1 atm is 373 K. m

Question 39.
Explain the elevation in the boiling point of a solution.
Answer:
The elevation in the boiling point of a solution is defined as the difference between the boiling points of the solution and the pure solvents at a given pressure, e.g. If T0 and T are the boiling points of a pure solvent and a solution, then the elevation in boiling point, ΔTb = T – T0. It is a colligative property.

Question 40.
What are the units of molal elevation constant?
Answer:
Boiling point elevation, ΔTb is given by,
ΔTb = Kb × m
where m is molality in mol kg-1 and Kb is molal elevation constant or abullioscopic constant.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 20
∴ Kb has units K kg mol-1 (or °C kg mol-1)
Therefore, molal elevation constant is the elevation in boiling point produced by 1 molal solution of a nonvolatile solute.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 41.
Derive the relation between molar mass of the solute and boiling point elevation.
Answer:
The boiling point elevation, ΔTb of a solution is directly proportional to molality (m) of the solution.
∴ ΔTb ∝ m
ΔTb = Kb m
where Kb is a proportionality constant
If m = 1 molal, then
ΔTb = Kb
where Kb is called molal elevation constant.
The molality of the solution is given by,
Number of moles of the solute, m = \(\frac{\text { Number of moles of the solute }}{\text { Weight of the solvent in } \mathrm{kg}}\)
Let W1 = Weight (in gram) of a solvent,
W2 = Weight (in gram) of a solute
M2 = Molecular weight of the solute
Then the molality (m) of the solution is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 21
If the weights and molecular weight are expressed in kg, then,
\(\Delta T_{\mathrm{b}}=K_{\mathrm{b}} \times \frac{W_{2}}{W_{1} M_{2}}\)

Question 42.
Define molal elevation constant (Ebullioscopic constant)? Does it depend on the nature of a solute ? What are its units ?
Answer:
(1) Molal elevation constant (Ebullioscopic constant) : It is defined as the elevation in boiling point, produced by dissolving one mole of a solute in 1 kg (or 1000 gram) of a solvent (i.e. 1 molal solution).
The elevation in the boiling point,
ΔTb is given by ΔTb = Kb × m
where Kb is molal elevation constant and m is molality of the solution.
∴ When m = 1, ΔTb = Kb
(2) Kb depends only on the nature of the solvent.
(3) Kb does not depend on the nature of the solute.
(4) It does not depend on concentration of the solution.
(5) The units of molal elevation constant are :
(A) K kg mol-1 and (B) Km-1.

Solved Examples 2.8

Question 43.
Solve the following :

(1) Calculate the (i) elevation in the boiling point and (ii) the boiling point of 0.05 m aqueous solution of glucose. (Kb = 0.52 Km-1)
Solution :
Given : Concentration of the solution = m = 0.05 m
Molal elevation constant = Kb = 1.86 K kg mol-1
Boiling point of pure water = T0 = 373 K
Elevation in the boiling point = ΔTb = ?
Boiling point of solution = Tb = ?

(i) ΔTb = Kb × m
= 0.52 × 0.05
= 0.026K

(ii) The elevation in the boiling point is given by,
ΔTb = Tb – T0
∴ Boiling point of a solution,
Tb = T0 + ΔTb
= 373 + 0.026
= 373.026 K
Ans. ΔTb = 0.026 K, Tb = 373.026 K

(2) 0.18 molal aqueous solution of a substance boils at 373.25 K. Calculate the molal elevation constant of water. (Boiling point of water is 373.15 K)
Solution :
Given : Concentration of solution = m = 0.18 m
Boiling point of water = T0 = 373.15 K
Boiling of the solution = Tb = 373.25
Molal elevation constant = Kb = ?
Elevation in boiling point = ΔTb
= Tb – T0
= 373.25 – 373.15
= 0.1 K
ΔTb = Kb × m
∴ Kb = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{b}}}{m}=\frac{0.1}{0.18}\) = 0.5556 K kg mol-1
Ans. Molal elevation constant of water
= 0.5556 K kg mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(3) The boiling point of benzene is 353.23 K. When 1.80 gram of non-volatile solute was dissolved in 90 gram of benzene, the boiling point is raised to 354.11 K. Calculate the molar mass of solute. [Kb for benzene = 2.53 K kg mol-1]
Solution :
Given : \(T_{b}^{0}\) = 353.23 K; Tb = 354.11 K
W1 = 90 g; W2 = 1.8 g; Kb = 2.53 K kg mol-1
Molar mass = M2 = ?
ΔTb = Tb – \(T_{b}^{0}\) = 354.11 – 353.23 = 0.88 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 22
Ans. Molar mass = M2 = 57.5 g mol-1

(4) Boiling point of a solvent is 80.2°C. When 0.419 g of the solute of molar mass 252.4 g mol-1 is dissolved in 75 g of the above solvent, the boiling point of the solution is found to be 80.256 °C. Find the molal elevation constant.
Solution :
Given : T0 = (273 + 80.2) K
Tb = 273 + 80.256 (K)
W1 = 75g
W2 = 0.419 g
M2 = 252.4 g mol-1
Kb = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0
= (273 + 80.256) – (273 + 80.2)
= 0.056 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 23
Ans. Kb = 2.53 K kg mol-1

(5) 3.795 g of sulphur is dissolved in 100 g of CS2. This solution boils at 319.81 K. What is the molecular formula of sulphur in solution? Theboiling point of CS2 is 319.45 K.
(Given that Kb for CS2 =2.42 K kg mol-1 and atomic mass of S = 32.)
Solution :
Given : W2 = 3.795 g; W1 = 100 g CS2
Tb = 319.81 K; T0 = 319.45 K
Kb = 2.42 K kg mol-1 M2 = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0 = 319.81 – 319.45 = 0.36 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 24
Number of S atoms in molecule = \(\frac{255.1}{32}\)
= 7.972
≅ 8
Ans. Formula of sulphur in CS2 solution = S8

(6) Calculate the mass in grams of an impurity of molar mass 100 g mol-1 which would be required to raise the boiling point of 50 g of chloroform by 0.30°C. (Kb for chloroform = 3.63 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : M2 = 100 g mol-1
W1 = 50 g chloroform
W2 = ?
ΔTb = 0.30°C.
Kb = 3.63 K kg mol-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 25
Ans. Weight of impurity = 0.4132 g

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(7) A solution containing 0.5126 g of naphthalene (molar mass = 128.17 g mol-1) in 50.0 g of CCl4 gives a boiling point elevation of 0.402 °C. While a solution of 0.6216 g of unknown solute in the same mass of the solvent gives a boiling point elevation of 0.647 °C. Find the molar mass of the unknown solute. (Kb for CCl4 = 5.03 K kg mol-1 of solvent)
Solution:
Given : For naphthalene solution :
W2 = 0.5126 g
W1 = 50 g
M2 = 128.17 g mol-1
Kb = 5.03 K kg mol-1
ΔTb = 0.402°C
For unknown solute :
W’1 = 50g
W’2 = 0.6216 g
ΔT’b = 0.647°C
M’2 = ?
For the solution of unknown substance,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 26
Ans. Molecular weight of unknown substance = 96.65 g mol-1

(8) A solution containing 0.73 g of camphor (molar mass 152 g mol-1) in 36.8 g of acetone (boiling point 56.3°C) boils at 56.55°C. A solution of 0.564 g of unknown compound in the same weight of acetone boils at 56.46°C. Calculate the molar mass of the unknown compound.
Solution:
Given : Mass of solute = W2 = 0.73 g camphor
Mass of solvent = W1 = 36.8 g
Molar Mass of solute = M2 = 152 g mol-1
Boiling point of acetone = T0 = (273 + 56.3) K
Mass of unknown solute = W’2 = 0.564 g
Mass of solvent = W’1 = 36.8 g
Boiling point of solution of camphor = Tb = (273 + 56.55) K
Boiling point solution of unknown compound = T’b = (273 + 56.46) K
Molar mass of unknown compound = M’2 = ?

For camphor solution,
∴ ΔTb = Tb – T0
= (273 + 56.55) – (273 + 56.3)
= 0.25 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 27
For a solution of unknown compound
ΔT’b = ΔT’b – T0
= (273 + 56.46) – (273 + 56.3)
= 0.16 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 28
Ans. Molar mass of the compound = 183.5 g mol-1

(9) 0.12 molal solution of a substance boils at 373.21°K. Calculate molal elevation constant of the solvent.
Solution :
Given : Concentration of solution = m = 0.12
Boiling point of the solution = Tb = 373.21 K
For solvent (water) T0 = 373.15 K
Molal elevation constant, Kb = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0
= 373.21 – 373.15
= 0.06 K
ΔTb = Kb × m
∴ Kb = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{b}}}{m}\)
= \(\frac{0.06}{0.12}\)
=0.5 K kg mol-1
Ans. Molal elevation constant = Kb = 0.5 K kg mol-1

(10) Boiling point of water at 750 mm of Hg is 99.63 °C. How much sucrose must be added to 500 g of water so that it boils at 100 °C? (Kb = 5.02 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Boiling point of water = T0 = 273 + 99.63
= 372.63 K
Boiling point of a solution = Tb = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Mass of a solvent (water) = W1 = 500 g
Molar mass of sucrose (C12H22O11) = M2
= 342 g mol-1
Kb = 5.02 K kg mol-1
Mass of solute (sucrose) = W2 = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0
= 373 – 372.63
= 0.37 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 29
Ans. Mass of sucrose required to be added = 12.60 g

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(11) A solution of phosphorus prepared by dissolving 0.0175 kg of phosphorus in 0.08 kg of CS2 has a boiling point 319.87 K. If Kb for CS2 is 2.4 K kg mol-1 and atomic mass of phosphorus is 31 × 10-3 kg mol-1, find the formula of phos-phorus. (Boiling point of CS2 = 319.45 K)
Solution :
Given : Mass of solvent (CS2) = W1 = 0.08 kg
Mass of phosphorus = W2 = 0.0175 kg
Boiling point of CS2 = T0 = 319.45 K
Boiling point of solution = Tb = 319.87 K
Molal elevation constant = Kb = 2.4 K kg mol-1
Atomic mass of phosphorus = 31 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Molecular formula of phosphorus = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0 = 319.87 – 319.45 = 0.42 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 30
∴ Number of atoms in a molecule of phosphorus = \(\frac{\text { molar mass of phosphorus }}{\text { atomic mass of phosphorus }}\)
= \(\frac {125}{31}\)
= 4.032
≅ 4
Hence the molecular formula of phosphorus is P4 in CS2.
Ans. Molecular formula of phosphorus = P4

(12) Boiling point of water at 750 mm of Hg is 99.63 °C. How much sucrose must be added to 500 g of water so that it boils at 100 °C? (Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Pressure = P = 750 mm Hg
T0 = 273 + 99.63 = 372.63 K
Tb = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1
Molar mass of sucrose (C12H22O11) = 342 × 10-3 kg mol-1
W1 = 500 g = 0.5 kg
Mass of sucrose to be added = W2 = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0 = 373 – 372.63 = 0.37 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 31
Ans. Mass of sucrose to be added = 121.7 × 10-3 kg
= 121.7 g

(13) 35 % (W/W) solution of ethylene glycol in water, an anti-freezer used in automobiles in radiators as a coolant. It lowers freezing point of water to -17.6 °C. Calculate the mole fraction of the components.
Solution :
35% (W/W) means 100 g solution contains 35 g ethylene glycol (CH2OH-CH2OH) and 65 g H2O.
Molar mass of water = 18 g mol-1
Molar mass of ethylene glycol (CH2OH-CH2OH) = 62 g mol-1
Number of moles of water = n1 = \(\frac{65}{18}\) = 3.611 mol
Number of moles of ethylene glycol = n2 = \(\frac{35}{62}\)
= 0.5645 mol
Total moles = n = n1 + n2 = 3.611 + 0.5645
= 4.1755 mol
Mole fraction of ethylene glycol = x2
\(=\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}=\frac{0.5645}{4.1755}\) = 0.1352
∴ Mole fraction of water = 1 – x2 = 1 – 0.1352
= 0.8648
Ans. Mole fraction of water = 0.8648
Mole fraction of ethylene glycol = 0.1352

Question 44.
Define freezing point of a liquid.
Answer:
The freezing point of a liquid is defined as the temperature at which the solid coexists in the equilibrium with the liquid and the vapour pressure of the liquid and the solid are equal.

Question 45.
Explain the depression in the freezing point of a solution.
Answer:
The depression in the freezing point of a solution is defined as the difference between the freezing points of a pure solvent and that of the solution.
If T0 and T are the respective freezing points of a pure solvent and a solution, then the depression in the freezing point ΔTf is given by,
ΔTf = T0 – T (T < T0)
The depression in the freezing point (ΔTf) is a colligative property.

Question 46.
What causes depression in freezing point ?
OR
Explain, freezing point depression as a consequence of vapour pressure lowering.
Answer:
The freezing point of a liquid is the temperature at which the liquid and the solid have the same vapour pressure.

Addition of a nonvolatile solute to a liquid decreases the freezing point, i.e., the freezing point of the solution is less than that of the pure solvent. This is due to the lowering of the vapour pressure of the solvent by the addition of the nonvolatile solute.

When a liquid is cooled from the point A, its vapour pressure decreases and at the point B, it freezes (solidifies).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 32
In case of a solution, since the vapour pressure is lowered, the freezing point decreases. Hence, if the solution is cooled from the point A’, it freezes at lower temperature B’, than the pure liquid. This is also due to separation of solvent molecules due to solute molecules decreasing their intermolecular attraction.

If T0 and T are the freezing points of a pure solvent and the solution, then, the depression in the freezing point is given by,
ΔTf = T0 – T.
This depression ΔTf depends on the lowering of the vapour pressure (P0 – P). ΔTf ∝ (P0 – P), where P0 and P are the vapour pressures of the pure liquid and the solution.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 47.
What is a relationship between freezing point depression and concentration of solute (or solution)?
Answer:
It is observed experimentally that as the concentration of a solution increases, the freezing point of the solution decreases and hence the depression in the freezing point (ΔTf) increases.

The depression in the freezing point of a solution is directly proportional to the molal concentration (expressed in mol kg-1) of the solution.
Thus,
ΔTf ∝ m
where m is the molality of the solution.
∴ ΔTf = Kfm, where Kf is a constant of proportionality. If m = 1 molal,
ΔTf = Kf. Hence Kf is called the cryoscopic constant or molal depression constant. Kf is characteristic of the solvent.

Question 48.
What are the units of molal depression constant or cryoscopic constant?
Answer:
The freezing point depression, ΔTf is given by,
ΔTf = Kf × m
where m is molality in mol kg-1 and Kf is molal depression constant or cryoscopic constant.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 33
∴ Kf has unit K kg mol-1 (or °C kg mol-1)
Therefore cryoscopic constant is the depression in freezing point produced by 1 molal solution of a nonvolatile solute.

Question 49.
Write the formula to determine molar mass of a solute using freezing point depression method.
Answer:
M2 = \(\frac{K_{\mathrm{f}} \times W_{2} \times 1000}{W_{1} \times \Delta T_{\mathrm{f}}}\)
where
Kf = Molal depression constant
ΔTf = Depression in freezing point
W1 = Mass of a solvent
W2 = Mass of a solute.
M2 = Molar mass of solute

Question 50.
Define cryoscopic constant (or molal depression constant).
Answer:
Molal depression constant : It is defined as the depression in freezing point, produced by dissolving one mole of a solute in 1 kg (or 1000 g) of a solvent (i.e. 1 molal solution).

Solved Examples 2.9

Question 51.
Solve the following :

(1) 1.35 g of a substance when dissolved in 55 g acetic acid produced a depression of 0.618°C in a freezing point. Calculate the molar mass of the dissolved substance. (Kf = 3.865 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of a solvent = W1 = 55 g
Mass of a solute = W2 = 1.35 g
Depression in freezing point = ΔTf = 0.618 °C
Molal depression constant = Kf = 3.865 K kg mol-1
Molar mass of a solute = M2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 34
Ans. Molar mass of the substance = 153.5 g mol-1

(2) When certain amount of sucrose is dissolved in 1 kg of water, the freezing point of the solution is found to be 272.8 K. If the molecular mass of sucrose is 342 g mol-1 and Kf for water is 1.86 K kg mol-1, calculate the amount of sucrose present in the solution.
Solution :
Given : W1 = Mass of the solvent = 1 kg
T0 = Freezing point of pure water = 273 K
Tf = Freezing point of the solution = 272.8 K
ΔTf = T0 – Tf = Depression in freezing point
= 273 K – 272.8 K
= 0.2 K
M2 = Molecular mass of the solute
= 342 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Kf = Molal freezing point depression constant for water
= 1.86 K kg mol-1
W2 = Mass of the solute = ?
ΔTf = T0 – Tf
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 35
Ans. Mass of sucrose = 36.78 × 10-3 kg

(3) The freezing point of a pure solvent is 315 K. On addition of 0.5 mole of urea in 1 kg of the solvent, the freezing point decreases by 3 K. Calculate the molal depression constant for the solvent.
Solution :
Given :
m = Molality of urea = 0.5 m
ΔTf = Depression in the freezing point = 3 K
Kf = Molal depression constant for the solvent = ?
ΔTf = Kf × m
∴ Kf = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{f}}}{m}\)
= \(\frac{3}{0.5}\)
= 6 K kg mol-1
Ans. Molal depression constant = 6 K kg mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(4) The freezing point of pure benzene is 278.4 K. Calculate the freezing point of the solution when 2g of a solute having molecular weight 100 is added to 100 g of benzene. (Kf for benzene = 5.12 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Kf for benzene = 5.12 K kg mol-1
T0 = Freezing point of the solvent = 278.4 K
W1 = Mass of the solvent = 100 g = 0.1 kg
W2 = Mass of the solute = 2g = 2 × 10-3 kg
M2 = Molecular mass of the solute = 100 g mol-1
= 100 × 10-3 kg mol-1
T = Freezing point of the solution = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 36
Ans. Freezing point of the solution = 277.376 K

(5) 0.635 × 10-3 kg of a substance of molar mass 190 × 10-3 kg mol-1 was dissolved in 30.5 × 10-3 kg of a solvent. If the depression in the freezing point is 0.62 °C, find the molal depression constant of the solvent.
Solution :
Given : Mass of solvent = W1 = 30.5 × 10-3 kg
Mass of solute = W2 = 0.635 × 10-3 kg
Depression in freezing point = ΔTf = 0.62 °C (or K)
Molar mass of the substance = M2 = 190 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Molal depression constant = Kf = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 37
Ans. Molal depression constant = Kf
= 5.66 K kg mol-1

(6) The boiling point of an aqueous solution is 100.18 °C. Find the freezing point of the solution. (Given : Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1, Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Tb = 100.18 °C + 273 = 373.18 K
Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1; Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1
Boiling point of water = T0 = 373 K
Tf = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0 = 373.18 – 373 = 0.18 K
If m is the molality of the solution, then
ΔTb = Kb × m and ΔTf = Kf × m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 38
Freezing point of water = T0 = 273 K
ΔTf = T0 – Tf
Hence the freezing point of the solution is,
Tf = T0 – ΔTf = 273 – 0.6438 = 272.3562 K
OR Freezing point of solution is -0.6438 °C.
Ans. Freezing point of the solution
= 272.3562 K
= -0.6438 °C

(7) 1.0 × 10-3 kg of urea when dissolved in 0.0985 kg of a solvent, decreases freezing point of the solvent by 0.211 K. 1.6 × 10-3 kg of another nonelectrolyte solute when dissolved in 0.086 kg of the same solvent depresses the freezing point by 0.34 K. Calculate the molar mass of the another solute. (Given molar mass of urea = 60)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Urea = W2 = 1 × 10-3 kg
Mass of solvent = W1 = 0.0985 kg
Depression in freezing point = ΔTf = 0.211 K
Molar mass of urea = M2 = 60 g mol-1
= 60 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Mass of another solute = W’2 = 1.6 × 10-3 kg
Mass of solvent = W’1 = 0.086 kg
Depression in freezing point = ΔT’f = 0.34 K
Molar mass of another solute = 60 × 10-3 kg mol-1

From urea solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 39
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 40
For solution of another solute :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 41
Ans. Molar mass of solute = 68.23 g mol-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 52.
What do you understand by the terms :
(1) permeable membrane
(2) semipermeable membrane?
Answer:
(1) Permeable membrane : A membrane which allows free transfer of the solute molecules from a solution of a higher concentration to a solution of a lower concentration through it is called a permeable membrane and the transfer is called diffusion, e.g., a membrane of a paper.

(2) Semipermeable membrane : A membrane which allows free passage of only the solvent molecules but not the large solute molecules or ions of large molecular mass from a solution of a lower concentration (or a pure solvent) to a solution of higher concentration through it, is called a semi-permeable membrane, e.g., parchment paper, complex like Cu2[Fe(CN)6], etc.

Question 53.
Define and explain osmosis.
Answer:
(1) Definition : It is defined as a spontaneous uni-directional flow of the solvent molecules from a pure solvent or a dilute solution to the more concentrated solution through a semipermeable membrane.

Example : A flow of water molecules from a dilute solution into a concentrated glucose solution through a parchment paper.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 42

(2) Explanation : Consider a vessel divided into two compartments by a semipermeable membrane. When one compartment is filled with a pure solvent or a dilute solution and another by concentrated solution, there is a spontaneous of solvent molecules to the concentrated solution. This arises due to higher vapour pressure of a pure solvent or dilute solution than concentrated solution.

Question 54.
Explain the relation between osmotic pressure and concentration of solution.
Ans.
(1) Consider V dm3 of a solution in which n1 moles of a solvent contains n2 moles of a nonvolatile solute at absolute temperature T.

(2) The osmotic pressure, n of a solution is given by,
π = \(\frac{n R T}{V}\)
R is gas constant having value 0.08206 dm3 atm K-1 mol-1 (OR L atm K-1 mol-1). Since concentration, C of a solution is in mol dm-3 or molarity is,
C = \(\frac{n}{V}\) mol dm-3 or M
∴ π = CRT
(If concentration C is expressed in mol m-3 and R = 8.314 J K-1mol-1, then π will be in SI units, pascals or Nm-2.)

Question 55.
Explain the terms :
(1) Isotonic solutions
(2) Hypotonic solutions
(3) Hypertonic solutions.
Answer:
(1) Isotonic solutions : The solutions having the same osmotic pressure at a given temperature are called isotonic solutions.

Explanation : If two solutions of substances A and B contain nA and nB moles dissolved in volume V (in dm3) of the solutions, then their concentrations are,
CA = \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{A}}}{V}\) (in mol dm-3) and
CB = \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{B}}}{V}\) (in mol dm-3)
If the absolute temperature of both the solutions is T, then by the van’t Hoff equation,
πA = CARTand πB = CBRT where πA and πB are their osmotic pressures.
For the isotonic solutions,
πA = πB
∴ CA = CB
∴ \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{A}}}{V}=\frac{n_{\mathrm{B}}}{V}\)
∴ nA = nB
Hence, equal volumes of the isotonic solutions at the same temperature will contain equal number of moles (hence, equal number of molecules) of the substances.

(2) Hypotonic solutions : When two solutions have different osmotic pressures, then the solution having lower osmotic pressure is said to be a hypotonic solution with respect to the other solution.
Explanation : Consider two solutions of the substances A and B having osmotic pressures πA and πB. If πB is less than πA, then the solution B is a hypotonic solution with respect to the solution A.
Hence, if CA and CB are their concentrations, then, CB < CA. Hence, for equal volumes of the solutions, nA < nA.

(3) Hypertonic solutions : When two solutions have different osmotic pressures, then the solution having higher osmotic pressure is said to be a hypertonic solution with respect to the other solution.
Explanation : Consider two solutions of substances A and B having osmotic pressures πA and πB. If πB is greater than πA, then the solution B is a hypertonic solution with respect to the solution A.
Hence, if CA and CB are their concentrations, then CB > CA. Hence, for equal volume of the solutions, nB > nA.

Question 56.
Explain colligative properties of electrolytes.
Answer:

  • The electrolytic solutions do not exhibit colligative properties similar to nonelectrolytes.
  • The colligative properties of electrolytes are higher than those shown by equimolar solutions of nonelectrolytes.
  • The molar masses of electrolytes determined by colligative properties are found to be considerably lower than their actual molar masses.

Question 57.
Why are the colligative properties of electrolytic solutions greater than those for non-electrolytic solutions with same concentration ?
Answer:

  • The electrolytes in polar solvents or aqueous solutions dissociate into two or more ions whereas nonelectrolytes do not dissociate.
  • Consequently the number of particles in electrolytic solutions are considerably higher than equimolar nonelectrolytic solutions.
  • Therefore the colligative properties of electrolytes are greater than nonelectrolytes with same concentration in solution.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 58.
What is abnormal colligative property? Explain the reasons.
Answer:
Abnormal colligative property : When the experimentally measured colligative property of a solution is different from that calculated theoretically by the van’t Hoff equation or by the laws of osmosis, then the solution is said to have abnormal colligative property.

Explanation : The colligative property depends on the number of solute particles in the solution but it is independent of their nature. Abnormal values of them arise when the dissolved solute undergoes a molecular change like dissociation or association in the solution.
The observed colligative property (or abnormal colligative property ) may be higher or lower than the theoretical value.

(i) Dissociation of the solute molecules : When a solute like an electrolyte is dissolved in a polar solvent like water, it undergoes dissociation, which results in the increase in the number of particles in the solution.

Hence, the observed value of the colligative property becomes higher than the theoretical value, e.g., when one mole of KCl is dissolved in the solution then due to dissociation, KCl → K+ + Cl, the number of particles increases, hence, the colligative properties like osmotic pressure elevation in the boiling point, etc. increase.

(ii) Association of the solute molecules : When a solute like a nonelectrolyte is dissolved in a nonpolar solvent like benzene, it undergoes association forming molecules of higher molecular mass. Hence, the number of the particles in the solution decreases. Therefore the colligative properties like osmotic pressure, elevation in the boiling point, etc., are lower than the theoretical value, e.g., nA → An.
2CH3COOH → (CH3COOH)2
2C6H5COOH → (C6H5COOH)2

Question 59.
Explain abnormal osmotic pressure.
Answer:

  • When the experimentally observed osmotic pressure is different than theoretically calculated value by van’t Hoffs equation then it is called abnormal osmotic pressure.
  • This arises when the dissolved solute undergoes a molecular change like association or dissociation.

Question 60.
Explain abnormal molecular masses.
Answer:
When the observed molecular masses obtained from their colligative properties of the substances are different (higher or lower) than the theoretical or normal values calculated from their molecular formulae, then they are called abnormal molecular masses.

Question 61.
How is van’t Hoff factor related to molecular mass of the substance ?
Answer:
The van’t Hoff factor is also defined as,
actual moles of particles in solution after
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 43
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 44
In case of nonelectrolytes, i < 1.
In case of electrolytes, i > 1. For example for KNO3 and NaCl, i = 2, for Na2SO4, CaCl2, i = 3, etc.

Question 62.
Write modification of expressions of colligative properties with the help of van’t Hoff factor.
Answer:
The modified expressions of colligative properties with the help of van’t Hoff factor i are as follows :
(1) By Raoult’s law :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 45
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 46

Question 63.
Obtain a relation between degree of dissociation and molar mass for an electrolyte.
Answer:
Consider an electrolyte AxBy.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 47
If i is van’t Hoff factor and n is total number of ions produced from dissociation of one mole of electrolyte then, the degree of dissociation α is given by,
α = \(\frac{i-1}{n-1}\)
Now if Mth and Mob are theoretical arid observed molecular (or molar) masses respectively, then,
i = \(\frac{M_{\mathrm{th}}}{M_{\mathrm{ob}}}\)
∵ α(n – 1) = i – 1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 48
This is a relation between degree of dissociation and molecular masses of the dissolved electrolyte AxBy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 64.
Solve the following :

(1) 300 mL solution at 27 °C contains 0.2 mol of a nonvolatile solute. Calculate osmotic pressure of the solution.
Solution :
Given : V= 300 ml = 0.3 dm3 ;
T= 273 + 27 = 300 K
π = 0.2 mol, π = ?
π = \(\frac{n R T}{V}\)
= \(\frac{0.2 \times 0.08206 \times 300}{0.3}\)
= 16.41 atm
Ans. Osmotic pressure = π = 16.41 atm.

(2) 200 mL solution at 27 °C contains 10 g of a nonvolatile solute of molar mass 65 g mol-1. What is osmotic pressure of the solution ?
Solution :
Given : V = 200 mL = 0.2 dm3; W = 10 g
M = 65 g mol-1; T= 273 + 27 = 300 K; π = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 49
Ans. Osmotic pressure = π = 18.93 atm.

(3) Calculate the osmotic pressure of 0.2 M glucose solution at 300 K. (R = 8.314 J mol-1 K-1)
Solution :
Given : Concentration of the solution
= C = 0.2 M
= 0.2 mol dm-3
= 0.2 × 103 mol m-3
Temperature = T= 300 K
= 8.314 J mol-1 K-1
The osmotic pressure, π is given by,
π = CRT
= 0.2 × 103 × 8.314 × 300
= 4.988 × 105 Nm-2 (or Pa)
Ans. Osmotic Pressure = 4.988 × 105 Nm-2

(4) A solution of cane sugar containing 18 g L-1 has an osmotic pressure 1.25 atm. Calculate the temperature of the solution. (Molar mass of cane sugar = 342, R = 0.082 lit atm mol-1 K-1)
Solution:
Given : Amount of cane sugar = W = 18 g L-1
Osmotic pressure = π = 1.25 atm
Molar mass of cane sugar = M = 342 g mol-1
Temperature = T = ?
Number of moles of cane sugar
= \(\frac{W}{M}\)
= \(\frac{18}{342}\)
= 0.05263 mol
∴ Concentration of solution = C
= \(\frac{n}{V}\)
= \(\frac{0.05263}{1}\)
= 0.05263 mol lit-1
π = CRT
∴ T = \(\frac{\pi}{\mathcal{C R}}\)
= \(\frac{1.25}{0.05263 \times 0.08206}\)
= 289.4 K
Ans. Temperature of solution = 289.4 K

(5) Equal volumes of two solutions, one containing glucose and another urea have osmotic pressures 12.6 atm and 23.8 atm at 25 °C. Calculate the ratio of number of moles of urea to glucose.
Solution :
Given : Osmotic pressure of glucose solution = π1
= 12.6 atm
Osmotic pressure of urea solution = π2
= 23.8 atm
Number of moles of glucose = n1
Number of moles of urea = n2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 50
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 51

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(6) One litre of a solution containing 25 g glucose has osmotic pressure 3.4 atm at 300 K. If by diluting the solution the osmotic pressure becomes 2.0 atm at the same temperature, what would be its concentration ? (Molar mass of glucose = 180)
Solution :
Given : Mass of solute (glucose) = 25 g
Volume of solution = 1.0 L
Osmotic pressure = π1 = 3.4 atm
After dilution osmotic pressure = π2 = 2 atm
Final concentration = c2 = ?
The number of moles of glucose = n = \(\frac{25}{180}\)
= 0.1389 mol
Initial concentration = c1 = \(\frac{n}{V}\)
= \(\frac{0.1389}{1}\)
At constant temperature, by van’t Hoff-Boyle’s law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 52
Ans. Concentration of solution = 0.0817 mol L-1

(7) A solution of a substance having mass 1.8 × 10-3 kg has the osmotic pressure of 0.52 atm at 280 K. Calculate the molar mass of the substance used.
[Volume = 1 dm3, R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1]
Solution :
Given : W= 1.8 × 10-3 kg = 1.8 g
π = 0.52 atm; V = 1 dm3
T = 280 K;
Molar mass = M = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 53
Ans. Molar mass = M = 79.53 g mol-1

(8) An organic substance (M = 169 gram mol-1) is dissolved in 2000 cm3 of water. Its osmotic pressure at 12 °C was found to be 0.54 atm. If R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1, calculate the mass of the solute.
Solution :
Given : M = 169 g mol-1
V = 200 cm3 = 0.2 dm3
T = 273 + 125 = 285 K
π = 0.54 atm
R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1; W = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 54
Ans. Mass of solute = 0.78 g

(9) A solution containing 10 g glucose has osmotic pressure 3.84 atm. If 10 g more glucose is added to the same solution, what will be its osmotic pressure. (Temperature remains constant)
Solution :
Given : Mass of glucose = W1 = 10 g
Mass of more glucose added = W2 = 10 g
Initial osmotic pressure = π1 = 3.84 atm
Final osmotic pressure = π2 = ?
Total mass of glucose in final solution = W1 + W2
W’ = 10 + 10
= 20 g
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 55
∴ π2 = \(\pi_{1} \times \frac{W^{\prime}}{W_{1}}\)
= \(3.84 \times \frac{20}{10}\) = 7.68 atm
Ans. Osmotic pressure of the solution = 7.68 atm

(10) A 0.1 m solution of K2SO4 in water has freezing point of -0.43 °C. What is the value of van’t Hoff factor if Kf for water is 1.86 K kg mol-1?
Solution :
Given : m = 0.1 m, ΔTf = 0 – (-0.43) = 0.43 °C
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1, i = ?
ΔTf = i × Kf × m
∴ i = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{f}}}{K_{\mathrm{f}} \times m}=\frac{0.43}{1.86 \times 0.1}=2.312\)
Ans. van’t Hoff factor = i = 2.312

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 65.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. A molal solution is one that contains one mole of solute in
(a) one litre of the solvent
(b) 1000 g of the solvent
(c) one litre of the solution
(d) 22.4 litre of solution
Answer:
(b) 1000 g of the solvent

2. 10.0 grams of caustic soda when dissolved in 250 cm3 of water, the resultant molarity of solution is
(a) 0.25 M
(b) 0.5 M
(c) 1.0 M
(d) 0.1 M
Answer:
(c) 1.0 M

3. 5 × 10-3 kg of urea is dissolved in 2 × 10-2 kg of water. The percentage by weight of urea is
(a) 15%
(b) 20%
(c) 25%
(d) 30%
Answer:
(b) 20%

4. Vapour pressure of solution of a nonvolatile solute is always
(a) equal to the vapour pressure of pure solvent
(b) higher than vapour pressure of pure solvent
(c) lower than vapour pressure of pure solvent
(d) constant
Answer:
(c) lower than vapour pressure of pure solvent

5. According to the Raoult’s law, the relative lowering of vapour pressure is equal to the
(a) mole fraction of solvent
(b) mole fraction of solute
(c) independent of mole fraction of solute
(d) molality of solution
Answer:
(b) mole fraction of solute

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

6. Partial pressure of solvent in solution of non-volatile solute is given by equation,
(a) P = x2P0
(b) P0 = xP
(c) P = x1P0
(d) P0 = x1P
Answer:
(c) P = x1P0

7. When partial pressure of solvent in solution of nonvolatile solute is plotted against its mole fraction, nature of graph is
(a) a straight line passing through origin
(b) a straight line parallel to mole fraction of solvent
(c) a straight line parallel to vapour pressure of solvent
(d) a straight line intersecting vapour pressure axis
Answer:
(a) a straight line passing through origin

8. Colligative property depends only on ………………. in a solution.
(a) Number of solute particles
(b) Number of solvent particles
(c) Nature of solute particles
(d) Nature of solvent particles
Answer:
(a) Number of solute particles

9. Lowering of vapour pressure of solution
(a) is a property of solute
(b) is a property of solute as well as solvent
(c) is a property of solvent
(d) is a colligative property
Answer:
(d) is a colligative property

10. Raoult’s law is not applicable to
(a) solutions of volatile solutes
(b) solutions of electrolytes
(c) dilute solutions
(d) concentrated solutions
Answer:
(d) concentrated solutions

11. The relative lowering of vapour pressure of a solution is proportional to the
(a) mole fraction of the solvent
(b) mole fraction of the solute
(c) amount of the substance
(d) volume of the solvent
Answer:
(b) mole fraction of the solute

12. The vapour pressure of an aqueous solution of glucose at 100 °C is 710 mm Hg. Hence the molality of the solution is
(a) 2.83 m
(b) 3.65 m
(c) 16.47 m
(d) 12.5 m
Answer:
(b) 3.65 m

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

13. Relative vapour pressure lowering depends only on
(a) Mole fraction of solute
(b) Nature of solvent
(c) Nature of solute
(d) Nature of solute and solvent
Answer:
(a) Mole fraction of solute

14. A solution having mole fraction of a solute equal to 0.05 has vapour pressure 20 × 103 Nm-2. Hence the vapour pressure of a pure solvent is
(a) 21.05 × 103 Nm-2
(b) 4 × 105 Nm-2
(c) 1 × 103 Nm-2
(d) 2 × 104 Nm-2
Answer:
(a) 21.05 × 103 Nm-2

15. The addition of the nonvolatile solute into the pure solvent ……………..
(a) increases the vapour pressure of solvent
(b) decreases the boiling point of solvent
(c) decreases the freezing point of solvent
(d) increases the freezing point of solvent
Answer:
(c) decreases the freezing point of solvent

16. A solution having the highest vapour pressure is
(a) 1 M Al2(SO4)3
(b) 0.1 M NaNO3
(c) 1 M BaCl2
(d) 1 M Ca(NO3)2
Answer:
(b) 0.1 M NaNO3

17. Molal elevation constant is elevation in boiling point produced by
(a) 1 g of solute in 100 g of solvent
(b) 100 g of solute in 1000 g of solvent
(c) 1 mole of solute in one litre of solvent
(d) 1 mole of solute in one kg of solvent
Answer:
(d) 1 mole of solute in one kg of solvent

18. The determination of molar mass from elevation in boiling point is called
(a) cryoscopy
(b) osmometry
(c) ebullioscopy
(d) spectroscopy
Answer:
(c) ebullioscopy

19. Which of the following aqueous solutions will have minimum elevation in boiling point ?
(a) 0.1 M KCl
(b) 0.05 M NaCl
(c) 1 M AIPO4
(d) 0.1 M MgSO4
Answer:
(b) 0.05 M NaCl

20. Which of the following solutions shows maximum depression in freezing point ?
(a) 0.5 M Li2SO4
(b) 1 M NaCl
(c) 0.5 M Al2 (SO4)3
(d) 0.5 M BaCl2
Answer:
(c) 0.5 M Al2 (SO4)3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

21. If the freezing point of 0.1 m solution is 272.814 K, then the freezing point of 0.2 m solution will be
(a) 545.628 K
(b) 265.64 K
(c) 272.628 K
(d) 0.482 K
Answer:
(c) 272.628 K

22. At a freezing point,
(a) Vapour pressure of a solution = Vapour pressure of a solid
(b) Vapour pressure of a liquid = Vapour pressure of a solid
(c) Vapour pressure of a liquid > Vapour pressure of a solid
(d) Vapour pressure of a solid > Vapour pressure of a liquid
Answer:
(b) Vapour pressure of a liquid = Vapour pressure of a solid

23. In osmosis
(a) solvent molecules pass from high concentration of solute to low concentration
(b) solvent molecules pass from a solution of low concentration of solute to a solution of high concentration of solute
(c) solute molecules pass from low concentration to high concentration
(d) solute molecules pass from high concentration to low concentration
Answer:
(b) solvent molecules pass from a solution of low concentration of solute to a solution of high concentration of solute

24. As temperature increases
(a) Osmotic pressure and vapour pressure decrease
(b) Vapour pressure and osmotic pressure increase
(c) Vapour pressure increases but osmotic pressure decreases
(d) Osmotic pressure increases but vapour pressure decreases
Answer:
(b) Vapour pressure and osmotic pressure increase

25. A mango kept in a salt solution shrinks. Hence the liquid content in mango with respect to the salt solution is
(a) isotonic
(b) hypertonic
(c) hypotonic
(d) equimolar
Answer:
(c) hypotonic

26. The osmotic pressure of 5% glucose solution at 300 K is
(a) 6.93 × 105 Nm-2
(b) 6.93 × 102 Nm-2
(c) 6.83 Pa
(d) 6.00 × 103 Pa
Answer:
(a) 6.93 × 105 Nm-2

27. 0.1 M solution of A has osmotic pressure xNm-2 at 300 K. If 200 ml of A and 100 ml of 0.2 M solution of nonreactive solute B are mixed then the osmotic pressure will be
(a) 3x
(b) 0.05 x
(c) 1.33 x
(d) 0.75 x
Answer:
(c) 1.33 x

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

28. The solution A is twice hypertonic to the solution B at a given temperature. If the solution A contains 8.6 × 1022 molecules, then the number of molecules present in B are,
(a) 8.6 × 1022
(b) 1.73 × 1023
(c) 3.24 × 1022
(d) 4.3 × 1022
Answer:
(d) 4.3 × 1022

29. Isotonic solutions are the solutions having the same
(a) surface tension
(b) vapour pressure
(c) osmotic pressure
(d) viscosity
Answer:
(c) osmotic pressure

30. If Kb for water is 0.52 Km-1, the boiling point of 0.2 m solution of a nonvolatile solute will be
(a) 371.96 K
(b) 373.104 K
(c) 373.52 K
(d) 374.0 K
Answer:
(b) 373.104 K

31. The vapour pressure of water is 15.5 mm at 20 °C. The lowering of vapour pressure of 0.02 m K Br solution will be
(a) 0.0112 mm Hg
(b) 0.0056 mm Hg
(c) 0.056 mm Hg
(d) 0.31 mm Hg
Answer:
(a) 0.0112 mm Hg

32. Which of the following 0.1 M aqueous solutions will exert highest osmotic pressure ?
(a) Al2(SO4)3
(b) Na2SO4
(c) MgCl2
(d) KCl
Answer:
(a) Al2(SO4)3

33. If equimolar solutions of urea, NaCl, sucrose and BaCl2 have boiling points A, B, C and D, then
(a) A = C < B < D
(b) A = D < B < C
(c) A > B > C < D
(d) A < B < C < D
Answer:
(a) A = C < B < D

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

34. The molar mass of acetic acid obtained by measuring depression in freezing point is 115.8 gmol-1. Hence the degree of association is
(a) 0.482
(b) 0.964
(c) 0.883
(d) 1.12
Answer:
(b) 0.964

35. Δ Tb/m for NaBr solution will have value (Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1)
(a) 0.52 K mol-1
(b) 0.104 K kg mol-1
(c) 1.24 kg mol-1
(d) 1.04 K kg mol-1
Answer:
(d) 1.04 K kg mol-1

36. 0.2 M urea solution can be isotonic with
(a) 0.1 M KBr solution
(b) 0.1 M glucose solution
(c) 0.15 m NaCl solution
(d) 0.2 M KBr solution
Answer:
(a) 0.1 M KBr solution

37. The osmotic pressure of 0.1 M HCl solution at 27 °C will be
(a) 2.46 atm
(b) 0.164 atm
(c) 4.92 atm
(d) 0.0082 atm
Answer:
(c) 4.92 atm

38. If a, b, c and d are the van’t Hoff factors for Na2SO4, glucose and K4[Fe(CN)6] then
(a) a > b > c
(b) a < b < c
(c) b < a < c
(d) c < a < b
Answer:
(c) b < a < c

39. The osmotic pressure of 0.2 M KCl solution at 310 K is
(a) 10.17 atm
(b) 5.084 atm
(c) 8.36 atm
(d) 12.2 atm
Answer:
(a) 10.17 atm

40. A temperature at which 0.1 M KCl solution will have osmotic pressure 10 atm will be
(a) 408 °C
(b) 263 °C
(c) 310 °C
(d) 337 °C
Answer:
(d) 337 °C

41. 5 % solution of glucose is isotonic with a solution of urea (M = 60). Hence the weight of urea present in the solution is
(a) 1.67 g
(b) 6.0 g
(c) 18.6 g
(d) 1.2 g
Answer:
(a) 1.67 g

42. Abnormal molar mass is produced by
(a) association of solute
(b) dissociation of solute
(c) both association and dissociation of solute
(d) separation by semipermeable membrane
Answer:
(c) both association and dissociation of solute

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

43. The van’t Hoff factor for an aqueous solution of an electrolyte is
(a) less than 1
(b) zero
(c) greater than 1
(d) equal to 1
Answer:
(c) greater than 1

44. The value of van’t Hoff factor will be minimum for
(a) 0.05 M AlCl3
(b) 0.2 M NaNO3
(c) 5.0 M glucose
(d) 0.1 M H2SO4
Answer:
(c) 5.0 M glucose

45. van’t Haff factor for K4[FeC(N)6] dissociated 10% is
(a) 1.1
(b) 1.4
(c) 0.86
(d) 1.6
Answer:
(b) 1.4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 1.
What are the physical states of matter? How can they be changed into one another?
Answer:

  • There are three physical states of matter namely solid, liquid and gas.
  • They differ in intermolecular or interatomic or interionic forces which are strongest in the solid-state.
  • By raising the temperature of solids to their melting point, solids are converted into liquids while heating liquids to their boiling points, they can be converted into vapour or gaseous state.
  • On the contrary, by cooling the gases to very low temperature and subjecting to high pressure they can be transformed into liquid which on further cooling can be transformed into solid-state.

The equilibrium existing between three states of matter may be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 1

Question 2.
What are the constituents of solids?
Answer:
The smallest constituent particles of various solids are atoms, ions or molecules. All such small constituents are referred to as ‘particles’.

Question 3.
What are the characteristic properties of solids?
Answer:

  • The solid state of matter is characterised by strong interparticle forces of attraction.
  • There is regularity and periodicity in the arrangement of constituent particles of solid.
  • Generally solids are hard, incompressible and rigid except some solids like Na, K, P which are soft.
  • The constituent particles of solids like molecules, atoms or ions have fixed stationary positions in solid and can only oscillate about their equilibrium or mean positions. Hence, they have fixed shape and cannot be poured like liquids.
  • Crystalline solids have sharp melting points and they melt at a definite temperature. Amorphous solids do not have sharp melting points.
  • They are anisotropic or isotropic.

Question 4.
Give classification of solids.
Answer:
Depending on orderly arrangement of the constituent particles, the solids are classified into two types :

  • Crystalline solids. For example, diamond, NaCl, K2SO4, etc.
  • Amorphous solids or non-crystalline solids. For example, tar, glass, plastics, rubber, butter, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 5.
Define :
(1) Crystalline solid.
(2) Amorphous solid.
Answer:
(1) Crystalline solid : A homogeneous solid in which the constituent particles like atoms, ions or molecules are arranged in a definite repeating pattern throughout the solid is called crystalline solid. For example, NaCl, KNO3, etc.

(2) Amorphous solid : A substance which appears like solid but does not have perfectly ordered crystalline structure and no regular arrangement of constituent particles in structure is called amorphous solid. For example, glass, rubber, plastics, etc.

Question 6.
Define the term anisotropy.
OR
Define and explain the term anisotropy.
Answer:
Anisotropy : The ability of crystalline solids to change their physical properties when measured in different directions is called anisotropy.

Explanation : This property is due to different arrangement of constituents in different directions. Different types of particles fall on the way of measurements in different directions. Hence the composition of crystalline solid changes with directions changing their physical properties.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 2
Fig. 1.1 : Anisotropy in crystals : Different arrangements of constituent particles about different directions, AB, CD and EF.

Question 7.
Define and explain isotropy.
Answer:
Isotropy : The ability of amorphous solids to exhibit identical physical properties even though measured in different directions is called isotropy.

Explanation : This property arises because there is no long range order of regular pattern of arrangement in them and hence the arrangement is irregular along all the directions. Therefore the magnitude of any physical property would be identical along all directions.

Question 8.
Why does crystalline solid show different refractive indices in different directions ?
Answer:

  1. Crystalline solid has long range order of regular pattern of arrangement which repeats periodically over entire crystal.
  2. Within the given pattern, the arrangements of different atoms or ions or molecules is different in different directions. Hence the properties like refractive indices in the different directions are different.

This shows that the crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature.

Question 9.
Explain the properties of amorphous solids.
Answer:

  1. The constituent particles in amorphous solids are arranged randomly.
  2. They have short range ordered structure.
  3. Amorphous solids are called supercooled liquids having very high viscosity.
  4. They do not have sharp melting points and they melt gradually over a temperature interval.
  5. Amorphous substances appear like solids but they do not have perfectly ordered crystalline structure, hence they are not real solids. Therefore they are pseudo solids.
  6. They are isotropic and exhibit the same magnitude of any property in every direction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 10.
What is isomorphism ?
Answer:
Isomorphism : A phenomenon in which two or more crystalline substances show same crystalline structure is called isomorphism and the crystals are said to be isomorphous. For example, NaNO3 and CaCO3. They have atomic ratios 1 : 1 : 3.

Question 11.
What is isomorphous?
Answer:
Isomorphous : When two or more crystalline substances have the same crystalline structure, they are said to be isomorphous. For example, NaF and MgO, NaNO3 and CaCO3.

Question 12.
What is polymorphism ?
Answer:
Polymorphism : A phenomenon in which when a single substance crystallises in two or more forms under different conditions of solidification is called polymorphism and the substance is called polymorphous. For example, calcite and oragonite are two forms of CaCO3.

Question 13.
What is polymorphous ?
Answer:
Polymorphous: A single substance which crystallises in two or more forms under different conditions of solidification is called polymorphous. Polymorphic forms of an element are called allotropic forms or allotropes. For example, carbon exists as diamond and graphite, or sulphur exists in rhombic and monoclinic allotropic forms.

Question 14.
Identify isomorphous and polymorphous substances in the following :
K2SO4, graphite, β-quartz, Na2SeO4, CaCO3, diamond, cristobalite, CsNO3.
Answer:

IsomorphousPolymorphous
K2SO4, Na2SeO4

CaCO3, CsNO3

Graphite, diamond

Β-quartz, cristobalite

Question 15.
Why does a crystalline solid has a sharp melting point ?
Answer:

  1. Crystalline solid is a homogeneous solid and it has long range order of regular pattern of arrangement which repeats periodically over entire crystal.
  2. The interatomic or intermolecular forces are identical, hence the thermal energy required to break the regular structure by overcoming the intermolecular forces is uniform throughout.
  3. Hence the heat and temperature needed to melt the solid are same, and therefore solids have sharp melting points.

Question 16.
Amorphous solids do not have sharp melting points. Explain.
Answer:

  1. Amorphous solids do not have perfectly ordered crystalline structure.
  2. They have short range order of regular pattern hence periodically repeating regular pattern is over a short distance.
  3. The thermal energy required to break the structure and separate constituent particles is not uniform.
  4. Hence the temperature needed to melt the solid is not same, therefore amorphous solids do not have sharp melting points but melt over a range of temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 17.
Give examples of (1) crystalline solids and (2) amorphous solids.
Answer:
(1) Crystalline solids : Metallic solids (Cu, Fe, etc.) crystalline salts (NaCl, K2SO4, etc.)
(2) Amorphous solids : Glass, plastics, rubber, etc.

Question 18.
Distinguish between crystalline solids and amorphous solids.
Answer:
Crystalline solids:

  1. They have definite characteristic geometrical shape.
  2. They have long range order of regular pattern of arrangement of constituent particles.
  3. They are true solids.
  4. They have sharp melting points.
  5. They are anisotropic in nature.
  6. They have definite heat of fusion.

Amorphous solids:

  1. They have irregular shape.
  2. They have short range order of regular pattern of arrangement of constituent particles.
  3. They are pseudo solids or supercooled liquids.
  4. They do not have sharp melting points.
  5. They are isotropic in nature.
  6. They do not have definite heat of fusion.

Question 19.
How are crystalline solids classified ?
Answer:
Crystalline solids are classified as follows :

  1. Ionic crystals
  2. Covalent network crystals
  3. Molecular crystals
  4. Metallic crystals

Question 20.
What are crystalline solids?
Answer:
The solids in which the constituent particles are charged ions namely cations and anions held together by electrostatic force of attraction are called crystalline solids.

Question 21.
What are the characteristics of ionic crystals ?
Answer:
The characteristics of ionic crystals are as follows :

  1. The constituents of ionic crystals are charged ions namely cations and anions. They differ in ionic size.
  2. The ions in these crystals are held by strong electrostatic force of attraction.
  3. Ionic crystals have high melting points and they are hard and brittle.
  4. In solid state they are nonconductors of electricity but they are good conductors when melted or dissolved in water.
  5. In aqueous solution they dissociate forming ions.
  6. Example : NaCl, KCl. CaF2, K2SO4, etc.

Question 22.
Explain why ionic solids are hard and brittle.
Answer:

  1. In ionic crystalline solids, constituent particles are positively charged cations and negatively charged anions placed at alternate lattice points.
  2. The ions are held by strong coulombic electrostatic forces of attraction compensating opposite forces. Hence they are hard.
  3. Since there are no free electrons, they are not malleable and on applying a shearing force, ionic crystals break into small units. Hence they are brittle.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 23.
What are covalent network crystals ?
Answer:
The crystals in which the constituent particles are atoms linked by covalent bonds forming a continuous network are called covalent network crystals. For example, diamond, quartz.

Question 24.
What are the characteristics of covalent network crystals ?
Answer:
The characteristics of covalent network crystals are as follows :

  • The constituent particles in these solids are atoms.
  • The atoms in these crystals are held by covalent bonds forming a rigid three dimensional network which gives a giant molecule. Hence, the entire crystal is a single molecule.
  • These crystals are very hard (or hardest) and most incompressible.
  • They have high melting points and boiling points.
  • Since the electrons are localised they are poor conductors of heat and electricity.
  • Example : Quartz (SiO2), diamond.

Question 25.
Give the examples of network solids.
Answer:
The examples of covalent network solids are as follows :
Quartz (SiO2), diamond, boron nitride carborundum.

Question 26.
What are allotropes ?
Answer:
Allotropes : When a substance exists in two or more forms then they are called allotropes. They are polymorphous. For example, carbon has allotropes diamond and graphite.

Question 27.
What are molecular crystals ?
Answer:
The crystals in which the constituent particles are molecules (or unbonded single atoms) of the same substance held together by intermolecular forces of attraction. For example solidified Cl2, CO2, etc.

Question 28.
What are the characteristics of molecular crystals ?
Answer:
The characteristics of molecular crystals are as follows :

  1. The constituent particles of these solids are molecules (or unbonded single atoms) of the same substance.
  2. The atoms within the molecules are bonded by covalent bonds.
  3. The molecules are held together by intermolecular forces of attraction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 29.
What are intermolecular forces of attraction involved in molecular crystals ?
Answer:
The intermolecular forces involved in molecular crystals are as follows :
(1) Weak dipole-dipole interactions :
The solids constituting polar molecules like HCl, H2O, SO2, etc. which possess permanent dipole moment involve weak dipole-dipole interactions.

(2) Very weak dispersion or London forces :
The solids consisting of nonpolar molecules like CH4, H2, etc. involve weak dispersion forces. They are also involved in monoatomic solids like Ar, Ne.

(3) Intermolecular Hydrogen bonds :

  • In this crystalline solids, the constituent particles are the molecules which contain hydrogen atom linked to highly electronegative atom like F, O or N.
  • In these, molecules are held by hydrogen bonds in which H atom of one molecule is bonded to electronegative atom (like F, N or O) of another molecule.
  • Since hydrogen bonding is weak, these solids have very low melting points and generally at room temperature they exist in the liquid or gaseous state.
  • They are non-conductors of electricity.

Question 30.
What are metallic crystals ?
Answer:
These are crystalline solids formed by atoms of the same metallic element held together by metallic bonds.

Question 31.
What are the characteristics of metallic crystals ?
Answer:

  1. Metallic crystals are solids formed by atoms of the same metallic element held together by metallic bonds.
  2. Metallic crystals have high melting point and boiling point.
  3. Metals are malleable and can be hammered into thin sheets.
  4. Metals are ductile and can be drawn into thin wires.
  5. Metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.
  6. Examples are Cu, Ag, Au, Ni, etc.

Question 32.
Classify the following solids into different types :
(i) Plastic (ii) P4 molecule (iii) S8 molecule (iv) Iodine molecule (v) Tetra phosphorus decoxide (vi) Ammonium phosphate (vii) Brass (viii) Rubidium (ix) Graphite (x) Diamond (xi) NaCl (xii) Silicon.
Answer:

SolidType
(i) PlasticCovalent network crystal
(ii) P4 moleculeCovalent network crystal
(iii) S8 moleculeCovalent network crystal
(iv) Iodine moleculeCovalent network crystal
(v) Tetra phosphorus decoxideCovalent network crystal
(vi) Ammonium phosphateIonic crystal
(vii) BrassMetalic crystal
(viii) RubidiumMetalic crystal
(ix) GraphiteCovalent crystal
(x) DiamondCovalent crystal
(xi) NaClIonic crystal
(xii) SiliconCovalent crystal

Question 33.
Mention the types of the following solids :
(i) CaF2 (ii) SiC (iii) Ice (iv) SO2 (v) CaCO3 (vi) ZnS (vii) HCl (viii) CO2
Answer:

SolidType
(i) CaF2Ionic crystal
(ii) SiCCovalent crystal
(iii) IceHydrogen bonded molecular crystal
(iv) SO2Molecular crystal
(v) CaCO3Ionic crystal
(vi) ZnSIonic crystal
(vii) HClPolar molecular crystal
(viii) CO2Non-polar molecular crystal

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 34.
What is a giant solid ?
Answer:
Covalent solid formed by covalent bonds between neighbouring constituent atoms of non-metallic solid is called a giant solid. For example, graphite.

Question 35.
What is lattice ?
Answer:
Lattice is a geometrical arrangement of points in a three dimensional periodic array.

Question 36.
What is crystal lattice (space lattice) ?
Answer:
Crystal lattice (space lattice) : A regular arrangement of the constituent particles (atoms, ions or molecules) of a crystalline solid having similar environment in three dimensional space is called crystal lattice or space lattice.

Question 37.
What is a lattice point?
Answer:
Lattice point : A position occupied by a crystal constituent particle like an atom, ion or a molecule in the crystal lattice is called lattice point or lattice site.
OR
Any point at the intersection of the lines in the unit cell occupied by a constituent particle like an atom, an ion or a molecule in the crystalline solid is called a lattice point.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 38.
What are the parameters of a unit cell ?
Answer:
A unit cell is characterised by following parameters :
(1) Edges or edge lengths : The intersection of two faces of crystal lattice is called as edge. The three edges denoted by a, b and c represent the dimensions (lengths) of the unit cell along three axes. These edges may or may not be mutually perpendicular.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 3

(2) Angles between the edges (or planes) : There are three angles between the edges of the unit cell represented as α, β and γ.

  • The angle α is between edges b and c.
  • The angle β is between edges a and c.
  • The angle γ is between edges a and b.

The crystal is defined with the help of these parameters of its unit cell.

Question 39.
Represent space lattice and unit cell diagrammatically.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 4

Question 40.
What do you understand by the basis of crystal lattice ?
Answer:

  • A crystal structure is formed by attaching a constituent particle to lattice points.
  • The constituent particles attached to the lattice points form the basis of the crystal lattice.
  • The crystal structure is obtained by attaching a basis to each of the lattice points.

This is represented by the following schematic equation :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 5

Question 41.
What are the types of unit cells?
Answer:
Basically unit cells are of two types as follows :

  1. Primitive unit cells : The unit cells in which the constituent particles like atoms, ions or molecules are present only at the corners of the unit cell are called primitive unit cells or simple unit cells.
  2. Body-centred unit cell : A unit cell in which the constituent particles are present at the corners as well as at its body-centre is called body-centred unit cell.
  3. Face-centred unit cell : A unit cell in which the constituent particles are present at the corners as well as at the centre of each face is called face-centred unit cell or cubic close packed (CCP) unit cell.
  4. Base-centred unit cell : A unit cell in which the constituent particles are present at the corners as well as at the centres of two opposite faces is called end-centred unit cell.

Question 42.
Explain briefly crystal systems.
Answer:
(1) The constituent particles like atoms, ions or molecules of the crystal can be arranged in seven different ways changing edges (a, b, c) and angles (α, β, γ) and accordingly they form seven systems or types of the crystal.

(2) These seven crystal system are named as :
(a) Cubic system, (b) Tetragonal system (c) Orthorhombic system (d) Rhombohedral system (e) Monoclinic system (f) Triclinic system (g) Hexagonal system.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 43.
What are Bravais lattices ?
Answer:

  1. There are seven crystal systems according to the edges (a. b, c) and angles (α, β, γ).
  2. The constituents of the crystal may be present at corners, face centres, body centres, edge centres and voids.
  3. By mathematical analysis, it has been proved that only fourteen different kinds of space lattices are possible.
  4. Hence there are fourteen different ways of arrangement of the lattice basis.
  5. These fourteen lattices of seven crystal systems are called Bravais lattices.

Question 44.
Explain Bravais lattices of a cubic system.
OR
Explain unit cells of a cubic system.
Answer:
Cubic lattice : For this, edges are a = b = c and angles are α = β = γ = 90°. In this cubic system, there are three Bravais lattices.
(1) Simple (or primitive) cubic unit cell (SCC) : In this unit cell, atoms are present only at 8 corners of the cube.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 6

(2) Body-centred cubic unit cell (BCC) : In this, atoms are present at 8 corners along with one additional atom at the body-centre of the cube.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 7

(3) Face-centred cubic unit cell (FCC) : In this unit cell, atoms are present at 8 comers and at 6 face centres.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 8

Question 45.
Give the number of lattice points in one unit cell of the following crystal structures :
(1) Simple cubic
(2) Face-centred cubic
(3) Body-centred cubic.
Answer:
Lattice points in one unit cell represent the positions of atoms, ions or molecules in the unit cell.
(1) Simple cubic unit cell : In this primitive unit cell, the lattice points are at 8 corners of the unit cell. Hence there are 8 lattice points.
(2) Face-centred cubic unit cell : In this unit cell, the lattice points are at 8 comers and 6 face centres.
(In cubic close packing unit cell, the lattice points are also at edge centres and body centre.)
(3) Body-centred cubic unit cell : In this, the lattice points are at 8 comers and one at body centre.

Question 46.
Find the number of atoms per unit cell in the following crystal structures.
(1) Simple cubic unit cell
(2) Body-centred cubic unit cell
(3) Face-centred cubic cell.
Answer:
(1) Number of atoms in primitive simple cubic (scc) unit cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 9
In simple or primitive cubic unit cell, there are 8 atoms at 8 corners. Each corner contributes 1/8th atom to the unit cell.
∴ Number of atoms present in the unit cell = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1
Hence the volume of the unit cell is equal to the volume of one atom.

(2) Number of atoms in body-centred cubic (bcc) unit cell:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 58
In this unit cell, there are 8 atoms at 8 corners and one additional atom at the body centre. Each corner contributes 1/8th atom, to the unit cell, hence due to 8 corners.
Number of atoms = 8 × \(\frac {1}{8}\)
= 1 atom.
An atom at the body centre wholly belongs to the unit cell.
∴ Total number of atoms present in bcc unit cell = 1 + 1 = 2.
Hence the volume of unit cell is equal to the volume of two atoms.

(3) Number of atoms in face-centred cubic (fcc) unit cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 10
In this unit cell, there are 8 atoms at 8 comers and 6 atoms at 6 face centres. Each corner contributes 1/8th atom to the unit cell, hence due to 8 corners,
Number of atoms = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.
Each face centre contributes half of the atom to the unit cell, hence due to 6 face centres,
Number of atoms = \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6 = 3.
∴ Total number of atoms present in fee unit cell = 1 + 3 = 4.
Hence the volume of the unit cell is equal to the volume of four atoms.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 47.
Obtain a relation for the density of the unit cell and radius of atom or sphere for the following :
(1) Simple cubic (scc) crystal
(2) Body centred cubic (bcc) crystal
(3) Face centred cubic (fcc) crystal.
Answer:
(1) Consider a unit cell of a simple cubic crystal. It has 8 atoms at 8 corners of the unit cell.
∴ Total number of atoms in unit cell = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1
If a is the length of edge of cubic unit cell and r is the radius of the atom, then r = a/2 or a = 2r.
Volume of the unit cell = a3 = (2r)3 = 8r3
If M is atomic mass of the element, then mass of one atom is M/NA where NA is Avogadro number. If there are V atoms in one unit cell then,
Mass of unit cell = n × Mass of one atom = n × \(\frac{M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 11
Since there is one atom present in one unit cell,
ρ = \(\frac{M}{N_{\mathrm{A}} \times a^{3}}\)

(2) Consider a unit cell of body centred cubic (bcc) crystal. It has 8 atoms at 8 comers and one additional atom at the centre of body of unit cell.
Number of atoms due to 8 corners = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1
Body centred atom, wholly belong to the unit cell. Hence total number of atoms in the unit cell is two. If M is atomic mass of an element then M/NA is mass of one atom where NA is Avogadro number.
Mass of unit cell = Mass of 2 atoms in unit cell = 2 M/NA
If a is the edge length or lattice parameter then,
Volume of cubic unit cell = a3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 12

(3) Consider a unit cell of face centred cubic (fcc) crystal.
It has 8 atoms at 8 comers and 6 atoms at 6 face centres.
∴ Total number of atoms in unit cell = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6 = 1 + 3= 4
If M is the atomic mass of an element, then mass of one atom is M/NA, where NA is Avogadro number. Mass of unit cell = Mass of 4 atoms
= \(4 \times \frac{M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
If a is the edge length of this cubic unit cell then,
volume of unit cell = a3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 13

Question 48.
What is coordination number? What is its significance?
Answer:
(1) Coordination number : The number of the closest neighbouring constituent particles like atoms, ions or molecules which are in contact with a particular particle or an atom in the crystal lattice is called coordination number of that particle.
(In the crystal lattice, all atoms may have same or different coordination numbers.)

(2) The magnitude of the coordination number is a measure of compactness of spheres in close-packed structures.

(3) The higher the coordination number, the closer are the spheres to each other.

Question 49.
Explain linear packing in one direction.
OR
Explain close packing in one dimension.
Answer:
Linear packing in one direction or close packing in one dimension :
The constituent particles of the crystal may be of varying shapes but for better understanding we consider particles as hard spheres of equal size.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 14
There is only one way of arranging or packing spheres placed in a horizontal row touching one another. Since one sphere is in contact with two neighbouring spheres except the end atoms, the coordination number in this arrangement is two. This packing may be in any one direction x, y or z.

Question 50.
Explain the following :
Planar packing arrangement of spheres.
OR
Close packing in two dimensions.
OR
AAAA type and ABAB type of two dimensional arrangement.
OR
(i) Square close packing
(ii) Hexagonal close packing.
Answer:
Two dimensional close packing crystal structure can be generated by placing one dimensional linear crystal structure over another to form multiple layers. This staking of linear rows may be taking place in two different ways giving two different two dimensional structures as follows :

(i) AAAA type two dimensional close packing or square close packing :
In this arrangement, various one dimensional rows are placed on one over other so that each sphere in one row is over the another sphere of another row forming planar structure. In this, spheres have horizontal as well as vertical alignment. All the rows of spheres are identical in planar structure. All crests as well as all the depressions or troughs formed by the arrangement are also aligned.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 15

If the first row is labelled as A type, then second and all subsequent rows are also identical, hence are of A type. Therefore this planar two dimensional close packing is called AAAA type packing.

In this arrangement, each sphere is in contact with (or touching) four other spheres around it, hence the coordination number of each sphere is four and the packing is called two dimensional or planar square close packing. In this, packing efficiency is 52.4%.

(ii) ABAB type two dimensional packing or hexag-onal close packing :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 16

In this arrangement, crests of the spheres of one row are placed into the depressions or troughs formed between adjacent spheres of next row. This arrangement is repeated consecutively throughout.

In this arrangement, crests of the spheres of one row are in contact with depressions or troughs of next row.

If one row of spheres is labelled as A then the next row will be B, third row will again be A, fourth row B and so on. Hence this planar or two dimensional close packing is called ABAB… type packing.

In this arrangement, each sphere is in contact with six other spheres around it hence the coordination number of each sphere is six and the packing is called two dimensional or planar hexagonal close packing. In this, the packing efficiency is 60.4% which is more than linear close packing.

Question 51.
Explain close packing in three dimensions.
Answer:
Close packing in three dimensions :
Three dimensional crystal structures are obtained by stacking of two dimensional layers. Simple cubic lattice is obtained by stacking of two dimensional square layers.

The stacking of two dimensional hexagonal close packed layers gives two structures namely hexagonal close packed (hcp) structure and face centred (fcc) structure.

(i) Stacking of square close packed layers :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 17

In this arrangement, the two dimensional AAAA type square closed packed layers are placed one over the other in such a way that the crests of all spheres are in contact with successive layers in all directions. All spheres of different layers are perfectly aligned horizontally and vertically forming unit cells having primitive or simple cubic structure. Since all the layers are identical and if each layer is labelled as layer A, then whole three dimensional crystal lattice will be of AAAA… type.

Each sphere is in contact with six surrounded spheres, hence the co-ordination number of each sphere is six.

(ii) Stacking of two hexagonal close packed layers :
A close packed three dimensional structure can be generated by arranging hexagonal close packed layers in a particular manner.

In this the spheres of second layer are placed in the depression of the first layer.

In this if first layer is labelled as A then second layer is labelled as B since they are aligned differently.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 18

In this, all triangular voids of the first layers are not covered by the spheres of the second layer. The triangular voids which are covered by second layer spheres generate tetrahedral void which is surrounded by four spheres. The triangular voids in one layer have above them triangular voids of successive layers.

The overlapping triangular voids from two layers together form an octahedral void which is surrounded by six spheres.

(iii) Placing third hexagonal close packed layer :
(a) Hexagonal close packing (hcp) : If the crests of spheres of third layer are placed on the triangular shaped tetrahedral voids C of the second layer, then three dimensional closest packing structure is obtained in which the spheres of third layer lie directly above the spheres of first layer, i.e., first and third layers are identical. Following same placing of layers, fourth layer will be identical to second layer.

If the first layer is labelled A and second layer B, then the arrangement of packing will be of ABAB type. This is also called hexagonal close packing (hcp) as shown in the figure. In this, packing efficiency is 74%. The coordination number of each sphere is 12. The metals Be. Mg, Zn, Cd crystallise in HCP crystalline structure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 19

(b) Cubic close packing (ccp) : If the crests of spheres of third layer are placed in the positions of tetrahedral void ‘a’ having apex upward of first layers, then the third layer will not be identical to the first, and may be labelled as C, which is different from A and B layers. Fourth layer may be arranged above third layer such that the spheres are aligned, so that the first layer and fourth layer are identical, second and fifth layers are identical and so on.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 20
If first, second and third layers are labelled as A, B and C respectively then the arrangement of packing will be ABCABC type. This is also called cubic close packing (ccp) as shown in the figure. This is similar to face centred cubic (fcc) packing.

In this, arrangement packing efficiency is 74% and the coordination number of each sphere is 12.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 52.
Explain tetrahedral void.
Answer:
(1) Tetrahedral void : The vacant space or void among four constituent particles having tetrahedral arrangement in the crystal lattice is called tetrahedral void.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 21
The arrangement of four spheres around the void is tetrahedral. A tetrahedral void is formed when a triangular void made by three coplanar spheres is in contact with fourth sphere above or below it.

(2) Characteristics of tetrahedral void :

  • The volume of the void is much smaller than that of atom or sphere.
  • Larger the size of sphere, more is the size of void.
  • If R is the radius of the constituent atom, then the radius of the tetrahedral void is 0.225 R.
  • Coordination number of tetrahedral void is four.
  • There are two tetrahedral voids per sphere, in the crystal lattice. If the number of closed packed spheres is N then the number of tetrahedral voids is 2N.

Question 53.
Explain octahedral void.
Answer:
(1) Octahedral void : The vacant space or void at the centre of six spheres (or atoms) which are placed octahedrally is called octahedral void.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 22

(2) Characteristics of octahedral void :

  • The volume of the void is small.
  • There is one octahedral void at the body centre and twelve octahedral void positions at twelve edge centres.
  • If R is the radius of constituent atom, then the radius of the octahedral void is 0.414 R.
  • The coordination number of octahedral void is six.
  • There is one octahedral void per sphere in the crystal lattice. If the number of closed packed spheres is N then the number of octahedral voids is N.

Question 54.
What are number of voids per atom in hep and ccp ?
Answer:
The tetrahedral and octahedral voids occur in hep and ccp/fcc structures. There are two tetrahedral voids associated with each atom. The number of octahedral voids is half that of tetrahedral voids. Thus, there is one octahedral void per atom.

Question 55.
What is packing efficiency?
Answer:
(1) Packing efficiency : It is the fraction of a percentage of the total space (of the unit cell) occupied by the particles (spheres).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 23
( 2) The magnitude of packing efficiency gives a measure of how tightly particles are packed together.

Question 56.
Calculate packing efficiency in body-centred cubic lattice.
Answer:
Step 1 : Radius of sphere :
In the unit cell of body-centred cubic lattice, there are 8 atoms at 8 corners and one atom at the centre of the cube.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 24

The atoms are in contact along the body diagonal BF. Let a be the edge length and r the radius of an atom.
Consider a triangle BCE.
BE2 = BC2 + CE2 = a2 + a2 = 2a2
Consider triangle BEF,
BF2 = BE2 + EF2 = 2a2 + a2 = 3a2
BF = \(\sqrt{3}\)a.
From figure, BF = 4r
∴ 4r = \(\sqrt{3}\)a
∴ r = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} a\)

Step 2 : Volume of sphere :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 25

Step 3 : Total volume of particles :
The unit cell of bcc structure contains 2 particles.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 26

Step 4 : Packing efficiency
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 27
∴ Packing efficiency = 68%
∴ Percentage of void space = 100 – 68
= 32%

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 57.
Calculate packing efficiency in face-centred cubic lattice.
Answer:
Step 1 : Radius of sphere :
In the unit cell of face-centred cubic lattice, there 8 atoms at 8 corners and 6 atoms at 6 face centres. Consider the face ABCD.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 28

The atoms are in contact along the face diagonal BD.
Let a be the edge length and r, the radius of an atom.
Consider a triangle BCD.
BD2 = BC2 + CD2
= a2 + a2 = 2a
∴ BD = \(\sqrt{2} a\)
From figure, BD = 4r
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 29

Step 3 : Total volume of particles :
The unit cell of fee crystal lattice contains 4 particles.
∴ Volume occupied by 4 particles = \(4 \times \frac{\pi a^{3}}{12 \sqrt{2}}\)
= \(\frac{\pi a^{3}}{3 \sqrt{2}}\)

Step 4 : Packing efficiency :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 30
∴ Packing efficiency = 74%
∴ Percentage of void space = 100 – 74
= 26%

Edge length and particle parameters in cubic system
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 31a

Coordination number and packing efficiency in systems

LatticeCoordination number of atomsPacking efficiency
1. scc6 : four in the same layer, one directly above and one directly below52.4%
2. bcc8 : four in the layer below and four in the layer above68%
3. fcc/ccp/hcp12 : six in its own layer, three above and three below74%

Question 58.
Calculate the number of particles and unit cells in ‘x’ g of metallic crystal.
Answer:
Consider ‘x’ gram of a metallic crystal of molar mass M and density ρ. If the unit cell of the crystal has edge length ‘a’ then, volume of unit cell = a3.
Mass of one metal atom = \(\frac{M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\). If ‘n’ number of atoms are present in one unit cell then
Mass of unit cell = \(\frac{n \times M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
If ‘a’ is the edge length of the unit cell then, Volume of unit cell = a3
Density of unit cell = ρ = \(\frac{n \times M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}} \times \frac{1}{a^{3}}\)
∴ M = \(\frac{\rho \times N_{\mathrm{A}} \times a^{3}}{n}\)
∵ Molar mass M gram contains NA particles
∴ x gram contains \(\frac{x \times N_{\mathrm{A}}}{M}\) particles.
Substituting the value M,

(i) Number of particles in x g crystal
= \(\frac{x \times N_{\mathrm{A}}}{\rho \times N_{\mathrm{A}} \times a^{3} / n}\)
= \(\frac{x \times n}{\rho \times a^{3}}\) particles

(ii) Number of unit cells in x g crystal :
∵ n particles are present in 1 unit cell
∴ \(\frac{x \times n}{\rho \times a^{3}}\) are present in, \(\frac{x \times n}{\rho \times a^{3}} \times \frac{1}{n}\)
= \(\frac{x}{\rho \times a^{3}}\) unit cells

(iii) Number of unit cells in V volume of crystal = \(\frac{V}{a^{3}}\)

Alternative method :
Consider ‘x’ g metal of atomic mass M g mol-1.
Number of moles of metal = \(\frac{x}{M}\)
(a) Number of atoms (particles) of metal = \(\frac{x}{M} \times N_{\mathrm{A}}\)
(b) If unit cell contains ‘n’ atoms,
Number of unit cells = \(\frac{x}{M} \times \frac{N_{\mathrm{A}}}{n}\)
(c) If ‘a’ is the edge length then,
Volume of unit cells = a3
∴ Number of unit cells in V volume of crystal = \(\frac{V}{a^{3}}\).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Solved Examples 1.5 – 4.7

Question 59.
Solve the following :
[1 m = 10 dm = 100 cm = 109 nm = 1012 pm, 1Å = 10-8 cm = 100 pm]

(1) A cubic unit cell of a crystal consists of atoms of A and B elements. Atoms of A occupy corners of the unit cell while one B atom is present at the body centre. Determine the formula of the crystalline compound.
Solution :
Given : Atoms of A are at the comers while atom B is at the body centre of the cubic unit cell.
Since \(\frac {1}{8}\)th atom is contributed at each comer and there are 8 comers in unit cell, number of atoms of A due to comers is \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.

In addition there is one atom of B at body centre. Hence this unit cell contains one atom of each, A and B, therefore the formula of the compound is AB.
Ans. The formula of the compound = AB.

(2) Atoms C and D form fee crystalline structure. Atom C is present at the corners of the cube and D is at the face centres of the cube. What is the formula of the compound ?
Solution :
Given : Crystal has fee structure.
Atoms C are at 8 comers while atoms D are at 6 face centres of the cubic unit cell.
At the comer, \(\frac {1}{8}\)th of each C atom is present while at each face centre, half of each D atom is present.
Number of C atoms = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.
Number of D atoms = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 6 = 3.
Thus unit cell contains one C atom and three D atoms.
Hence the formula of the compound is CD3.
Ans. Formula of the compound = CD3.

(3) A cubic unit cell contains atoms A at the corners, atoms B at face centres and atom C at the body centre. What is the formula of the crystalline compound?
Solution :
Given : Atoms A are at 8 comers, atoms B at the 6 face centres and one atom C at body centre.
Total number of atoms of A = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.
Total number of atoms of B = \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6 = 3.
One atom of C at the body centre.
Therefore the unit cell contains one atom of A, three atoms of B and one atom of C.
Hence the formula of the compound is AB3C.
Ans. The formula of the crystalline compound is AB3C.

(4) An element A and B constitute bcc type crystalline structure. Element A occupies body centre position and B is at the corners of cube. What is the formula of the compound? What are the coordination numbers of A and B ?
Solution :
Given : Crystalline structure is bcc type.
Atoms A are at 8 comers and atom B is at body centre.
∴ Number of atoms of A in a unit cell
= \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.
Number of atom B in a unit cell = 1.
Since unit cell contains one atom each of A and B, the formula of the compound is AB.
The coordination number of an atom A at comer is 8.
The coordination number of an atom B at body centre is 8.
Answer. Formula of the compound = AB.
Coordination number of A = 8
Coordination number of B = 8.

(5) Mention the number of atoms in the following unit cells :
(a) scc (b) bcc (c) fcc (d) hcp.
Answer:

Unit cellNumber of atoms
(a) scc1
(b) bcc2
(c) fcc4
(d) hcp3

(6) 0.1 mole of Buckminster fullerene of molar mass 720 gmol-1 contains how many Kg of carbon ?
Solution :
Molar mass of fullerene, C60 = 720 gmol-1
∵ Mass of 1 mole of fullerene = 720 g = 0.72 kg
∴ Mass of 0.1 mole of fullerene = 0.72 × 0.1
= 0.072 kg
Ans. 0.072 kg.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

(7) In a cubic crystalline structure of zinc blende (ZnS), sulphide ions are at corners and face centres while zinc ions occupy half of tetrahedral voids.
Find in the unit cell :
(i) Number of Zn2+ ions
(ii) Number of S2- ions
(iii) Number of ZnS molecules
(iv) Molecular formula of zinc blende.
Solution :
Given : S2- ions are at 8 comers and 6 face centres.
Zn2+ ions occupy half of tetrahedral voids.
Number of S2- ions in unit cell
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 32
= 1 + 3 = 4

Cubic unit cell has 8 tetrahedral voids. Since half of them are occupied by Zn2+ ions, there are 4Zn2+ ions in the unit cell.
Hence number of zinc sulphide (ZnS) molecules is 4.
Molecular formula of zinc blende is ZnS.
Ans. (i) Number of Zn2+ ions = 4
(ii) Number of S2- ions = 4
(iii) Number of ZnS molecules = 4
(iv) Molecular formula of zinc blende = ZnS.

(8) In a crystalline compound, atoms A occupy ccp lattices while atoms B occupy 2/3 rd tetrahedral voids. What is the formula of the compound ?
Solution :
In ccp unit, lattice points are 8 comers and 6 face centres where atoms A are present.
∴ Number of A atoms
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 33
In cubic unit cell, there are 8 tetrahedral voids.
Hence,
Number of B atoms = \(\frac {2}{3}\) × 8 = \(\frac {16}{3}\).
Hence the formula should be A4B16/3 or A12B16 or A3B4.
Ans. The formula of the compound is A3B4.

(9) A compound forms hep structure. What is the number of (a) octahedral voids, (b) tetrahedral voids, (c) total voids formed in 0.2 mol of the compound?
Solution :
Number of atoms in 0.2 mol of the compound
= 0.2 × NA = 0.2 × 6.022 × 1023
= 1.2044 × 1023 atoms
(a) Number of octahedral voids
= Number of atoms
= 1.2044 × 1023

(b) Number of tetrahedral voids
= 2 × Number of atoms
= 2 × 1.2044 × 1023
= 2.4088 × 1023

(c) Total number of voids
= 1.2044 × 1023 + 2.4088 × 1023
= 3.6132 × 1023
Ans. (a) Number of octahedral voids
= 1.2044 × 1023
(b) Number of tetrahedral voids = 2.4088 × 1023
(c) Total number of voids = 3.6132 × 1023

(10) Copper crystallises into a fcc structure and the unit cell has length of edge 3.61 × 10-8 cm. Calculate the density of copper. Atomic mass of copper is 63.5 g mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Crystalline structure of Cu is fcc.
Edge length = a = 3.61 × 10-8 cm
Atomic mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Avogadro number = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1
Density = d = ?

In fcc structure, there are 8 Cu atoms at 8 comers and 6 Cu atoms at 6 face centres.
∴ Total number of Cu atoms
= \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6 = 1 + 3
= 4
Mass of one Cu atom
= \(\frac{63.5}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\) = 1.054 × 10-22 g
∴ Mass of 4 Cu atoms = 4 × 1.054 × 10-22
= 4.216 × 10-22 g
Mass of unit cell = Mass of 4 Cu atoms
= 4.216 × 10-22g
Volume of unit cell = a3 = (3.61 × 10-8)3
= 4.7 × 10-24 cm3
Density of unit cell = \(\frac{\text { Mass of unit cell }}{\text { Volume of unit cell }}\)
∴ ρ = \(\frac{4.216 \times 10^{-22}}{4.7 \times 10^{-23}}\) = 8.97 g cm-3
Ans. Density of Cu = 8.97 g cm-3.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

(11) Niobium is found to crystallise with bcc structure and found to have density of 8.55 g cm-3 (OR 8.55 kg m-3). Determine the atomic radius of niobium if its atomic mass is 93.
Solution :
Given : Density of Niobium (Nb) crystal = 8.55 g cm-3
Crystalline stmeture is bcc.
Atomic mass of Nb = 93 g mol-1
Avogadro number = NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1
Atomic radius of Niobium = ?
In bcc unit cell, there are 8 atoms at 8 comers and 1 atom at the body centre.
∴ Number of Nb atoms = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 + 1 = 1 + 1 = 2.
Mass of one Nb atom = \(\frac{93}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\) = 1.544 × 10-22
∴ Mass of 2 Nb atoms = 2 × 1.544 × 10-22 = 3.088 × 10-22 g
Mass of unit cell
= Mass of 2Nb atoms = 3.088 × 10-22 g
If a is edge length of bcc unit cell, volume of unit cell = a3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 34
= 0.361 × 10-22 cm3 = 36.1 × 10-24 cm3
∴ a = (36.1 × 10-24)-1/3 = 3.3 × 10-8 cm
If r is the radius of 1 Nb atom, then in bcc structure
r = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} a=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4}\) × 3.3 × 10-8
= 1.43 × 10-8 cm
= 1.43 × 10-10 m
= 1.43 × 10-10 × 109 nm
= 0.143 nm
Ans. Atomic radius of niobium atom = 0.143 nm

(12) Gold occurs as face centred cube and has a density of 19.30 kg dm-3. Calculate atomic radius of gold. (Molar mass of Au = 197)
Solution :
Given : Density of Au = 19.3 kg dm-3
Molar mass = 197 g mol-1
Avogadro constant = NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1
Atomic radius of Au = ?
In fcc unit cell, there are 8 atoms of Au at 8 comers and 6 atoms at 6 face centres.
Number of Au atoms in the unit cell = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6
= 4 atoms
Mass of 1 Au atom = \(\frac{197}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\) = 3.271 × 10-22 g
∴ Mass of 4 Au atoms = 4 × 3.271 × 10-22 g = 1.308 g × 10-21 g
∴ Mass of unit cell = 1.308 × 10-21 g
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 35
= 6.777 × 10-24 dm3
= 6.777 × 10-23 cm3
∴ a = (6.777 × 10-23)1/3 = (67.77 × 10-24)-1/3
= 4.077 × 10-8 cm
If r is the radius of Au atom, then for fcc unit cell,
r = \(\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
= \(\frac{4.077 \times 10^{-8}}{2 \sqrt{2}}\) = 1.442 x 10-8 cm = 144.2 pm
Ans. Radius of Au atom = 144.2 pm.

(13) A compound is formed by two elements X and Y. The atoms of Y form ccp structure. The atoms of A occupy \(\frac {1}{3}\) of tetrahedral voids. Find the formula of the compound.
Solution :
In ccp structure, Y atoms are present at 8 comers and 6 face-centres of the ccp structure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 36
There are 8 tetrahedral voids of which \(\frac {1}{3}\)rd are occupied by atoms X. Hence unit cell has \(\frac {8}{3}\) atoms of X and 4 atoms of Y. The formula will be,
X8/3 Y4 or X8Y12 or X2Y3
Ans. Formula of the compound = X2Y3.

(14) A metal crystallises into two cubic faces namely face centered (FCC) and body centered (BCC), whose unit cell edge lengths are 3.5 Å and 3.0 Å respectively. Find the ratio of the densities of FCC and BCC.
Solution :
Given : Edge length of unit cell of fcc metal = 3.5 Å
= 3.5 × 10-8 cm
Edge length of unit cell of bcc metal = 3 Å = 3 × 10-8 cm
Density d = \(\frac{n \times \mathbf{M}}{a^{3} \times \mathbf{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
where, n = Number of Fe atoms in the unit cell
M = Atomic mass of metal
a = Edge length of unit cell
NA = Avogadro number
∴ For fcc unit cell = n = 4
For bcc unit cell = n = 2
∴ \(\frac{\text { Density of fcc unit cell }}{\text { Density of bcc unit cell }}=\frac{d_{\mathrm{fcc}}}{d_{\mathrm{bcc}}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 37

(15) The density of silver having atomic mass 107.8 gram mol-1 is 10.8 gram cm-3. If the edge length of cubic unit cell is 4.05 × 10-8 cm, find the number of silver atoms in the unit cell. (NA = 6.022 × 1023, 1Å = 10-8 cm)
Solution :
Given : d = 10.8 g cm-3
M= 107.8 g mol-1
a = 4.05 × 10-8 cm
Number of Ag atoms in unit cell = n = ?
Mass of one Ag atom = \(\frac{107.8}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\)
= 1.79 × 10-22 g
If there are n atoms, then
Mass of unit cell = n × 1.79 × 10-22 g
Volume of unit cell = a3 = (4.05 × 10-8)3
= 6.643 × 10-23 cm3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 38
Ans. Number of silver atoms (Ag) atoms in unit cell = 4.

(16) Aluminium having atomic mass 27 g mol-1 crystallises in face centred packed cubic crystal. Find the number of Al atoms in 10 g aluminium. How many unit cells will be present in it?
Solution :
Given : Atomic mass of Al = 27 g mol-1
Mass of Al = 10 g
Avogadro number = NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1
Number of Al atoms = ?
Number of unit cells = ?
1 gram atom of Al = 27 g Al contains 6.022 × 1023
Al atoms
∴ Number of Al atoms in 10 g
= \(\frac{10 \times 6.022 \times 10^{23}}{27}\)
= 2.23 × 1023
In fcc structure, each unit cell contains 4Al atoms.
∴ Number of unit cells = \(\frac{2.23 \times 10^{23}}{4}\)
= 5.575 × 1022
Ans. Number of Al atoms = 2.23 × 1023
Number of unit cells = 5.575 × 1022.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

(17) The density of iron crystal is 8.54 gram cm-3. If the edge length of unit cell is 2.8 Å and atomic mass is 56 gram mol-1, find the number of atoms in the unit cell. What is the type of crystal ?
Solution :
Given :
Density of Fe crystal = d = 8.54 g cm-3
a = 2.8 Å = 2.8 × 10-8 cm
Atomic mass = M = 56 g mol-1
Number of atoms in unit cell, n = ?
Mass of one atom = \(\frac{56}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\) = 9.3 × 10-23 g
Volume of unit cell = a3 = (2.8 × 10-8)3
= 2.195 × 10-23 cm3
If there are n atoms in the unit cell, then
Mass of unit cell = n × 9.3 × 10-23 g
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 39
Since unit cell contains 2 atoms, the crystal has bcc structure.
Ans. Number of atoms in unit cell = 2
Type of crystal = bcc

Question 60.
What is meant by crystal defects or imperfections?
Answer:

  1. Defect in crystalline structure : Any deviation from orderly and stoichiometrically perfect arrangement of atoms, ions or molecules in the crystal lattice is called a defect in the crystalline structure.
  2. Defects are created during the crystallisation process. If the process occurs at faster rate, the defects are more.
  3. The properties of solids are affected due to imperfactions.

Question 61.
Mention the types of defects in the solids or crystal structures.
Answer:
The defects in crystalline solids are of two types viz., (1) Point defect and (2) Line defect.
(1) Point defects are further classified as :
(a) Vacancy defect or Schottky defect
(b) Interstitial defect or Frenkel defect
(c) Impurity defect :

This is further classified as

  • Substitution impurity defect
  • Interstitial impurity defect.

(2) Line defects are further classified as

  • Edge dislocation
  • Screw dislocation.

Question 62.
What are point defects?
Answer:
Point defects : These defects arise due to irregularities produced in the arrangement of basis of lattice points in crystalline solids.

Question 63.
What are major classes of point defects ?
Answer:
There are three major classes of point defects : stoichiometric point defects, impurity defects and nonstoichiometric point defects.

There are four types of stoichiometric point defects as vacancy defect, self interstitial defect, Schottky defect and Frenkel defect.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 64.
Explain vacancy defect.
Answer:
Vacancy defect :
(1) During crystallisation, some of regular sites in solid remain unoccupied and the missing particle creates a vacancy defect.
(2) The defect can be developed by heating the substance.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 40
(3) The mass of solid decreases due to absence of particles in regular sites.
(4) Since the volume remains the same the density of the substance decreases.

Question 65.
Explain self interstitial defect in elemental solid.
Answer:
Self Interstitial defect in elemental solid : The empty spaces or voids in between the particles at lattice points represent interstitial defective sites or self interstitial defects.

This defect arises in the following two ways :
(1) An extra particle occupies the empty interstitial space. This extra particle is similar to those already present in the crystal.

(2) (i) A particle gets shifted from its original regular site to an empty interstitial space in the crystal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 41
(ii) This displacement of a particle produces a vacancy defect at its regular site.
(iii) This defect is referred to as a combination of vacancy defect and self interstitial defect.
(iv) Since there is neither loss or gain in mass of the substance, the density of it remains unchanged.

Question 66.
How does Schottky defect arise?
Answer:
(1) Schottky defect arises in ionic solids due to missing of equal number of cations and anions from their regular positions in the crystal lattice creating vacancies.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 42
(2) There arises formation of two holes per loss of ion pair.

(3) Conditions for formation of Schottky defect :
Characteristics of ionic solids showing Schottky defect :

  • High degree of ionic character
  • High coordination number of anion
  • Small difference between ionic size or radii of cation and anion. The ionic ratio \(\frac{r_{\text {cation }}}{r_{\text {anion }}}\) is not below unity.

Question 67.
How does Frenkel defect arise?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 43

  • Frenkel defect : This defect arises when an ion of an ionic compound is missing from its regular site and occupies interstitial vacant position between lattice points.
  • Cations have smaller size than anions, hence generally cations occupy the interstitial sites.
  • This creates a vacancy defect at its original position and interstitial defect at new position.
  • Frenkel defect is regarded as the combination of interstitial defect and vacancy defect.

Conditions for the formation of Frenkel defect :

  • This defect arises in ionic compounds with a large difference between the sizes of cation and anion.
  • The ionic compounds must have ions with low coordination number.

Question 68.
What are the consequences of Frenkel defect ?
Answer:
Consequences of Frenkel defect :

  • Since there is no loss of ions from the crystal lattice, the density of the solid remains unchanged.
  • The crystal remains electrically neutral.
  • This defect is observed in ZnS, AgCl, AgBr, AgI, CaF2, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 69.
Explain nonstoichiometric defect.
Answer:
Nonstoichiometric defect : This defect arises when the ratio of number of one kind of atoms to that of other kind of atoms (or ratio of number of cations to anions) becomes different from the actual stoichiometric formula. This involves the change in stoichiometry of the compound.

There are two types of nonstoichiometric defects as follows :
(1) Metal deficiency defect : This defect arises in compounds of metal which show variable oxidation states. In some metal crystals, positive metal ions are missing from their regular lattice sites. The extra negative charge is balanced by cations of the same metal with higher oxidation state than that of missing cation at site.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 44
Consider a crystal of NiO. When one Ni2+ is missed from its lattice point, it creates a vacant site.

The deficiency of two positive charges is compensated by two Ni3+ ions at other lattice points of Ni2+ ions and the composition of NiO crystal becomes Ni0.97O1.0.

(2) Metal excess defect : There are two types of metal excess defect as follows :
(a) Presence of a neutral atom or an extra positive ion at interstitial position :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 45
There are two types or ways of metal excess defects in ZnO. In the first case, Zn atom is present in the interstitial space as shown in figure.

(b) Metal ions and electrons at interstitial sites :
The second case arises when ZnO is heated, Zn2+ and electrons are obtained,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 46
The excess Zn2+ ions are trapped in interstitial sites in the crystal lattice. Electrons occupy interstitial sites by diffusing into the interstitial sites.
In above both cases, the nonstoichiometric formula of ZnO is Zn1 + x O1.0

Question 70.
Explain defects due to anion vacancies.
OR
Explain colour of crystals or F centres.
Answer:

  • The defect due to anion vacancies imparts colour to the colourless crystal.
  • When a colourless crystal of NaCl is heated in the atmosphere of sodium vapour, the sodium atoms are deposited on the crystal surface.
  • Due to diffusion of Cl ions to the crystal surface vacancies are created at their regular sites.
  • These diffused Cl ions combine with Na atoms on the surface forming NaCl along with releasing electrons from sodium atoms. Na + Cl → NaCl + e

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 47
The released electrons diffuse into the crystal and occupy vacant sites of anions Cl in the crystal.
The anion vacant sites occupied by electrons are called F-centres or colour centres. Due to colour centres NaCl shows yellow colour.
Now NaCl crystal has excess of Na atoms having nonstoichiometric formula Na1+x Cl1.0.

Question 71.
How are solids classified according to electrical conductivity?
Answer:
According to electrical conductivity, solids are classified as follows :
(1) Conductors :

  • The solids having electrical conductivity in the range of 104 to 107 Ohm-1m-1 are called conductors.
  • The examples of conductors are metals and electrolytes.
  • Electrical conductivity in metals is due to free movement of electrons while electrolytes conduct electricity due to migration ions.

(2) Insulators :

  • Solids having very low electrical conductivity in the range of 10-20 to 10-10 Ohm-1 m-1 are called insulators.
  • The examples of insulators are nonmetals and molecular solids.

(3) Semiconductors :

  • Solids having conductivity in the range of 10-6 to 104 Ohm-1m-1 are semiconductors.
  • The conductivity range is intermediate between conductors and insulators.
  • The examples of semiconductors are silicon and germanium.

Question 72.
Explain band theory.
OR
Explain the origin of electrical properties in solids.
Answer:
(1) Metals are good conductors of heat and electricity. This is explained on the basis of band theory which involves the presence of free electrons.

(2) According to band theory, the atomic orbitals of metal atoms overlap to form molecular orbitals which are spread all over the crystal structure.

(3) The energy difference between adjacent molecular orbitals decreases as the number of molecular orbitals increases and when it becomes very less, the orbitals merge into one another forming continuous bands which extent over the entire crystal.

(4) There are two types of bands of molecular orbitals as follows :

  • Valence band : The atomic orbitals with filled electrons from the inner shells form valence bands, where there are no free mobile electrons since they are involved in bonding.
  • Conduction band : Atomic orbitals which are partially filled or empty on overlapping form closely placed molecular orbitals giving conduction bands where electrons are delocalised and can conduct, heat and electricity.

(5) Band gap :

  • The energy difference between valence band and conduction band is called band gap.
  • Band gap decides whether electrons from valence band can be promoted to vacant conduction band or not.
  • The conductors like metals have very small or no band gap and electron can be promoted by thermal energy. The nonconductors have large band gap. The insulators have very large band gap.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 48

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 73.
Metals are good conductors of electricity. Explain.
Answer:
(1) Metals are good conductors of electricity since the outermost electrons of atoms in metallic crystal occupy conduction bands.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 49
(2) The number of electrons in conduction bands is very large.
(3) The conduction bands in metals can be labelled as ‘s’ band, overlapping s and p bands etc. according to overlapping of orbitals.
(4) This results in delocalisation of outermost electrons forming metal ions. Hence, this is analogous to metal cations immersed in the sea of electrons.

Question 74.
Why does metallic conductivity decrease by increasing temperature?
Answer:

  1. In metals a large number of outermost electrons of atoms occupy conduction bands.
  2. Band formation in metals results in delocalisation of outermost electrons forming metal ions or cations.
  3. The metallic cations occupying crystal lattice sites vibrate about mean positions.
  4. As temperature increases the vibrational motion increases which interrupts flow of electrons decreasing electrical conductivity.

Question 75.
Explain insulators.
Answer:
(1) In insulators the valence band is completely filled by electronics while conduction band is empty.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 50
(2) The energy gap between valence band and conduction band in insulator is very large.
(3) Thermal energy is not sufficient to promote electrons from valence band to conduction band.
(4) Therefore, the conduction band in insulator remains vacant and does not allow the conduction of electricity.

Question 76.
What are semiconductors ? Mention the types of semiconductors.
Answer:
(1) Semiconductors : The substances like silicon, germanium which have poor electrical conductance at low temperature but the conductance increases with the increase in temperature are called semiconductors.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 51
(2) Their conductivity lies between metallic conductors and insulators.
(3) The energy difference between valence band and conduction band is relatively small, hence the electrons from valence band can be excited to conduction band by heating.

(4) Types of semiconductors : There are two types of semiconductors :
(a) Intrinsic semiconductor
(b) Extrinsic semiconductor

(a) Intrinsic semiconductor :

  • A pure semiconductor material like pure Si, Ge which have a very low but finite electrical conductivity is called intrinsic semiconductor.
  • The electrical conductivity of a semiconductor increases with the increase in temperature.

(b) Extrinsic semiconductor :

  • Semiconductor doped with different element is called extrinsic semiconductor.
  • By doping with elements like Ga or P, the electrical conductivity is increased.

Question 77.
Explain extrinsic semiconductor and doping.
Answer:
(1) A semiconductor obtained by doping intrinsic semiconductor with elements of third group and fifth group is called extrinsic semiconductor.
(2) This extrinsic semiconductor has higher electrical conductivity than pure intrinsic semiconductor.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 52

(3) There ate two types of extrinsic semiconductors:
(A) n-type semiconductors:
(i) n-type semiconductor contains increased number of electrons in the conduction band.
(ii) When Si semiconductor is doped with 15th group element phosphorus, P, the new atoms occupy some vacant sites in the lattice in place of Si atoms.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 53
(iii) P has five valence electrons, out of which four are involved in covalent bonding with neigh-bouring Si atoms while one electrons remains free and delocalised.
(iv) These free electrons increase the electrical conductivity of the semiconductor.
(v) The semiconductors with extra non-bonding free electrons are called n-type semiconductors.

(B) p-type semiconductor :
(i) p-type semiconductor is obtained by doping a pure semiconductor by an element of 13th group like B.
(ii) 13th group element has less number of valence electrons. When pure Si is doped with B atoms, these atoms occupy Si lattice points.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 54
(iii) Boron (5B) has only 3 valence electrons which form covalent bonds with the neighbouring Si atoms, while one bond has shortage of one electron.
(iv) This creates a vacancy or a hole, hence the electron from neighbouring Si atom jumps into this hole creating a vacancy in itself. This process continues, i.e., positive holes move in one direction while electrons moves in opposite direction.
(v) Due to electron deficient positions, this semiconductor is called p-type semiconductor.
(vi) When p-type semiconductor is connected to the external source of electricity, electrons from neighbouring silicon atoms jump into the holes so that electrons move towards positive electrode and holes migrate towards negative electrode.
(vii) Hence electrical conduction in p-type semiconductor is due to electrons and holes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 78.
What are the uses of semiconductors ?
Answer:
The uses of semiconductors are as follows :

  1. They are used in transistors, digital computers and cameras.
  2. They are used in solar cells and television sets.
  3. By combining n-type and p-type semiconductors, n-p junctions are formed which are effectively used in rectifiers or to convert light energy into electrical energy.

Question 79.
Classify the following semiconductors into n or p-type.
(i) B doped with Si
(ii) As doped with Si
(iii) P doped with Si
(vi) Ge doped with In.
Answer:

SemiconductorType
(i) B doped with Sip-type
(ii) As doped with Sin-type
(iii) P doped with Sin-type
(iv) Ge doped with Inp-type

Question 80.
Explain the origin of magnetic properties in solids.
Answer:
(1) The magnetic properties of a substance arise due to the presence of electrons in their atoms or molecules.

(2) The electrons while revolving around the nucleus in various orbits, also spin around their own axes. Both these motions of electrons result in generating magnetic field and magnetic moments. Hence electron be haves as a tiny magnet.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 55

(3) An atomic orbital can accommodate maximum two electrons with opposite spins, clockwise and anticlockwise. The degenerate orbitals like p, d and f orbitals can accommodate electrons with same spins until they are half filled.

(4) When a substance contains one or more unpaired electrons spinning in same direction, then their magnetic moments and magnetic properties add and the substance is said to be paramagnetic.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 56
If a substance contains all electrons paired then their spins are balanced and magnetic moments and magnetic properties are cancelled and the substance is said to be diamagnetic.

Question 81.
Explain diamagnetism.
Answer:
(1) The magnetic properties of a substance arise due to presence of the electrons.

(2) An electron while revolving around the nucleus, also spins around its own axis and generates a magnetic moment and a magnetic property.

(3) If an atom or a molecule of the substance contains all electrons paired, spinning clockwise and anticlockwise, their magnetic moments and magnetic properties get cancelled. Hence they oppose and repel the applied magnetic field. This phenomenon is called diamagnetism and the substance is said to be diamagnetic.Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 57
For example : Zn, Cd, H2O, NaCl, etc.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 82.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. A substance which on cutting will give irregular cleavage is
(a) glass
(b) KBr
(c) ZnS
(d) NaCl
Answer:
(a) glass

2. A solid which has definite heat of fusion is
(a) plastic
(b) CaCl2
(c) glass
(d) soda lime glass
Answer:
(b) CaCl2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

3. In solids the constituent particles may be
(a) atoms
(b) ions
(c) molecules
(d) any one of the above three
Answer:
(d) any one of the above three

4. A single substance that exists in two or more forms is called
(a) polymorphous
(b) amorphous
(c) isomorphous
(d) monomorphous
Answer:
(a) polymorphous

5. Graphite is a
(a) metallic crystal
(b) covalent crystal
(c) ionic crystal
(d) molecular crystal
Answer:
(b) covalent crystal

6. Anisotropy is observed in
(a) Pyrex glass
(b) plastic
(c) K2SO4
(d) fullerene
Answer:
(c) K2SO4

7. The number of crystal systems (or types) is
(a) 4
(b) 7
(c) 8
(d) 12
Answer:
(b) 7

8. The number of Bravais lattices are
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 12
(d) 14
Answer:
(d) 14

9. Face centred cubic crystal is
(a) Cubic lattice of Bravais system
(b) Bravais lattice of HCP
(c) Bravais lattice of cubic system
(d) Cubic lattice with 5 atoms
Answer:
(c) Bravais lattice of cubic system

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

10. The number of tetrahedral sites per sphere in ccp structure is,
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

11. The packing fraction for a body centred cubic structure is
(a) 0.42
(b) 0.53
(c) 0.68
(d) 0.82
Answer:
(c) 0.68

12. If r is the radius of an atom and a is an edge length of fcc unit cell, then
(a) r = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} a\)
(b) r = \(\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
(c) r = \(\frac{a}{2}\)
(d) r = \(2 \sqrt{2} a\)
Answer:
(b) r = \(\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)

13. The ratio of packing efficiency in see, bcc and fee crystalline structures is
(a) 1 : 1.2 : 1.3
(b) 1 : 1.12 : 1.23
(c) 1 : 1.3 : 1.4
(d) 1 : 1.25 : 1.38
Answer:
(c) 1 : 1.3 : 1.4

14. The correct sequence of the atomic layers in cubic close packing is
(a) ABABA
(b) ABACABAC
(c) ABCABC
(d) AABBAABB
Answer:
(c) ABCABC

15. The major binding force in diamond is
(a) Covalent bond
(b) Ionic bond
(c) Metallic bond
(d) Coordinate covalent bond
Answer:
(a) Covalent bond

16. The ratio of close packed atoms to octahedral holes in cubic packing is
(a) 1 : 1
(b) 1 : 2
(c) 2 : 1
(d) 1 : 3
Answer:
(a) 1 : 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

17. A defect present in AgCl is
(a) Frenkel defect
(b) Schottky defect
(c) point defect
(d) interstitial impurity defect
Answer:
(a) Frenkel defect

18. An ionic solid crystallises in bcc structure. If the ionic radii of cation and anion are 0.84 Å and 1.07 Å, the length of the body diagonal is
(a) 1.91 Å
(b) 2.75 Å
(c) 3.82 Å
(d) 2.32 Å
Answer:
(c) 3.82 Å

19. The type of defect in NaCl crystal will be
(a) point defect
(b) interstitial defect
(c) vacancy defect
(d) impurity defect
Answer:
(c) vacancy defect

20. Schottky defects are observed in which solid among the following ?
(a) Brass
(b) Cesium chloride
(c) Zinc sulphide
(d) Stainless steel
Answer:
(b) Cesium chloride

21. An ionic compound crystallises in FCC type structure with ‘A’ ions at the centre of each face and ‘B’ ions occupying comers of the cube. The formula of compound is
(a) AB4
(b) A3B
(c) AB
(d) AB3
Answer:
(b) A3B

22. Total number of different primitive unit cells are
(a) 6
(b) 7
(c) 12
(d) 14.
Answer:
(d) 14

23. The volume of atoms present in body centred cubic unit cell of a metal of atomic radius r is,
(a) \(\frac{16}{3} \pi r^{3}\)
(b) \(\frac{8}{3} \pi r^{3}\)
(c) \(\frac{12}{3} \pi r^{3}\)
(d) \(\frac{24}{3} \pi r^{3}\)
Answer:
(b) \(\frac{8}{3} \pi r^{3}\)

24. The substances which can be permanently magnetised are
(a) diamagnetic
(b) paramagnetic
(c) ferromagnetic
(d) non-magnetic
Answer:
(c) ferromagnetic

25. CrO2 is
(a) diamagnetic
(b) paramagnetic
(c) metalic
(d) ferromagnetic
Answer:
(d) ferromagnetic

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

26. A metallic element crystallises in face centred cubic structure. If the radius of metal ion is 0.92 Å, the edge length of the unit cell of the crystal is
(a) 0.8464 Å
(b) 1.252 Å
(c) 5.187 Å
(d) 2.6 Å
Answer:
(d) 2.6 Å

27. The volume of unit cell of a metallic crystal of bcc type is 8.4 × 10-23 cm3. The volume occupied by 10 atoms in the crystalline structure is
(a) 4.2 × 10-22 cm3
(b) 3.12 × 10-23 cm3
(c) 1.74 × 10-23 cm3
(d) 2.856 × 10-22 cm3
Answer:
(d) 2.856 × 10-22 cm3

28. Copper crystallises in face centred cubic structure. If the unit cell length is 360 pm, the radius of copper atom is
(a) 180 pm
(b) 156 pm
(c) 127 pm
(d) 110 pm
Answer:
(c) 127 pm

29. If all the lattice points in ccp structure namely comers, face and edge centres and body centre are occupied by atoms then the total number of atoms in the unit cell will be
(a) 8
(b) 12
(c) 14
(d) 16
Answer:
(a) 8

30. Gold crystallises in face centred cubic structure. If atomic mass of gold is 197 g mol-1, the mass of the unit cell of gold will be
(a) 3.25 × 10-23 kg
(b) 6.5 × 10-23 kg
(c) 3.9 × 10-24 kg
(d) 1.3 × 10-24 kg
Answer:
(d) 1.3 × 10-24 kg

31. The mass of a unit cell of a body centred cubic crystal of a metal is 72.2 × 10-23 g. The atomic mass of the metal is
(a) 128.6 gmol-1
(b) 108.7 gmol-1
(c) 217.3 gmol-1
(d) 57.86 gmol-1
Answer:
(c) 217.3 gmol-1

32. An element crystallises in fee structure. If the atomic mass of the element is 72.7 U, the mass of one unit cell of it will be
(a) 2.9 × 10-24 g
(b) 4.83 × 10-25 kg
(c) 1.2 × 10-22 g
(d) 2.41 × 10-24 kg
Answer:
(b) 4.83 × 10-25 kg

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

33. Edge length of a cubic unit cell is 354 pm. The distance between two atoms diagonally opposite on the face is
(a) 500 pm
(b) 354 pm
(c) 708 pm
(d) 627 pm
Answer:
(a) 500 pm

34. The unit cell has an edge length 403 pm. The distance between two atoms placed opposite ends of body diagonal will be
(a) 806 pm
(b) 201.5 pm
(c) 698 pm
(d) 578 pm
Answer:
(c) 698 pm

35. An element having atomic mass 115 u, crystallises in bcc structure. The number of unit cells in 1 g of the element will be
(a) 2.6 × 1021
(b) 3.8 × 1023
(c) 8.7 × 10-3
(d) 6.17 × 1020
Answer:
(a) 2.6 × 1021

36. The edge length of a bcc unit cell of a metallic crystal is 2.9 Å. Hence the diameter of an atom is
(a) 1.025 Å
(b) 2.512 Å
(c) 1.45 Å
(d) 1.31 Å
Answer:
(b) 2.512 Å

37. An element crystallises in fee structure. If the atomic radius is 130 pm, the edge length of unit cell is
(a) 332.5 pm
(b) 410 pm
(c) 390 pm
(d) 367.6 pm
Answer:
(d) 367.6 pm

38. The arrangement of layers in hexagonal close packing is
(a) ABCABC
(b) ABAB
(c) ABBABBA
(d) ABBCABBC
Answer:
(b) ABAB

39. For square close packing, the planar arrangement is
(a) AAAA
(b) ABAB
(c) ABCABC
(d) AABBAA
Answer:
(a) AAAA

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

40. Semiconductors are manufactured by addition of impurities of
(a) p-block elements
(b) actinoids
(c) Lanthanoids
(d) s-block elements
Answer:
(a) p-block elements

41. p-type semiconductor is formed when trace amount of impurity is added to silicon. The number of valence electrons in the impurity atom must be
(a) 3
(b) 5
(c) 1
(d) 2
Answer:
(a) 3

42. n-type semiconductor is formed when trace amount of impurity is added to silicon. The number of valence electrons in the impurity atom must be
(a) 3
(b) 5
(c) 1
(d) 2
Answer:
(b) 5

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Textbook Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

1. Choose the correct option from the given alternatives.

Question i.
Nylon fibers are …………………………………..
A. Semisynthetic fibres
B. Polyamide fibres
C. Polyester fibres
D. Cellulose fibres
Answer:
B. polyamide fibres

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question ii.
Which of the following is naturally occurring polymer?
A. Telfon
B. Polyethylene
C. PVC
D. Protein
Answer:
D. Protein

Question iii.
Silk is a kind of …………………………………. fibre
A. Semisynthetic
B. Synthetic
C. Animal
D. Vegetable
Answer:
C. an animal

Question iv.
Dacron is another name of …………………………………. .
A. Nylon 6
B. Orlon
C. Novolac
D. Terylene
Answer:
D. Terylene

Question v.
Which of the following is made up of polyamides?
A. Dacron
B. Rayon
C. Nylon
D. Jute
Answer:
C. Nylon

Question vi.
The number of carbon atoms present in the ring of ε – caprolactam is
A. Five
B. Two
C. Seven
D. Six
Answer:
D. Six

Question vii.
Terylene is …………………………………. .
A. Polyamide fibre
B. Polyester fibre
C. Vegetable fibre
D. Protein fibre
Answer:
B. Polyester fibre

Question viii.
PET is formed by …………………………………. .
A. Addition
B. Condensation
C. Alkylation
D. Hydration
Answer:
D. Hydration

Question ix.
Chemically pure cotton is …………………………………. .
A. Acetate rayon
B. Viscose rayon
C. Cellulose nitrate
D. Cellulose
Answer:
D. Cellulose

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question x.
Teflon is chemically inert, due to presence of …………………………………. .
A. C-H bond
B. C-F bond
C. H- bond
D. C=C bond
Answer:
A. C-H bond

2. Answer the following in one sentence each.

Question i.
Identify ‘A’ and ‘B’ in the following reaction …………………………………. .
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 1
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 70

Question ii.
Complete the following statements
a. Caprolactam is used to prepare …………………………………. .
b. Novolak is a copolymer of …………………………………. and …………………………………. .
c. Terylene is ………………………………….. polymer of terephthalic acid and ethylene glycol.
d. Benzoyl peroxide used in addtion polymerisation acts as …………………………………. .
e. Polyethene consists of polymerised …………………………………. .
Answer:
a. Nylon-6
b. Phenol, formaldehyde
c. polyester
d. initiator (catalyst)
e. linear or branched-chain

Question iii.
Draw the flow chart diagram to show the classification of polymers based on type of polymerisation.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 71

Question iv.
Write examples of Addition polymers and condensation polymers.
Answer:
Addition polymers : Polyvinyl chloride, polythene
Condensation polymers : Bakelite, terylene, Nylon-66

Question v.
Name some chain-growth polymers.
Answer:
Chain growth polymers : Polythene, polyacrylonitrile and polyvinyl chloride.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question vi.
Define the terms :
1) Monomer
2) Vulcanisation
3) Synthetic fibres
Answer:
1. Monomer is a small and simple molecule and has a capacity to form two chemical bonds with other monomers. Examples : Ethene, Propylene.
2. The process by which a network of cross-links is introduced into an elastomer is called vulcanisation or it can also be defined as the process of heating natural rubber with sulphur to increase the tensile strength, toughness and elasticity of natural rubber is known as vulcanization of rubber.
3. The man-made fibres prepared by polymerization of one monomer or copolymerization of two or more monomers are called synthetic fibres.

Question vii.
What type of intermolecular force leads to high-density polymer?
Answer:
High density polymers have low degree of branching along the hydrocarbon chain. The molecules are closely packed together during crystallization. This closer packing means that the van der Waals attraction between the chains are greater and so the plastic (high density polymer) is stronger and has a melting point.

Question viii.
Give one example each of copolymer and homopolymer.
Answer:
Homopolymer : PVC, Nylon-6
Copolymer : Terylene, Buna-S

Question ix.
Identify Thermoplastic and Thermosetting Plastics from the following …………………………………. .
1. PET
2. Urea-formaldehyde resin
3. Polythene
4. Phenol formaldehyde
Answer:
Thermoplastic plastics : PET, Polythene
Thermosetting plastics : Urea formaldehyde resin, Phenol formaldehyde

3. Answer the following.

Question i.
Write the names of classes of polymers formed according to intermolecular forces and describe briefly their structural characteristics.
Answer:
Molecular forces bind the polymer chains either by hydrogen bonds or Vander Waal’s forces. These forces are called intermolecular forces. On the basis of magnitude of intcrmolccular forces, polymers are further classified as ebstomers, fibres, thermoplastic polymers. thermosetting polymers.

(1) Elastomers: Weak van der Waals type of intermolecular forces of attraction between the polymer chains are observed in cbstomcrs. When polymer is stretched, the polymer chain stretches and when the strain is relieved the chain returns to its odginal position, Thus, polymer shows elasticity and is called elastomers. Elastomers, the elastic polymers, have weak van der Waals type of intermolecular forces which permit the polymer to be stretched. Lilastorners are soft and stretchy and used in making rubber bands. E.g.. neoprene, vulcanized rubber, buna.S, buna-N.

(2) Fibres : It consists of strong intermolecular forces of’ attraction due to hydrogen bonding and strong dipole-dipole forces. These polymers possess high tensile strength. Due to these strong intermolecular forces the fibres are crystalline in nature. They are used in textile industries, strung tyres. etc.. e.g., nylon, terylene.

(3) Thermoplastic polymers: These polymer possess moderately strong intermolecular forces of attraction between those of elastomers and fibres. These polymers arc called thermoplastic because they become soft on heating and hard on cooling. They are either linear or branched chain polymers. They can be remoulded and recycled. E.g. polyethenc, PVC, polystyrene.

(4) Thermosetting polymers: These polymers are cross linked or branched molecules and are rigid polymers. During their formation they have property of being shaped on heating. but they get hardened while hot. Once hardened these become infusible, cannot be softened by heating and therefore, cannot be remoulded and recycled.
This shows extensive cross linking by covalent bonds formed in the moulds during hardening/setting process while hot. E.g. Bakelite, urea formaldehyde resin.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question ii.
Write reactions of formation of :
a. Nylon 6
b. Terylene
Answer:
Terylene is polyester fibre formed by the polymerization of terephthalic acid and ethylene glycol.

Terylene is obtained by condensation polymerization of ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid in presence of catalyst zinc acetate and antimony trioxide at high temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 26

Properties :

  • Terylene has relatively high melting point (265 °C)
  • It is resistant to chemicals and water.

Uses :

  • It is used for making wrinkle free fabrics by blending with cotton (terycot) and wool (terywool), and also as glass reinforcing materials in safety helmets.
  • PET is the most common thermoplastic which is another trade name of the polyester polyethylenetereph- thalate.
  • It is used for making many articles like bottles, jams, packaging containers.

Question iii.
Write the structure of natural rubber and neoprene rubber along with the name and structure of thier monomers.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 27

Question iv.
Name the polymer type in which the following linkage is present.
Answer:
The Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 74 linkage is present in terylene or dacron polymer.

Question v.
Write the structural formula of the following synthetic rubbers :
a. SBR rubber
b. Buna-N rubber
c. Neoprene rubber
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 41

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question vi.
Match the following pairs :
Name of polymer – Monomer
1. Teflon – a. CH2 = CH2
2. PVC – b. CF2 = CF2
3. Polyester – c. CH2 = CHCl
4. Polythene – d. C6H5OH and HCHO
5. Bakelite – e. Dicarboxylic acid and polyhydoxyglycol
Answer:

  1. Teflon – CF2 = CF2
  2. PVC – CH2 = CHCI
  3. Polyester-Dicarboxylic acid and polyhydoxyglycol
  4. Polythene – CH2 = CH2
  5. Bakelite – C6H5OH and HCHO

Question vii.
Draw the structures of polymers formed from the following monomers
1. Adipic acid + Hexamethylenediamine
2. e – Aminocaproic acid + Glycine
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 32

Question viii.
Name and draw the structure of the repeating unit in natural rubber.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 14Repeating unit of natural rubber (Basic unit : isoprene)

Question ix.
Classify the following polymers as natural and synthetic polymers
a. Cellulose
b. Polystyrene
c. Terylene
d. Starch
e. Protein
f. Silicones
g. Orlon (Polyacrylonitrile)
h. Phenol-formaldehyde resins
Answer:

Natural Polymers1. Cellulose 4. Starch 5. Protein
Synthetic Polymers2. Polystyrene 3. Terylene 6. Silicones 7. Orion (Polyacrylonitrile) 8. phenol-formaldehyde resin

Question x.
What are synthetic resins? Name some natural and synthetic resins.
Answer:
Synthetic resins are artificially synthesised high molecular weight polymers. They are the basic raw material of plastic. The main properties of plastic depend on the synthetic resin it is made from.

Examples of natural resins : Rosin, Damar, Copal, Sandarac, Amber, Manila
Examples of synthetic resins : Polyester resin, Phenolic resin, Alkyl resin, Polycarbonate resin, Polyamide resin, Polyurethane resin, silicone resin, Epoxy resin, Acrylic resin.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question xi.
Distinguish between thermosetting and thermoplastic resins. Write example of both the classes.
Answer:

Thermosetting resinThermoplastic resin
(1) They harden when heated. Once hardened it no longer melts.(1) They soften when heated and harden again when cooled.
(2) They cannot be re-shaped.(2) They can be reshaped
(3) They are strong, hard.(3) They are weak, soft.
(4) Thermosetting resin show cross-linking.
Examples : Melamine resin Epoxy resins, Bake-lite.
(4) Thermoplastic molecules do not cross link, hence are flexible.
Examples : Polythene, polypropylene, nylon, polyester.

Question xii.
Write name and formula of raw material from which bakelite is made.
Answer:
The raw material or monomers used to prepare bakelite are o-hydroxymethyl phenol Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 35 and formaldehyde (HCHO)

4. Attempt the following :

Question i.
Identify condensation polymers and addition polymers from the following.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 2
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 68

Question ii.
Write the chemical reactions involved in the manufacture of Nylon 6, 6
Answer:
Nylon-6, 6 is a linear polyamide polymer formed by the condensation polymerisation reaction. The monomers used in the preparation of Nylon-6, 6 are :
(1) Adipic acid : HOOC-(CH2)4-COOH
(2) Hexamethylene diamine : H2N-(CH2)6-NH2

When equimolar aqueous solutions of adipic acid and hexamethylene diamine are mixed and heated, there is neutralization to form a nylon salt. During polymerisation at 553 k nylon salt loses a water molecule to form nylon 6, 6 polymer. Both monomers (hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid) contain six carbon atoms each, hence the polymer is termed as Nylon-6,6.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 24

Properties and uses : Nylon 6,6 is high molecular mass (12000 – 50000 u) linear condensation polymer. It possesses high tensile strength. It does not soak in water. It is used for making sheets, bristles for brushes, surgical sutures, textile fabrics, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question iii.
Explain the vulcanisation of rubber. Which vulcanizing agents are used for the following synthetic rubber.
a. Neoprene
b. Buna-N
Answer:
The process by which a network of cross links is introduced into an elastomer is called vulcanization.

Vulcanization enhances the properties of natural rubber like tensile strength, stiffness, elasticity, toughness etc. Sulphur forms cross links between polyisoprene chains which results in improved properties of rubber.

  • For neoprene vulcanizing agent is MgO.
  • For Buna-N vulcanizing agent is sulphur.

Question iv.
Write reactions involved in the formation of …………………………………. .
1) Teflon
2) Bakelite
Answer:
The monomers phenol and formaldehyde undergo polymerisation in the presence of alkali or acid as catalyst.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 33
Phenol reacts with formaldehyde to form ortho or p-hydroxy methyl phenols, which further reacts with phenol to form a linear polymer called Novolac. It is used in paints.

In the third stage, various articles are shaped from novolac by putting it in appropriate moulds and heating at high temperature (138 °C to 176 °C) and at high pressure forms rigid polymeric material called bakelite. Bakelite is insoluble and infusible and has high tensile strength.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 34
Bakelite is used in making articles like telephone instrument, kitchenware, electric insulators frying pans, etc.

2. Teflon is polytetrafluoroethylene. The monomer used in preparation of teflon is tetrafluoroethylene, (CF2 = CF2) which is a gas at room temperature. Tetrafluoroethylene is polymerized by using free radical initiators such as hydrogen peroxide or ammonium persulphate at high pressure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 22

Properties:

  • Telflon is tough, chemically inert and resistant to heat and attack by corrosive reagents.
  • C – F bond is very difficult to break and remains unaffected by corrosive alkali, organic solvents.
    Uses : Telflon is used in making non-stick cookware, oil seals, gaskets, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question v.
What is meant by LDP and HDP? Mention the basic difference between the same with suitable examples.
Answer:

  • LDP is low density polyethylene and HDP is high density polyethylene.
  • LDP is a branched polymer with low density due to chains are loosely held and HDP is a linear polymer with density due to close packing.
  • HDP is much stiffer than LDP and has high tensile strength and hardness.

LDP is mainly used in preparation of pipes for agriculture, irrigation and domestic water line connections. HDP is used in manufacture of toys and other household articles like bucket, bottles, etc.

Question vi.
Write preparation, properties and uses of Teflon.
Answer:
Teflon is polytetrafluoroethylene. The monomer used in preparation of teflon is tetrafluoroethylene, (CF2 = CF2) which is a gas at room temperature. Tetrafluoroethylene is polymerized by using free radical initiators such as hydrogen peroxide or ammonium persulphate at high pressure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 22

Properties:

  • Telflon is tough, chemically inert and resistant to heat and attack by corrosive reagents.
  • C – F bond is very difficult to break and remains unaffected by corrosive alkali, organic solvents.
    Uses : Telflon is used in making non-stick cookware, oil seals, gaskets, etc.

Question vii.
Classify the following polymers as straight-chain, branched-chain and cross-linked polymers.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 8

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

5. Answer the following.

Question i.
How is polythene manufactured? Give their properties and uses.
Answer:
LDP means low density polyethylene. LDP is obtained by polymerization of ethylene under high pressure (1000 – 2000 atm) and temperature (350 – 570 K) in presence of traces of O2 or peroxide as initiator.

The mechanism of this reaction involves free radical addition and H-atom abstraction. The latter results in branching. As a result the chains are loosely held and the polymer has low density.

Properties of LDP :

  • LDP films are extremely flexible, but tough chemically inert and moisture resistant.
  • It is poor conductor of electricity with melting point 110 °C.

Uses of LDP :

  • LDP is mainly used in preparation of pipes for agriculture, irrigation, domestic water line connections as well as insulation to electric cables.
  • It is also used in submarine cable insulation.
  • It is used in producing extruded films, sheets, mainly for packaging and household uses like in preparation of squeeze bottles, attractive containers, etc.

HDP means high density polyethylene. It is a linear polymer with high density due to close packing.

HDP is obtained by polymerization of ethene in presence of Zieglar-Natta catalyst which is a combination of triethyl aluminium with titanium tetrachloride at a temperature of 333K to 343K and a pressure of 6-7 atm.

Properties of HDP :

  • HDP is crystalline, melting point in the range of 144 – 150 °C.
  • It is much stiffer than LDP and has high tensile strength and hardness.
  • It is more resistant to chemicals than LDP.

Uses of HDP :

  • HDP is used in manufacture of toys and other household articles like buckets, dustbins, bottles, pipes, etc.
  • It is used to prepare laboratory wares and other objects where high tensile strength and stiffness is required.

Question ii.
Is synthetic rubber better than natural rubber? If so, in what respect?
Answer:
Yes. Synthetic rubber is more resistant to abrasion than natural rubber and is also superior in resistance to heat and the effects of aging (lasts longer). Many types of synthetic rubber are flame-resistant, so they can be used in insulation for electrical devices.

It also remains flexible at low temperatures and is resistant to grease and oil. It is resistant to heat, light and certain chemicals.

Question iii.
Write main specialities of Buna-S, Neoprene rubber?
Answer:
Buna-S is an elastomer and it is copolymer of styrene with butadiene. Its trade name is SBR. Buna-S is superior to natural rubber, because of its mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. It is used in tyre industry. It is vulcanized with sulphur. Neoprene is a synthetic rubber and it is a condensation polymer of chloroprene (2-chloro-l, 3-butadiene). Vulcanization of neoprene takes place in presence of MgO. It is resistant to petroleum, vegetable oils. Neoprene is used in making hose pipes for transport of gasoline and making gaskets.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Question iv.
Write the structure of isoprene and the polymer obtained from it.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 82

Question v.
Explain in detail the free radical mechanism involved during the preparation of the addition polymer.
Answer:
Polymerisation of ethylene is carried out at high temperature and at high pressure in presence of small amount of acetyl peroxide as initiator.

(1) Formation of free radicals : The first step involves clevage of acetyl peroxide to form two carboxy radicals. These carboxy radicals immediately undergo decarboxylation to give methyl initiator free radicals.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 15

(2) Chain initiating step : The methyl radical thus formed adds to ethylene to form a new larger free radical.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 16

(3) Chain propagation step : The larger free radical formed in the chain initiating step reacts with another molecule of ethene to form another big size free radicals and chain grows. This is called chain propagation step.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 17

The chain reaction continues till thousands of ethylene molecules are added.

(4) Chain terminating step : The continuous chain reaction can be terminated by the combination of free radicals to form polyethene.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 18

Activity :
i. Collect the information of the process like extrusion and moulding in Textile Industries.
ii. Make a list of polymers used to make the following articles
a. Photographic film
b. Frames of spectacles
c. Fountain pens
d. Moulded plastic chains
e. Terywool or Terycot fabric
iii. Prepare a report on factors responsible for degradation of polymers giving suitable example.
iv. Search and make a chart/note on silicones with reference to monomers, structure, properties and uses.
v. Collect the information and data about Rubber industry, plastic industry and synthetic fibre (rayon) industries running in India.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

12th Chemistry Digest Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry Intext Questions and Answers

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 323)

Question 1.
Differentiate between natural and synthetic polymers.
Answer:

Natural polymersSynthetic polymers
(1) The polymers are obtained either from plants or animals.(1) The man made fibres prepared by polymerization of monomer or copolymerization of two or more monomers.
(2) They are further divided into two types :
(i) plant polymers
(ii) Animal polymers.Examples: Cotton, linen, latex
(2) They are further divided into three subtypes :
(i) fibres
(ii) synthetic rubbers
(iii) plastics.Examples : Nylon, terylene Buna-S

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 325)

Question 1.
What is the type of polymerization in the following examples?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 11
Answer:
(i) Addition polymerization
(ii) Condensation polymerization

Problem 15.1 : (Textbook Page No 326)

Question 1.
Refer to the following table listing for different polymers formed from respective monomers. Identify from the list whether it is copolymer or homopolymer.

MonomerPolymers
EthylenePolyethene
Vinyl chloridePolyvinyl chloride
IsobutylenePolyisobutylene
AcrylonitrilePolyacrylonitrile
CaprolactamNylon 6
Hexamethylene diammonium adipateNylon 6, 6
Butadiene + styreneBuna-S

Solution :
In each of first five cases, there is only one monomer which gives corresponding homopolymer. In the sixth case hexamethylene diamine reacts with adipic acid to form the salt hexamethylene diammonium adipate which undergoes condensation to form Nylon 6, 6. Hence nylon 6, 6 is homopolymer. The polymer Buna-S is formed by polymerization of the monomers butadiene and styrene in presence of each other. The repeating units corresponding to the monomers butadiene and styrene are randomly arranged in the polymer. Hence Buna-S is copolymer.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 328)

Question 1.
(1) From the cis-polyisoprene structure of natural rubber explain the low strength of van der Waals forces in it.
(2) Explain how the vulcanization of natural rubber improves its elasticity. (Hint : consider the intermolecular links.)
Answer:
(1) (i) Natural rubber is cis-polyisoprene. It is obtained by polymerization of isoprene units at 1, 4 positions. In rubber molecule, double bonds are located between C2 and C3 of each isoprene unit. These cis-double bonds do not allow the polymer chain to come closer. Therefore, only weak vander Waals’ forces are present. Since the chains are not linear, they can be stretched just like springs and exhibit elastic properties.

(ii) Cis-1, 4 polyisoprene (Natural rubber), due to this cis configuration about the double bonds, has the adjacent chain that do not fit together well (there is no close packing of adjacent chains). The only force that interact is the weak or low strength of van der Waals’ forces.

(iii) Cis-polyisoprene has a coiled structure in which the various polymer chains are held together by weak van der Waals’ forces.

(2) (i) Vulcanization of rubber is a process of improvement of the rubber elasticity and strength by heating it in the presence of sulphur, which results in three dimensional cross-linking of the chain rubber molecules (polyisoprene) bonded to each other by sulphur atoms.

(ii) Vulcanisation makes rubber more elastic and more stiffer. On vulcanisation, sulphur forms cross links at the reactive sites of double bonds and thus rubber get stiffened.

(iii) The improved properties of vulcanised rubber are (i) high elasticity (ii) low water absorption tendency,

(iii) resistance to oxidation.

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 334)

Question 1.
Write structural formulae of styrene and polybutadiene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 43

(1) Classify the following polymers as addition or condensation.
(i) PVC (ii) Polyamides
(iii) Polystyrene
(iv) Polycarbonates
(v) Novolac
Answer:
Addition polymers: PVC, Polystyrene
(ondensatlon polymers: Polyamides. Polycarbonates, Novolac

Question 2.
Completed the following table :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 44

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 335)

(1) Represent the copolymerization reaction between glycine and e aminocaproic acid to form the copolymer nylon 2-nylon 6.
(2) What is the origin of the numbers 2 and 6 in the name of this polymer?
Answer:
(1) It is a copolymer and has polyamide linkages. The monomers glycine and e-amino caproic acid undergo condensation polymerisation to form nylon-2-nylon-6.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Introduction to Polymer Chemistry 46
Nylon-2-nylon-6 is used in orthopaedic devices and implants.

(2) Monomer glycine contains two carbon atoms and e amino caproic acid contains six carbon atoms, hence the polymer is termed as nylon-2-nylon-6.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Textbook Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

1. Select the most correct choice.

Question i.
CH2OH-CO-(CHOH)4-CH2OH is an example of
a. Aldohexose
b. Aldoheptose
c. Ketotetrose
d. Ketoheptose
Answer:
(d) Ketoheptose

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question ii.
The open chain formula of glucose does not contain
a. Formyl group
b. Anomeric hydroxyl group
c. Primary hydroxyl group
d. Secondary hydroxyl group
Answer:
(b) Anomeric hydroxyl group

Question iii.
Which of the following does not apply to CH2NH2 – COOH
a. Neutral amino acid
b. L – amino acid
c. Exists as zwitterion
d. Natural amino acid
Answer:
(d) Natural amino acid

Question iv.
Tryptophan is called essential amino acid because
a. It contains an aromatic nucleus.
b. It is present in all the human proteins.
c. It cannot be synthesized by the human body.
d. It is an essential constituent of enzymes.
Answer:
(c) It cannot be synthesised by human body.

Question v.
A disulfide link gives rise to the following structure of protein.
a. Primary
b. Secondary
c. Tertiary
d. Quaternary
Answer:
(c) Tertiary

Question vi.
RNA has
a. A – U base pairing
b. P – S – P – S backbone
c. double helix
d. G – C base pairing
Answer:
(a) A – U base pairing

2. Give scientific reasons :

Question i.
The disaccharide sucrose gives negative Tollens test while the disaccharide maltose gives positive Tollens test.
Answer:
(1) In disaccharide sucrose, the reducing groups of glucose and fructose are involved in glycosidic bond formation, sucrose is a nonreducing sugar. As there is no free aldehyde group, it does not reduce Tollen’s reagent to metallic silver. Hence, sucrose gives negative Tollen’s test.

(2) While the disaccharide maltose is a reducing sugar because a free aldehyde group can be produced at C1 of second sugar molecule. It is a reducing sugar. It reduces Tollen’s reagent to shining silver mirror. Hence, Maltose gives positive Tollen’s test.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question ii.
On complete hydrolysis DNA gives equimolar quantities of adenine and thymine.
Answer:
On complete hydrolysis DNA yields 2-deoxy-D-ribose, adenine, thymine, guanine, cystosine and phosphoric acid. Since adenine always forms two hydrogen bonds with thymine, the hydrolysis of DNA gives equimolar quantities of adenine and thymine.

Question iii.
α – Amino acids have high melting points compared to the corresponding amines or carboxylic acids of comparable molecular mass.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 102
α-Amino acids have high melting points compared to the corresponding amines or carboxylic acids of comparable molecular mass due to the presence of both acidic (carboxylic group) and basic (amino group) groups in the same molecule. In aqueous solution, proton transfer from acidic group to amino (basic) group of amino acid forms a salt, which is a dipolar ion called zwitter ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 103

Question iv.
Hydrolysis of sucrose is called inversion.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 104
Sucrose is dextro rotatory. On hydrolysis it gives equimolar mixture of D – ( + ) glucose and D – ( -) fructose. Since the laevorotation of fructose (- 92.4°) is more than dextrorotation of glucose ( + 52.7°), the hydrolysis product has net laevorotation. Thus, hydrolysis of sucrose brings about a change in the sign of rotation, from dextro ( + ) to laevo (-) and the product is called as invert sugar and so the hydrolysis of sucrose is called inversion.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question v.
On boiling, egg albumin becomes opaque white.
Answer:
Upon boiling the egg, denaturation αcurs. During denaturation, secondary and tertiary structures are destroyed, but primary structure remains intact. Egg contains soluble globular proteins, which forms insoluble fibrous proteins (opque) on boiling egg.

3. Answer the following

Question i.
Some of the following statements apply to DNA only, some to RNA only and some to both. Lable them accordingly.
a. The polynucleotide is double stranded. ( …………… )
b. The polynucleotide contains uracil. ( …………… )
c. The polynucleotide contains D-ribose ( …………… ).
d. The polynucleotide contains Guanine ( …………… ).
Answer:
(1) The polynucleotide is double stranded. (DNA)
(2) The polynucleotide contains uracil. (RNA)
(3) The polynucleotide contain D-ribose (RNA)
(4) Thc polynucleotide contains Guanine (DNA, RNA)

Question ii.
Write the sequence of the complementary strand for the following segments of a DNA molecule.
a. 5′ – CGTTTAAG – 3′
b. 5′ – CCGGTTAATACGGC – 3′
Answer:
(1) DNA molecule : 5′ – CGTTTAAG – 3′
The complementary strand runs in opposite direction from the 3′ end to the 5′ end. It has the base sequence decided by complementary base pairs A – T and C – G.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 100
(2) DNA molecule : 5′ – CCGGTTAATACGGC – 3′
The complementary strand runs in opposite direction from the 3′ end to the 5′ end. It has the base sequence decided by complementary base pairs A – T and C – G.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 101

Question iii.
Write the names and schematic representations of all the possible dipeptides formed from alanine, glycine and tyrosine.
Answer:
(1) Dipeptide formed from alanine and glycine
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 67
(2) Dipeptide formed from alanine and tyrosine
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 68
(3) Dipeptide formed from glycine and tyrosine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 69

Question iv.
Give two pieces of evidence for the presence of the formyl group in glucose.
Answer:
(1) Glucose reacts with hydroxyl amine in an aqueous solution to form glucose oxime. This indicates the presence of – CHO (formyl group) in glucose.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 15
(2) Glucose on oxidation with mild oxidising agent like bromine water gives gluconic acid which shows carbonyl group in glucose is aldehyde (formyl group) group.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 16

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

4. Draw a neat diagram for the following:

Question i.
Haworth formula of glucopyranose
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 30

Question ii.
Zwitter ion
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 61

Question iii.
Haworth formula of maltose
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 38

Question iv.
Secondary structure of the protein

Answer:
The structure of proteins can be studied at four different levels i.e. primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary levels. Each level is more complex than the previous one.
(1) Primary structure of proteins :
(a) Representation by structural formula
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 76

(b) Representation with amino acid symbols
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 77

Primary structure of proteins is the sequence of constituent a-amino acid residues linked by peptide bonds. Any change in the sequence of amino acid residue creates different protein molecule. Primary structure of proteins is represented by writing the three letter symbols of amino acid residues as per their sequence in the concerned protein. The symbols are separated by dashes. According to the convention, the N-terminal amino acid residue as written at the left end and the C-terminal amino acid residue at the right end.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

(2) Secondary structure of proteins : The three-dimensional arrangement of lαalized regions of a long polypeptide chain is called the secondary structure of protein. Hydrogen bonding between N-H proton of one amide linkage and C = O oxygen of another gives rise to the secondary structure. There are two different types of secondary structures i.e. α-helix and β-pleated sheet.

α-Helix : In a-helix structure, a polypeptide chain gets coiled by twisting into a right handed or clαkwise spiral known as a-helixn. The characteristic features of α-helical structure of protein are :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 78
(1) Each turn of the helix has 3.6 amino acids.
(2) A C = O group of one amino acid is hydrogen bonded to N – H group of the fourth amino acid along the chain.
(3) Hydrogen bonds are parallel to the axis of helix while R groups extend outward from the helix core.
Myosin in muscle and a-keratin in hair are proteins with almost entire a-helical secondary structure.

β-Pleated sheet : In secondary structure, when two or more polypeptide chains (strands) line up side-by-side is called β-pleated sheets. The β-picate sheet structure of protein consists of extended strands of polypeptide chains held together by intermolecular hydrogen bonding. The characteristics of β-pleated sheet structure are :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 79

  • The C = O and N – H bonds lie in the planes of the sheet.
  • Hydrogen bonding occurs between the N – H and C = O groups of nearby amino acid residues in the neighbouring chains.
  • The R groups are oriented above and below the plane of the sheet.

The β-pleated sheet arrangement is favoured by amino acids with small R groups.

(3) Tertiary structure of proteins :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 80
The three-dimensional shape acquired by the entire polypeptide chain of a protein is called its tertiary structure. The structure is stabilized and has attractive interaction with the aqueous environment of the cell due to the folding of the chain in a particular manner. Tertiary structure gives rise to two major molecular shapes i.e. globular and fibrous proteins. The main forces which stabilize a particular tertiary structure include hydrogen bonding, dipole-dipole attraction (due to polar bonds in the side chains), electrostatic attraction (due to the ionic groups like -COO, \(\mathrm{NH}_{3}^{+}\) in the side chain) and also London dispersion forces. Finally, disulfide bonds formed by oxidation of nearby – SH groups (in cysteine residues) are the covalent bonds which stabilize the tertiary structure.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

(4) Quaternary structure of proteins The two or more polypeptide chains with folded tertiary structures forms complex protein. The spatial arrangements of these polypeptide chains with respect to each other is known as quaternary structure. Each individual polypeptide chain is called a subunit of the overall protein. For example: Haemoglobin consists of four subunits called haeme held together by intermolecular forces in a compact three dimensional shape. Haemoglobin can do its function of oxygen transport only when all the four subunits are together.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 81

Question v.
AMP
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 105

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question vi.
dAMP
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 106

Question vii.
One purine base from nucleic acid
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 88

Question viii.
Enzyme catalysis
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 85

Activity :

  • Draw the structure of a segment of DNA comprising at least ten nucleotides on a big chart paper.
  • Make a model of DNA double stranded structure as group activity.

12th Chemistry Digest Chapter 14 Biomolecules Intext Questions and Answers

Try ….. this (Textbook Page No 298)

Question 1.
Observe the following structural formulae carefully and answer the questions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 2
(1) How many OH groups are present in glucose, fructose and ribose respectively?
(2) Which other functional groups are present in these three compounds?
Answer:
(1) Glucose contains five hydroxyl (- OH) groups.
Fructose contains five hydroxyl ( – OH) groups.
Ribose contains four hydroxyl ( – OH) groups.

(2) Glucose contains aldehyde ( – CHO) as other functional group.
Fructose contains ketonic group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 3 as other functional group.
Ribose contains aldehyde ( – CHO) as other functional group.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 299)

Question 1.
Give IUPAC names to the following monosaccharides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 4
Answer:
(1) Aldotriose
(2) Aldopentose
(3) Ketoheptose

Problem 14.1 : (Textbook Page No 300)

Question 1.
An alcoholic compound was found to have molecular mass of 90 u. It was acetylated. Molecular mass of the acetyl derivative was found to be 174 u. How many alcoholic (- OH) groups must be present in the original compound?
Solution :
In acetylation reaction H atom of an (- OH) group is replaced by an acetyl group (- COH3).

This results in an increase in molecular mass by [(12 + 16 + 12 + 3 x 1) – 1] that has, 42 u. In the given alcohol, increase in molecular mass = 174 u – 90 u = 84 u
∴ Number of – OH groups \(=\frac{84 \mathrm{u}}{42 \mathrm{u}}=2\)

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 301)

(1) Write structural formula of glucose showing all the bonds in the molecule.
(2) Number all the carbons in the molecules giving number 1 to the ( – CHO) carbon.
(3) Mark the chiral carbons in the molecule with asterisk (*).
(4) How many chiral carbons are present in glucose?
Answer:
Refer structural formula of glucose for (1) (2) and (3).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 14
(4) There are 4 chiral carbon atoms present in glucose.

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 306)

Question 1.
(1) Is galactose an aldohexose or a ketohexose?
(2) Which carbon in galactose has different configuration compared to glucose?
(3) Draw Haworth formulae of α-D-galactose and β-D-galactose.
(4) Which disaccharides among sucrose, maltose and lactose is/are expected to give positive Fehling test?
(5) What are the expected products of hydrolysis of lactose?
Answer:

  1. Galactose is an aldohexose.
  2. Fourth carbon in galactose has different configuration compared to glucose.
  3. Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 42
  4. Maltose and lactose are expected to give positive Fehling solution test.
  5. The expected products of hydrolysis of lactose are D – ( +) glucose and D – ( +) galactose.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Can you think? (Textbook Page No 307)

Question 1.
When you chew plain bread, chapati or bhaakari for long time, it tastes sweet. What could be the reason?
Answer:
When chapati, bread or bhakari are chewed for long time the pulp mixes with saliva and carbohydrate component in them diseminates and gives the sweet taste.

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 309)

Question 1.
Tryptophan and histidine have the structures (I) and (II) respectively. Classify them into neutral? acidic/basic &amino acids and justify your answer. (Hint: Consider învolvement of lone pair in resonance).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 56
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 57
In tryptophan, nitrogen atom present in cyclic structure cannot donate pair of electrons as it is stabilized by resonance. The other amino group and carboxylic group present in the side chain neutralize each other. Tryptophan has equal number of amino and carboxylic groups. Hence, tryptophan is a neutral amino acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 58
In histidine, amino groups are more in number than carboxyl groups therefore histidine ¡s basic in nature.

Can you think? (Textbook Page No 309)

Question 1.
Compare the molecular masses of the following compounds and explain the observed melting points.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 59
Answer:
Above compounds have same molecular masses but they have different melting points, a-amino acids have higher melting points compared to the corresponding amines or carboxylic acids of comparable masses. This property is due to the presence of both carboxylic group (acidic) and amino group (basic) in the molecule. In aqueous solution, protons transfer from acidic group to amino (basic) group of amino acid forms a salt, which is a dipolar ion called – Zwitter ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 60

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 310)

Question 1.
(1) Write the structural formula of dipeptide formed by combination of carboxyl group of alanine and amino group of glycine.
(2) Name the resulting dipeptide.
(3) Is this dipeptide same as glycyalanine or its structural isomer?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 66
(2) ala-glycine. OR ala-gly
(3) It is a structural isomer.

Question 54.
Write the names and schematic representations of all the possible dipeptides formed from alanine, glycine and tyrosine.

Problem 14.3 : (Textbook Page No 311)

Question 1.
Chymotrypsin is a digestive enzyme that hydrolyzes those amide bonds for which the carbonyl group comes from phenylalanine, tyrosine or tryptophan. Write the symbols of the amino acids and peptides smaller than pentapeptide formed by hydrolysis of the following hexapeptide with chymotrypsin. Gly-Tyr-Gly-Ala-Phe-Val
Solution :
In the given hexapeptide hydroylsis by chymotripsin can take place at two points, namely, Phe and Tyr. The carbonyl group of these residues is towards the right side, that is, toward the C-terminal. Therefore the hydrolysis products in required range will be :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 70

Problem 14.4 : (Textbook Page No 311)

Question 1.
Write down the structures of amino acids constituting the following peptide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 71
Solution :
The given peptide has two amide bonds linking three amino acids. The structures of these amino acids are obtained by adding one H2O molecule across the amide bond as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 72

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 313)

A protein chain has the following amino acid residues. Show and label the interactions that can be present in various pairs from these giving rise to tertiary level structure of protein.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 82
Answer:
Tertiary level structure from amino residues.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 83

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No 313)

Question 1.
What is the physical change observed when (a) egg is boiled, (b) milk gets curdled on adding lemon juice?
Answer:
(a) When egg is boiled, coagulation of eggwhite (insoluble fibrous proteins) takes place. This is a common example of denaturation.
(b) When lemon juice is added to milk, it gets curdled due to the formation of lactic acid. This is another example of denaturation.

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No 315)

Question 1.
What is the single term that answers all the following questions?
(1) What decides whether you are blue eyed or brown eyed?
(2) Why does wheat grain germinate to produce wheat plant and not rice plant?
(3) Which acid molecules are present in nuclei of living cells?
Answer:
(1) Nucleic acid (DNA)
(2) Nucleic acid (DNA)
(3) Nucleic acid (DNA + RNA)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Use your brain power! (Textbook Page No 317)

Question 1.
Draw structural formulae of nucleosides formed from the following sugars and bases.
(1) D – ribose and guanine
(2) D – 2 – deoxyribose and thymine
Answer:
(1) D-ribose and guanine
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 93
(2) D – 2 – deoxyribose and thymine
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 94

Problem 14.5 (Textbook Page No 318)

Queston 1.
Draw a schematic representaion of trinucicotide segment ACT of a DNA molecule.
Solution :
In DNA molecule sugar is deoxyribose. The base ‘A’ in the given segment is at 5 end while the base T at the 3’ end. I-fence the schematic representation of the given segment of DNA is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 97

Problem 14.6 : (Textbook Page No 320)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules

Question 1.
Write the sequence of the complementary strand of the following portion of a DNA molecule : 5 -ACGTAC-3
Solution :
The complementary strand runs in opposite direction from the 3′ end to the 5′ end. It has the base sequence decided by complementary base pairs A – T and C – G.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 99

Problem 14.2 : (Text Page No 303)

Question 1.
Assign D/L configuration to the following monosaccharides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 20
Solution :
D/L configuration is assigned to Fischer projection formula of monosaccharide on the basis of the lowest chiral carbon.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 21
Threose has two chiral carbons C-2 and C-3. The given Fischer projection formula of threose has OH groups at the lowest C -3 chiral carbon on the right side.
∴ It is D-threose.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Biomolecules 22
Ribose has three chiral carbons C – 2, C – 3 and C -4.
The given Fischer projection formula of ribose has – OH group at the lowest C -4 chiral carbon on the left side.
∴ It is L-ribose